JP7120721B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a setting value can be selected and set from a plurality of types of setting values (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-108772 A

There is still room for ingenuity with respect to effects in gaming machines that can be set by selecting one of a plurality of types of setting values.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine in which a performance is devised .

A game machine capable of setting a game performance to a predetermined set value among a plurality of set values, comprising a lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not a win is achieved, and a game state control for controlling to a win state in the case of a win. means and an effect display device for displaying an effect, wherein a predetermined winning hole is opened in the winning state, and a prize ball is played when a prize is won in the predetermined winning hole; There is a setting correspondence display corresponding to each, and it is possible to display the setting correspondence display corresponding to the set setting value on the effect display device, and a prize ball is played by entering the predetermined winning hole. in a situation where the setting correspondence display can be displayed, and the setting correspondence display corresponding to a specific setting value among the plurality of setting values is displayed on the effect display device as the setting correspondence display. , the setting correspondence display corresponding to the setting value one step higher than the specific setting value is displayed on the effect display device, and the setting correspondence display corresponding to the setting value one step higher than the specific setting value is displayed. A change from the situation displayed on the effect display device to a situation in which a setting correspondence display corresponding to a set value one step higher than the set value one step higher is displayed on the effect display device. and the number of the setting correspondence displays corresponding to each of the plurality of setting values is one corresponding to each of the plurality of setting values, and corresponds to the highest setting value among the plurality of setting values. in a state where the corresponding setting display corresponding to the set value is displayed on the effect display device, after the setting corresponding display corresponding to the highest set value among the plurality of set values is displayed on the effect display device, the predetermined Even if a prize ball is awarded by winning a prize hole, the setting correspondence display corresponding to the highest set value among the plurality of set values can be continuously displayed, and the setting correspondence display is A setting correspondence display corresponding to a specific setting value among the plurality of setting values and a setting correspondence display corresponding to a setting value one step higher than the specific setting value are partly the same. Amusement machine.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the performance is devised .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is at the raised position; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. (a) is an exploded perspective view of an outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed; (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame, viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit, viewed from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of a plate base unit in the plate unit; It is the perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in the dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the top view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit in a dish unit from the forward-backward direction of the production|presentation operation part button unit. (a) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from below. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. (a) is a front perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the rotary drive unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit, viewed from the front right. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit, viewed from the front left. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation button unit of the production|presentation operation unit, and was seen from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the production|presentation operation button unit, and was seen from the front lower side. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion; (a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation portion of the pressing operation portion. is a front view of the plate unit when is pressed. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame left side unit. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame top unit, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in . It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the body frame; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. (a) is a front perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing base unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a payout unit in a body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. Fig. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full-tank ball path unit; It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball in a main body frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear; It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. (a) is a plan view of a body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails, etc., viewed from above, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from below. FIG. 101(a) is exploded and it is the exploded perspective view seen from the front. It is an explanatory view showing a region in which the game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame circulate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball to the detour passage in the main-body frame upper part. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side. 1 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which the center accessories and the like are made opaque; FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 as seen from the front right. FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 viewed from the front left. FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. FIG. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of routing of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board; FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board with the center accessories and the like made transparent; 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 107; FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 107; It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which the game balls circulate and the obstacle nail. (a) is a front perspective view of the front constituent member and the game panel of the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front constituent member and the game panel. (a) is a front perspective view of the front unit on the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front unit on the game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path of the game ball of the right side in a front unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls flowing through the first guide passage in the guide passage group, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls flowing through the second guide passage in the guide passage group. be. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls received in the accessory winning opening, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the portion of the third sorting device in (a) from above, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the second sorting device in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the timing of operation|movement of the prize winning opening, 1st distribution device, and 2nd distribution device according to the kind of "small hit." (a) is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the attacker unit, and is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in (a). 118(a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams showing an embodiment of a group of guide passages different from that of FIG. 117. FIG. (e) and (f) are explanatory diagrams showing further different embodiments of the group of guide passages. (a) is a front view of an out-ball detection unit in the back unit, (b) is a right side view of the out-ball detection unit, (c) is a rear view of the out-ball detection unit, and (d) is a rear view of the out-ball detection unit. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit as seen from the front, (e) is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit as seen from the back, and (f) is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit and the out-ball detection unit as seen from the lower right front position. It is a figure and (g) is the perspective view which looked at the out-ball detection unit from the lower right rear. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the out-ball detection unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the out-ball detection unit as seen from the rear. (a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the game panel and the out-ball detecting unit, and (b) is a perspective view showing the state in which the out-ball detecting unit is in contact with the game panel. It is an enlarged cross-sectional view seen from the right side assembled to the game board and cut vertically at the center of the outlet right sensor. It is a perspective view showing the vicinity of the out port from the front in a state assembled to the game board. (a) is a front perspective view of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the light guide plate effect unit. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the picture substrate in the light guide plate effect unit from the front; (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate is illuminated, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is illuminated. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state where the light guide plate of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit is decorated with the second pattern. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the light guide plate of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit is decorated with the first pattern. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2(a) is an enlarged view of a part of the area where SMD type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and FIG. FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram (a) of a surface (mounting surface) of a substrate in which SMD type electronic components as substitutes for lead type electronic components are aggregated in a predetermined area, and SMD type electronic components as substitutes for lead type electronic components are aggregated. 1B is a schematic diagram (b) showing the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of a substrate that has been miniaturized. It is a figure which shows the back surface (solder side) of a main-control board in the enlarged view of Fig.138 (a). 4 is a perspective view of a main control board box of the main control unit; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main-control side power-on process. FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main-control-side power-on processing of FIG. 142; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting change processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payout control unit power-on. FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the processing at power-on of the payout control unit in FIG. 148. FIG. FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on process subsequent to FIG. 149 . It is a flow chart which shows an example of due-out control part timer interruption processing. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing; It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a first starting opening passing process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the second starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design process processing performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design normal process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. 7 is a flow chart showing the procedure of hit determination processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment; (A) is a win determination table used for lottery processing for big wins, (B) is a big win pattern design determination table used for lottery processing for types of big wins, and (C) is for small wins. It is a small winning design design determination table used for the lottery process for the type. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop design setting process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design variation process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control processing performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit control processing performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the procedure for normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small-hit start process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the process during a small hit performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is an example of an error notification mode. FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing timings of volume control and sound output suppression of a predetermined frequency band; FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing timings of volume control and sound output suppression of a predetermined frequency band; FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing timings of volume control and sound output suppression of a predetermined frequency band; It is a table showing winning probabilities and the like according to the setting values of the gaming machine. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a procedure for changing setting values; It is a variation pattern table used for determining a variation pattern. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a right detection sensor is provided in the first guide passage. It is a concrete example of the effect at the time of execution of the warning effect using the right detection sensor. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which detection sensors are provided in the first guide passage and the second guide passage. It is a concrete example of the effect at the time of execution of the warning effect using the right detection sensor and the left detection sensor. FIG. 11 is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which ball clogging elimination holes are provided in the first guide passage and the second guide passage; FIG. 11 is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which ball clogging elimination holes are provided in the first guide passage and the second guide passage; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second out port is provided near the entrances of the first guide passage and the second guide passage; It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a second outlet is provided in the vicinity of the outlet inside the first guide passage. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an execution state of computation when an abnormality occurs; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an execution state of computation when an abnormality occurs; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second out port and a third out port are provided separately from the out port; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of execution of computation when a second outlet and a third outlet are provided separately from the outlet; 3 is a luminescence color pattern table in which luminescence color patterns of a light guide plate are set; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a plurality of decorations are provided around the display area of the effect display device; It is a concrete example of the effect with the light guide plate and the plurality of decorations when the light emission effect is executed. This is a pattern displayed on the light guide plate and the effect display device when the imitation effect is executed. It is a concrete example of the effect in the light guide plate and the effect display device when the imitation effect is executed. 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board; 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board; 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board; 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of setting information determination processing executed by a main control MPU; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting value holding suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of image data in which a display mode of a pending notice effect and a display mode of a setting value pending suggestion effect are combined; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of setting value continuous suggestion production|presentation. It is a table showing winning probabilities and the like according to the setting values of the gaming machine. It is a table showing winning probabilities and the like according to the setting values of the gaming machine. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraud during setting change of setting values; FIG. FIG. 11 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity when the fraudulent activity is not monitored during confirmation display of setting values; FIG. FIG. 11 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity when the fraudulent activity is partially monitored while the setting values are being displayed for confirmation; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraudulent activity when the fraudulent activity is partially monitored while the setting value is being changed; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of a modification. It is an example of a table used in lottery processing. This is a modified example of setting value suggestion effect. 1 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine; FIG.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. be. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 12 shows the pachinko machine with the door frame, game board, main frame and outer frame 1 is an exploded perspective view viewed from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls B (see FIG. 90) are driven by. In addition, what is comprised from the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is called a front frame.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction and extend vertically, and the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. a lower outer frame assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40 .

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 are connected to the main body frame 4 and the main body. It is for coaxially supporting the lower frame hinge assembly 520 so as to be rotatable, and attaching the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward about the left side in front view.

In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the door frame 3 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 so that the lower outer frame assembly 40 is part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. By inverting the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiating it forward, the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 182 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operating section 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player can operate the performance operating section 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. , the player can participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by the operation of the performance operation unit 301.例文帳に追加

The body frame 4 has a frame-like body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed, a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A board unit 620 having a payout control board 633 in addition to a payout unit 560 for paying out balls B to the player side and a power board 630 having a power switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1. a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501; I have.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). The body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side of the front so that it can be opened and closed. is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front constituent member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front constituent member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. Main control unit 1300 having cage main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311; A peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) is arranged, an effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and can display a predetermined effect image, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100. and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.例文帳に追加The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing movable effects and light emitting effects according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in contact with the game ball B, and a predetermined privilege ( For example, it has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 that provide a predetermined number of game balls B). The obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁A general winning opening 2001 , a first starting opening 2002 , a normal winning opening 2003 , a second starting opening 2004 and a big winning opening 2005 are provided in the table unit 2000 .

A game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 by the player. Thereby, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. In this way, the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182 .

In addition, the game board 5 causes the effect display device 1600 to display a predetermined effect image, the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and the back effect according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a. The unit 3200 or the like can be used to perform a lighting effect to entertain the player.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 which are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 together, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

The outer frame 2 forms part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 when the main body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2 , the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 . The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in the front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. A left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially support a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 2 . It is for attaching the body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 .

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 includes a concave portion 11a that is flat and concave to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a portion that is opposite to the concave portion 11a on the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The left outer frame member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 to be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 connects the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of the portion 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 while the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11 . The upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing portion 12a in contact with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left side cutout portion 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 13a extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. A fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion, and rightward from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. and a flat plate-like abutting portion 13d that extends short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the contact portion 13 d against the front surface of the bulging portion 11 b of the left outer frame member 11 and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13 b against the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, thereby It is attached to the left frame member 11 . The left lower connecting member 13 has the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the left side cutout portion 41a of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 includes a right outer frame member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, and the right outer frame member 21. and a lower hooking member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed leftward at the rear portion of the right side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a recess portion 21a that is flat and recessed leftward from the portion opposite to the recessed portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The right outer frame member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the right outer frame member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces thereof. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10 .

The upper right connecting member 22 connects the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle of the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of the portion 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, and the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the right outer frame member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21 while the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing portion 22a in contact with the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a in the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. A horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion, and left from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. and a flat plate-like contact portion 23d that extends short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 has the rear surface of the abutting portion 23 d in contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21 b of the right outer frame member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23 b on the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a in contact with the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a in the right side surface of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

An outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 to be described later is hooked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 . The upper hooking member 24 has a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The upper hooking member 24 extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 24b to which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked is provided.

The lower hooking member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction. and a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same lateral length as the lateral length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 has cutout portions 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left and right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively inserted into the cutout portions 30a on the left and right ends and attached.

In addition, the outer frame upper member 30 has a mounting stepped portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed from the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment stepped portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 which is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and whose rear is open is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped rear panel member 43 extending to the left and right, which is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear panel member 43 a mechanism 44;

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 has cutout portions 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted into the cutout portions 41a on both the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the panel rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear in the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The concave portion 41b maximizes the volume of the inner space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43. As shown in FIG.

The front panel member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the panel front member 42 with the panel rear member 43, the panel interior becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the panel rear member 43. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The rear panel member 43 extends in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel member 42 to the front surface of the panel rear member 43 , the panel internal space 40 a that forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is formed in cooperation with the panel front member 42 . The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connection tube portion 43a extending in the left-right direction, projecting upward, and communicating with the inner space 40a of the panel at the central portion in the left-right direction of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the rear panel member 43 . In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting tube portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 the length of the entire rear panel member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the rear panel member 43 as a whole. is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting tube portion 43a. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection tube part 43a, thereby connecting the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624. FIG.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is arranged such that the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, thereby preventing the game ball B from being held between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. to prevent it from being caught.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so as to face the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the placement portion 44a, An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear and right sides of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and having an upper surface inclined upward toward the rear. and a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position coinciding with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size through which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear panel member 43 . Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged behind the curtain plate rear member 43. As shown in FIG.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an illegal tool such as piano wire from being inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. A standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the vertical wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end projecting portion 44e that protrudes forward provided at the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 .

By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B tends to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, there arises a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is discharged from the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first Through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged behind the curtain board rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 arranged on the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43 with a left-right spacing, and closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear side. and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which is mounted inside the front panel member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. , and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43 a of the rear panel member 43 .

The pair of guide members 45 are in contact with the lower end of the door frame 3 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 . The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is made of punching metal with numerous small holes. The port member 47 communicates the inner space 40a (enclosure 624) of the curtain board and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 with two cylinders. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the low-pitched sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (within the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. , a rich low-pitched sound can be radiated forward of the outer frame 2 (toward the player). In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. and prevents the sound in the enclosure of the speaker from leaking from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 and viewed from above, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable. is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30. and a mounting screw 53 for mounting the locking member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 .

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is in the form of a horizontally extending flat plate and extends forward from an upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-like forward extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the forward extending portion 51b to the center of the forward extending portion 51b toward the front and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and an end edge extending downward from the left side of the forward extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. A flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band plate-like lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and an operation piece 52b extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It has an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely forward left, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by an attaching screw 53, at a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 , the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the edge of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 . It extends forward so as to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. As shown in FIG. The locking member 52 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 in the vicinity of the front end is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock body 52a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 has a flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating vertically through the horizontal portion 60a and having a size through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrower upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. 60 d of discharge holes are formed in the horizontal part 60a so that it may contact|connect the center part of the front-back direction of the rising part 60b, and may extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal part 60a in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball jam prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 .

In the outer frame lower hinge member 60 assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is placed on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screwed (not shown). It is fixed to the rear panel member 43 by . The raised portion 60b is attached to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is separated from the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the ejection hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 60.例文帳に追加

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. FIG. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 182 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

The door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 closing the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. a handle unit 180 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100; a door frame left side unit 400 attached to the tray unit, a door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit, the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a vertically extending quadrangular (rectangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, and having a door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. A handle mounting member 102 mounted below, a speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner when viewed from the rear, and mounted near the right end on the rear side of the door frame base 101 on the rear side. a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the door frame main relay board 104; The door frame relay board cover 107 covers the rear handle relay board 106, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the handle rear relay board 106 is covered from the rear side. It has a post-handle relay board cover 108 and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to it. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 .

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 . The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is ejected into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing a game to hit into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. FIG. 31(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame, and FIG. 31(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 at the left side in front view, and closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so as to be opened and closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular and flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 with an outer shape extending vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting a handle unit 180, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view.

The door-frame base unit 100 also includes a door-frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in the rear view of the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101, and a door-frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101. A door frame secondary relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted to the left side of the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side and covering the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable are provided. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame top hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 at the bottom corner of the front surface, a plate unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 400 at the front surface of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1a. door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame base 101 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape with an inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door window 101a has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery, which are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively. It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. In this manner, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole with the door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b, which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted is recessed near the right end in the front view from the front to the front and the insertion recess 101c. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b are penetrated in the front-rear direction on the left side of the front view. and a ball feed opening 101e for facing the ball.

In addition, the door frame base 101 penetrates in the front and back at a position near the center in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. a passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for an upper tray that penetrates in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a in the vicinity of the left end in a front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, and a door. A glass unit mounting portion 101h recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of longitudinally long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the upper tray ball passage opening 101g) when viewed from the front and penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of slits 101i are such that the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is positioned in front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is positioned behind. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The handlebar mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a tubular portion 102a. a plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c projecting into the portion 102a and extending over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and arranged at uneven intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a; , and reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

The handle mounting member 102 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b with a screw while the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The cylindrical portion 102 a has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 . One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the remaining two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed in the handle base 181 at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181c. Therefore, in the handle mounting member 102, the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a only when the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be regulated.

Since the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend forward right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1c. speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is positioned in front of the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided forward. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the player can be guided forward (to the player side) of the pachinko machine 1 in a favorable manner.

Moreover, the speaker duct 103 has a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board/Door frame secondary relay board/Handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, door frame sub relay board 105, and rear handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 (see FIG. 83). and FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape by combining a square extending left and right on the right side of the upper part of the square extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame secondary relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410 side. It is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and the interface board 635 of the body frame 4, The remainder of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door-frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are arranged so that the vertically extending parts of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are connected to the door. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107 , and the rear side of the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150 .

The post-handle relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear handle relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, rear handle relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board (inverted L-shaped portion extending up and down) can be covered. cover the sides. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and the left side when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door-frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door-frame relay board cover 107 and can be opened. A connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side of the housing and connected to these terminals.

The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106 . The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 with a wiring cable (not shown). It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending in the left and right direction, and has openings formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cables.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 . An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position above the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115, which are connected to the right reinforcing frame 112, are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 with a vertical separation therebetween, and the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 are engaged. and a hooking member 116 that is attached.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically by a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101 . The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted through these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 . The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101 .

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends laterally with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 . The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch portion 114a that is rectangularly cut downward from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end. The notch portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the ball passage opening 101g for the upper tray of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 includes a pair of rear piece portions which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction and formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It has a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece portion connecting the front ends of the pair of front extending portions to each other. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112 . A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 .

The hooking member 116 is attached to an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 . Door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are hooked to these hooking members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching and molding metal plates. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 assembled along the left side, right side, and upper side of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114. , is assembled to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

[3-1 g. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front upper left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 . The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 biasing the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like attachment piece 121a that is square in front view, and flat plate-like projecting pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower sides of the attachment piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 at the attachment piece 121a. Hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends upward. The portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 .

The flange member 123 is an E-ring and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the flange member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121 . The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123 .

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower projecting piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is fully extended. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 or removed downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 , so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 . can be supported as much as possible.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 .

[3-1h. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and rectangular in front view, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. A door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22, etc.) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the projecting piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer circumference of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is positioned coaxially with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the projecting piece 125b. installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 rotatably with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. can be done.

[3-1i. cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650, which will be described later, to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing and locking with. The cylinder lock 130 has a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131. and a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

A cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from behind and has a rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and the rotation transmission member 133 is formed in opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the plate unit body 252 of the plate unit 200 (see FIG. 22, etc.).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. FIG. 34(a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 34(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the tamper-proof member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 can be supplied. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222. - 特許庁

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the inlet 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open end and a box-shaped front cover 141 with a closed rear end and an open front, and a game ball entered from an entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a batted ball supply port 142a for supplying ball B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extraction member 143 having a partition part 143a partitioning between an entrance port 141a and a ball extraction port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a rear cover 142 for game balls B on the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 one by one. The ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported about an axis extending vertically between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entry port 141a in a front view, and a ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144 .

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the center of rotation of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball extracting port 141b in front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. The upper side of the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entry port 141a. And, it is formed so as to close from the rear side the portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball removal guideway 241c.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b on the lower side of the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and the partition portion 143a. Extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball outlet 141b. a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b; and the rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c. and a weight portion 143d projecting from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. An operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34(a)). The actuating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 that moves downward when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped cut-off portion 144a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the entrance port 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143, and a cut-off portion 144a behind the cut-off portion 144a. It has a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of the rotation shaft, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Also, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding member 144 rotates about the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a feed position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540, and enters the partition portion 143a from the entry port 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. As a result, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings vertically by driving (energization) of a ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 which swings vertically. and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by movement of the ball feeding member 144 and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding actuation rod 146 has an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around the longitudinally extending axis. It is When the ball-feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball-feeding operating rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward (upward) the ball-feeding solenoid 145 due to the magnetic force generated, thereby feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. and return to the initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feed operating rod 146 near the ball feed crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feed solenoid 145 .

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction which can be engaged with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 which moves up and down, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b is disposed on the opposite side of the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the shaft portion 147b extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , and a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35(b)) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is positioned at the supply position. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feed operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feed member 144 is in the holding position. rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the drive control of the discharge solenoid 542 by the discharge control section 633b (see FIG. 137) of the payout control board 633.

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the rotatably supported ball extraction member 143 or the weight 143d. However, the actuating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 may contact the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper dish ball extracting slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper dish ball extracting button 222 of the dish unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b in a normal state to partition the ball removal port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter into.

Then, when the player presses downward the upper tray ball removal button of the tray unit, the upper tray ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission section, and the operation rod 143c moves downward along with the movement of the operation transmission section. will also move relatively downward. When the operation rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball removal member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to form a partition. is released. As a result, the game ball B entering from the inlet 141a falls to the side of the ball outlet 141b, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guideway 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 formed with the operation transmission part 242b with which the operation rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 abuts is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition part 143a. Even if is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, and it is possible to prevent the ball extraction member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B can be inserted into the partition Rebounding at 143a can be prevented.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 35(b), etc.) recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from the back of the batted ball feed port 142a in the rear cover 142. An anti-tampering member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The tamper-proof member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is made of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The anti-tampering member 148 has a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. A lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other are provided. . The upper piece 148a of the anti-tamper member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-tamper member 148 so that the right end in a front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece 148b extends flush with the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. As shown in FIG. As a result, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The anti-tampering member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to this tampering prevention member 148, an illicit game ball B to which a string is attached is hit into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper tray via the ball feeding unit 140, and attached to the illicit game ball B. The force of the illegal game ball B shot (hit ball) by the ball launching device 540 when a fraudulent act is performed such as operating the string to put the illegal game ball B into or out of the first start opening or the like. By inserting the string attached to the illegal game ball B between the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b, the V shape formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b It can be cut by the narrowed part of the string, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1k. foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. FIG. 36(a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 36(b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and having an open front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152 and .

The foul cover unit 150 has a penetrating ball passage 150a that penetrates front to back at the upper left corner in a front view, and communicates the normal guide path of the lower full ball path unit of the main body frame 4 with the upper dish ball supply port of the dish unit; A full-tank ball receiving port 150b that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through-ball passage 150a in front view and can communicate with the full-tank guideway of the lower full-tank ball path unit of the body frame 4 is provided. .

In addition, the foul cover unit 150 is open upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front, and despite being shot by the ball launching device of the body frame 4, it did not reach the game area 5a. A foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B received by a full ball receiving port 150b and a foul ball receiving port 150c opened forward near the lower right corner in a front view. A ball discharge port 150d that discharges forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port of the plate unit is provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the cover member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passageway 150e having a possible width is provided.

The ball-through passage 150 a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 . The full tank ball socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. As shown in FIG. The ball outlet 150d is formed in the lid member 152. As shown in FIG. A storage passage 150 e is formed by a unit main body 151 and a lid member 152 .

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and the movable piece 153 and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is kept inside the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full-tank detection sensor 154 . As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, the fact can be notified to the player, the staff of the game hall, or the like, and they can be urged to eliminate the full tank of the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the penetrating ball passage 150a. A door opening/closing abutting portion 150f with which the operating projection 613a of the door 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b ( front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is detachably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. As shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to be visible from the player side (front). It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 101h, and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 161 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for mounting the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. and a mounting member 163 .

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 161a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. A mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can come into contact with a projecting portion 163 b of a glass unit mounting member 163 . The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 97).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base portion 163a mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-like member protruding from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a projecting portion 163b. The glass unit mounting members 163 are rotatably mounted outside the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101 . After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the projecting portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101 .

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the procedure can be reversed. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is regulated by the projecting portion 163b when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the projecting portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally removed from the door frame base 101 .

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 170 includes a flat plate-shaped body portion 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171, and is spaced apart from the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 .

A main body portion 171 of the crime prevention cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1 . More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 171 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171 . Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . A rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 is formed along a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. ing.

In addition, the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B shot by the ball shooting device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area is It does not hinder the hitting of the game ball B into 5a.

A pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100 .

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front structural member 1000 . In addition, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000 . . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by the player to hit the game ball B in the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, a handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and a handle 182 covering the front end side of the handle 182. A disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the handle decoration substrate 184 and a handle cover 185 attached to the cover base 183 .

The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and the handle 182 is attached to the front end of the handle unit 180. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186 .

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to the initial rotation position (counterclockwise rotation end when viewed from the front). A biasing handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to an inner base 186 and the other end of which is attached to a transmission gear 188, rotates a detection shaft 189a of a handle rotation detection sensor 189 clockwise when viewed from the front. and an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. and an operation sensor 194 .

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base portion 181a extending back and forth, a disc-shaped front end portion 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base portion 181a, and recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 181a. and three groove portions 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. A base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102 . Also, the three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handlebar mounting member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c are positioned in the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes non-rotatable relative to the handle attachment member 102 .

The handle 182 has four first projections 182a, a second projection 182b, a third projection 182c, and a fourth projection 182d which protrude outwardly away from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape from the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center from the slit 182e. and a locking protrusion 182f.

The four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a protrudes outward from the portion protruding most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (gouged out) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second projection 182b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the first projection 182a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 85 degrees, and is further rotated than the first projection 182a. protrudes slightly lower. The second projection 182b protrudes so that the clockwise side surface in the front view of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the counterclockwise side surface, which is the opposite side, curves inward. and is formed in a shape similar to that of the first projection 182a.

The portion of the third protrusion 182c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. Both side surfaces of the third projection 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the clockwise side surface is inclined more gently than the opposite counterclockwise side surface. The portion of the fourth projection 182d that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the third projection 182c that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and is further rotated than the first projection 182a. It also protrudes slightly higher. Both sides of the fourth projection 182d are inclined substantially linearly, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle shape.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disc shape and has three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through slits 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within an angle of rotation of approximately 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward and is translucent. The handle cover 185 is internally provided with a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The steering wheel cover 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED on the front surface of the steering wheel decoration substrate 184 .

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. As shown in FIG. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is slanted so that the right end side is positioned more rearward than the left end side in a plan view, and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the hole is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the rotation operation without any sense of incongruity.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.例文帳に追加

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the player and detects the static electricity acting on the player's handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is fired with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the shooting solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a manner different from the original to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

Also, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the ejection control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation of the single shot button 193. Firing solenoid 542 is de-energized. As a result, the shooting of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 182, and by canceling the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, the single-shot button 193 can be operated before the operation. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a again with the hitting strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 has four first projections 182a, a second projection 182b, a third projection 182c, and a fourth projection 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 can be rotated most clockwise when viewed from the front. so that the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right hit"), the fourth projection 182d is the first projection 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the player can comfortably maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position by switching the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a. To reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into the main members and viewed from the rear. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and the upper plate 201 arranged below the upper plate 201 and game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. and a lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower tray 202 attached to the front surface of the tray base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-like dish unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper dish body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and having the upper dish 201 , and a right side of the upper dish body 212 . A mounting base 213 that is attached to and protrudes forward, a plate unit relay board 214 that is attached to the right of the mounting base 213, a ball rental operation unit 220 that is attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, It has an upper tray before ball removal unit 230 attached below the mounting base 213 and an upper tray after ball removal unit 240 attached behind the upper tray before ball removal unit 230. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower part of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish main body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. a lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251; a plate upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with a space left and right; A plate upper right decoration unit 275 and a plate lower left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 are provided.

The performance operation unit 300 includes, as a performance operation unit 301 operable by the player, a rotary operation unit 302 rotatable by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 operable by the player. The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 mounted on the upper surface. An annular performance operation ring 330 having a rotation operation portion 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation portion 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation portion 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decoration board 352 that lights up the effect operation ring 330, the decoration board cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the lower surface of the operation part base 320. an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation part base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330; and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320. and have.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the production operation unit 301 at the center in the left-right direction faces diagonally upward and forward, and the left side of the production operation unit 300 on the upper surface. An upper tray 201 is arranged on the right side of the performance operation unit 300, and a ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower tray 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 under the upper tray 201. - 特許庁

[3-5a. Fine plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is shaped like a container that bulges forward from the left-right center in a front view and opens upward. The upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212) bulges most forward at about ⅓ of the width of the door frame 3 in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes to the right in front view from the most bulging part, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a in front view is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.例文帳に追加

When the upper tray 201 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper tray 201 is positioned below the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211, and the game balls touch the upper end of the upper tray ball supply port 211e. It inclines so that it may become low toward the position of a little lower side than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game ball B can be discharged from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e.

In addition, the guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B contacts (rolls), the game ball Static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5b. lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower tray 202 is arranged below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the horizontal center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in front view. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. - 特許庁The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a through which the game balls B can be ejected through the bottom wall in the vertical direction. A lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed by a lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in a plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom plate 202 is inclined so that its bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is positioned below the production operation unit 300 in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c in the assembled state of the tray unit 200. - 特許庁

The lower tray 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a can be opened. The stored game balls B can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, when the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, since the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, the ball is moved forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The discharged game ball B can be rapidly discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a front perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit, and FIG. 44 is a rear perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached on the front surface.

The dish base unit 210 includes a flat plate-like dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the upper plate main body 212 on the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and protruding forward, and a mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. and a plate unit relay board 214 .

The plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper plate ball extraction unit 230 attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. , and an upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear side of the tray unit base 211 behind the upper tray ball removal front unit 230. - 特許庁

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends laterally across the entire width of the door frame base 101. box).

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view and extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear, and an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the front and rear direction below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached on the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at a lower portion on the left side of the left-right center in front view, and a lower plate. A notch portion 211d cut in the right side wall of the portion extending cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c to a size through which the game ball B can pass, and a front view upper right side of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. an upper tray ball feeding port 211e extending vertically and having an upper portion located at the right end of the upper tray main body 212. - 特許庁

The plate unit base 211 has a mounting projection 211f on which the mounting base is placed, which projects forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and an upper plate portion 211f on the left side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. A slider insertion opening 211g through which an operation transmission part 242b of an upper tray ball removal slider 242 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240 is inserted is passed through the lower part of the plate body in the front-rear direction, and a front-view lower right corner penetrates the plate body in the front-rear direction. A handle insertion opening 211h through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion opening 211h that penetrates in the front-rear direction near the right corner in front view and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. and a mouth 211i.

The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has its front end opened in the rear wall of the upper tray 201 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and its cylindrical rear end through which the upper tray balls of the door frame base 101 pass. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

The lower tray ball supply port 211c has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower tray 202 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a cylindrical rear end that passes through the lower tray ball passage opening 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects with the front end of the ball outlet 150 d of the foul cover unit 150 . As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. A notch portion 211d formed in a cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is connected to the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are released by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222, the upper tray ball feed port 211e, the entrance port 141a and the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feed unit 140, and the upper tray ball feed port 211e. The ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 after tray ball removal, and the notch 211d.

The upper tray ball feeding opening 211e is positioned in front of the ball receiving opening 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240 in the state assembled to the tray base unit 210, and the game balls in the upper tray 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 . The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than the center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper plate body 212 recedes rearward as it goes rightward in front view from the most forwardly bulging portion, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The top plate main body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion near the right end, whose upper part is closed, slips under the ball lending operation unit 220 when assembled to the plate unit 200 . In addition, the upper plate main body 212 is formed with an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a in the middle portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in the shape of a shallow box with an open top. The mounting base 213 has an insertion hole 213a vertically penetrating near the left end, and a through hole 213b vertically penetrating at the right corner of the rear end.

The insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213 is through which the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball removal front unit 230 is inserted. A wiring cable for connecting the ball rental operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213b.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 includes the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the plate upper left decorative board 273, the plate upper right decorative board 278, the plate lower left decorative board 283, and the plate lower right decorative board 288. , and the operation unit relay board 392 . The plate unit relay board 214 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f. The rear surface of the plate unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211 when attached to the plate unit base 211 .

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball rental operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 via the attachment base 213 . This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B are lent to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed, and the ball lending machine This is for returning the cash or prepaid card put into the machine after deducting the amount of the rented game ball B. - 特許庁

The ball rental operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 attached to the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper tray ball ejection button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper tray ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A translucent disk-shaped ball rental operation base 223 arranged on the right side of the withdrawal button 222, a ball rental button 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball rental operation base 223, and a ball rental operation. A return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display section (not shown) arranged on the lower rear portion of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

The upper tray ball ejection button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball rental display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball ejection button 222 . When the ball lending button 224 is pressed after cash or a prepaid card with a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201 . When a return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine and returned. The remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed on the ball lending display section. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display section when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit before upper tray ball removal and unit after upper tray ball removal]
The unit 230 before ball removal and the unit 240 after ball removal of the upper plate in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper tray ball before unit 230 and the upper tray after ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper tray 201 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. It is for discharging the game balls B stored inside to the lower tray 202 .

The upper tray ball extraction front unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the tray unit base 211 . The upper bowl post-ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion behind the upper bowl ball removal pre-unit 230 on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 .

The upper tray ball removal front unit 230 includes a cylindrical front base 231 attached to the front surface of the tray unit base 211 and extending vertically, and a front base 231 inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be vertically movable. and a slider 232 . The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 near the front of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper tray ball removal button 222, and its lower end is the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240. It abuts on the top surface.

The upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. an upper tray ball removal slider 242 slidably attached to the top, a spring 243 urging the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward, a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241, It has

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward, and has a ball receiving opening 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving opening 241a. A ball feeding guideway 241b guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then backward, and a game is played from a position below the ball feeding guideway 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241. A ball extraction guideway 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view is provided.

The ball receiving port 241a is installed in the plate base unit 210 and extends forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guiding passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an open position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is positioned at the rear of the lower portion in the assembled state of the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The laterally extending portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c protrudes to the right in rear view from the portion where the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side in rear view. A rear cover 244 closes the rear side of the portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending to the left and right. The upper portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c that extends vertically below the ball feeding guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 when assembled to the door frame 3. At the same time, the right end of the laterally extending portion as viewed from the rear is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211 . As a result, the game ball B ejected from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is ejected into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply opening 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper bowl ball removal slider 242 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an operation receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface, which is the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a, projecting rearward. and an operation transmission portion 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and a lower surface that extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving section 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion opening 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear side. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball extraction front unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the . When the upper tray ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmission part 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball extracting member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided on the upper surface. The rod 143c abuts.

The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper disk ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper disk ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 243 and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring 243 .

In the upper bowl ball extraction front unit 230 and the upper bowl ball extraction unit 240, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is moved upward. The front slider 232 abuts on the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a, and the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is positioned at the upper movement end. In addition, since the urging force of the spring 243 positions the upper disk ball removal slider 242 at the upper movement end, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to separate the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection opening 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and the ball is fed from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving opening 241a. The game ball B can be sent to the ball launching device 540 side from the hitting ball supply port 142a via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring 243, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is operated. The actuating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b, can move downward, and the ball removing member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removing member 143, and the partition portion 143a. retreats from between the entry port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entry port 141a through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feed guide path 241b from the upper tray 201 is discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b that opens below the entry port 141a. It will be done. Then, the game ball B ejected forward from the ball extraction port 141b passes through the ball extraction guide path 241c and is guided into the lower dish ball supply port 211c from the notch 211d. The game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the tray 202 and discharged into the lower tray 202 .

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is moved through the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball removal button 222 rises, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c in contact with the operation transmission part 242b, and the partition part 143a is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to its original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 before the upper tray ball is removed and the unit 240 after the upper tray ball is removed. It can be discharged to the lower tray 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. 47 is a front perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit, and FIG. 48 is a rear perspective view of the dish decoration unit. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the horizontal direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire plate unit 200. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 includes a lower dish main body 251 attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and forming the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. 211, a lower tray ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and the trays attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 with a space left and right. An upper left decorative unit 270 and an upper right plate decorative unit 275, and a lower left plate decorative unit 280 and a lower right plate decorative unit attached below the upper left plate decorative unit 270 and upper right plate decorative unit 275 on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285 and .

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 . The lower plate main body 251 extends left and right and has a container shape (dish shape) that is open at the top and rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to the lower portion of the front surface of the tray unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower tray body 251 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250 , the outer periphery and part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 . In addition, the bottom surface of the lower tray main body is located below the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211 when assembled with the tray unit 200. 211c. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the plate unit 200 . The plate unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. The top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward.

The plate unit main body 252 has upper side protrusions 252a which bulge forward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the top and extend downward and are spaced apart from the left and right at the bottom. has a lower front decorative portion 252b protruding forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c extending rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. .

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and are provided on the front surfaces of the upper left and lower plate decoration units 270 and 280, respectively, and the upper right and lower right plate decoration units 275 and 280, respectively. 285 is attached. The left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b at the right end of the lower surface. In addition, the right upper side swelling portion 252a is connected at its lower end to the lower front decoration portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side swelling portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulge 252a.

In addition, the plate unit main body 252 includes a front notch portion 252e cut upward from the front lower end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decoration portion 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. and a bottom cutout portion 252f that is cut at a portion below the . A lower tray ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 has a handle insertion opening 252g that penetrates the bottom right corner of the front decoration part 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylindrical part 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion opening 252g. The effect operation unit is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are central in the left-right direction. A production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled with the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . In addition, when the plate decoration unit 250 is assembled, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is positioned. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are flush with each other.

[3-5d-3. Lower tray ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower tray main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a, the game ball B is stored in the lower tray 202 and the game ball B is discharged from the lower tray 202. It is intended for

The lower pan ball extractor unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower pan main body 251 and includes a flat plate-like lower pan ball extractor base 261 having a through hole penetrating vertically at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower pan ball extractor base 261 . A slider 262 attached to the upper surface of the base 261 so as to be slidable forward and backward, a lower dish ball release button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 biasing the slider 262 forward, A lower tray ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower tray ball removal cover 265 in an open state via the slider 262 are provided.

The lower tray ball extraction base 261 is formed in a size to close the bottom notch 252f of the tray unit main body 252, and is vertically aligned with the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 (lower tray main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower tray ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish ball removal base 261 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The slider 262 has a projecting pin projecting upward in a cylindrical shape.

The lower tray ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower tray ball removal base 261 so as to be rotatable about a vertically extending axis at a position to the left of the slider 262 on the left end side, and is attached to the slider 262 on the right end side. , and the right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower disk ball removal lid 265 is formed with a laterally extending slit into which the projecting pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

When the lower tray ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower tray ball removal base 261 is closed. It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower tray ball release button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the tray unit main body 252. As shown in FIG. In the normal state, the slider 262 is positioned at the front moving end by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the right end of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is positioned directly above the through hole. and closes the through hole (lower tray ball extraction hole 202a).

In this normal state, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加In addition, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower tray ball release button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b.

In a normal state, when the lower tray ball ejection button 263 is pushed backward to move backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower tray ball ejection button 263. becomes. As the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower disk ball removal cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower disk ball removal cover 265 moves rearward on the right side with the left side as the center. It rotates in the moving direction. Then, the right end side of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 positioned directly above the through hole moves rearward from the position of the through hole, thereby opening the through hole and opening the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged downward from the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower tray ball eject button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower tray ball eject button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264 . As a result, the right end side of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game ball B in the lower tray 202 is continuously released. It can be discharged downward.

In order to close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, is pushed backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. be. Then, when the pressure on the lower tray ball ejection button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower tray ball ejection button 263 returns to the state in which it is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is positioned directly above the through hole, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by the lower tray ball removal lid 265 . Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decorative unit and plate upper right decorative unit]
The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252 a of the plate unit main body 252 . The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 300 on the upper part of the plate unit 200 .

The upper left dish decoration unit 270 includes a semi-cylindrical upper left dish decoration body 271 extending in the left and right direction and having translucency, an upper left dish reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the upper left dish decoration body 271, A plate upper left decorative substrate 273 attached to the rear side of the plate upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is provided.

The upper left decorative body 271 of the dish extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side swelling portion 252a. The upper left ornamental body 271 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. The plate upper left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

The upper left plate reflector 272 is inserted into the upper left plate decoration body 271 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the top left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the top left decorative body 271 of the plate can be decorated with light.

The left end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is continuous with Since the upper left plate decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the upper left plate decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the upper left plate decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate upper right decorative unit 275 includes a plate upper right decorative body 276 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, a plate upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the plate upper right decorative body 276, A plate upper right decorative substrate 278 is attached to the rear side of the plate upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The upper right ornamental body 276 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending obliquely to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. This plate upper right decoration 276 is formed in milky white.

The plate top right reflector 277 is inserted into the plate top right decoration 276 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate top right decoration substrate 278 corresponding to the LED. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decoration substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decoration body 276 can be decorated with light emission.

The right end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is continuous with Since the upper right plate decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the upper right plate decoration 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper right plate decoration substrate 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the upper right plate decoration 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 partially protrude upward from the front end of the upper side protrusion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 when assembled on the door frame 3. , and the upper side bulging portion 252a, a step can be formed in which the plate upper left decorative unit 270 and the plate upper right decorative unit 275 are higher. As a result, the player can hook his finger using the step between the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 and the upper side protrusion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. Alternatively, it can be used as a finger hold when operating an effect operation unit 301, which will be described later. In addition, the step between the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5d-5. Plate lower left decorative unit and plate lower right decorative unit]
The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252a of the plate unit body 252 so as to extend along the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively. be done. The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

The lower left plate decoration unit 280 includes a lower left plate decoration body 281 which is semicylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, a lower left plate reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left plate decoration body 281, A lower left plate decorative substrate 283 is attached to the rear side of the lower left plate reflector 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate lower left decorative body 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape centered rearward in a plan view. is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. The lower left plate decoration 281 is a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276. The shaft extends left and right, and is shaped like a bent semi-cylinder. The left end of the plate lower left decoration 281 is formed in a spherical shape. The lower left ornamental body 281 of the plate has a semicircular curvature that changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. This plate lower left decorative body 281 is formed in milky white.

The lower left plate reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left plate decoration body 281 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated with light emission.

The left end of the plate lower decoration unit 280 is positioned below the left end of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is located below the lower plate center decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. Contiguous with the left edge. Since the left end of the plate lower left decorative body 281 of the plate lower left decorative unit 280 is formed in a spherical shape, the left end looks as if it is hidden inside the door frame 3 . Since the lower left plate decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower left plate decoration 281, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the lower left plate decoration 281 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate lower right decoration unit 285 includes a plate lower right decoration body 286 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, and a plate lower right decoration body 286 attached to the rear side of the plate lower right decoration body 286. A reflector 287 and a plate lower right decorative substrate 288 attached to the rear side of the plate lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

The plate lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a rearward center in a plan view, It is attached to the lower portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The lower right plate decoration 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276. The central axis extends to the left and right, and is shaped like a bent semi-cylinder. The right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The dish lower right ornament 286 has a semicircular curvature that changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. This plate lower right decoration 286 is formed in milky white.

The plate lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the plate lower right decorative body 286 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate lower right decorative substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate lower right decoration body 286 can be decorated with light emission.

The right end of the plate lower right decorative unit 285 is located below the right end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is contiguous with the right edge of Since the right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 of the plate lower right decorative unit 285 is formed in a spherical shape, the right end appears to be hidden inside the door frame 3 . The lower right plate decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower right plate decoration body 286. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower right plate decoration substrate 288 are caused to emit light, the lower right plate decoration body 286 The entire front surface of the display can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, making it look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as seen from the forward/backward direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 52(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 52(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. The performance operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the performance when the player participation type performance is executed. It is possible. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250. - 特許庁

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. It enables the player to participate not only in the game ball hitting operation but also in the performance during the game. In the effect operation part 301, the rotation operation part 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation part 303 is arranged in the ring. . The pressing operation part 303 is arranged at the center of the rotating operation part 302, and has a central pressing operation part 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotating operation part 302. It is composed of an annular outer peripheral pressing portion 303b disposed between the inner peripheral portion and the inner peripheral portion.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 mounted on the upper surface. An annular production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation part 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation part 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 for transmitting rotation to and from the portion 302 , and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation portion base 320 .

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 includes a effect operation ring decoration board 352 attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and a effect operation ring decoration board 352. A decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, a vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330. A performance operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Production control unit cover unit]
The effect operation section cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction. The effect operation section cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top and rear.

The effect operation section cover unit 310 includes a downwardly recessed hemispherical unit lower cover 311, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulging forward, and a unit front cover. A plate center upper reflector 313 attached from behind in the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs attached to the plate center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. a plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a plate center lower reflector 315 attached from the rear in a plate center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312, and a plate center lower reflector 315 attached to the plate center lower reflector 315 to direct light forward. and a plate center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical surface bulging downward on the front side from the center rear side in the front-rear direction, and the effect operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252 on the rear side thereof. 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in a slanted state so that the axis perpendicular to the imaginary plane formed on the upper edge extending in a semi-circular shape of the front portion is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 is formed with a plurality of drain holes 311a at the lowest portion when assembled to the dish unit 200. As shown in FIG.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 when viewed from above. installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a plate center upper decoration 312a in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semicircular shape, and a plate center upper decoration 312a that extends forward below the plate center upper decoration 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b is provided, the protruding semicircular arc extending in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. - 特許庁The unit front cover 312 is attached to the unit lower cover 311 at the lower end of the plate center lower decorative body 312b.

The upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 divide a cylinder of approximately the same thickness (radius) into halves, and extend in a semicircular shape with the divided surfaces facing the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The lower plate center decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b is slightly thinner than the upper plate center decoration 312a. is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the front end of the upper plate center decoration 312a protrudes forward from the front end of the lower plate center decoration 312b. When the plate unit 200 is assembled, the left and right ends of the upper plate center decoration 312a are continuous with the right ends of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the left ends of the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively, and the lower plate center decorations. The left and right ends of 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the left end of the lower right plate decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is translucent and milky white.

Further, the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the front end of the door frame 3 when assembled to the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame The distance is about 1/2 of the full width of the base 101 in the horizontal direction.

The plate center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from behind. The plate center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LEDs mounted on the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking backward (inward). The upper plate center decoration substrate 314 is formed in a semicircular shape along the upper plate center decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. A plurality of LEDs of the upper plate center decoration substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate center upper decoration body 312a can be decorated with light.

The lower plate center reflector 315 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted into the lower plate center decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from behind. The plate center lower reflector 315 blocks the light from the LEDs mounted on the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 from leaking backward (inward). The lower plate center decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the lower plate center decoration body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. A plurality of LEDs of the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate center lower decoration body 312b can be decorated with light.

The production operation section cover unit 310 does not have reinforcing ribs in the middle of the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semicircular shape. When the LEDs of the upper center decoration substrate 314 and the LEDs of the lower dish center decoration substrate 316 are caused to emit light, the whole of each can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and it is possible to make it look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The performance operation part cover unit 310 has a front end projecting farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200.例文帳に追加In addition, in the production operation section cover unit 310, the upper plate center decoration 312a is continuous with the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276, and the lower plate center decoration 312b is connected with the lower left plate decoration 281 and the right plate decoration. It is continuous with the lower decoration body 286 . As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous, and the integral decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operating section base 320 of the effect operating unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation part base 320 is inserted into the effect operation part cover unit 310 from above, and the lower end is attached to the effect operation part cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

The operation unit base 320 includes a body portion 321 that is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and has an open top, and a body portion 321 that extends outward from the upper end of the body portion 321 and has a circular outer periphery. a plurality of (here, four) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321; and a gear bearing portion 325 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and opens upward to support the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a rotatable manner.

The operation part base 320 is formed such that the main body part 321 is sized to accommodate the production operation button unit 360 therein. The main body part 321 has a bottom wall to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached from below, and a portion of the bottom surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be flat. The bottom wall of the main body part 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibrations from the vibration speaker 354, so that the vibrations can be amplified, and the vibrations can be converted into sounds such as voice and music and output. can.

A leg portion 361 b of a button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 . Further, the body portion 321 has a through-hole formed in the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the body portion 321 . The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the body part 321, and the operating part relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The flange portion 322 has a diameter that substantially coincides with the inner circumference of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 . An effect operation ring decoration board 352 and a decoration board cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and a ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation section cover unit 310 .

The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear mounting member to mount the transmission gear for the operation ring so as to be rotatable about an axis extending left and right. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the driving side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is positioned at the flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation part base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300 , the upper surface of the flange part 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the upper plate center decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 . In addition, in the state where the effect operation unit 300 is assembled, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body portion 321 in contact therewith.

[3-5e-3. Production control ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56 and the like. FIG. 55(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and FIG. 55(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from below. FIG. 56(a) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from above, and FIG. 56(b) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation part 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) approximately twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and an inner diameter approximately 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the effect operation ring 330 has an outer diameter of approximately 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushings 333 are attached to the ring mounting base 331 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the ring mounting base 332, and are mounted on the ring mounting base 331 to prevent upward movement of the rotation base 332. and a regulating ring retaining member 334 .

In addition, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and attached to the ring outer upper cover 335 which constitutes a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side of the ring outer cover 336 forming a part of the rotation operation part 302 and form a part of the rotation operation part 302. and a ring inner cover 337 that is in the ring. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a translucent annular shape.

The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320 and an inner diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the flange portion 322 . The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is mounted so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. A boss portion 331b for rotatably mounting the bushing 333 and a boss portion 331b for rotatably mounting the bushing 333 projecting upward from a plurality of (here, four) portions, and a space in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. and through-holes 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of sites. A plurality of through holes 331 c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 .

The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331 . The rotation base 332 has a ring gear 332a projecting downward from the bottom surface and extending in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward toward the center of the rotation base 332 . The ring gear 332 a has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331 , and faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331 when assembled to the effect operation ring 330 . The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring in a state assembled with the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on an outer upper surface portion 335a in which an arc forming the outer and upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer upper surface portions 335a are arranged in the circumferential direction. and a plurality of outer cover attachment portions 335c extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extending toward the center side and arranged in the circumferential direction. there is An outer upper surface portion 335a of the upper outer ring cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc of a quarter of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The upper outer cover mounting portion 335 c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the upper outer surface portion 335 a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 .

The ring outer and lower cover 336 has an outer and lower surface portion 336a in which an arc forming the outer and lower portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward and toward the center from the inner side of the outer and lower surface portion 336a. A plurality of outer and lower cover attachment portions 336b are provided. A lower outer surface portion 336a of the outer lower ring cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of ⅛ of a circle is annular. The lower outer cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the upper outer cover 335 of the ring.

The ring inner cover 337 has an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming the inside and upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder extending downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a parallel to the central axis. and a plurality of inner cover mounting portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. An inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of ⅛ of a circle is annular. The cylinder surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter equal to the inner diameter of the rotation base 332 . The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332. As shown in FIG.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a constitute a portion of a range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. - 特許庁

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57(a) is a front perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the performance operation unit, and FIG. 57(b) is a rear perspective view of the rotary drive unit. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 . The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 .

The rotary drive unit 340 includes a rotary drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side surface of the rotary drive base 341 so that the rotary shaft protrudes leftward. , a drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of an operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. 345, and a gear cover that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 to the rotary drive base and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. 346 and .

The rotation drive unit 340 also includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 that are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. and a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open leftward. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The driving gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates together with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. there is A second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with a gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 .

The transmission detection gear member 345 includes a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a left side surface of the gear portion 345a. and a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval at which they are separated in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345 b are detected by a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 .

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345 b of the transmission detection gear member 345 . The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart in the circumferential direction by an interval different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one detects the detection piece 345b first. It's like As a result, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation portion 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345 .

When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the driving side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. engage with. In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 is entirely located inside the effect operation section cover unit 310 in a state where it is assembled to the effect operation unit 300 .

The rotation drive unit 340 is driven by an operation ring drive motor 342 to arbitrarily rotate the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via a drive gear 343, a transmission gear 344, a transmission detection gear member 345, and an operation ring transmission gear. can be rotated in the direction of In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 causes the drive gear 343 to repeat forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342, thereby reciprocatingly rotating and vibrating the rotary operation section 302. can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, it is possible to change the contents of the player participation type presentation according to the direction of rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 .

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation part 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotational direction of the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the rotation operation of the player can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation of the rotation operation section 302, it is possible to apply a load to the player's rotation operation. Therefore, by appropriately combining these elements, it is possible to provide the rotary operation unit 302 with an operation feeling corresponding to the content of the player-participation type presentation or a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Operation ring transmission gear]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation portion base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325 .

The operation ring transmission gear 350 includes a bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the ring side gear portion 350a that rotates integrally with the ring side gear portion 350a to detect the transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur-gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the driving-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles with the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350 a narrows in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 .

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation portion base 320 so that its rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330 . The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by inserting it from above into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 and then attaching the gear mounting member 351 to the operation portion base 320 . be done.

When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is engaged with the ring gear 332a. It meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotary drive unit 340 . Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and can light-embellish the effect operation ring 330 (rotational operation unit 302) by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is formed in a shape in which a ring is divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decoration board 352a on the front side and a rear decoration board 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decoration substrate 352a and the rear decoration substrate 352b. A plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are full-color LEDs.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is positioned below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300 . The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is covered with a transparent decoration board cover 353 on the upper side. The decoration board cover 353 is formed in a form divided into the front and rear sides, similarly to the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and covers the front decoration board 352a from above and is attached to the flange part 322 of the operation part base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b attached to the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320 to cover the rear decoration substrate 352b from above.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, so that the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring mounting base 331 are passed through the ring outer side of the rotary operation unit 302. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be decorated with light from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to present the player with a light-emitting decoration such that an LED is provided in the rotary operation unit 302 .

[3-5e-7. vibration speaker]
Vibration speaker 354 in production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction directed upward, and is capable of outputting vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output sounds such as voice and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Also, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire production operation unit 300 via the operation section base 320 . The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies compared to a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present more diverse effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit, viewed from above, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit, viewed from below. FIG. 62(a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is at the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is at the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation part base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation part 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation portion 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing portion 303b formed so as to cover the outer circumference of the central pressing operation portion 303a. ing.

The performance operation button unit 360 is arranged symmetrically with respect to the button unit base 361 attached inside the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a columnar shape connects the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 to each other. Upper base 363 , and between upper base 363 and button unit base 361 , are attached so as to be vertically movable by means of a pair of guide shafts 362 . and a pair of lifting springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted and biasing the lifting base 364 upward.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 extending upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a cylindrical shape, the upper end of which is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation axis on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. An operation button lifting drive motor 367 attached to protrude upward, a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 attached to the rotary shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the lifting drive gear 368 are engaged with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevation cam drive gear member rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably mounted through the central shaft 366. 370, an elevation cam member 371, which is connected to the elevation cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end and rotatably mounted through a central shaft 366, and rotates to raise and lower the elevation base 364; 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevation cam driving gear member 370 from above.

Furthermore, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom extending vertically with an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base, and is mounted above the elevation base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button body 373 and the lift base 364 and biasing the central button body 373 upward; A central button cover 375 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom and closed at the upper end side, and is attached to the upper end of the central button main body 373 so as to cover the upper side of the upper base 363 . and a center button decoration substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted that are capable of emitting light upward. In the effect operation button unit 360, a central button main body 373 and a central button cover 375 constitute a central pressing operation portion 303a.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the center button main body 373 on the upper surface of the lifting base 364. An outer peripheral substrate cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration substrate 377 and the outer periphery of the central button body 373; A translucent cylindrical perimeter decorative lens 379 that is arranged above the perimeter button decoration substrate 377 on the outer perimeter side and that is three-dimensionally decorated, and lifts up and down so as to cover the outer periphery and upper surface of the perimeter decorative lens 379. and a transparent outer perimeter button cover 380 attached to the base 364 and having a center button cover 375 facing upward at the center. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute the outer peripheral press operating portion 303b.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 includes a pressing detection sensor 381 attached to the button unit base 361 for detecting pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303, and a lifting cam drive gear member 370 attached to the button unit base 361. and an elevation detection sensor 382 that detects elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

The button unit base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. A base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 . The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevation cam driving gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to its upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevation detection sensor 382 attached to its lower surface. is attached. The button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 at the lower end of the leg portion 361b.

A pair of guide shafts 362 are mounted on the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a forward and rearward from the center. A pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. A pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366 .

The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 . The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and have their lower ends in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 and their upper ends in contact with the elevating base 364 . The lifting spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374 .

The elevating base 364 is formed to have substantially the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 . The elevating base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a into which the pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, a central hole 364b having a size through which the elevating cam member 371 can pass, and a central hole 364b that penetrates vertically. A vertical wall portion 364c projecting upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting into the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the vicinity of the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c. there is The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are mounted rotatably around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be vertically movable by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The lifting base 364 is restricted from moving upward by contacting the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c with the upper base 363, and a space is provided between the upper base 363 and the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 to move. forming. Also, the elevation base 364 is vertically moved by a pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the elevation cam member 371 .

The elevation cam driving gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevation cam member 371, and the gear portion 370a. and an elevation detection piece 370c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape from the top and is notched at two locations facing each other and is detected by the elevation detection sensor 382. The elevation cam driving gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevation cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guides the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364. As shown in FIG.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis; a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (see Figure 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the distance between the adjacent cam portions 371a is smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364.

Further, the lift cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f that connects with the connecting portion 370b of the lift cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end.

The elevation cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. is formed as By rotating the elevation cam member 371, the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 can be guided by the cam portion 371a so that the elevation base 364 can be elevated.

The central button main body 373 has a vertically extending cylindrical cylindrical portion 373a, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the cylindrical portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. 362 is slidably inserted into a pair of guide holes 373c, a central opening 373d passing through the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. A pressing detection piece 373 e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 , and a pair of guide bosses 373 f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373 b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 .

The center button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button main body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the lift base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a protrudes above the upper base 363. As shown in FIG. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short downward, and the lower end abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the central button body 373. As shown in FIG. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373 .

The center button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that their lower ends extend downward through the elevating base 364, and screws through which washers are inserted are attached to the lower ends. A washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f contacts the lower surface of the elevation base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the central button body 373. As shown in FIG.

The press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is activated when the bottom 373b (the lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button body 373 contacts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374. 364 to protrude downward. This center button main body 373 is formed to be opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs with a weaker biasing force than the lifting spring 365 .

The center button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having approximately the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the center button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. and is formed to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. The central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373 at the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b.

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the top surface of the center button decoration board 376 are full-color LEDs. The center button decoration board 376 can light-embellish the center button cover 375 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the upper surface of the peripheral button decoration board 377 . The peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can light-embellish the peripheral decorative lens 379 and the peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 includes an annular substrate portion 378 a that covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and is attached to the lift base 364 , and a cylindrical substrate portion 378 a that extends upward from the inner periphery of the substrate portion 378 a to cover the center button main body 373 . and a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The peripheral substrate cover 378 is transparent.

The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 has twisted portions extending upward so as to move in the circumferential direction and arranged in rows at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a of the peripheral substrate cover 378 . The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the lifting base 364 at the lower end of the cylindrical portion 380a. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 .

In the state where the effect operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. It is inserted into the engaging portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevation cam member 371 from below. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. In this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, when assembled into the effect operation unit 300 , the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 , and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 . also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63, etc.).

In this state (state shown in FIG. 62(a)), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pushed downward to move downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 is pushed downward. is detected by the pressure detecting sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is substantially level with the upper surface of the peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65(c)).

In this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. Neither is detected by the detection sensor 381 . That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation drive gear 368 counterclockwise in plan view, the elevation cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the elevation drive gear 368 . The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the elevation cam member 371 connected to the elevation cam driving gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevation cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. The cam 371b rolls to the left of the engaging portion 371c, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d, the second Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is moved upward along the second cam 371d by the biasing force of the lift spring 365. Together with this, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

In the elevated position, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the state of the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364 abuts the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevation base 364 is restricted. In addition, in the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (the central depressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral depressing operation portion 303b) at the lowered position is maintained. The entire pressing operation portion 303 including the peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes above the upper surface of the peripheral button cover 380 .

When the effect operation unit 300 is assembled into the effect operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65(b), etc.). reference).

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a ) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 are pressed against the button spring 374 . It moves downward against the force, and the center button main body 373 comes into contact with the lifting base 364 . When the center button body 373 is in contact with the lift base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protrudes downward from the lift base 364. , the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, After the center button main body 373 abuts on the lift base 364, the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365, and the lower end of the lift base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the lifting base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the lifting base 364 is in the lowered position, and together with the lifting base 364, the peripheral button cover 380 (peripheral pressing portion 303b) is also in the lowered position.

In this way, when the central button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364 and the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the lifting base 364 is detected. is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the central button cover 375 (the central pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward with a force greater than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the state of the raised position, the lifting base 364 moves through the outer peripheral button cover 380 to the lifting spring. It moves downward against the urging force of 365 , and the lower end of the lift base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 . In this state, the lift base 364 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in the lowered position. The pressure detecting piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lifting base 364, and the pressure detecting piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detecting sensor 381.

In order to return the central button cover 375 and the peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation portion 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. 62(b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364, moves rightward (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the guide pin 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the elevation cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevation base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d moves toward the first cam. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the concave locking portion 371c by the urging force of the lift spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 by the button elevation drive motor 367, the state of the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5e-9. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operating section relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operating section base 320 . The operation section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body section 321 of the operation section base 320 and an operation section relay board 392 mounted inside the board box 391 .

The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled into the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG. The operation part relay board 392 includes the plate center upper decoration board 314, the plate center lower decoration board 316, the operation ring drive motor 342, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevation drive motor 367, center button decoration board 376, peripheral button decoration board 377, press detection sensor 381, elevation detection sensor 382, and plate unit relay board 214 of plate base unit 210 are relayed. there is

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the action of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion. FIG. 65(a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing portion of the pressing operation portion. It is a front view of a plate unit when an operation part is pressed.

The performance operation unit 300 has a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player on its upper surface. The effect operating section 301 is composed of a large annular rotating operating section 302 and a pressing operating section 303 arranged in the ring of the rotating operating section 302 . The press operation portion 303 includes a cylindrical central press operation portion 303 a positioned at the center of the rotary operation portion 302 and an annular outer peripheral press operation portion disposed between the central press operation portion 303 a and the rotary operation portion 302 . 303b.

The rotation operation part 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335 , a ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330 . The central pressing operation portion 303 a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360 , and the outer pressing operation portion 303 b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 .

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the imaginary plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotary operation part 302 (the effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion 303 arranged in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302 is inclined so that it moves backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). .

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation portion 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 . Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 clockwise in a left side view, the effect operation ring 330 rotates through the operation ring transmission gear 350 . , rotates clockwise in plan view. On the other hand, when the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 counterclockwise in left side view, the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates counterclockwise in plan view. .

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotary operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotary operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotary operation portion 302 is rotated clockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 rotates clockwise in left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and rotates. When the operating portion 302 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in left side view. This transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 .

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b with the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. FIG. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart in the circumferential direction, is greater than the space between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in rows at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , is an interval that is not an integer multiple. Thereby, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, after the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected from the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

Since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected in this way, the content of the player participation type presentation can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 . Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring driving motor 342 rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. . Alternatively, the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the rotary operation portion 302 in the direction opposite to the direction of the rotary operation, thereby making the rotary operation heavy or giving a click feeling.

The rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation portion 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the drawing, the rotary operation unit 302 is attached with the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface exposed, so that it is formed in a shape that is easy for the player to grasp. .

As a result, the player can touch the rotary operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the player can rotate the rotary operation unit 302 in a way that is easy for the player to operate. is enhanced. Further, the rotary operation portion 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation portion 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. It should be noted that since the lower surface side of the rotary operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, it cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes a effect operation ring decoration board 352 below the effect operation ring 330, on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape. Thus, by causing the LED of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 to emit light, the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, in the effect operation ring decoration board 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a line are successively arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 can be decorated with light. As a result, the player can be given the illusion that an LED (decoration board) is provided inside the rotary operation unit 302 that rotates.

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 has a pressing operation part 303 arranged in a ring of the rotary operation part 302, and the upper surface of the rotary operation part 302 is larger than the upper surface of the rotary operation part 302, as shown in FIG. 65(a). It is in a state of a lowered position projecting slightly upward. In this state, the rotary operation section 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation section 303a of the pressing operation section 303 can be pressed. When the central push operation portion 303a is pushed downward, the upper surface of the central push operation portion 303a (center button cover 375) descends to approximately the same height as the upper surface of the outer circumference push operation portion 303b (perimeter button cover 380), and the push is detected. The pressure is detected by the sensor 381 .

In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressing is detected. The pressure is never detected by the sensor 381 .

In a normal state, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view, the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of lifting springs 365, the pressing operation portion 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the lifting base 364 to reach the raised position (see FIG. 65(b)). In this elevated position, the upper surface of the pressing operation portion 303 is positioned significantly higher than the upper surface of the rotary operation portion 302 . In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upward to a greater extent than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 .

When the central push operation portion 303a is pushed downward while the push operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the central push operation portion 303a moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central push operation portion 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b are at approximately the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect any pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b face the rotation operating portion 302. It will be in a state of approximately the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 65(c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b becomes substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotary operating portion 302 (see FIG. 65(a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect any pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation portion 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed to the downward movement end, regardless of whether the pressing operation portion 303 is in the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to encourage the player to press the central pressing operation portion 303a firmly, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operation portion 301 in the player participation type effect. , the player-participation type performance can be more enjoyable.

Note that the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the pressing operation portion 303 may be used as a clue to facilitate the rotation operation, or the pressing operation portion 303 may hinder the rotation operation. Therefore, it is possible to change the operability of the rotary operation unit 302, thereby making it possible to enjoy a wider variety of operations.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. FIG. 66(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, and FIG. 66(b) is a back perspective view of the door frame left side unit. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decorative board 402 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the cage, a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402, and a door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403 .

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens forward. The door frame left side decorative board 402 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and is composed of a left side upper decorative board 402a and a left side lower decorative board 402b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 402 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame left-side decoration substrate 402 can light-embellish the door-frame left-side decoration body 404 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The left side reflector 403 is formed with a through hole 403a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 . The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end thereof is continuous with the left end of the upper left plate decoration body 271 of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end is the top door frame unit 450 and the top decoration body 453 of the door frame. is formed so as to be continuous with the left lower end of the

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are approximately the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and looks as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. FIG. 69(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, and FIG. 69(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the back. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200, and a side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. and a plurality of luminous side window interior decorative portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and prevents a player playing with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 can be made difficult to see, and a player's personal space can be formed so as to protect the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b attached to the front surface and cylindrically extending forward and arranged vertically in rows, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on a portion corresponding to the window interior decoration portion 410b, and a side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and a plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 are mounted. and internal reflectors 414 respectively inserted into the interiors of the side window trims 410b.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to a right side reflector 415 that is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decoration member 412 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the door frame. A door having a through hole 416a that extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that penetrates in the left-right direction to form a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical direction and the front and back direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed with a through hole 417a extending in a shape and penetrating in the left-right direction to constitute the side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side decorative substrate 418 attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the right side reflector 415. and a door frame right side decoration 419 attached to the right side reflector 415 .

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (three in this case) side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in a row in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller on the front end side than on the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416 at the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b. The side window inner decorative member 412 is attached to the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame from a lower position to an upper position with respect to the center in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration member 412 is formed in translucent milky white.

The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 is attached to a portion behind the connection base 412 a of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 . A plurality of LEDs provided on the side window inner decorative portion decorative substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 has four LEDs arranged in a cross shape vertically and horizontally around the axial center of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at the rear portion of each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. It is

The internal reflector 414 has an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decorative portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four sections, upper, lower, left, and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and has a wavy shape in the front-rear direction that moves forward and then backward from the top end to the bottom end. It is The right side reflector 415 is formed with a plurality of through holes 415a penetrating in the front-rear direction and through which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 face forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and frontward and rearward. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and is connected to the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed opaque.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and frontward and rearward. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending deformed oval shape, and is connected to the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 418 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame right-side decorative substrate 418 can light-embellish the door-frame right-side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415 . As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decorative body 276 of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and its upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the right lower end of the body 453 .

The door frame right side unit 410, in a state assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. It looks embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) extending forward in a wavy shape so that a quarter portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed like a screen. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be viewed through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (columnar) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending back and forth in the side window 410a. , the side window inner decorative portion 410b can be decorated with light. By luminous decoration of the side window interior decoration part 410b, the inside of the side window 410a can be brightened, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that illuminates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the edge of the island facility) through the three side window interior decoration parts 410b in 410a. Therefore, a player looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without moving to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities. This pachinko machine 1 can be used to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window inner decorative portion 410b can block the line of sight of a player located nearby. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if he is being watched by other players, so that the other players can play without hesitation. .

Furthermore, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are illuminated by the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the light can dazzle the inside of the side window 410a, thereby changing the visibility through the side window 410a. Let At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, the light is emitted in a belt-like and radial manner, so that the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzling and the opposite side is seen from between them. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as a neighbor to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for other players to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to being unable to concentrate on the game and feeling lost due to mistakes being induced, and making the player concentrate on the game to make the game more enjoyable. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72(a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the rear, and (c) is a top lower cover removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the folded state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from above, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from below. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and covering the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. a top upper cover 452 attached to a door frame top base 451, a door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top base 451. and a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top center decoration board 455 attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door frame top decoration board 455. a door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 in front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front; a door frame top right decoration board 457 attached to the right side of the door frame top central decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top central reflector 458 arranged between a door frame top decoration 453 and a door frame top central decoration substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and between the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457. and a top right reflector 460 located in and attached to the front of the top upper cover 452 .

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a center speaker box 461 attached to the center of the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top center speakers 462 attached downward to the center speaker box 461, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. a top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454; a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below; A door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the upper side of the door frame top base 451. there is

The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-like body portion 451a extending in the left and right direction with the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction. and a forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side of the body portion 451a is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward. The left and right forward protruding portions 451b are inclined so that the front ends thereof move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open rearward. The forward projecting portion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

The top cover 452 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 when viewed from the front. The top upper cover 452 covers the outer sides of the left and right forward protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451, and is shaped to connect the upper front ends of the left and right forward protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes forward most at the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. The top cover 452 also has an opening 452a on the upper surface thereof, which is largely cut forward from the rear end. This opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468 .

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a semi-circular arc that protrudes forward, and the curvature decreases as it goes from both left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and it extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452 . formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. The door frame top decoration 453 faces downward at both ends in the horizontal direction, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively.

The door-frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door-frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door-frame top base 451, and bulges upward at the center in the left-right direction. , extending in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is spaced apart in the left-right direction. It has a pair of central speaker openings 454b facing the top central speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating up and down on the lateral outside of each of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speakers 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454 .

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top center decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decoration substrate 455 can light-embellish the central portion of the door frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip-like shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate the left portion of the door-frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are full-color LEDs. This door-frame top right decoration substrate 457 can light-embellish the right portion of the door-frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

Top center reflector 458 , top left reflector 459 , and top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, on door frame top center decoration substrate 455 , door frame top left decoration substrate 456 , and door frame top right decoration substrate 457 . Through-holes penetrating back and forth are formed at positions corresponding to the respective mounted LEDs.

The center speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and is attached so that a pair of top center speakers 462 face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. As shown in FIG. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker that outputs sounds such as speech and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right forward projections 451 b of the door frame top base 451 . The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter, and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Sounds output from the top central speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 are radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465 .

The door frame top relay board 467 includes the door frame top center decorative board 455 , the door frame top left decorative board 456 , the door frame top right decorative board 457 , the top center speaker 462 , the top side speaker 464 , and the door frame base unit 100 . It is for relaying the connection with the door frame secondary relay board 105 .

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452 , has a front end locked to the top upper cover 452 , and has a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. - 特許庁In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively, forming an integral decoration. there is In addition, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player through a pair of top central speakers 462 and a pair of top side speakers 464 .

[3-9. door frame decoration]
The decoration on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. The door frame 3 has, as shown in the figure, a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire periphery of the door window 101a.

A plate upper left decorative body 271, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate central upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, the upper left plate decoration 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the upper right plate decoration 276, the upper center plate decoration 312a, the left side door frame decoration 404, the right side door frame decoration 419, and the Behind the door frame top decoration 453 are a plate upper left decoration substrate 273, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314, a door frame left side decoration substrate 402, a door frame right side decoration substrate 418, and a door frame top center decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 are arranged, by appropriately lighting the LEDs of these decoration substrates, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated, A player can be shown or given a light emitting effect such that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, on the upper surface, an annular donut-shaped rotary operation part 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotary operation part 302. A pressing operation portion 303 consisting of a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and a cylindrical central pressing portion 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotating operation portion 302 is provided below the rotating operating portion 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or half-tube) large-diameter plate center upper decorations 312a and plate center lower decorations 312b are mounted vertically apart from each other. A door-frame left-side decoration 404 of the door-frame left-side unit 400 and a door-frame right-side decoration of the door-frame right-side unit 410 have similar shapes so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached outside the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged by the rotation operation part 302 and the two plate center upper decorations 312a and plate center lower decorations 312b. Since the pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be made conspicuous.

In addition, the upper left plate decoration 271, the upper right plate decoration 276, and the lower left plate decoration 281, the lower right plate decoration 286, and the lower center plate decoration 312b, which are arranged below the upper plate center decoration 312a, are placed in half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 increases upward from the lower end, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 that is arranged on the upper side and can be operated by the player. The push operation part 303 can be made to look larger, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation part 302 and the push operation part 303 of the performance operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can.

Further, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, a doughnut-shaped rotary operation part 302 is rotatably mounted around an axis that extends forward as it goes upward. Since the state is tilted to be lowered, the top surfaces of the rotation operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 face the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player. The operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be fully visible, and the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to appear larger. In addition, as described above, since the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotary operation portion 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, so that the player can immediately rotate when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 allows the player to enjoy the player-participation type performance, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, the diameter of the rotary operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center decoration body 312a and the lower plate center decoration body 312b are made larger than the diameter of the rotation operation part 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation portion 302, the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b protrude farther forward than the upper plate 201. Since the decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotary operation part 302, the rotation operation part 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved by the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize at a glance that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appeal to the player can be made. can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall structure of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. FIG. 76 is a front view of the body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the body frame of the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the rear. Fig. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and Fig. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the back.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached openable and closable to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted possible.

The body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a body frame top hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame top hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame top hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; A main body frame hinge assembly attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 in front view, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid 520 is provided.

The main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and is positioned within the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launcher 540 for hitting a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base unit 500 in front view, and the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out game balls B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. a rear cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable; and a locking unit 650 for locking between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

The body frame base unit 500 includes a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member for guiding a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a box-shaped ball tank attached to the payout base 551 extending left and right and opening upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 and extending leftward in an upwardly open groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 away from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and a tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 according to instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides to the board unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the body frame base 501 , a plurality of door frame hooks 652 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3 , and a unit base 651 protruding rearward. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be engaged with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that vertically moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653, and the door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It has a lock spring 655 that biases the outer frame hook 653 upward and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
Main body frame base unit 500 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base 501 attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503 . and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 which is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth. ing.

The body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 includes a base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base body 501a. A game board insertion opening 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game board on which the game board 5 is placed, which forms the lower side of the game board insertion opening 501b. A placing portion 501c and a game board restricting portion 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the left-right direction and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rearward.

In addition, the body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board placing portion 501c in the front view of the base body 501a in front view, and has a launcher attachment portion 501e for attaching the ball launcher 540, and a launcher attachment portion 501e. A cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted is inserted in the right side of the portion 501e when viewed from the front. A circular speaker opening 501g that faces the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a at 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. It has a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h in front view.

Further, the body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base body 501a when viewed from the front. A rotatably attached rearwardly extending portion 501j is formed on the rear surface of the base body 501a near the upper and lower ends of the left end in the front view, for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l.

Further, the body frame base 501 has a door for detecting opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted on the front surface of the base body 501a. A frame opening switch 4a is attached. When the door frame 3 is opened (released) with respect to the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 4a is depressurized so that the opening of the door frame 3 can be detected. A detection signal from the door frame open switch 4 a is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 . Further, the body frame base 501 has a body frame open switch 4b for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base body 501a below the position where the door frame open switch 4a is attached. It is When the body frame 4 is opened (released) with respect to the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 4b is depressing and can detect the opening of the body frame 4. As shown in FIG. A detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

A game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 around a longitudinally extending axis below the game board placing portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 enables the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b to be detachable by regulating forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position to the right of the speaker opening 501g and below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable mounting recess 501h is sized to accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, and both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a projecting forward and extending rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of protruding strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a guide body 502a are penetrated in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, and a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that an attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503 . The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 and the opposite end of which is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame sub board. It is connected to the relay board 105 .

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 is attached to the body frame base 501 at an end (right end) on the side opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the hinge in the left-right direction. ) is mounted rotatably around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3 .

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a side connected to the interface board 635 connected to the connection cable guide member. 502 is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and in a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 are installed. (see FIG. 84(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 .

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably, α/3≧β). (see FIG. 84(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but the increase stops when the opening angle α exceeds a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). transition as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501 . By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not caught between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. problems can be prevented.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees. You can get used to it. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the fold. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the crease of the door frame 3 can prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a guides the leading end of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis) side of the lower door frame hinge pin 126 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the center axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and the door is positioned closer to the speaker duct 103 than the cable holder 103a. The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open through the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and effects similar to those described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
Main body frame upper hinge member 510 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. is rotatably mounted on the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the above.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending plate-like plate is bent downward into an L shape, and a columnar shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 511. and a main body frame hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame hinge assembly 50 . The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a which penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in the horizontally extending portion and supports the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 pivotally. I have.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501 k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 . The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 .

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to attach the main body frame 4 to the door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 , is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 , and is attached to the door frame 3 . door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member upward into an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 spaced upward from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

The lower hinge second body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. a hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3; , is equipped with The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 . can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcing frame]
Main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500 . The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view that is U-shaped with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded profile.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a rear portion extending rightward from the front end thereof, which restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached with a space therebetween in the vertical direction.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove 530a that opens to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into the groove 530a. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing flail 111 is in a meandering state in plan view, and an unauthorized tool can be inserted from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also extends from the left side of the main body frame 4 through between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( Prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. The ball shooting device 540 is attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and shoots the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 onto the game board attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for hitting into the game area 5a. The ball shooting device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 .

The ball launching device 540 includes a flat plate-shaped launching base 541 attached to the launching device attachment portion 501e of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through a firing base 541; A shooting rail 544 is attached to the front surface of the shooting base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 . Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the shooting rail 544 and hit into the game area 5a.

It should be noted that if the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball B, etc., the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From the gap, the ball drops into the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[4-6. payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a front perspective view of the payout base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout base unit. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and attached to the rear side of the body frame base unit 500 .

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 . The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a front-rear width extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. a right side plate portion 551c extending short downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a; and a rear side of the top plate portion 551a. and a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a rear plate portion 551b extending from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width to the right. A back plate left portion 551e, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, and rightward from the front portion of the lower side of the left side plate portion 551b. A bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f are provided. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open forward and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the horizontal direction with a length substantially equal to the horizontal width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b extending above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with a length substantially equal to the height of the direction. The dispensing base 551 has front ends of a top plate portion 551a, a left side plate portion 551b, and a right side plate portion 551c attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the dispensing base 551 has a vertically extending shallow concave portion opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the left side portion 551e of the back plate, and the inner side plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is attached. In addition, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward from the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and includes a box-shaped ball tank 552 that extends left and right and is open upward, and a part that extends left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape that is open upward.

In addition, the dispensing base unit 550 includes a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction, and a first rail cover 554 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stop member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction that is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a rightward position in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the shape extends straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570 a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560 .

In addition, the upper end of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the height of the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side is lower at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. A first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stop member 557 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are provided to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from widening or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the end on the first rail cover 554 side is arranged around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 has rectifying pieces 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By delaying the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B that are circulating in two stages, the rectification pieces 556a rectify the flow of the game balls B so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side. Even if the height is lowered, the balls will not be clogged.

The ball stop member 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in a front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

Furthermore, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 in front view on the top surface of the portion extending left and right of the payout base 551 . The external terminal plate 558 is for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 has a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion opening 501b side of the main body frame base 501 . A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. FIG. 87(a) is a front perspective view of the payout unit in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. FIG. 88(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551 e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 .

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and an upper full ball path unit A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the side of the door frame 3 or the side of the board unit 620 is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580 . The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pull out lever 593 is operated from the ball pull out passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit A game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides down the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball withdrawal passage 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. ball guidance unit]
The ball guide unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for

The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a meandering manner through which the game ball B flows, and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward, and the front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. A flat guide passage front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by a game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and a game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 92).

In the sphere guide unit 570, the shape of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 when viewed from the front is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends rightward to guide the guide unit base 571. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeating folding between the widths of the unit base 571 in the horizontal direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guiding unit base 571 .

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the circulation direction in which the game ball B is circulated. It can be guided in a line.

The ball guide unit 570 has a movable piece member 573 attached near the top thereof so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guide passage 570a. Specifically, the upper portion of the movable piece member 573 is attached to the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in a front view so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. is formed to This movable piece member 573 is in a state where the game ball B abuts on the part protruding into the guide passage 570a, the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B, retreats from the guide passage 570a, and does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball-off detection sensor 574 is in a state of detection when the game ball B is present in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guide unit 570, since the guide passage 570a that guides the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guide unit 570, and many games are played in the guide passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball ejection movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the lower side of the ball guide unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 .

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a opened rearward and through which the game balls B can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a; A flat dispensing device rear lid 582 closing the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward are provided. ing.

Dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between dispensing device main body 581 and dispensing device front lid 583. A spur-gear-shaped driving gear 585 attached thereto, and a spur-gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the driving gear 585 and is rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583. , a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and the second transmission gear 587 meshes with and a plurality of detecting pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a. a payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a rotating integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and protruding into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 is provided.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and includes a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear cover 582. A movable ball removal piece 592 attached to a portion branched from the dispensing passage 580a by a lid 582 so as to be able to open and close the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. and a ball extracting lever 593 attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically in a plan view. Dispensing device 580 has a width in the left-right direction larger than the width in the left-right direction of ball guiding unit 570 toward the right in front view.

As shown in FIG. 89, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It is open downward. The dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward by about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move leftward as it goes downward from the upstream end. It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically toward the center (rotational axis) of the delivery blade 589 . Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer circumference of the payout blade 589 is formed, and extends downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the delivery blade 589 in the rear view.

A payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout vane 589 and right above the downstream end in the payout passage 580a.

The ball extraction passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches at a portion where it is bent to the right, and extends vertically along the left side of the rear view to the lower end. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b diverge. The body-side guide wall 581a protrudes rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and is formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b in a rear view. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a branch from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side walls of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball removing movable piece 592 rotates through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end when viewed from the rear. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the dispensing device front lid 583. The dispensing gear member 588 is provided with three outwardly extending flat detection pieces 588b at angular intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 . The delivery blade 589 has three blade pieces 589a extending outward in the form of flat plates at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The wing piece 589a extends from above in the payout passage 580a toward the rotating shaft and then extends rightward in rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Further, it protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball housing portion 589b recessed in an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in this ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotates clockwise in the rear view. Thus, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b can be moved downstream.

The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are coaxially attached to a dispensing device rear lid 582 and a dispensing device front lid 583 so as to be rotatable together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the delivery blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588 that rotates together with the delivery blade 589 .

The upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592 is attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a so as to be rotatable around the longitudinally extending axis. The ball removing movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball removing movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It can protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 and to the left in the rear view. A portion of the ball removal lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extracting lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball extracting movable piece 592, and the clockwise rotation of the ball extracting movable piece 592 in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal movable piece 592 can close the ball removal passage 580b. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the upper end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened (Fig. 90).

When the ball extraction lever 593 is lifted to make the ball extraction movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which was in a state like a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592, moves to the ball extraction movable piece 592. and flows down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a side. will flow down quickly.

In this way, in a state in which the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball extraction passage 580b at a high speed. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the game ball B vigorously, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since the movable piece 592 can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b due to the contact force. It is not caught between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the ball extraction movement due to the collision of the game ball B can be prevented. It is possible to suppress deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 .

For this reason, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be made difficult to break, so that more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement, maintenance, etc. of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Also, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B, and the ball removal path 580b. Since the game ball B abuts on the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the back cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the gap is larger than the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the narrow gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the ball after that is released. Since the movement of the movable piece 592 is due to inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable piece 592. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank ball route unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550 . The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610 . The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the payout base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full-tank base 601 and has an open front side. and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full-tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in front view, and has a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

In addition, the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper delivery ball receiving passage 600a, extends rightward in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left-right center of the upper ball storage passage 600b in a front view and opening downward on the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. An upper full discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the bottom surface, and an upper opening near the right end in the front view on the top surface and substantially perpendicular to the bottom. and an upper ball extraction passage 600e extending downward and opening downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side in front view, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball extraction passage 600e are arranged in order and open downward. When the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the upstream end of the upper dispensed ball receiving passage 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600 e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580 b in the dispensing device 580 . As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full payout passage 600d. is emitted downward from any of Also, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower portion of the upper full ball path unit 600 . The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c. 611, a lower full-tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full-tank base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full-tank base 611 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening/closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full-tank payout passage 610b and a payout passage opening/closing door 613 are attached in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full-tank payout passage 610b. and a biasing closing spring 614 .

The lower full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c arranged in this order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the part extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b extend forward side by side and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. As shown in FIG. The lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b extends forward while being slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full-tank dispensing passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the middle in the front-rear direction.

The payout passage open/close door 613 is rotatably mounted between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b. The payout passage open/close door 613 is urged clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 has an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a short circular arc shape centering on the center of rotation of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and the front end surface of the actuating protrusion 613a gradually increases toward the end in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed to contact the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4. As shown in FIG.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full payout passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are connected to the upper full ball passage. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d flows into the lower full payout passage 610b. , and the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is open so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 that opens leftward in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620. As shown in FIG.

In the normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 is such that the actuating projection 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As shown in FIG. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are opened, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 in a state assembled to the body frame 4 . In a normal state, the ball extraction lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is positioned at the lower end to close the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a at the branched portion. Further, in the lower full-tank ball path unit 610, the dispensing passage open/close door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are supplied from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the detection of the ball running out by the ball running out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 and sent through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580.例文帳に追加When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout vane 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout vane 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570 a of the ball guide unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573 , and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573 . As a result, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589 .

In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b moves clockwise in the back view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a 589 is discharged downstream. After being detected by the payout detection sensor 591, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (ball housing portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The game balls B sent to the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 are arranged directly under the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. , is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 at .

When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device. The game ball B paid out from 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600 that is in communication. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicated with the upper normal payout passage 600c on the upstream side. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full ball payout passage 600d passes through the lower full ball payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be received. After that, the game ball B received by the full ball socket 150b is discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray ball supply opening 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are put out, the game balls B can be automatically put out to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

In addition, when the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, and the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower tray The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full by voice (for example, "Please remove the ball!"), and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is set to the state where the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detected. stop temporarily until

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are ejected from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball extraction lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the state of the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball removing movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

At this time, at the position of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the falling game ball B contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592, so that the ball extraction movable piece 592 is less likely to break.

Then, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through and discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall island equipment side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93(a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and FIG. 93(b) is a back perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 .

The substrate unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placing portion 501c, and a front view near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 facing forward. and a container-shaped speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened forward. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of vertically extending slits penetrating in the vicinity of the left end in front view, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b, extends in the left-right direction, and obliquely downwards and rearwards. and an open connecting portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side so as to face forward. The connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs low sounds.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward, and the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes rearward the most. is formed so that the protrusion of the As a result, a sufficient rear space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620 a forms part of an enclosure 624 that encloses the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 . In the enclosure 624, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a space front concave portion 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front. Even if it is formed stepwise so as to reduce the volume, a sufficiently wide space is ensured on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 .

When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connection cylinder part 43a so that the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the body frame speaker 622 is positioned behind the speaker unit 620a. and the inner space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication. Therefore, the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the panel front member 42, and the panel rear member 43 can form a wide enclosure 624 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to the front panel 42 can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body-frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right in a front view with a relatively large depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since it communicates with the lower outer frame assembly 40 through the connecting tube portion 43a, the lower outer frame assembly 40 can be connected to the lower outer frame assembly 40 without particularly attenuating the low frequency range in the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel member 42 .

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622, and the sound is output from the plate unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a loud sound with deep bass.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are produced. This allows the player to listen to a sound with rich bass.

In the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is provided with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. A through-cylinder 623a extending in a tubular shape communicating with the through-hole 621d and penetrating back and forth is formed. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other, and the enclosure 624 is independent. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through-hole 621d and the through-cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. and a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with a front base 625 and a rear base 626, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a front view. A ball ejection guiding part 627 that guides to the right, and a discharged ball receiving part that opens upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball ejection guiding part 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guide portion 627 and the discharged ball receiving portion 628 downward.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens leftward on the upper left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end that opens to the left end side of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 . The ball removal guide part 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a state where it is assembled to the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving portion 628. - 特許庁

The ejected ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends laterally. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 at the left end in front view, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 to the right in the front view after guiding the ball ejection guide part 627 and the ejected ball receiving part 628. Since the ink is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a wide space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and .

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped transparent payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632. (See FIG. 97). The payout control board box 632 is composed of a transparent cover body and a transparent base body. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 and payout commands from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. Then, the instructed number of game balls B are paid out to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board 633 is accommodated in the payout control board box 632 and configured as a caulking case.

In addition, the payout control board 633 includes an error LED indicator (not shown) for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, as well as an RWM clear button 633z and the like having a pressing operation section that serves a plurality of functions. In this embodiment, a lead type RWM clear button 633z is adopted, and each lead of the RWM clear button 633z is soldered to the rear surface (solder surface) of the payout control board 633. The pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is exposed from the opening formed in the transparent cover body, and the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed when the payout control board 633 is accommodated in the payout control board box 632. can be operated by pressing the

The RWM clear button 633z is stored in the RAM built in the payout control MPU, which is the microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, and the RAM built in the main control MPU, which is the microprocessor provided in the main control board 1310. It functions as a RAM clear switch to completely erase the stored information, a function as a setting switch button to select and switch setting values, and an error to clear the error displayed on the error LED indicator. It also functions as a release switch. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change function related to the game specifications (function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching setting values) is mounted on the payout control board 633 which is a separate board from the main control board 1310. It is Also, the separate board may not be the payout control board 633, and the board not housed in the board case, the board housed in the board case, and the board housed in the board case configured as a caulking case. can be considered. However, the setting change function (function as a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values) is an important function for a game machine, so it is desirable to have high security, and it is better to put it in the board case rather than the board that is not stored in the board case. The board housed has higher security, and the board with even higher security is the board housed in a board case configured as a caulking case. Since the dispensing control board 633 is a board housed in a board case configured as a caulking case, it can be said that security is high. The main control board 1310 is attached to the game panel 1100, while the payout control board 633 is attached to the main body frame 4, which also contributes to the improvement of security.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a rear side of the interface substrate 635. and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 .

The circuit board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at the rearward portion of the speaker box 623 , which projects most backward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 . The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board, the peripheral control board, and the like, and is connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends rightward in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. back cover]
The back cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501 b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 . The rear cover 640 has its right side in a front view attached to the rear end of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically, and its left side attached to the dispensing base 551. and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 so as to be openable and closable. A locking screw 642 is provided on the left side of the back cover 640 and in a portion corresponding to the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 . The left side of the back cover 640 is attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i of the dispensing base 551 and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600, and the locking screw 642 is screwed into the back cover attachment portion 601a to secure the back. Cover 640 is secured. The back cover 640 can rotate about 180 degrees from a closed state covering the rear side of the game board 5 to an open state opening the rear side of the game board 5.例文帳に追加

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front. It is formed so as to be positioned substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the body frame 4 can be seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 . Note that the slit 641 is not formed at all in a region corresponding to a main control board box 1320, which will be described later.

[4-10. locking unit]
Locking unit 650 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98(a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and FIG. 98(b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. The locking unit 650 is attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 and locks the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 .

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lock units that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude backward from the unit base 651 and can be engaged with the outer frame 2, and a door frame that protrudes forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 and rotates depending on the direction of rotation. and a transmission cylinder 654 for vertically moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the body frame 4 , a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 , transmission cylinders 654 , and outer frame unlocking levers 656 are positioned forward of the front surface of the body frame base 501 . Protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4, the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. Engaged with the transmission member 133, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are engaged with the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the door frame hooks 652 are locked. The frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the lock unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise in a front view. The door frame hook 652 moves upward and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the body frame 4 . On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654 to unlock the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 . When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 , sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward causes the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 to move downward, thereby opening the main body frame relative to the outer frame 2 . 4 is unlocked. In this manner, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the front end sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are moved by the hooking member 116 and the upper hooking member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, it is locked by the biasing force of the lock spring 655. As shown in FIG.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 106. FIG. FIG. 99(a) is a plan view of the body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper portion of the perspective view of the body frame as viewed from behind. FIG. 101(a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails and the like, viewed from the front and above, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from the front and bottom. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101(a) exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in which game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side.

As described above, the body frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 at its rear portion, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by means of the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped body that is attached along the front upper and left sides of the body frame base 501 on the rear side. A payout base 551, a sphere tank 552 that is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box shape (container shape) that extends left and right and is open upward, and a ball tank 552 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and is open upward. A tank rail 553 extending leftward in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 leftward in front view. a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the payout base 551, a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 and for paying out game balls B to the player side; It has

The sphere tank 552 has a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a. It is The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the opposite side (right side wall 552e side) of the front wall 552b and has a length of about 3/4 of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction. It is formed over

The tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 on the right end side (upstream side) when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552 . . The tank rail 553 extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom, and has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction perpendicular to the direction of circulation of the game ball B. have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. In a plan view, the main guiding portion 553a extends leftward from the right end parallel to the axis extending in the leftward and rightward direction from the right end to a position approximately 1/10 of the total length in the leftward and rightward directions, and then leftward. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to a position about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move rearward as it goes, and extending from there to the left end in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction. . The main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 has a portion extending from the left end to the right in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. As shown in FIG. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the passage through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) at which only one can be circulated.

In addition, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main guide portion 553a is arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges out wider than the width of the guide portion 553a and that the width direction narrows from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guide portion 553a. there is By this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Moreover, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end toward the main guiding portion 553a downward. As such, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is aligned in a row toward the downstream side and downward side.

The center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is arranged on the inner side, and the bulging portion 553b is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight bulge at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved swelling portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the swelling portion 553b acts depends on the position of the contacting swelling portion 553b. Since the direction changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of spheroids in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends constantly, the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b is always subjected to reaction force in a fixed direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force becomes difficult to disperse, and the game ball B inside is always pushed in a fixed direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape, and ball clogging (ball jam) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed are dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball jam) can be made difficult to occur.

The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clog (ball jam) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the clogged place can be quickly specified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the clogging of the balls can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be enhanced. A decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from behind through the tank rail 553. When a problem occurs in the movement of the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to achieve the effects of

The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552 and extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552 d of the ball tank 552 . In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is inclined so that the height is higher. and the overflow surface portion 501m extending rearward from the outer side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b in which the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. , and the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is inclined to be lower, and a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m and a detour passage 552g that guides the

In addition, the body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among both left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g. A discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the part of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is open, and a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g across the discharge portion 551j. An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered, and the upper surface is an overflow surface portion. and a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501 . The overflow surface portion 501m is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The rear surface of the base body 501a has a flat plate shape extending from a position two to four times the outer diameter of the game ball B lower than the upper side of the rear surface. extended to The overflow surface portion 501m has a length in the left-right direction approximately 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in a front view extends from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is positioned to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the horizontal direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. This overflow surface portion 501m forms a gap with a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and includes a flat left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o have upper ends higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right outer sides, and extend in the front-rear direction in a band-like shape. and a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Also, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right stepped portion 501o is formed longer in the left-right direction than in the front-rear direction. In addition, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is raised. The gap between is formed at a height narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is aligned with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the ball tank 552 in the front view. The right end of the right stepped portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG. Note that the container-like region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as the sphere tank 552 below. The detour passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h that is inclined so that the front end is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is lower. and a dam portion extending upward from the opposite side of the passage surface 552h to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 at the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side when viewed from the front. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes from the right end side. In addition, the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be horizontally inclined in the horizontal direction.

The detour passage 552g is arranged so that the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is aligned with the front end side of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank-like shape and that extends obliquely in the left-right direction. extended. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552g changes its distribution direction from the slanted rear end so as to be perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, from the rear end of the detour passage 552g, since the game ball B is released in a direction substantially perpendicular to the circulation direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552g A game ball B from can be received. In addition, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a substantially vertical direction (perpendicular direction) to the circulation direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552g Ball clogging in 553 can be made difficult to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the obliquely extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released to the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrowed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball slugs in the tank rail 553 by discharging the fuel to a wide area.

In addition, the portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear portion of the left wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outer left portion of the rear wall 552c of the tank rail 553 in front view. A game ball B that passes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) from inside the ball tank 552 flows through this portion. For this reason, in the portion behind the detour passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). height). Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured, so that the detour passage 552g The tank rail 553 can surely receive the game ball B guided backward by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.例文帳に追加

The sphere tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f of the left side wall 552d in the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side extending from the left end of the front wall 552b to about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to about 1/2 of the full length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the full length, it extends in parallel with the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the spherical tank 552, in plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side. and has an opening 552k penetrating in the vertical direction. The ball tank 552 has flat flanges extending laterally outward and vertically on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper edge of the portion of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edge of the two flange portions 552l is equal to the upper edge of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (body frame base 501). upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled together, the opening 552k of the ball tank 552 is connected to the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 . In addition, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the left portion extending straight in the left-right direction are positioned (protruded) behind the ball tank 552 . )is doing. The rear end side of the left detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. As shown in FIG. The discharge part 551j is arranged in the ball tank 552 such that when assembled to the main body frame 4, the height lower than the bypass passage 552g is lowered rearward in a step-like manner to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in the front view to the tank rail 553, it extends leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). position in the vicinity), and then extends backward.

The external terminal plate 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a arranged in the left-right direction on its rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the gripping portion can be opened by operating a lever so that the tip of the electric wiring can be gripped. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551 . The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG.

Next, the function and effect of the upper portion of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lowered as indicated by the white arrows in FIG. The left stepped portion 501n has a rear right corner, and the right stepped portion 501o has a rear left corner. Also, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side thereof becomes lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

Then, when the amount of the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, first, the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest in the upper edge of the outer periphery, is crossed. The game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface portion 501m, and can be made to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 104). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). , it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball jam) due to engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 .

Moreover, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game balls B overflowing the overflow surface portion 501m from the ball tank 552 can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressure on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and the game balls B in the ball tank 552 are clogged. can be prevented. In addition, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m can be prevented from spilling outside (rear side) of the body frame 4. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game ball B spilled outside the body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and the body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552 Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

In addition, since the height of the upper edge of the outer periphery of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than the overflow portion 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g The upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, after overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m over the overflow portion 552f, the game ball B circulating from the overflow surface portion 501m to the detour passage 552g is on the left side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning from the detour passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the side of the detour passage 552g presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the ball is released. It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552 .

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is positioned from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). Since the height is also high, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552g without going through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) with respect to the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552g is prevented from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the detour passage 552g can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing each other and getting caught due to the direction of the pressure applied to the game balls B being varied, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B can be prevented. can be prevented.

In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, thereby aligning in the horizontal direction. Since they are aligned, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 has a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged in a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, the game ball released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the effects described above can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side so that the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since they are changed so as to coincide with each other, a plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B circulates decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) By circulating a plurality of game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the height direction to the downstream side through the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and a row is formed. can be aligned. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the capacity inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552 .

An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (abut) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , there is no problem such as short-circuit or disconnection of electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.例文帳に追加

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed backward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is placed in the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent upstream of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 104) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and clogging of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 occurs. can be prevented.

In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 104, these inclinations can guide the game ball B to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g, and the game ball B spills outside the body frame 4, causing a problem. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes under the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game balls are piled up on the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) capable of stacking the game balls B upward can be secured. , the game ball B guided by the detour passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, Since the game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 107 to 117. FIG. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which the central accessories and the like are made opaque. 108 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 viewed from the front right, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 viewed from the front left, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. . FIG. 111 is a schematic explanatory diagram of routing of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 112 is a front view of the game board with the center accessories and the like made transparent. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. 115 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 107, and FIG. 116 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. FIG. 117 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which game balls circulate and the obstacle nails.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 . In the game area 5a, there are a general prize winning port 2001, a first start port 2002, and a normal prize winning port 2001 for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, a predetermined number of game balls B to be paid out) to the player by receiving or passing the game ball B. An opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and a prize winning opening 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, a prize winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. In addition, it is intended to perform a game that allows the user to enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B within the game area 5a so as to be accepted.

The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 is provided. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 117, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a. In addition, the game board 5 includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A game is performed by hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 115 and 137, etc.) for controlling contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side. A panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. and further comprising:

An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁A panel relay board 1710 is attached below the effect display device 1600 on the rear surface of the back unit 3000 . The panel relay board 1710 includes a main control board 1310, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a normal winning opening sensor 2401, a large winning opening sensor 2403, and a prize winning opening sensor 2513. , 1st V winning mouth sensor 2514, 1st losing mouth sensor 2515, 2nd V winning mouth sensor 3003, 3rd losing mouth sensor 3004, Out mouth left sensor 3032, and Out mouth right sensor 3033, Start mouth solenoid 2412, Attacker It is for relaying connection with the solenoid 2414, the prize winning opening solenoid 2512, the first sorting solenoid 2532, the second sorting solenoid 2545, the third sorting drive motor 2555, and the like.

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to accept the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the game areas. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at different positions in the game area 5a, and a normal winning port 2003 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a further different position in the game area 5a. Then, a second start opening 2004 that enables the reception of the game ball B according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B in the normal winning opening 2003, and the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening. A large prize winning opening 2005 that allows the reception of the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to 2004, and the first start port 2002 or the second start A prize winning port 2006 that enables reception of the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the port 2004, and the prize winning port 2006. A first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008 that give an opportunity to receive the game ball B received, a plurality of magnetic sensors 2010 that detect magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a, It has

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002 attached directly above the lower end of the playing area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the playing area 5a, and a front surface of the starting opening unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning holes 2001, and a side upper left unit that is mounted slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300, and an attacker attached to the right side of the starter unit 2100 in front view, which is the lower right corner in front view in the game area 5a, and has a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. Above the unit 2400, the starter unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a, there are a prize winning port 2006, a first V winning port 2007 and a second V and a frame-like center accessory 2500 having a winning opening 2008. - 特許庁

The attacker unit 2400 includes a normal winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004, A big winning hole sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is provided. The center accessory 2500 includes an accessory winning opening sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006, and a first V winning opening that detects the game ball B received in the first V winning opening 2007. A sensor 2514 and a first loss opening sensor 2515 for detecting the game ball B received in the first loss opening 2535 are provided.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. and a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600 . In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting a game ball B received in a general winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a second winning opening sensor 3001 provided in the starting opening unit 2100. A first starting opening sensor 3002 for detecting a game ball B received in a first starting opening 2002, and a second V winning opening sensor 3003 for detecting a game ball B received in a second V winning opening 2008 of the center accessory 2500. and a third loss opening sensor 3004 for detecting the game ball B received in the third loss opening 2556 of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 137).

In addition, the back unit 3000 is driven into the game area 5a, and is placed in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006. Out-ball detection unit 3030 for detecting unaccepted game ball B (game ball B not given a privilege), light guide plate effect unit 3100 attached to the front end of back box 3010, and light guide plate effect unit 3100. and a back effect unit 3200 attached in the back box 3010 at the rear of the.

The light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 includes the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200, and the second V of the third sorting device 2550 in the center accessory 2500. A back and bottom ball discharge unit 3120 that receives the received game ball B and discharges it downward to the winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2556, the first losing opening 2535 in the center accessory 2500, and the first V winning opening 2007 A back-right ball discharge unit 3130 that receives the game ball B received in and discharges it downward, a magnetic sensor (not shown) that detects magnetism acting illegally on the warp entrance 2501 in the center role 2500, is provided.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 118(a) is a front perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel of the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel.

The front structural member 1000 is formed transparent as a whole. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in the front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely to the upper right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 and the impact part 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the space between the outer rail 1001 and is urged by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Furthermore, the front structural member 1000 has an out port 1008 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame. The game ball B guided backward by the out guide section 1003 passes through the out port 1008 and an out ball detection unit 3030 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later, and is discharged to the rear of the front constituent member 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front structural member 1000 is provided on the outside of the portion near the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially perpendicularly from the lower ends thereof, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 projects backward from the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire attempts to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1010 is aligned with the notch 1103 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch pass through the lower part of the lower full ball path unit 610. The front end openings of the normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b face forward.

Further, the front structural member 1000 includes a function display unit attachment portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner in a front view, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp attachment portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. there is

In addition, the front structural member 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 118 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 117, etc.).

The game panel 1100 is made of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and has an external shape substantially the same as that of the front structural member 1000 . The game panel 1100 has an out recess 1101 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a and corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000 . In addition, the game panel 1100 is formed with a plurality of openings 1102 penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

The game panel 1100 also has a notch 1103 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This cutout portion 1103 is formed to match the cutout portion 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the cutout portion 1010 and the cutout portion are penetrated to penetrate the lower portion. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the full ball path unit 610 face forward. Although detailed illustration is omitted, on the front surface of the game panel 1100, a decorative sheet with patterns and decorations according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is attached.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched rearward from the front end at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the state assembled to the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 , the ejecting portion 1201 is located directly above the ejected ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620 of the body frame 4 . As a result, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out hole 1008 and the out ball detection unit 3030 of the back unit 3000, and the game ball discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000. B, can be discharged from the discharge portion 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Main control unit 1300 in game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 accommodates a main control board 1310 for controlling game content, payout of game balls B, etc., a setting change board 1311 for setting game performance, and the main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311. and a main control board box 1320 that is mounted on the board holder 1200 .

When the main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, when the game board 5 is viewed from behind, the rectangular main control board 1310 that is long in the left-right direction is the left side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. In the area surrounded by the upper, right, and lower sides, it is formed and arranged in a size that occupies about four-fifths of the area from the left side to the right side, and the remaining one-fifth area. A square setting change board 1311 is arranged in a corner region where the upper side and the right side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 are connected.

As described above, the outer frame 2 coaxially connects the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Since the body frame 4 is rotatably supported so that the body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward about the left side in a front view, the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 52 of the body frame 4 are separated. The left side of the main body frame 4 in the front view in the vertical direction where is arranged is the pivot support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, and the right side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction in the front view, which is the opposite side, is the open side of the main body frame 4. side. In other words, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4, while the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivot side of the main body frame 4 ( A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the closed side).

Further, the rear cover 640 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 as described above. It is a thing. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 , the main control board box 1320 is covered with the back cover 640 . As described above, the rear cover 640 has its right side in front view attached to the vertically extending rear end of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable about the vertically extending axis. , the left side is attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i of the dispensing base 551 and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600, so the right side in front view is the pivot side of the back cover 640 ( The closed side), and the opposite left side in front view is the open side of the back cover 640 . That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the back cover 640, whereas the back cover is opened. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the side.

In this embodiment, green is used as the resist of the main control board 1310, and the entire surface (mounting surface) and the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are solidly coated with green resist except for various land patterns. On the other hand, as the resist of the setting change board 1311, a white color different from that of the resist of the main control board 1310 is adopted, and the entire surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting board 1311 are white. It is solidly coated with resist except for various land patterns.

Here, the use of a color different from the color used as the resist of the main control board 1310 as the resist of the setting change board 1311 will be described. Both the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are boards housed in the main control board box 1320 . The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game (controls the content of the game, the payout of the game ball B, etc.) and is highly important for crime prevention. Awareness about is very high. Therefore, it is not necessary to draw attention to the fact that this board is the main control board 1310 by distinguishing it from other boards. On the other hand, since the setting change board 1311 is a board having a completely new function in the pachinko machine 1 that can set the game performance, it is accommodated in the main control board box 1320, but it is not important for crime prevention. Awareness of the fact that it is an expensive substrate is extremely low. Therefore, it is necessary to draw attention to the fact that this board is the setting change board 1311, distinguishing it from other boards.

Therefore, in this embodiment, green, which is generally used as a substrate resist, is adopted as the resist of the main control board 1310, and white, which is different from the color adopted as the resist of the main control board 1310, is adopted as the resist of the setting change board 1311. adopted. As a result, among the boards housed in the main control board box 1320, the setting change board 1311 stands out more than the main control board 1310, and the setting change board 1311 is also highly important in terms of crime prevention in addition to the main control board 1310. This can contribute to raising awareness of the fact that it is a substrate.

In this embodiment described above, the resist of the setting change board 1311 is white, which is different from the green used as the resist of the main control board 1310. However, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be distinguished. If possible, it may be yellow, red, blue, transparent, and the like.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, as the resist of the setting change board 1311, a white color different from the green used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is used. The surface (mounting surface) and/or the back surface (solder surface) may be printed in white to cover almost the entirety of the surface (mounting surface) and/or in black, blue, yellow, or red. You may print.

Next, the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will be described. The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and molded transparently. A main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether or not unauthorized alteration has been made, or whether or not an illegal IC is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. In addition, the main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the main In order to open the control board box 1320, its sealing mechanism must be destroyed, and the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 is enhanced. The cover body is formed with a plurality of ventilation holes for heat radiation through which the air inside the main control board box 1320 can be released to the outside air.

A main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 , the peripheral control board 1510 and the setting change board 1311 . In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a normal winning opening sensor 2401, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, and a prize winning opening sensor. 2513, 1st V winning mouth sensor 2514, 1st losing mouth sensor 2515, 2nd V winning mouth sensor 3003, 3rd losing mouth sensor 3004, Out mouth left sensor 3032, Out mouth right sensor 3033, Start mouth solenoid 2412, Attacker Solenoid 2414, accessory prize winning solenoid 2512, first distribution solenoid 2532, second distribution solenoid 2545, third distribution drive motor 2555, magnetic sensor 2010, outlet left sensor 3032, outlet right sensor 3033, etc. It is connected.

A setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is provided with a setting key switch 1311a capable of switching setting values of the pachinko machine 1 and confirming the setting values. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connector-connected (inter-board connection) to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connection between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is connected by a harness). The harness (electrical wiring) absorbs (relieves) the force associated with the operation of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310 is connected electrically. can be difficult to transmit to). The signal from the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 by this connector connection (connection between boards). Note that connector connections, which are connections between boards, include connection using a normal connector that does not have a floating mechanism and connection using a special connector that has a floating mechanism. A normal connector that does not have a floating mechanism consists of a socket and a plug, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the plug into the socket. The structure is such that there is absolutely no amount of movement in the direction (for example, vertical direction) relative to the direction in which the plug is inserted and pushed. On the other hand, a special connector with a floating mechanism consists of a socket and a plug. At the time of mating, it is possible to absorb the error (fitting axis misalignment) that occurs when the socket is pushed in by moving the socket in a predetermined distance range in a direction perpendicular to the pushing direction (e.g., vertical direction). It has a structure. In this embodiment, a normal connector without a floating mechanism is used as a connector connection between boards, but a special connector with a floating mechanism may be used.

The setting change board 1311 is formed in a square shape with one side having a distance dimension approximately one-fifth of the horizontal distance dimension of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, and the upper side of the setting change board 1311 being the main control board 1310. is arranged on the same straight line as the upper side of the main control board 1310, and the lower side thereof is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310 respectively.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311 at the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction. , at a position corresponding to the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 . A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated is arranged at the center point of intersection of the center lines of the square setting change board 1311 in the vertical and horizontal directions. On the main control board 1310, a setting change permission lamp 1310z that can emit a single color (for example, red) is arranged above the center line of the setting change board 1311 in the horizontal direction and near the connector MSCN. Above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, a setting display 1310g composed of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged. A base monitor 1310h composed of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) arranged in a row from the center toward the right side is arranged below.

In this embodiment, the position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion opening formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion opening is along the vertical direction). , the setting key switch 1311a is turned off as an initial position. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion port and can be pulled out from the insertion port. In the present embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the setting key is inserted into the insertion port, other players arranged in a line opposite the island facilities of the game hall can be used. The distance dimension of the setting key switch 1311a in the depth direction is adopted so that the member of the pachinko machine (or the member of the island facility of the game hall) and the setting key do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

The setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation, and the setting key ON signal is set. It is input from the change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . When the setting key cylinder is turned counterclockwise by 60 degrees from the initial position and turned on for the second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on to turn the decision key ON. is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . In addition, the setting key cylinder is moved so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by being rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees and turned off, and the setting key switch 1311a can be moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the decision key is turned on to the original position. (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder to turn off the setting key switch 1311a), the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn off the setting key switch 1311a. can be turned off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . In this embodiment, two completely different functions, that is, the setting key ON function and the enter key ON function, can be realized by only the setting key switch 1311a alone, depending on the direction in which the setting key cylinder is rotated. An operation for turning on the setting key and an operation for turning on the decision key can be collectively performed only by the single setting key switch 1311a.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a corresponds to the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, although it is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. A wire penetration prevention portion is molded in the cover body for this opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter from the "gap" formed in the opening and modify the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. It is a structure that is The setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover and the base and cannot be touched at all. , the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized through the cover.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern for transmitting a setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a decision key ON signal for the setting key switch 1311a, and a setting key switch 1311a and the wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal of 1311a are formed on the setting change board 1311 so as not to come close to each other (at a distance from each other), and terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 ( The connection to the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is also formed at a distance. The wiring pattern for transmitting the key ON signal, the wiring pattern for transmitting the enter key ON signal for the setting key switch 1311a, and the wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal for the setting key switch 1311a) are also brought closer to each other. In addition, the wiring pattern to which the signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is transmitted is not brought close to each other (mutually spaced apart). ) is formed.

Here, the procedure for accessing (operating) the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 will be briefly described. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4 as described above. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the support side (closed side). Further, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board box 1320 is covered with the back cover 640 as described above. Further, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivotal support side (closed side) of the back cover 640, whereas the back cover is opened. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the side. That is, when the back cover 640 is opened, the back cover opening side of the back cover 640 is the pivotal support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4 , so the main body frame 4 is made larger than the outer frame 2 (approximately 90 degrees), the open side of the back cover 640 interferes with the outer frame 2 and the back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 cannot be opened. In other words, a person who accesses (operates) the setting key switches 1311a of the setting change board 1311 simply opens the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 by a gap just enough to insert his or her arm, and opens the setting change board 1311. The back cover 640 cannot be opened even if an attempt is made to access (operate) the setting key switch 1311a. In other words, a person who accesses (operates) the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 first needs to secure a space where the back cover 640 covers the back side of the game board 5. 2, it is necessary to open the body frame 4 largely (nearly 90 degrees).

Since the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the pivotal support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4 in this way, compared to the case where the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4, the setting change board 1311 When a fraudulent person who attempts to illegally access (operate) the setting key switch 1311a uses an illegal tool such as a piano wire or wire, the main body frame 4 between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 Even if an illegal tool is inserted and fed from the open side of the body frame 4, the path from the open side of the body frame 4 to the setting key switch 1311a becomes long, so the illegal tool must be fed deeply. As a result, the operation time during which an illegal tool is fed into the setting key switch 1311a is also lengthened, so that such fraudulent acts can be easily detected by a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall.

In addition, since the main control board box 1320 is covered with the back cover 640, the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is covered with the back cover 640. there is As a result, a fraudulent person who attempts to illegally access (operate) the setting key switches 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is prevented from getting between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 by using an illegal tool such as a piano wire or wire. Even if an unauthorized tool is inserted and fed from the open side of the main body frame 4, the unauthorized tool is blocked by the back cover 640 before it reaches the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. can be prevented from being inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a.

The setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is provided with an insertion port for inserting the setting key, and the insertion port of the setting key cylinder is covered with the back cover 640. In order to access (operate) the setting key switches 1311a of the setting change board 1311, it is necessary to open the rear cover 640. FIG. In order to open the back cover 640, it is necessary to open the body frame 4 largely (approximately 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2. FIG. Accompanied by such a plurality of operations, the security of access (operation) to the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 can be enhanced, thereby increasing the deterrence against fraudulent use of an unauthorized tool.

As described above, the rear cover 640 is attached so that its left side in front view is pivotably supported by the rear cover mounting portion 551i of the dispensing base 551 and the rear cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 so as to be openable and closable. A lock screw 642 is screwed into the back cover mounting portion 601 a to fix the back cover 640 . It is arranged on the pivotal support side (closed side) of the body frame 4, which is opposite to the open side of the body frame 4. Therefore, a fraudulent person who attempts to illegally access (operate) the setting key switches 1311a of the setting change board 1311 may insert an illegal tool between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the open side of the main body frame 4. Even if the tool is inserted and fed, the path from the open side of the body frame 4 to the locking screw 642 of the back cover 640 becomes long, so it is necessary to feed the unauthorized tool deeply. In this respect as well, since the operation time during which an illegal tool is fed into the lock screw 642 becomes longer, it is possible to make it easier for staff members such as store clerks in game halls to discover such illegal acts, and the setting change board. By increasing the security of access (operation) to the setting key switch 1311a of 1311, it is possible to increase the deterrence against fraudulent acts using illegal tools.

The setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switches 1311a are arranged is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310, and this main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 of the game board 5. ing. On the other hand, the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z is arranged is accommodated in the payout control board box 632, and this payout control board box 632 is located behind the power supply board cover 631 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. installed on the side. In this way, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are separated from each other by arranging the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z on separate substrates, and by making the objects to which the substrates are attached different. can be done. If the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are collectively arranged on one board, only one board needs to be tampered with, which is not preferable in terms of crime prevention. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on separate substrates, and the objects to which the substrates are attached are also different. Security against the clear button 633z is enhanced.

In addition, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) performs game preparation control and game control (follows game preparation control and performs game control). The game preparation control is performed in the first step (step S14 in the main control side power-on processing described later) in which the setting value can be changed based on the signal from the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311. Judgment, processing of step S16A), and following this first step, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 (here, it functions as a setting switching button for selecting and switching the set value.) and a second step (determination in step S216 and processing in step S218 in setting change processing to be described later) in which the setting value can be selected and switched based on the signal. Following the game preparation control, the game control consists of a main control side main process in a main control side power-on process described later, a timer interrupt process on the main control side described later, and the like.

Although it is possible to improve such security, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on separate substrates, and the objects to which the substrates are attached are also different. Since the switch 1311a is housed in the main control board box 1320, there is no need to tell where the setting key switch 1311a is located. It may be difficult for staff members such as game hall managers and game hall clerks to know if they are arranged because they may be unfamiliar with them.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. Specifically, the cover body of the main control board box 1320 is pasted with a sticker that indicates the location of the RWM clear button 633z. This sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet, and on this rectangular sheet, for example, "RWM clear button (setting switching button) is on the payout control board" is printed in red translucent characters (height: 7 mm). ing. As a result, the location of the RWM clear button 633z (the setting switching button) can be communicated to the store manager of the game hall, the store clerk of the game hall, and other staff members. Since the RWM clear button 633z can be easily found when operating the RWM clear button 633z, the user does not get dizzy. Therefore, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Note that even if this sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 , the visibility of the main control board 1310 is not obstructed. Also, a symbol such as an arrow may be used instead of the characters printed on the rectangular sheet of the sticker.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. When molding the cover body of the board box 1320, concave characters or convex characters may be molded together (that is, the cover body and the characters may be integrally molded). . Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. On the surface (mounting surface) of the board 1311, characters (height: 7 mm) "RWM clear button (setting switching button) is on the payout control board" may be printed in white as silk printing. Characters (height: 7 mm) "RWM clear button (setting switching button)" may be printed on the surface (mounting surface) in white by silk printing. In addition, the color of silk printing may be the same color, or may be different colors. Also, a symbol such as an arrow may be used instead of silk-printed characters. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. The character part may be masked on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 1311, and the character (height: 7 mm) may be formed with a resist as "RWM clear button (setting switching button) is on the payout control board". A character portion may be masked on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 633, and a blank character (height: 7 mm) "RWM clear button (setting switching button)" may be formed with a resist. The colors of the resist may be the same color, but it is preferable to use different colors so that the substrates can be distinguished. Also, instead of the blank characters, blank symbols in which symbols such as arrows are masked may be used. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. A similar sticker (this sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet, and this rectangular sheet has, for example, red translucent characters (high (width: 7 mm), and "RWM clear button (setting switching button) is on the payout control board" is printed.), or red translucent on the surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633 A transparent rectangular sheet labeled "RWM clear button (setting switching button)" with letters (height: 7 mm) may be attached. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. The position of the button 633z may be indicated by an announcement sound from various speakers, or an announcement image may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. FIG. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, an attendant such as a store manager of the game hall or a store clerk of the game hall operates the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300 to display the effect display device 1600. Various setting screens are displayed, and an item regarding the arrangement location of the RWM clear button 633z (setting switching button) is selected. As a result, an announcement saying "The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also serves as a setting switching button." , an announcement image (which may be photographed) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. After grasping the arrangement location of the RWM clear button 633z from such announcement voices and announcement images, the staff such as the manager of the game hall and the staff of the game hall turn off the power of the pachinko machine 1 to change the setting value. can be done smoothly. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. When the setting is changed, an announcement voice may be played from various speakers to indicate where the RWM clear button 633z, which also functions as a setting switching button, is arranged. Specifically, for example, by transmitting a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in which the setting value can be changed and determined, the peripheral Tells where the RWM clear button 633z is located by the control of the control board 1510 ``The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. Please change the value." is repeated from various speakers. When the main control MPU 1310a completes the setting change process, it transmits a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, whereby the peripheral control board 1510 stops the announcement sound and proceeds with various processes based on the received predetermined command. It will be done. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known. It should be noted that, following such an announcement voice, an announcement voice telling how to operate the setting keys after the setting values are determined may be played from various speakers. Also, an image of "setting" may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the announcement sound is played.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is affixed to the cover of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. When the setting is changed, an announcement voice may be played from various speakers to indicate where the RWM clear button 633z, which also functions as a setting switching button, is arranged. Specifically, for example, by transmitting a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in which the setting value can be changed and determined, the peripheral Tells where the RWM clear button 633z is located by the control of the control board 1510 ``The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. Please change the value." is repeated from various speakers. This eliminates the need to search for the seal attached to the cover body of main control board box 1320 . Although such an announcement sound is repeatedly played from various speakers, it is assumed that the contents of the announcement sound may be overlooked. , the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be known. In addition to the announcement voice, "The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also serves as a setting switching button. Please operate the RWM clear button to change the setting value." The contents of the location where the seal indicating the location of the button is affixed may also be provided. When the RWM clear button is operated, the main control MPU 1310a transmits a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 stops the announcement sound. Even if the person who changes the setting value becomes accustomed to changing the setting value by the work and it is annoying, if the RWM clear button is operated immediately after starting the work, this will be a trigger. , the announcement sound can be promptly stopped, and even if it is unavoidable that the work needs to be done after the game hall opens for business, the work can be started so as not to cause inconvenience to the players. If the RWM clear button is operated immediately, the announcement sound can be quickly stopped with this as a trigger. It should be noted that, following such an announcement voice, an announcement voice telling how to operate the setting keys after the setting values are determined may be played from various speakers. Also, an image of "setting" may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the announcement sound is played.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on separate substrates, and the objects to which the substrates are attached are also different. were spaced apart, but if security can be enhanced, a setting key switch 1311a and a setting switching button (in this case, from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 to the setting switching button functions are removed.) can be aggregated and arranged. For example, the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 have the same vertical distance as the right and left sides of the main control board 1310, and the left and right sides of the main control board 1310 have the same vertical distance. A center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 and a center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 , have matching shapes. That is, the setting change board 1311 has a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311 so that the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is on the center line. Along the right side of the control board 1310, the center position of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is arranged on the center line. Below the center line of the setting change board 1311 and near the lower side of the setting change board 1311, a setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated is arranged. A setting switching button having a pressing operation portion is arranged above the center line and near the upper side of the setting change board 1311 . That is, on the same board, the setting change board 1311, the setting key switches 1311a are arranged near the bottom side, while the setting switching buttons are arranged near the top side, and are spaced apart from each other. In this way, when the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button are separately arranged on the same substrate, the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button are integrated on one substrate. are placed close to each other and arranged separately, it is difficult to make unauthorized modifications. Even if it is a thing, there is a case where crime prevention can be improved.

Next, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, and the setting indicator 1310g of the main control board 1310 will be briefly described. Here, first, the case of changing the settings of the set values will be briefly described, and the case of displaying the current set values for confirmation will be briefly described. In addition, since the setting key is an important key that can be used not only to change the setting value but also to check the current setting value, etc., only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, can possess it. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the settings of the set values, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power failure (an instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily), the body frame is changed to the outer frame 2. 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn the first ON. It is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined set value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by being operated. In other words, the person who actually changes the setting value must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then check the outer frame 2. After the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch 1311a and turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. The power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by turning on the key switch 1311a. As the above-described "predetermined setting value change permission condition", a condition that an operation signal is input by operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z may be used. That is, when power is restored to the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power failure (an instantaneous power failure), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning ON the setting key switch 1311a, and The setting value may be changed when the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated is satisfied.

A person who changes the setting value must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. After performing the opening operation, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. The key switch 1311a is set to ON. Subsequently, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a shown in FIG. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a controls the current setting values stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON for the first time). The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1310z is switched from the off state to the on state.

A person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, and the detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z is sent from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. is input to Each time the person who changes the setting of the setting value presses the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current setting value by 1 based on the detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z. When it reaches the set value 6, which is the maximum value, it returns to the set value 1, which is the initial value, increases again by 1, and controls to display the set value on the setting display 1310g.

When the setting value is to be determined, the person who changes the setting value rotates the setting key cylinder counterclockwise by 120 degrees (that is, turns the setting key switch 1311a ON. The cylinder is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return from the rotational position of the cylinder to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a), and then turned off. By rotating the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees and performing the second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

The setting key cylinder is turned counterclockwise by 120 degrees (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on from the setting key cylinder rotation position to the original position, that is, the initial position (that is, the setting key When the switch 1311a is returned to the turning position of the setting key cylinder to turn it off, a decision key ON signal may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this case, After the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g by pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, the setting value is determined only by turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is removed from the setting key cylinder. and workability is improved.

A person who changes the setting value should return the setting key switch 1311a from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the decision key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees and turning it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting values to not displaying them, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1310z from lighting to turning off.

A person who changes the setting value pulls out the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and changes the setting value. to complete.

When confirming and displaying the currently set setting value, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily), the outer frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn the first ON. It is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined set value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by being operated. In other words, the person who actually confirms and displays the setting values that are currently set must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (state that power has been restored after a power outage or momentary power failure). Then, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, and then the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to open the first key. is turned on, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on.

A person who confirms and displays the currently set setting values must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (state that power has been restored after a power outage or momentary power failure), and then confirm that the power is restored. Then, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Thus, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a controls the current setting values stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON for the first time). of which, the set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the state where the setting change permission lamp 1310z is turned off is maintained, and even if the person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, , the setting value is not changed at all in response to this pressing operation, and the contents displayed on the setting display 1310g are also not changed.

When the person who confirms and displays the currently set set values completes the confirmation of the currently set set values, the setting key switch 1311a is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, The setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the turning position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and is turned off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 .

The main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting value to not displaying the setting value.

A person who confirms and displays the set value currently set pulls out the setting key from the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and displays the current setting. Complete the task of confirming the setting value displayed.

In addition, as described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is that when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure), the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to open the first switch. While it is necessary that the setting key is ON by being ON-operated, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is, as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when a power failure (momentary After the power is restored after power is restored, the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. It is necessary that the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees and the first ON operation is performed to turn the setting key ON. Thus, the predetermined set value change permission condition and the predetermined set value display permission condition are that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch 1311a is opened. , and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. The setting value change permission condition requires "at the time of power recovery", whereas the predetermined setting value display permission condition requires "after power recovery".

Also, there are two types of setting key switches: a lead type and a surface mounting type (so-called SMD type). The setting key switch 1311a in this embodiment is basically of a lead type. The setting key switch 1311a has an operation in which the setting key is inserted into and removed from the insertion port. Therefore, the force associated with this operation acts on the substrate on which the setting key switch 1311a is provided, and this substrate bends. In the lead type, each lead of the setting key switch is arranged inside the outline of the setting key switch and soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the substrate. On the other hand, in the SMD type, each lead of the setting key switch is arranged to protrude outward from the outline of the setting key switch and is soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate.

As a result, with the lead type, if the setting key is caught in the insertion port when the setting key is pulled out from the insertion port, each lead of the setting key switch is arranged inside the outer shape of the setting key switch and the back side of the board ( Since the setting key switch is soldered to the surface (solder surface), compared to the SMD type where the lead of the setting key switch is arranged to protrude toward the outer shape and is soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the board, the setting key switch The load applied to the part where each lead is soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the board increases, and this load acts strongly from the back surface (solder surface) of the board toward the front surface (mounting surface), causing the board itself to bend significantly. becomes. On the other hand, in the SMD type, even if the setting key is caught in the insertion port when the setting key is pulled out from the insertion port, each lead of the setting key switch protrudes outward from the outer shape of the setting key switch. A lead type in which each lead of the setting key switch is placed inside the outline of the setting key switch and soldered to the back of the board (solder side). The load on the part where each lead of the setting key switch is soldered to the front surface (mounting surface) of the board is smaller than that of the other model, and this load is transferred from the back surface (solder surface) to the front surface (mounting surface) of the board. The substrate itself is hard to bend even when working toward it.

Also, if the board itself bends greatly due to external force acting on the board, there is a concern that the solder part where the SMD type electronic parts are soldered will peel off due to the large peeling load of the land pattern. When using , it is desirable to mount it on a board on which SMD type electronic components are not mounted. In addition, the peeling load of the wiring pattern and land pattern at the solder part where each lead part of the setting key switch is soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the board is smaller than that of the SMD type, and the solder part of the setting key switch Considering the strength of the solder portion, it is desirable to use a lead type setting key switch because it can be made strong against peeling.

Therefore, in this embodiment, basically, a reed type switch is adopted as the setting key switch 1311a. In this embodiment, lead-type electronic components are mounted on the setting change board 1311 instead of SMD-type electronic components. Even if the setting key is caught in the insertion port when the setting key is pulled out from the insertion port and the board itself is greatly bent as described above, the leads soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 are not used. There is no risk that other electronic components of the type will peel off from the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 . As described above, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected (connected between boards) to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are connected). may be electrically connected via a harness), the signal from the setting key switch 1311 a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 .

A rectangular main control board 1310 elongated in the left-right direction of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 extends from the left side to the right side of the area surrounded by the left, top, right and bottom sides of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 . It is formed in a size that occupies about four-fifths of the area of the main control board box 1320, and the remaining one-fifth of the area is connected to the upper side and right side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. A square setting change board 1311 is arranged in the corner area. The setting change board 1311 is formed in a square shape with one side having a distance dimension approximately one-fifth of the lateral distance dimension of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, and a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction. Compared with the shape of the main control board 1310, it is small. In this embodiment, a lead-type setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the square setting change board 1311 having such a small shape. Even if the board itself bends due to the setting change board 1311a, or if the setting key gets caught in the insertion port when the setting key is pulled out from the insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and the board itself bends, the setting change board 1311 is formed on a small board. As a result, the magnitude of deflection can be kept smaller than that of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 are brought into contact with the cover body and base body of the main control board box 1320 at positions corresponding to the setting change board 1311 to prevent bending. Since there is no need to provide ribs that can be used to control the setting key switch 1311a, screw holes can be provided in the setting change board 1311 around the position where the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, and the setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the transparent main control board box 1320. This can contribute to the visibility of the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 .

As described above, in this embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is of the lead type and is arranged on the setting change board 1311, which is separate from the main control board 1310, so that the setting value can be changed. Even if the setting change board 1311 bends when the setting key is inserted into or removed from the insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, the main control board 1310 does not bend. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from bending due to the operation of the lead type setting key switch 1311a.

On the other hand, in place of the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a is arranged on one of the boards such as the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, and the power supply board 630. When an SMD type electronic component is mounted on the board, instead of the lead type setting key switch 1311a, an SMD type switch is adopted, mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board, and temporarily inserted. Even if the setting key is caught in the insertion opening when the setting key is pulled out from the opening, the board itself does not easily bend as described above. There is no risk of peeling off from the surface (mounting surface) of the

Here, to briefly explain the set value, the "set value" is the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or a small hit or not, in addition to the probability It is possible to change the probability for lottery determination when moving to time, the allocation rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc. The probability (the degree of advantage) of increasing the number of game balls that can be played is set in advance. In the present embodiment, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are prepared in advance as set values. A probability (degree of advantage) of being advantageous to the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a jackpot determination table that defines the ratio of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, a jackpot symbol A big hit pattern determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the decision, a small hit determination table that defines the ratio of the small hit determination value indicating that the small win has been won, and a ratio of the determination value of the determination value of the small hit pattern Select a small hit pattern determination table, a normal transition determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the transition determination from the probability variation to the normal time, etc.), or use various distribution rates associated with the set value Various tables (for example, a sorting table that defines a sorting time, a block that manages driving of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) is selected. In various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at predetermined ratios. The various tables used for various lottery determinations are set so that at least some values differ from each other, and the various tables used for various sorting rates are set so that at least some values differ from each other. The value may differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electric drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of another electric drive source. Some are set to In addition, as the set values described above, six set values (integers) ranging from set value 1 to set value 6 were used, but a smaller range may be used, or a larger range may be used. can be anything. For example, four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4 may be used, or eight setting values (integer) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8 may be used.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the set values, but also checks the contents of the internal RAM when the main control MPU 1310a restores power to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the main control side power-off processing has not ended normally when the power is turned off, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the internal RAM (or it is unreliable). is not possible), an error is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h collects game balls launched into the game area 5a through an out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. The number of game balls is displayed. Of the game balls shot to the game area 5a, the game balls collected by the out port 1008 are detected by one of the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033, and this detection signal is sent to the panel. It is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the relay board 1710. FIG.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It's becoming

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position, which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and then turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then turn it counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it on. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a is set from the initial position. The setting key switch 1311a' may be rotatable only within a range up to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder whose key is turned ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a' is turned counterclockwise so as to return from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) which is the original position. By rotating the setting key switch 1311a' by 60 degrees toward the direction and turning it off, the setting key switch 1311a' can be turned on. (The mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be described as "determination key modification (1)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) which is the original position. 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and then rotate it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the push operation portion of the enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button. A wire penetration prevention part is attached to the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter through the "gap" formed in the opening and modify the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. It becomes a structure to be molded. When the pressing operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation portion of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button. When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON.

The position where the enter key button is arranged on the setting change board 1311 may be in the vicinity of the setting key switch 1311a. The cover body of the main control board box 1320 has an enter key button and other buttons so as not to confuse the enter key button with other buttons when other buttons are arranged on the main control board 1310 in addition to the enter key button. A sticker printed with the name of each button is affixed to a position corresponding to each of the buttons (instead of the sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and other buttons, a button with a cover that covers the depressing operation part of either the enter key button or the other button (a cover for depressing the depressing operation part) ) may be adopted, the color of the pressing operation part may be different, the outer shape of the enter key button and other buttons, or the shape of the pressing operation part A different type of switch may be employed, or another type of switch that does not have a depressing operation section may be employed as the decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Switches can be mentioned. In addition, when providing the enter key button and other buttons on the setting change board 1311, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for the enter key button and the wiring pattern for the other buttons are set as routing. They are formed so as not to come close to each other (at a distance from each other) on the change board 1311, and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed at a distance. Also, in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the enter key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the other buttons should not be drawn close to each other (separate from each other). ) are formed. Further, when the setting key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. (The form of the Enter key button (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modification (2) of the Enter key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and then rotate it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the finger is touching, and a detection from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. A signal may be branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and whether or not the decision key is ON may be determined based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the palm or fingers are in contact with the handle 182 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192. When it is not touched, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON, and/or when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the decision key is ON. On the other hand, when the launch of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. good.) may be described as "determination key modification (3)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and then rotate it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A firing reference pulse is branched in the payout control board 633 from the provided firing timing control circuit and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Based on these firing reference pulses, the decision key is turned on. The presence or absence may be determined. The launch reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B to be launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the firing reference pulse is input from the payout control board 633, while determining that the decision key is not ON when the firing reference pulse is not input. (The form of the firing reference pulse may be described as "determination key modification (4)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) which is the original position. 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and then rotate it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the action of the player sitting opposite the pachinko machine 1 is detected. When a distance measuring sensor that can be used is provided on the game board 5 and a detection signal from this distance measuring sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via a relay board, the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor is It may be branched at the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and whether or not the decision key is ON may be determined based on this detection signal. The light emitted by the light emitting part of the distance measuring sensor passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected by the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance dimension. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light-receiving section, thereby detecting the action of the player. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a receives a detection signal from the distance measuring sensor through the relay board, and determines whether or not there is an action based on this detection signal. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no movement, it is possible to determine that the decision key is not ON (the mode of the distance measurement sensor may be described as "determination key modification (5)"). .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on to set the decision key, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder rotates 60 degrees counterclockwise so that the setting key cylinder is returned to the initial position (i.e., the setting key cylinder turning position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the key is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by being rotated and turned off, and the setting key switch 1311a can be moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the enter key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the key switch 1311a. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF is transmitted to the outside as serial information. A serial output circuit capable of serial output may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311, but may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 633 instead. . When the serial information serially output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a turns on the setting key, the enter key ON, and the It is possible to determine which one of OFF is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "determination key modification (6)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on to set the decision key, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder rotates 60 degrees counterclockwise so that the setting key cylinder is returned to the initial position (i.e., the setting key cylinder turning position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the key is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by being rotated and turned off, and the setting key switch 1311a can be moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the enter key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the key switch 1311a. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF is sent to the outside as a pulse signal. A pulse output circuit capable of outputting may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit was provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead of this, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 633. . The pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit is set to have a pulse width of 1 ms if the information is to indicate that the SET key is ON, and is set to have a pulse width of 3 ms if the information is to indicate that the OK key is ON. If the information indicates OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a turns on the setting key, the decision key, and the key from the input pulse signal. and OFF (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be referred to as "determination key modification (7)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on to set the decision key, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder rotates 60 degrees counterclockwise so that the setting key cylinder is returned to the initial position (i.e., the setting key cylinder turning position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the key is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by being rotated and turned off, and the setting key switch 1311a can be moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the enter key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the key switch 1311a. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The voltage level of the signal is set between the boards from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310 using an intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2 V to 3 V in the range of 0 V to 5 V). By providing a comparator circuit and inputting the comparison result by the comparator circuit to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control MPU 1310a turns ON/OFF the setting key ON signal, ON/OFF the decision key ON signal, and OFF signal. ON/OFF may be determined. As a result, it is possible to improve security with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a (the aspect of the setting key switch using an intermediate potential is sometimes referred to as "determination key modification (8)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and then rotate it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation part An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the enter key button. and a structure in which a wire penetration prevention portion is molded in the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter from the "gap" formed in the opening and modify the payout control board 633. Become. When the pressing operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation portion of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button. When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

The position where the enter key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of the RWM clear button 633z having a depressing operation part. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, there are stickers printed with the names of the respective buttons at positions corresponding to the enter key button and the RWM clear button 633z so as not to confuse the enter key button and the RWM clear button 633z. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover.). Also, in order not to confuse the decision key button and the RWM clear button 633z, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation part of either the decision key button or the RWM clear button 633z (for pressing the pressing operation part) It is necessary to open the cover at the same time.), the color of the pressing operation part may be different, and the outer shape or pressing operation of the enter key button and the RWM clear button 633z may be adopted. A switch having a different shape of the part may be adopted, and a switch of a different type that does not have a depressing operation part may be adopted as the decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the enter key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Switches can be mentioned. Further, when the payout control board 633 is provided with the enter key button and the RWM clear button 633z, the wiring pattern for the enter key button and the wiring pattern for the RWM clear button 633z are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. are formed so as not to come close to each other on the payout control board 633 (separately from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed at a distance. Also, in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the enter key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z should not be drawn close to each other (mutually spaced apart). Further, when the determination key button is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. (The form of the Enter key button (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Decision key modification (9)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and then rotate it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the three functions of the RWM clear button 633z are shared. (RAM clear switch, setting switching button, and error cancel switch), the payout control board 633 is provided with an error cancel switch having a pressing operation part separately from the RWM clear button 633z, so that the error cancel switch can A signal may be branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and based on this signal, it may be determined whether or not the determination key is ON. As described above, the error cancellation switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633. When the board power-on processing is completed and interrupt processing is being performed), and when no error has occurred as the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation portion of the error release switch cannot be operated at all. do not have. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the error canceling switch is operated based on the signal from the error canceling switch, while the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON based on the signal from the error canceling switch. Therefore, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON when the depression operation portion of the error canceling switch is not operated. As a result, the security can be improved depending on whether or not the decision key is ON (the mode of the error release switch may be described as "the decision key modification (10)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the three functions of the RWM clear button 633z are shared. (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error release switch), the payout control board 633 is provided with an error release switch having a press operation part separately from the RWM clear button 633z, and the error release switch The payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 monitors the logic of the signal in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to create a command, and creates the command in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later. This command may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receiving this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. As described above, the error cancellation switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633. When the board power-on processing is completed and interrupt processing is performed), and when no error has occurred as the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation portion of the error release switch cannot be operated at all. do not have. Therefore, in the main control MPU 1310a, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation unit is operated based on the signal from the error release switch in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later, and notifies that effect. When the command is received, it can be determined that the decision key is ON. On the other hand, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and receives the command to notify that effect. When the button is pressed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, the security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on (mode 2 of the error release switch may be referred to as "variation (11) of the enter key").

In the above-described embodiment, the RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch) is provided on the payout control board 633, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. turning the key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it from the rotational position of the key cylinder to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) to turn it off; Further, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a by rotating it 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction and turning it on. Although it was designed to be input to the main control MPU 1310a of the board 1310, instead of this, among the functions of the RWM clear button 633z, the function of the RAM clear switch is used as a separate RAM clear switch The payout control board 633 , a signal (RAM clear signal) that tells that the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch has been operated is input to the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, and is branched in the payout control board 633 Input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on the operation signal input. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch is operated when the depressing operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while depressing the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch). When performing a setting change that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a stores a predetermined area of the internal RAM (the entire RAM). Areas other than specific areas.) must be cleared. Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears the predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch is depressing, the RAM clear switch is determined. It can be used as a key, and the main control MPU 1310a is based on a signal (RAM clear signal) that tells that the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch provided on the payout control board 633 has been operated. While it can be determined that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation is performed, the RAM is cleared based on a signal (RAM clear signal) that conveys that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch provided on the payout control board 633 has been operated. When the pressing operation portion of the switch is not pressed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the enter key ON.

The pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch provided on the payout control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch, A wire penetration prevention portion is molded in the cover body for the corresponding opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter through the "gap" formed in the corresponding opening and modify the payout control board 633. structure.

In addition, the position where the RAM clear switch is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of the RWM clear button 633z. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, there are stickers printed with the names of the respective buttons at positions corresponding to the RAM clear switch and the RWM clear button 633z so as not to confuse the RAM clear switch and the RWM clear button 633z. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover.). Also, in order not to confuse the RAM clear switch and the RWM clear button 633z, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation part of either the RAM clear switch or the RWM clear button 633z (for pressing the pressing operation part) It is necessary to open the cover at the same time.), different colors of the pressing operation part may be used, and the external shape or pressing operation of the RAM clear switch and the RWM clear button 633z may be adopted. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be employed, and a switch of a different type that does not have a depressing operation portion may be employed as the RAM clear switch. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the RAM clear switch include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Switches can be mentioned. Also, when the RAM clear switch and the RWM clear button 633z are provided on the payout control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized alteration, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch and the wiring pattern to the RWM clear button 633z are routed. are formed so as not to come close to each other on the payout control board 633 (separately from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed at a distance. Also, in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z is transmitted should not be brought close to each other (mutually spaced apart). Further, when a RAM clear switch is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. (The mode of the RAM clear switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may also be included.) may be described as "the modification (12) of the enter key").

In the above-described embodiment, the RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch) is provided on the payout control board 633, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. turning the key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it from the rotational position of the key cylinder to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) to turn it off; Further, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a by rotating it 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction and turning it on. Although it was designed to be input to the main control MPU 1310a of the board 1310, instead of this, among the functions of the RWM clear button 633z, the function of the RAM clear switch is used as a separate RAM clear switch The payout control board 633 , the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 outputs the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that conveys that the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch has been operated to the port of the payout control part power-on processing described later. Create a command by monitoring in the input process, send the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that received this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch is operated when the depressing operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while depressing the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch), When performing a setting change that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a stores a predetermined area of the internal RAM (the entire RAM). Areas other than specific areas.) must be cleared. Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears the predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch is depressing, the RAM clear switch is determined. The main control MPU 1310a generates a signal (RAM Clear signal), the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is being operated, and when it receives a command to that effect, it can determine that the enter key is ON. The payout control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch has not been operated based on a signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch provided on the substrate 633 has been operated, and notifies that effect. When the command to transmit is received, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. Thus, it is possible to improve the security against whether or not the Enter key is ON (RAM clear switch mode 2 (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may also be included). ”).

In the above-described embodiment, the output port left sensor 3032 and the output port right sensor 3033 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and the setting key cylinder is rotated with the setting key switch 1311a turned on. It is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return from the position to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a), and then turned off. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees toward the direction of the main control board 1310. Although it was designed to be input to the control MPU 1310a, instead of this, the outlet left sensor 3032 and the outlet right sensor 3033 are connected to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 (via). Based on detection signals from the outlet left sensor 3032 and the outlet right sensor 3033 which are input to the control MPU 1310a and to which the main control MPU 1310a is input, it may be determined whether or not the enter key is ON. A game ball shot into the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a, as described above. A game ball collected by the out port 1008 is detected by either one of the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033, as described above. Therefore, based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 4a, the main control MPU 1310a detects when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 and the out door left sensor 3032 and the out door Based on the detection signal from either one of the right sensors 3033, when the out port 1008 collects the game ball, it can be determined that the decision key is ON. When it is not open (that is, it is closed), and/or based on the detection signals of the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033, when the out port 1008 has not collected the game ball. It can be determined that the decision key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (out port switch). mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (14)"). In this case, the person who changes the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and feed the game ball B into the out port 1008 in order to turn the enter key ON.

In the above-described embodiment, the output port left sensor 3032 and the output port right sensor 3033 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and the setting key cylinder is rotated with the setting key switch 1311a turned on. It is turned counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the position to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a), and then turned off. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a by rotating it 60 degrees toward the direction of the main control board 1310. The logic of detection signals from the outlet left sensor 3032 and the outlet right sensor 3033 is input to the control MPU 1310a, but instead of this, the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 performs payout control described later. Monitor and create a command in the port input process of the unit power-on process, send the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to the main control board 1310, and the master that received this command The main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 may determine whether or not the Enter key is ON. A game ball shot into the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a, as described above. A game ball collected by the out port 1008 is detected by either one of the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033, as described above. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a, in frame command reception processing in the main control timer interrupt processing to be described later, based on the detection signals from the outlet left sensor 3032 and the outlet right sensor 3033, the game ball is collected by the outlet 1008 When the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the game ball is not collected by the out port 1008, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the decision key is ON when it receives a command to notify that effect. When a command to that effect is received, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (out port switch). mode 2 (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (15)"). In this case, the person who changes the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and feed the game ball B into the out port 1008 in order to turn the enter key ON.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and then rotate it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 574 or the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, and is branched at the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON, or the logic of the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591. is monitored by the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, and a command is created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later. The command may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receiving this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a' may be configured to be rotatable only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the dispensing unit may The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (16)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and then rotate it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a operates the main body frame open switch 4b. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it can be determined that the enter key is ON based on the detection signal from When the state is maintained, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (main body frame open). The form of the switch (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "determination key modification (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value must close the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to open the body frame 4 again by pressing the button, remove the setting key from the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 again.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and then rotate it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a operates the door frame opening switch 4a. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, it can be judged that the enter key is ON based on the detection signal from When the state is maintained, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (door frame opening). The form of the switch (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "determination key modification (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value must open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the enter key. Then, it is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is shifted from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Rotating the key switch 1311a counterclockwise 60 degrees to return it to the rotational position ) to turn it OFF, and rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turning it on again (turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise). can be turned on, and the decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310 (the mode of the setting key switch may be described as "determination key modification (18)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is shifted from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Rotating the key switch 1311a counterclockwise 60 degrees to return it to the rotational position ) to turn it OFF, and rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turning it on again (turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise). can be turned on, and the decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder from the rotational position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to the initial position and turning off the setting key switch 1311a. By inputting the signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the Enter key is ON when the OFF signal is input, while the OFF signal is input. If not, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (setting key switch 1311a'). mode 2 (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (19)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and then rotate it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the push operation portion of the enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button. and a structure in which a wire penetration prevention part is molded in the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter from the "gap" formed in the opening and modify the main control board 1310. Become. When the pressing operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation portion of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button. When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

It should be noted that the position where the enter key button is arranged on the main control board 1310 may be in the vicinity of the other buttons in the case where other buttons are arranged on the main control board 1310 in addition to the enter key button. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, stickers with the name of each button printed are affixed to positions corresponding to the enter key button and other buttons so that the enter key button and other buttons are not confused. (Instead of this seal, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and other buttons, a button with a cover that covers the depressing operation part of either the enter key button or the other button (a cover for depressing the depressing operation part) ) may be adopted, the color of the pressing operation part may be different, the outer shape of the enter key button and other buttons, or the shape of the pressing operation part A different type of switch may be employed, or another type of switch that does not have a depressing operation section may be employed as the decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the enter key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Switches can be mentioned. In addition, when providing the enter key button and other buttons on the main control board 1310, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for the enter key button and the wiring pattern for the other buttons are mainly routed. They are formed on the control board 1310 so as not to come close to each other (spaced apart from each other). Further, when the enter key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. (Mode 2 of the enter key button (may include the mode of the enter key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variation (20) of enter key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the RWM clear button input to the main control MPU 1310a 633z (the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch). good. As will be described later, the RWM clear button 633z is activated when the depressing operation unit is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while depressing the depressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z). ), when performing a setting change that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later), the main control MPU 1310a stores a predetermined area of its own built-in RAM (RAM excluding specific areas) must be cleared. Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears the predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed, the RWM clear button 633z can be diverted as a determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a is based on a signal (RAM clear signal) notifying that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated. On the other hand, it is possible to determine that the decision key is ON when the RWM clear button 633z is pressed based on a signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated. When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the enter key ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (RAM clear switch). mode 3 (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (21)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 2003 normal winning opening sensor 2401, various sensors of various winning openings (for example, second starting opening sensor 2402, big winning opening sensor 2403, first receiving opening sensor 2406, general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002) , the main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signals from the outlet left sensor 3032 and the outlet right sensor 3033 of the outlet 1008 are input, may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (various sensors, etc.). mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (22)"). In this case, the person who changes the set value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the decision key, sends the game ball B into the normal prize winning opening 2003, or performs various operations. It is necessary to send the game ball B to the winning opening or send the game ball B to the out opening 1008 .

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and then rotate it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Control the operation of the movable body (accessory) by controlling the drive of the electrical drive source such as the solenoid, and operate the movable body (accessory) based on the detection signal from the optical sensor (photo sensor, distance measuring sensor, etc.) When determining the original position, the operating position, etc., the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on the detection signal from this optical sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (optical function). The aspect of the object sensor (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (23)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value must open the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 so that the optical sensor detects the original position of the movable body (accessory) in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to move the movable body (accessory) so as to detect the operating position, etc.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and then rotate it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a is detected. The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 is inputted may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010. FIG. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the magnetic sensor is The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (24)"). In this case, the person who changes the set value needs to bring the magnet close to the front of the game board 5 from the front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the enter key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and then rotate it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or hit. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated to change the path of the game ball flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5, and the ball enters the various winning openings and gates provided on the game board 5. When the game board 5 is provided with a vibration sensor that detects cheating, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether there is cheating based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor, and determines based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. It may be determined whether or not the key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the vibration sensor may The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (25)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the enter key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and then rotate it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, radio waves are emitted to the pachinko machine 1 to play the game. A game board 5 or a payout device 580 is provided with a radio wave sensor for detecting a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining a game ball B by causing malfunction of various sensors of various winning ports provided on the board 5 and various sensors provided on the payout device 580.例文帳に追加In this case, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may determine the presence or absence of the enter key ON based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the radio wave sensor The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (26)"). In this case, it is necessary for the person who changes the setting value to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the decision key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and then rotate it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detection signal from the press detection sensor 381 that detects the pressing operation, and a detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that detect the rotation direction of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation button unit 360. The signals are input to the peripheral control board 1510, branched at the peripheral control board 1510, and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the enter key is ON. good too. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (effect operation button The form of the unit (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (27)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 composed of the cover body and the base body. It may be housed in a body setting change board box and placed around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320 . In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are crimped by a one-way screw or the like of the crimping portion. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism, and has a plurality of them. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping part using a single sealing mechanism. It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. That is, unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed, the cover cannot be removed from the base. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the press operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding thereto. It is possible to modify the setting change board 1311 by inserting a wire or the like from the "gap" formed between the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the opening corresponding to the press operation portion of the enter key button. In order to prevent this, a structure is adopted in which a wire penetration preventing portion is molded in the cover body with respect to the opening. In addition, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, the configuration of the setting change board box is such that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body. A setting change board cover open/close switch capable of detecting opening of the cover may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover opening/closing switch may be directly input to the main control board 1310, or (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. may be configured to be The condition that the cover body is released from the base body based on the detection signal from the setting change board cover open/close switch can be included in the above-described predetermined set value change permission conditions (setting change board box This aspect may be described as “determination key modification (28)”).

In the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are connected to each other. A wiring pattern for transmitting a key ON signal, a wiring pattern for transmitting a determination key ON signal for the setting key switch 1311a, and a wiring pattern for transmitting an OFF signal for the setting key switch 1311a are routed: They are formed so as not to come close to each other on the setting change board 1311 (separately from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also spaced apart. Also in the main control board 1310, a wiring pattern for transmitting various signals from the setting key switch 1311a (that is, a wiring pattern for transmitting a setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, determination of the setting key switch 1311a). The wiring pattern for transmitting the key ON signal and the wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a) and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633. Although they were formed so as not to come close to each other (at a distance from each other), the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a and the determination key ON signal for the setting key switch 1311a are transmitted. One of the wiring patterns is connected to the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 via another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately from the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310. The other connector provided on the main control board 1310 may be connected (inter-board connection) to the body, or the other connector provided on the setting change board 1311 and the other connector provided on the main control board 1310 may be connected. , may be electrically connected via a harness (the manner in which the wiring pattern is routed may be described as a “determination key modification (29)”).

In addition, it is also possible to employ a mode in which one of the above-described modification examples (1) to (29) of the decision key is appropriately selected and combined (the mode of selection and combination of the modification examples is referred to as "Modification example (30) of the decision key"). ”).

In addition, in the above-mentioned setting value, in addition to the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or not, and the probability for lottery determination whether it is a small hit, for lottery determination when shifting from probability variable time to normal time It is possible to change the probability of , the rate of distribution to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player possible) probability (degree of advantage) is set in advance. In the present embodiment, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are prepared in advance as set values. A probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player is set in advance. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a plurality of set values ranging from set value 1 to set value 6, other pachinko machines have a probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player. Some have a single preset value. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, which has a game specification in which the probability of being advantageous to the player (the degree of advantage) exists as a plurality of set values in advance and requires setting changes, is advantageous to the player. There are game specifications in which only a single set value of the probability (advantage degree) exists in advance and no setting change is required. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed according to such game specifications and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 depends on the game specifications, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 have similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, it is desired that the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be used in common without depending on the game specifications, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification in which there is only a single set value in advance for the probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player and there is no need to change the setting, the probability (advantage degree) that the set value is advantageous to the player Since there is no need to use it as a can be done.

For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of its built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area out of all areas of the RAM), it is possible to set a plurality of actual machine confirmation operation patterns (after clearing the RAM It can be used as a setting value that allows variation in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1). In this case, the set value 1 is set to "all operations (movable bodies (role Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that specifies "movement of object (object), lighting of light emitter)" is assigned, and real machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies "movable object (character object) operation" is assigned as setting value 2, and set Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "illumination of light emitting body" is assigned as value 3, and detailed operation of movable body (character object) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operation area, other An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "interference check with structures and other movable bodies (accessories), operation order with other movable bodies (accessories)" is assigned, and the setting value 5 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 that specifies "lighting of light emitters per port (lighting of light emitters by predetermined output port units (that is, each output port) of the main control MPU 1310a)" is assigned, and set value 6 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 specifying "no operation" is assigned (the aspect of change setting of actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing may be described as "modification (1) by common hardware configuration"). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a performs the operation of the movable body (accessory) and the lighting of the light emitter such as the lamp and the LED by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later after the RAM is cleared. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command (described as a setting change completion command in FIG. 145) from the main control MPU 1310a, controls the peripherals according to the setting value included in the setting change command (actual machine confirmation operation pattern). The board 1510 can operate a movable body (accessory) to be controlled and light a light-emitting body. By changing and setting the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, it is possible to provide variations to the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM.

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of times from the end of the pattern fluctuation until the demonstration (demonstration effect performed while waiting for the player). In this case, time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" is assigned as setting value 1, time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" is assigned as setting value 2, and "20 seconds" is assigned as setting value 3. is assigned, time setting pattern 4 is assigned to specify "25 seconds" as setting value 4, time setting pattern 5 is assigned to specify "30 seconds" as setting value 5, A time setting pattern 6 that specifies "35 seconds" is assigned as the set value 6 (the mode of change setting of the time when the player waits after the completion of the symbol variation is set as "Modified example by common hardware configuration (2 )”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing and setting the time from the end of the symbol variation to the player waiting state, it is possible to provide variation in the time from the end of the symbol variation to the demonstration.

In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of contents of a demonstration (demonstration performed while the player is waiting) to be performed after the pattern variation is completed. In this case, a demonstration effect setting pattern 1 that designates "comical effect" is assigned as setting value 1, and a demonstration effect setting pattern that designates "comical effect, movement effect of movable body (character object)" as setting value 2. 2 is assigned, a demonstration effect setting pattern 3 that designates "serious effect" is assigned as the set value 3, and a demonstration effect setting pattern that designates "serial effect, movement effect of the movable body (role object)" is assigned as the set value 4. 4 is assigned, a demonstration effect setting pattern 5 specifying "historical drama effect" is assigned as setting value 5, and a demonstration effect setting designating "historical drama effect, movable body (role object)" is assigned as setting value 6. Pattern 6 is assigned (the aspect of changing and setting the content of the demonstration effect may be described as "modification (3) based on common hardware configuration"). In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can demonstrate with a demonstration effect (demonstration effect setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner of changing and setting the details of the demonstration effect, variations can be given to the details of the demonstration effect performed after the variation of the symbols is finished.

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value for setting a plurality of default sound volumes to be adjusted by the sound volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 . By rotating the volume control switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2, and "volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3. is assigned a volume setting pattern 3 that designates ", a volume setting pattern 4 that designates "volume 4" is allocated as a setting value 4, a volume setting pattern 5 that designates "volume 5" is allocated as a setting value 5, A volume setting pattern 6 that designates "volume 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the change setting mode of the default volume may be described as "modification (4) based on common hardware configuration"). It should be noted that the volume is set to increase from setting value 1 to setting value 6. FIG. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, sets the default sound volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "volume 1" assigned to setting value 1 is moved to the direction of decreasing the volume of the volume control switch (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of increasing the volume), and the movement to the end of the minimum volume is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the minimum side volume, the sound may be muted, or the volume may be such that the sound can be recognized when the player stops in front of the pachinko machine. In addition, the default volume of "volume 6" assigned to set value 6 is moved in the direction of increasing the volume of the volume control switch (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of decreasing the volume), and the movement to the end on the maximum volume side is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the maximum side volume, the volume may be set to the maximum volume, or the volume may be set to a predetermined percentage (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. This mode of changing and setting the default sound volume allows variation in the default sound volume adjusted by the sound volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 .

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value for setting a plurality of sound volumes of error notification sounds for error notification such as various troubles, gotos, and errors. Various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, not dependent), and the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound by setting the maximum volume is used in the game hall. Although it is easy for a staff member such as a store clerk to notice this, it may be offensive to players who are playing games on other pachinko machines. Therefore, there is also a demand for a device capable of adjusting the volume of various error notification sounds. In this case, error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, and error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2. , error notification volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3, error notification volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as setting value 4, and setting value 5 is assigned as " An error notification volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification volume 5" is assigned, and an error notification volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as a setting value 6 (error notification sound volume is sometimes referred to as "modified example (5) based on common hardware configuration"). In addition, setting value 1 (the volume that does not mute the sound, and the volume that allows you to recognize the error notification sound when you stop in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) to setting value 6 (the maximum volume, The volume of the error notification sound is set so that the volume of the error notification sound increases toward a volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if the player is several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, performs control to issue an error notification sound at the error notification sound volume (error notification volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner of changing and setting the volume of the error notification sound, it is possible to provide variation in the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification.

In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value for setting a plurality of default luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs. It is possible to increase or decrease the brightness from the default brightness for the light emitters to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, the default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies "brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and the setting value 3 is " A default brightness setting pattern 3 specifying "brightness 3" is assigned, a default brightness setting pattern 4 specifying "brightness 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and a default brightness setting pattern specifying "brightness 5" is assigned as the setting value 5. 5 is assigned, and a default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies "brightness 6" as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of change setting of default brightness is sometimes described as "modification (6) by common hardware configuration"). be). Note that the main control MPU 1310a changes the default brightness by repeatedly performing main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to adjust the brightness of the light emitters and perform lighting, blinking, gradation points, and the like of the light emitters. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, is subject to control by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitters, lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitters can be performed. Variations can be given to the default brightness of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs by changing and setting the content of the default brightness.

In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs for reporting errors such as various defects, gotos, and errors. An error notification luminance setting pattern 1 that designates "error notification luminance 1" as the setting value 1 is assigned to the lamp to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, and "error notification luminance 2" is assigned as the setting value 2. An error notification brightness setting pattern 2 is assigned to be specified, an error notification brightness setting pattern 3 specifying "error notification brightness 3" is assigned as a setting value 3, and an error notification specifying "error notification brightness 4" is assigned as a setting value 4. A luminance setting pattern 4 is assigned, an error notification luminance setting pattern 5 specifying "error notification luminance 5" is assigned as the setting value 5, and an error notification specifying "error notification luminance 6 (maximum luminance)" is assigned as the setting value 6. A luminance setting pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of changing and setting the luminance of the light emitter in the error notification may be described as "modification (7) by common hardware configuration"). In addition, from setting value 1 (the brightness of the lamp is low, so that an error notification can be recognized when stopping in front of the pachinko machine even though it does not turn off), the lamp brightness is increased from setting value 6 (maximum brightness). Brightness is set to high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitters by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to change the brightness of the light emitters in the error notification, and control the lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitters. conduct. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, is the object to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification luminance (error notification luminance setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitters, the light emitters can be turned on, blinked, gradation points, and the like. By changing and setting the luminance of the light emitters in this error notification, it is possible to provide variations in the luminance of the light emitters such as lamps and LEDs in the error notification.

Further, the various setting values assigned to the modifications (1) to (7) based on the above-described common hardware configuration are determined when the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established in the setting value confirmation display processing (to be described later) performed by the main control MPU 1310a. However, it may be displayed on the setting display 1310g all the time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on until the power is turned off (set value display (8) may be referred to as "modification (8) by common hardware configuration").

Further, any one of the modifications (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration described above may be appropriately selected and adopted as the modification (30) of the determination key described above.

In addition, the predetermined setting value change permission condition described above is applied to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily). Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary that the setting key had been turned ON. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a clears all of the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-on processing described later. The area is cleared except for the specific area, and then the game is advanced by performing interrupt permission setting and the like. Further, when the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition is established at the time of power recovery of the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs setting change processing in the main control side power-on processing to be described later, and stores the main control built-in RAM. The game proceeds by clearing the entire area except for the specific area, and then performing interrupt permission setting and the like. In other words, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is restored. In either case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then performs interrupt permission setting and the like. The game will proceed with . Therefore, as the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure), the outer frame 2 Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. In addition to the ON operation of the setting key, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 may be pressed (“Modified example of predetermined setting value change permission condition” sometimes referred to as).

In addition, the predetermined setting value display permission condition described above is applied to the outer frame 2 after the power is restored after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily). Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary that the setting key had been turned ON. When this predetermined setting value display permission condition is met, the main control MPU 1310a sets and displays the current set value in the setting value confirmation display processing performed as one processing of the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later. displayed on vessel 1310g. In addition, as described above, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 needs to be pressed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the period during which the pressing operation is performed is limited. rice field. Therefore, as the above-described predetermined setting value display permission condition, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure), the outer frame 2 Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. In addition to the ON operation of the setting key, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 may not be pressed ("Modified example of predetermined setting value display permission condition ”). In this case, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the setting value confirmation display processing as one processing of the main control side timer interrupt processing described later when the predetermined modification of the set value display permission condition is satisfied, and In the processing at the time of entry, the game proceeds by performing the initial setting and start-up setting of the built-in WDT, and then performing the interrupt permission setting and the like. When the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established and the setting value confirmation display processing is performed, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the interrupt permission setting yet, so the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. A detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is released. The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by rotating clockwise 60 degrees from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) to perform the first ON operation. , and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a are read and stored as input information to be described later in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. For this reason, the main control MPU 1310a controls the main body frame opening for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 when the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established and the setting value confirmation display processing is performed. The detection signal from the switch 4b and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a are read.

By adopting both the above-described modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the modification of the above-described predetermined setting value display permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or a power failure (momentary power failure) When the power is restored after the momentary power failure that occurs), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. Assuming that the setting key is turned ON by rotating the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and performing the first ON operation, the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is turned on. When the pressing operation is being performed, the main control MPU 1310a performs setting change processing in main control side power-on processing to be described later, clears the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then sets interrupt permission. While the game progresses by performing such as, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs Set value confirmation display processing is performed, and then the game proceeds by performing interrupt permission setting and the like. By adopting this mode, the main control MPU 1310a never performs the set value confirmation display process once the progress of the game is started. In other words, the main control MPU 1310a never displays the set current setting value on the setting display 1310g when the progress of the game is started by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like. The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 in the ball count process of the main control side power-on processing described later. In the port output process of the main control side power-on process to be described later, the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 is output to the base monitor 1310h and displayed on the base monitor 1310h. Therefore, the current set value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the base monitor 1310h described above (this may be described as a "modification of how to use the base monitor"). . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a uses the base monitor 1310h to display the current set value that is set during the period from when the power is restored until when the progress of the game is started by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like. In addition, when the progress of the game is started by performing interrupt permission setting etc. after the power is restored, the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 can be displayed, so the setting display 1310g It is no longer necessary to provide it, and can contribute to cost reduction.

Any one of the above-described modification of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the modification of the method of using the base monitor may be selected as appropriate. It may be selected and employed in the modified example (30) of the enter key described above.

Any one of the above-described modification of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the modification of the method of using the base monitor may be selected as appropriate. It may be selected and employed in modifications (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration described above.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 107, 110 and 111. FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 displays a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status, and the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the ordinary prize winning opening 2003. A normal symbol display consisting of two LEDs and a normal reservation display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to acceptance of the game ball B into the normal prize winning opening 2003 are provided.

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. A first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and a second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special pattern indicator consisting of eight LEDs to be displayed, and a second special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the reception of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. ing.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 has five LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the big prize opening 2005 when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is "win". It has a display.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc. can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

Here, as a countermeasure against noise when the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected, A plurality of wirings (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “wirings”) for transmitting control signals from the control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400 will be described in detail.

The wiring FCBL electrically connected via the connector 1400a provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 extends from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear side of the back box 3010, as shown in FIGS. When pulled up to the upper side, it is bent downward on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is grouped by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the vertical direction to form a game panel. Along the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 that is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of 1100 or that is attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 as it is pulled downwards.

When the wiring FCBL is routed to the lower side of main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the left side of main control board box 1320 and extends along the lower side of main control board box 1320 to the function display unit connector MFCN. , and then electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

As described above, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 has a longer wiring length, and in particular, from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and then to the back box. The wiring FCBL routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward on the rear surface of the back box 3010 by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the vertical direction. The rear surface of the board holders 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 is routed along the right side of the main control board box 1320 to the lower side of the main control board box 1320 . In the state where the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the area where the wiring FCBL is routed in this way is in front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 shown in FIG. will be placed in

A decoration board 1131 on which a plurality of decoration LEDs are mounted is arranged behind the function display unit 1400 . The wiring UPCBL, which is a connection cable that is electrically connected via a connector 1131a provided on the back side of the decoration board 1131, is bent upward on the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and at the upper side of the front surface of the back box 3010. When it is bent toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 and pulled around to the upper side of the back surface of the back box 3010 in a state (or in contact) with the wiring FCBL described above, it extends downward from the rear surface of the back box 3010. , and bundled by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 vertically formed along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 , and routed to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500 . be. Then, the wiring UPCBL separates from the path of the wiring FCBL described above, and is bent toward the left side at the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500 to extend along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. After being routed and routed above a predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700, it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector.

In this way, the wiring UPCBL that electrically connects the decoration board 1131 arranged behind the function display unit 1400 and the panel drive board 1720 has a longer wiring length, and especially from the upper right corner of the game board 5 The wiring FCBL, which is routed to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the rear box 3010, is bent downward on the rear surface of the rear box 3010 and extends vertically along the right side of the rear surface of the rear box 3010. A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 are formed, respectively, and are routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 . The area where the wiring UPCBL is routed in this manner is attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. It will be arranged in front of the payout unit 560 that is set.

As described above, the payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guide passage that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a single guide passage of the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out guided game balls B one by one based on an instruction from a payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides downward the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580, A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side is provided.

In addition, as described above, the game ball B is ground in the island equipment of the game hall, or rubs against each other in circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, and is charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby generating electromagnetic noise. emits For this reason, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 that can retain the game balls B are attached.

In addition, the main control board 1310, which will be described in detail later, includes a main control MPU 1310a, etc., which is a microprocessor containing a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. I have. This main control MPU 1310a has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "built-in reset circuit"). The forced reset by the circuit is a mechanism that cannot be controlled and disabled by the user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset is applied without executing the main control side power-off processing described later, and the main control side power-on processing described later is executed again. It will be done. In this case, since the main control side power failure processing is not executed, the checksum (sum value) error of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a always occurs, so the contents of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is completely erased (cleared). That is, when forced reset is performed by the built-in reset circuit, RAM clear is executed when the main control MPU 1310a is activated again.

In addition, in this embodiment, a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type is adopted as the package of the main control MPU 1310a. It protrudes from the soldering surface (the surface opposite to the mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 . In other words, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a project toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. FIG.

In this way, since static electricity tends to accumulate in the area where the sphere tank 552 and the payout unit 560 are attached and the surrounding area, when electromagnetic noise is emitted due to electrostatic discharge, the function display is arranged in front of the payout unit 560. It may enter the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the unit 1400 and the main control board 1310, and it may electrically connect the upper left panel decoration board 1131 arranged behind the function display unit 1400 and the peripheral control board 1510. may intrude into the wiring UPCBL that As a result, the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL may pop out and enter the wiring UPCBL, and conversely, the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL may pop out and enter the wiring FCBL.

For example, if the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is assumed to pass through the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, From a predetermined position on the right side of the control board box 1320 to the left side of the main control board box 1320 (for example, on the right side of the main control board box 1320, approximately from the top side of the main control board box 1320) bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 so as to be parallel to the top or bottom side of the main control board box 1320 at the point where it has a quarter length), and from the center of the bottom side of the main control board 1310 to the left side When it passes over the function display unit connector MFCN arranged closer to the side, it is bent toward the lower side of the main control board box 1320, pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320, and then the function display unit connector MFCN. When the wiring FCBL is electrically connected to the wiring FCBL, if electromagnetic wave noise enters the wiring FCBL, the wiring FCBL is routed in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320. Then, when passing through the area in front of the main control board 1310 (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a, the electromagnetic wave noise is mainly transmitted through the wiring FCBL. Intruding into various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the control board box 1320, there is a risk that the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly reset by its own built-in reset circuit under the influence of this intruding electromagnetic wave noise.

Note that if a wiring receiving groove is formed in the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 instead of the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320, the wiring FCBL , not in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, but along the wiring accommodation groove, and after being pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320, the function display It is electrically connected to the unit connector MFCN. Also in this case, if electromagnetic wave noise enters this wiring FCBL, as described above, if the wiring FCBL is housed along the wiring housing groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and routed, the main control MPU 1310a When passing through the area in front of the main control board 1310 (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position of , electromagnetic wave noise is transmitted to the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via the wiring FCBL. There is a risk that the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly reset by its built-in reset circuit under the influence of electromagnetic wave noise that has penetrated into various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward it.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is placed on the main control board as the positional relationship between the mounting position of the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected and the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310, while the main control MPU 1310a is arranged from the center to the left side of the lower side of the main control board 1310. That is, in this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged below the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, whereas the function display unit connector MFCN is arranged below this center line. By arranging the main control MPU 1310a above the line, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other on the main control board 1310. FIG.

As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be arranged away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected. Various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 can be prevented from entering through the space separating the main control board 1310 from the MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

Further, by arranging the main control MPU 1310a away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters the wiring FCBL, the main control MPU 1310a is not affected. , on the main control board 1310, or in the space separating the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310, the electromagnetic wave noise entering through the wiring FCBL can be attenuated. ing. In this respect as well, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged such that the right side of the package is separated from the right side of the main control board 1310 by at least a predetermined distance dimension (hereinafter referred to as "first wiring separation distance dimension"). ing. This is because the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is routed downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320, so that the electromagnetic waves entering the wiring FCBL This is to prevent noise from entering various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from the wiring FCBL through the space having the first wiring spacing dimension.

The wiring FCBL electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is located in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, as described above. (or accommodated along the wiring accommodation groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200), the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 is attached to the right side of the main control substrate box 1320. When it is routed downward along the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and after being routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to below the function display unit connector MFCN. , and the function display unit connector MFCN, the wiring FCBL is routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 and protrudes toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. It is possible to ensure a large distance dimension (hereinafter referred to as "second wiring distance dimension") to various pins of the main control MPU 1310a. This second wire spacing dimension has a larger distance dimension than the first wire spacing dimension. As a result, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL enters various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from the wiring FCBL via the space having the second wiring separation distance dimension. can be prevented. In this respect as well, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

In this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are directly electrically connected by the wiring FCBL. It can also be configured to be directly connected. In this case, it is preferable to provide the panel relay board 1710 with an element capable of reducing or removing the electromagnetic wave noise entering the wiring FCBL (that is, a plurality of elements for transmitting control signals from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400). elements capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic wave noise are preferably provided for each of the wirings FCBL). As a result, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

Such elements may include resistors, filter circuits, and the like. From observation results of electromagnetic noise waveforms, it is known that the waveform width of electromagnetic noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs). Designed to pass through.

In addition to resistors, filter circuits, etc., such elements can also include EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.). When capacitors are used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wirings FCBL. Further, when a steeper attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted in each of the plurality of wirings FCBL, or a bead and a capacitor may be used. may be inserted respectively.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110, 114 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 137) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520; The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control part 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. FIG. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at substantially the center thereof. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 . The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding leftward from the left side surface and one right fixing piece 1602 protruding rightward from the right side surface. This performance display device 1600 has two fixed grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely behind 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward to insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding upward at the .

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 119 to 124 and the like. FIG. 119(a) is a front perspective view of the front unit on the game board, and FIG. 119(b) is a back perspective view of the front unit on the game board. FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow path of the game balls on the right side of the front unit. FIG. 121(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls circulating through the first guide passage in the guide passage group, and FIG. 121(b) is an illustration showing the flow of game balls circulating through the second guide passage in the guide passage group. It is a diagram. FIG. 122(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls received in the accessory winning opening, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the portion of the third sorting device in (a) from above, ( c) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the second sorting device in (a).

Also, FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation timings of the accessory winning opening, the first sorting device, and the second sorting device according to the type of "small win". FIG. 124(a) is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the attacker unit, and is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in (a). The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the rear end partially projects into the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100. there is

The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of (here, three) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first starting port 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a first start opening 2002 which is attached to a further different position in the game area 5a and is always open to accept the game ball B a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004 and a first starting opening 2002 in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B in the normal winning opening 2003. Alternatively, a large winning opening 2005 and a first starting opening that can accept the gaming ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second starting opening 2004 2002 or second start opening 2004 to receive the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B, an accessory winning opening 2006; A first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008 are provided for giving the chance of receiving the game ball B received in the winning opening 2006.例文帳に追加

A plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged below the center in the vertical direction in the game area 5a and on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowest end at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The normal prize winning opening 2003 is arranged near the right end of the game area 5a and below the center in the vertical direction. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged at the lower left of the normal winning opening 2003 . The big winning opening 2005 is arranged at a height slightly lower than the first starting opening 2002 between the second starting opening 2004 and the first starting opening 2002 . The prize winning slot 2006 is arranged above the normal winning slot 2003 . The first V winning opening 2007 is arranged at a height between the accessory winning opening 2006 and the normal winning opening 2003 . The second V winning opening 2008 is arranged right above the first starting opening 2002 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a.

The table unit 2000 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start opening 2002. On the other hand, a side unit 2200 which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 and has three general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit 2300 which is mounted slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. , An attacker unit 2400 which is attached to the right of the starter unit 2100 in front view, which is the lower right corner in front view in the game area 5a, and has a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. , above the starter unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and slightly above the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having 2008 .

[5-8a. starting unit]
The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starter opening unit 2100 has a first starter opening 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, so that the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 is opened. located just below the center of Therefore, when the game ball B is released downward from the central release portion 2503a of the stage 2503, it is received in the first starting port 2002 with a very high probability.

The starting port unit 2100 guides the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100 in a state attached to the game panel 1100, and guides the ball B to the rear of the light guide plate production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. It can be handed over to the discharge unit 3120 .

[5-8b. side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is provided with three general prize winning openings 2001 which are open to receive game balls B at all times. The three general prize winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002 . The two general prize winning openings 2001 on the right side are open upward, and the general prize winning opening 2001 on the left side is open toward the upper left.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, the three general winning openings 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁This side unit 2200 guides the game ball received in the general winning hole 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and can deliver it to the back lower ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 .

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes down to the right.

When the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, the shelf 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 to the right side below the center role 2500 by the shelf part 2301 .

[5-8d. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the starter unit 2100, which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100 from the front. This attacker unit 2400 has a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 120, etc.).

Attacker unit 2400 has a triangular outer shape in a front view in which the height from the lower side increases toward the right. In this attacker unit 2400, the normal prize winning opening 2003 is always open upward at the upper right corner. The second starting port 2004 is provided at the lower left with an interval larger than one game ball B from the normal winning port 2003, and is always open forward. The big winning opening 2005 is provided in the vicinity of the lower left lower end of the second starting opening 2004, and can be opened and closed forward.

The attacker unit 2400 has a normal winning opening 2003 which is slightly larger than the game ball B. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a second start opening 2004 that is slightly larger than the game ball, and a large winning opening 2005 that has a width of about 3 to 6 times the outer diameter of the game ball in the horizontal direction. It is open with

The attacker unit 2400 includes a normal winning opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004, and a large opening opening. It is provided with a big winning hole sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the winning hole 2005 and a magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting illegal magnetism (see FIG. 137, etc.).

The attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting door 2411 capable of guiding the game ball B to the second starting hole 2004, and a normal lottery that draws the second starting door 2411 by accepting the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003. A starting opening solenoid 2412 to be opened and closed according to the result, a large winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005, and the large winning opening door 2413 to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 of the game ball B An attacker solenoid 2414 is provided which is opened and closed according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by acceptance.

The attacker unit 2400, as shown in FIGS. 120, 121, and 124, is provided above the second starting opening 2004 at the lower left of the normal winning opening 2003, and is inclined downward to the left. a second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421, a second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 provided on the left side of the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 and extending vertically, and a second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421. It is provided on the right side of the big prize opening 2005 below the second starting opening right standing wall portion 2423 extending downward from the right end, the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422, and a large winning opening guide shelf 2424 which is inclined so as to become lower toward the left.

The second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 extends from a portion on the right side of the right end of the second starting opening 2004, beyond the left end of the second starting opening 2004, to the center between the second starting opening 2004 and the big winning opening 2005 in the horizontal direction. It extends to the left to the vicinity. This second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 prevents the receiving of the game ball B from above to the second starting opening 2004 .

The second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 is provided to the left from the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 with an interval through which one game ball B can pass. The second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 vertically extends from a position higher than the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 to a position lower than the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 and higher than the lower end of the second starting opening 2004. ing. The upper end of the second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 is bent rightward.

The second starting opening right standing wall portion 2423 vertically extends downward from the right end of the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the second starting opening 2004 . This second start opening right standing wall portion 2423 prevents the reception of the game ball B from the right side to the second start opening 2004 .

The big winning opening guide shelf 2424 is at a height slightly lower than the lower end of the second starting opening 2004, from the left side of the left end of the second starting opening 2004, from the lower end of the second starting opening 2004 One game ball B It extends in the left-right direction so that the left end side is lowered to the left side of the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 and substantially the same as the right end of the big winning opening 2005. As shown in the figure, the right end side of the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 is curved so as to rise upward, and the angle of inclination becomes steeper toward the right.

In addition, the attacker unit 2400 is open to the left on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and is an attacker that guides the game ball B to a position below the large winning opening guiding shelf 2424 and lower than the large winning opening 2005. A right passageway 2430 is provided.

The attacker's right passage 2430 is located between the first opening 2431 that is vertically long and opens toward the left above the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421. A second opening 2432 that opens upward to the left, a third opening 2433 that opens upward on the lower side of the second starting opening 2004, and a large A fourth opening 2434 that is vertically long and opens leftward on the right side of the winning opening 2005, and a discharge opening that communicates with the lower end of the fourth opening 2434 and opens leftward. 2435 and . The attacker's right passage 2430 allows the game ball B to enter the inside from the first opening 2431, the second opening 2432, the third opening 2433, and the fourth opening 2434, and the discharge opening 2435. The game ball B can be released to the outside only from the outside.

The attacker's right passage 2430 is formed in the shape of a plurality of steps with the left side descending. More specifically, the attacker's right passage 2430 extends downward from a portion on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 above the normal winning opening 2003, and moves leftward at a portion lower in height than the normal winning opening 2003. It bends around to the lower side of the normal winning prize opening 2003, and under the normal winning prize opening 2003, after bending downward with the second starting opening right standing wall portion 2423 as a part of the left wall, the large winning opening guide shelf 2424 It bends to the left again at a portion lower than , and bends downward to the lower end of the attacker unit 2400 at the lower side of the portion on the right side of the center of the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 .

The attacker's right passage 2430 is provided with a plurality of projections 2436 projecting into the passage and extending in the left and right direction at intervals in the vertical direction on the inner walls on the front and rear sides of the vertically extending portion. The plurality of protrusions 2436 are provided so that the heights on the front side and the rear side are alternated. When the game ball B comes into contact with these protrusions 2436, the game ball B can be guided downward in a zigzag shape while suppressing an increase in the downward velocity of the game ball B.

The attacker's right passage 2430 is located on the right side of the big prize opening 2005 and is elongated vertically and is provided at a portion where the fourth opening 2434 opens. It has a protrusion 2437 protruding further into the passage (see FIG. 124, etc.). Due to the presence of this protrusion 2437, it is possible to prevent the game ball B in the attacker's right passage 2430 from being discharged to the outside (leftward) from the fourth opening 2434, and to pass through the fourth opening 2434. The game ball B can enter into the attacker's right passage 2430 from the outside. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the attacker's right path 2430 is released from the attacker unit 2400 into the game area 5a without a chance to be received by the normal winning opening 2003, the second start opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005.例文帳に追加

In addition, since the attacker's right passage 2430 has a fourth opening 2434 that is vertically elongated in a portion that passes through the right side of the big winning opening 2005, a game ball released leftward from the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 A game ball B that touches a plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the large winning opening 2005 and flows to the upper side of the large winning opening 2005 to the right of the large winning opening 2005 is placed in the fourth position. It can be received by opening 2434 and allowed to enter attacker right passage 2430 . As described above, the game ball B that has entered the attacker's right passage 2430 is released outside only from the ejection port 2435 at the lower end. Due to the presence of the attacker's right path 2430, the game ball B that has been played will not rebound to the big winning opening 2005 side.

Therefore, when the big winning hole 2005 is in the open state, if the game ball B released from the big winning hole guide shelf 2424 is guided to the right side of the big winning hole 2005 by the obstacle nail N, it enters the attacker's right path 2430. It is not possible to enter and be accepted in the grand prize opening 2005 . For this reason, even if the passage of the game ball B (here, the attacker right passage 2430) is provided adjacent to the large winning prize port 2005, the wall of the passage (fourth opening 2434) is on the large winning prize port 2005 side. A path for the game ball B can be provided adjacent to the large winning opening 2005 while suppressing excessive acceptance of the game ball B into the large winning opening 2005 without rebounding to the large winning opening 2005.例文帳に追加, the pachinko machine 1 having a passage that has never been seen in the past pachinko machines.

The second starter door 2411 has a plate shape extending left and right from the lower side of the second starter door 2004 to the vicinity of the second starter left standing wall portion 2422 , and is moved back and forth by the starter solenoid 2412 . The second starting opening door 2411 is inclined so as to be lowered from the left end side toward the second starting opening 2004 on the right side, and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear at the part of the second starting opening 2004. is doing. The second starting door 2411 is retracted in a normal state (closed state). Therefore, the game ball B that has entered between the second start opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second start opening left standing wall portion 2422 falls onto the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 without coming into contact with the second start opening door 2411. Therefore, it will not enter (accept) the second starting port 2004 .

On the other hand, in the normal winning state (open state), the second starting opening door 2411 is moving forward, so the game ball B that has entered between the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 comes into contact with the second starting opening door 2411 and is guided toward the second starting opening 2004 by the second starting opening door 2411 to enter (receive) the second starting opening 2004 . In this way, the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed by advancing and retracting the second starting port door 2411 . The second starter door 2411 closes the second starter port 2004 when the starter solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the second starter port 2004 when the starter solenoid is ON (when energized). Let

The big prize winning opening door 2413 has a rectangular shape elongated in the left and right direction, and is attached so as to be rotatable around an axis in the left and right direction with one long side serving as an axis. The large winning opening door 2413 can close the large winning opening 2005, which is open to the front, by setting the short side upright by the attacker solenoid 2414, while the other long side faces forward. By rotating so as to move, the big winning opening 2005 can be opened and the game ball B can be received. The big winning opening door 2413 closes the big winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the big winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when energized).

In the attacker unit 2400, after the game ball B received in the normal winning hole 2003 is detected by the normal winning hole sensor 2401 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, it is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 below. Also, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 below after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2402 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 . Further, the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 below after being detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 .

This attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the normal prize winning opening 2003 is positioned below the two exits of the guide passage group 2520 on the upper right side of the center role 2500, which will be described later. 2503, the second starting opening 2004 is located at the lower left of the normal winning opening 2003 and at a height between the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500, and the big winning opening 2005. is located below the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 . In addition, when attached to the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the upper parts of the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004 (second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421), and the large winning opening 2005. is set.

[5-8e. Center role]
The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100. FIG. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the production display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 and various production units provided in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. can.

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over its entire circumference except for the lower side, so that the game ball B hit into the game area 5a cannot enter the frame. It has become.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2501 which is open to allow the game ball B in the game area 5a to enter, and a frame which can release the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view. A warp exit 2502 that opens inside, and a stage 2503 that can release the game ball B released from the warp exit 2502 into the game area 5a after rolling in the horizontal direction (FIG. 117, etc.) ).

The stage 2503 of the center role 2500 has a curved shape in which the central side in the left-right direction is depressed, and the position corresponding to the position directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center role 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100. It is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the substantially central position in the horizontal direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. This stage 2503 has a portion (central release portion 2503a) slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portion (side release portion 2503b) on both left and right sides. It is inclined so that it may become low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised part (central discharge part 2503a) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 is positioned directly above the first starter opening 2002 of the starter unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central release portion 2503a in the center of the stage 2503, it is received in the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 constitutes a part of the outer peripheral surface of the upper side, and an upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 that is inclined so as to be lower rightward from a position on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction. , and a guide passage group 2520 consisting of two passages provided in the upper right corner and through which game balls B can flow. The upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 forms an upstream space portion 2505 of a predetermined size through which the game balls B can flow between the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 and the outer rail 1001 of the front component member 1000 when assembled to the game board 5 . The guide path group 2520 guides the game ball B above the attacker unit 2400 .

In addition, the center accessory 2500 is provided in the middle of one passage of the guide passage group 2520, and is the first special lottery that is drawn when the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. A role winning opening 2006 in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the lottery result and the second special lottery result, and the game ball B received in the role winning opening 2006 is swung to either the V winning side or the losing side. A first distribution device 2530 for dividing, and a second distribution for distributing the game ball B distributed to the V winning side by the first distribution device 2530 to either the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening side. A device 2540 and a third sorting device 2550 that sorts the game ball B sorted to the second V winning hole side by the second sorting device 2540 to either the second V winning hole 2008 or the losing side. ing.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 includes an accessory winning opening door 2511 capable of opening and closing the accessory winning opening 2006, and the accessory winning opening door 2511 for receiving the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. Accessory prize winning opening solenoid 2512 that opens and closes according to the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery drawn by, and a prize winning opening sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B received in the prize winning opening 2006. , a first loss opening sensor 2515 that detects a game ball B received in a first loss opening 2535, and a second sorting device 2540 that detects a game ball B received in a first V winning opening 2007. A first V winning opening sensor 2514 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, the guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the frame of the center accessory 2500, and includes a first guide passage 2521 whose upper entrance is provided at the blocking portion 1006. , and a second guide passage 2522 whose upper entrance is provided adjacent to the left side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 . The guide path group 2520 (the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522) are both made of a colorless and transparent member, and the game balls B flowing inside can be visually recognized from the front.

The first guide passage 2521 extends vertically and short from the abutment portion 1006 of the front component 1000 downward, then bends rightward at a right angle, and when it hits the right rail 1005, bends downward to the right rail 1005. Extends along, bends to the left near the height of 3/4 from the bottom of the height of the game area 5a, extends to the left so as to be lower at a loose angle, the game than the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 It bends downward at the position on the left side of one ball B and extends to the height of the center of the game area 5a, then bends rightward and extends to the vicinity of the right rail 1005, and then bends downward to open the exit downward. It is formed in a shape that opens toward it. The first guide passage 2521 is not bent in the front-rear direction, and guides the game ball B downward on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the game panel 1100 .

The accessory prize-winning opening 2006 is provided in a portion extending leftward in the first guide passage 2521, extends left and right over substantially the entire length of the portion in the left-right direction, and opens upward. ing. The accessory prize-winning door 2511 is formed in a plate-like shape extending to the left and right so that the left end is lowered while extending forward and backward. can be opened and closed. The accessory winning opening door 2511 can close the accessory winning opening 2006 by moving forward, and when the accessory winning opening 2006 is closed, the door 2511 extends to the left in the first guide passage 2521. can be formed to guide the game ball B flowing from the upstream side to the exit side of the first guide passage 2521.

The accessory winning opening door 2511 is driven backward by the accessory winning opening solenoid 2512 to open the accessory winning opening 2006, and the game ball B that has circulated through the first guide passage 2521 is passed through the accessory winning opening 2006. can be accepted by This prize winning port door 2511 closes the prize winning port 2006 when the prize winning solenoid 2512 is OFF (when not energized), and closes the prize winning port 2006 when the prize winning solenoid 2512 is ON (when energized). The prize winning opening 2006 is opened.

The second guide passage 2522 opens upward at a right end side of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 at a portion spaced leftward from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 . The second guide passage 2522 extends substantially straight downward from the entrance at the upper end, and bends backward at a position lower than the height of the portion where the first guide passage 2521 first bends to the right. A portion of the first guide path 2521 extending downward to the left of the prize winning opening 2006 in a state of being aligned with the first guide path 2521 in the front-rear direction by bending downward behind the front surface of the panel 1100; Extends downward so that the left and right directions substantially match, bends to the right in a crank shape at the height of the center of the game area 5a, and then bends downward, and the lower right in the first guide passage 2521 After bending forward at a portion lower than the portion extending toward the direction, it extends rightward below the first guide passage 2521 while being flush with the front-rear direction of the first guide passage 2521. It is bent rightward so as to extend along the lower side of the part, and then bent downward so as to be adjacent to the left side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2521, and the outlet is formed into a shape that opens downward. ing.

The first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522 are aligned in the front-rear direction at a portion extending vertically on the left side of the prize winning opening 2006 in the first guide path 2521, so that they appear to overlap from the front. It has a portion 2520a. In this weighted portion 2520a, both the game ball B flowing through the first guide passage 2521 and the game ball B flowing through the second guide passage 2522 can be visually recognized from the front. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine through which path the game ball B circulating in the weighted portion 2520a is circulating.

In the guide passage group 2520, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are twisted 90 degrees around the vertical axis above the overlapped portion 2520a, and below the overlapped portion 2520a, It is twisted 90 degrees around the vertical axis in the direction opposite to the upper side. The respective exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are above the normal winning opening 2003 in the attacker unit 2400 and open downward.

The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are each provided with a plurality of protrusions 2520b spaced apart in the circulation direction of the game ball B, and the game ball B contacts the protrusions 2520b, thereby increasing its circulation speed. can be suppressed (see FIG. 112).

The first sorting device 2530 is provided at a height between the accessory winning opening 2006 and the portion extending to the lower right in the first guide passage 2521, and the first guide passage 2521 (game It is provided behind the front surface of the panel 1100).

The first sorting device 2530 has a storage portion 2531a that can store only one game ball B on the outer peripheral surface, and a sorting rotating body 2531 that can rotate around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a sorting rotating body 2531. A first sorting solenoid 2532 (see FIG. 137 etc.) for rotating the sorting rotor 2531 between a state in which the accommodating portion 2531a of the is facing rightward and a state in which it is facing upward, and a swinging Cylindrical peripheral wall portion 2533 covering the outer periphery of the minute rotating body 2531, and the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is passed through the peripheral wall portion 2533 above the sorting rotating body 2531 and shaken. A first sorting guideway 2534 that guides to the outer peripheral surface of the upper side of the dividing rotor 2531, and a lower part of the first sorting guideway 2534 that opens toward the rear and accommodates a housing portion 2531a of the sorting rotor 2531. A first losing port 2535 into which game balls B that have not been accommodated enter, and a ball game ball B accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 circulates. a first strike passageway 2536 extending rightwardly through the .

The distribution rotator 2531 is formed in a truncated cone shape with an outer peripheral surface tapering toward the rear. The right end of the first strike passage 2536 bends backward and then bends downward to communicate with the second sorting device 2540 side.

In the first sorting device 2530, when the first sorting solenoid 2532 is OFF (non-energized), the accommodating portion 2531a of the sorting rotor 2531 faces rightward. In this state, when the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 comes into contact with the upper part of the outer peripheral surface of the distribution rotor 2531 through the first distribution guide path 2534, the outer circumference of the distribution rotor 2531 Since the surface is formed in the shape of a truncated cone that narrows backward, the game ball is guided backward by the inclination of the outer peripheral surface and enters the first losing port 2535 .

On the other hand, when the first sorting solenoid 2532 is ON (energized), the sorting rotator 2531 rotates counterclockwise, and the accommodating portion 2531a faces upward (see FIG. 122(a)). reference). In this state, when the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 passes through the first sorting guideway 2534, only one is received in the receiving portion 2531a. In the state where the game ball B is accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531a of the distribution rotator 2531, when the game ball B is further guided by the first distribution guide path 2534 from the accessory winning opening 2006 side, the game ball After B contacts the game ball B housed in the housing portion 2531a, it enters the first losing hole 2535 in the rear. The game ball B that has entered the first loss hole 2535 is passed to the back right ball discharge unit 3130 of the light guide plate production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, and the first loss hole sensor provided in the back right ball discharge unit 3130. After being sensed by 2515 it is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 .

In the state where the game ball B is housed in the housing portion 2531a, the first distribution solenoid 2532 rotates the distribution rotating body 2531 in the clockwise direction, and when the housing portion 2531a faces rightward, the housing portion The game ball B housed in 2531a rolls from the housing portion 2531a to the right side of the first strike passage 2536, and flows through the first strike passage 2536. The game ball B that has circulated through the first strike passage 2536 is sent to the next second sorting device 2540 .

Thus, in the first sorting device 2530, it is possible to sort the game ball B received in the prize winning port 2006 to either the second sorting device 2540 side or the first losing port 2535 side. can.

The second sorting device 2540 is provided below the first sorting device 2530 and behind the guide passage group 2520 near the exit, as shown in FIGS. 117 and 120 and the like. The second sorting device 2540 is provided behind the first sorting guideway 2534 and the first strike passage 2536 of the first sorting device 2530 .

As shown in FIG. 122, the second sorting device 2540 distributes game balls B that are housed in the housing portion 2531a of the sorting rotor 2531 in the first sorting device 2530 and sorted to the first strike passage 2536 side. A second distribution guideway 2541 extending vertically, a first V winning opening 2007 opening on the right side of the lower part of the second distribution guidance path 2541, and extending rightward from the first V winning opening 2007 a first V winning path 2542 extending downward after the first V winning path 2542; 2514 and .

In addition, the second sorting device 2540 is provided above the second loss port 2543 that opens upward at the lower end of the second sorting guideway 2541, and the second loss port 2543. A distribution door 2544 capable of opening and closing the loss port 2543, a second distribution solenoid 2545 for moving the distribution door 2544 forward and backward to open and close the second loss port 2543, and a second loss port 2543 extending to the left. and a second failure passage 2546 that bends downward at the rear. The sorting door 2544 has a flat plate shape that advances and retreats back and forth, and is inclined so that the right side is lower.

In the second sorting device 2540, when the second sorting solenoid 2545 is OFF (not energized), the sorting door 2544 is retracted, and the second loss port 2543 is opened upward. In this state, when the game ball B from the first sorting device 2530 side flows down the second sorting guideway 2541, it enters the second loss port 2543, passes through the second loss passage 2546, and passes through the second loss passage 2546. It is sent to the three sorting device 2550 side.

On the other hand, when the second distribution solenoid 2545 is ON (energized), the distribution door 2544 moves forward above the second loss opening 2543, and the second loss opening 2543 is closed by the distribution door 2544 to play the game. Ball B is unacceptable. In this state, when the game ball B from the first sorting device 2530 side flows down the second sorting guide path 2541, it contacts the upper surface of the sorting door 2544, and the sorting door 2544 It is guided to the right by the slope and enters (is accepted) the first V winning opening 2007 . Then, the game ball B that has entered the first V winning opening 2007 circulates through the first V winning passage 2542 and is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514. It is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 via the back right ball ejection unit 3130 .

When the ball game ball B from the first sorting device 2530 is received by the first V winning opening 2007 and detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. A "jackpot game" that opens and closes is executed. This second sorting device 2540 can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent guide passage group 2520 .

Thus, in the second sorting device 2540, the game ball B housed in the housing part 2531a of the sorting rotor 2531 in the first sorting device 2530 is placed in the first V winning hole 2007 or the second losing hole. 2543 (third sorting device 2550).

The third sorting device 2550 is provided above the stage 2503 within the frame of the center accessory 2500, as shown in FIGS. The third sorting device 2550 communicates with the lower end of the second losing passage 2546 of the second sorting device 2540, and has a crank-like third sorting guideway 2551 that guides the game ball B to the left; A third distribution detection sensor 2552 is provided in the middle of the three distribution guideway 2551 and detects the game ball B circulating inside, and a third distribution detection sensor 2552 is provided above the stage 2503 within the frame of the center accessory 2500. and a container-like hollow 2553 recessed downward to which the game balls B guided by the third distribution guide path 2551 are supplied.

In addition, the third sorting device 2550 includes a sorting rotary vane 2554 provided rotatably around an axis in the vertical direction at the center of the upper surface of the croon in a plan view, and a cloon 2553 provided below and rotating in a sorting manner. A third distribution drive motor 2555 (see FIG. 115) that rotates the blades 2554, a second V winning opening 2008 that opens at the front end of the peripheral wall of the croon 2553, and a second V winning opening 2008 on the peripheral wall of the croon 2553. A third distributing ball discharge passage that distinguishes and guides the game balls B received in the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2556, respectively, downward. 2557 and .

Furthermore, although not shown, the third sorting device 2550 includes a spur gear-like rotating gear that rotates integrally with the sorting rotary vane 2554 below the cloon 2553, and a spur gear-like rotating gear that meshes with the rotating gear. a flat plate-like detection piece protruding downward from near the peripheral edge of the lower surface of the driven gear; and a third distribution rotation detection sensor that detects the detection piece.

The third distribution guideway 2551 extends short from directly below the lower end of the second losing passage 2546, then bends to the left and extends to near the right end of the croon 2553, and then downward toward the croon 2553. It is bent into a crank shape. This third distribution guideway 2551 is formed to release the game ball B to the right front corner in the croon 2553 in plan view. The third distribution detection sensor 2552 is provided at the entrance of the third distribution guideway 2551 .

The croon 2553 is shaped like an oblong oval dish with the lowest center. The distribution rotary blade 2554 has a pair of projecting pieces 2554a (see FIG. 108, etc.) projecting perpendicularly to the rotation axis, and a confetti-like decoration with a plurality of projections protruding from the sphere. and a portion 2554b. The distributed rotary vanes 2554 are constantly rotated in a certain direction by the third distributed drive motor 2555, and the third distributed rotation detection sensor monitors whether or not the distributed rotary vanes 2554 are rotating. ing. When the game ball B in the croon 2553 comes into contact with the projecting piece 2554a while the distribution rotary blade 2554 is rotating, the game ball B can be flipped to the peripheral wall side of the croon 2553. The third losing openings 2556 provided on the left and right sides of the second V winning opening 2008 are formed to have the same size as the second V winning opening 2008, respectively.

In the third sorting device 2550 , a sorting rotary vane 2554 in the center of the croon 2553 is constantly rotating by a third sorting drive motor 2555 . Then, when the game ball B is distributed to the second loss port 2543 by the second distribution device 2540, it is supplied to the crew 2553 through the third distribution guide path 2551 from the second loss passage 2546. At that time, the game ball B supplied to the crew 2553 is detected by the third distribution detection sensor 2552 . Based on the detection of the game ball B by the third distribution detection sensor 2552, an effect corresponding to the distribution of the game ball B by the crew 2553 is executed.

The game ball B supplied to the croon 2553 from the third distribution guideway 2551 turns (circles) in the croon 2553 while narrowing the turning radius, and when it comes into contact with the projecting piece 2554a of the distribution rotary blade 2554, the croon 2553 is repelled to the side of the surrounding wall. Then, when the game ball B is bounced forward by the distribution rotary vane 2554, it enters (accepts) either of the second V winning opening 2008 and the two third losing openings 2556.例文帳に追加In this third sorting device 2550, the game ball B is sorted to the second V winning hole 2008 with a probability of 1/3.

The game ball B that has entered the second V winning port 2008 is delivered to the lower ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate production unit 3100 in the rear unit 3000 via the third distribution ball discharge passage 2557, and the lower ball is discharged. After being detected by the second V winning slot sensor 3003 provided in the unit 3120 , it is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 . On the other hand, the game ball B received in the third losing port 2556 is passed through the third sorting ball discharge passage 2557 to the back and bottom ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, and is transferred to the back and bottom ball discharge unit 3120. The ball is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the third failure opening sensor 3004 provided in the ball discharging unit 3120 .

Thus, in the third distribution device 2550, the game ball B distributed to the second loss port 2543 by the second distribution device 2540 is sent to either the second V winning port 2008 or the third loss port 2556. can be divided into

[5-8f. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B within the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117, 120 to 124, and the like. In the state assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided on the upper right side with respect to the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the left and lower parts of the center role 2500 and in the part between the attacker unit 2400 and the center role 2500. It is In addition, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300 .

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center role 2500 keep the game ball B struck on the left side of the center role 2500 from the warp entrance 2501 of the center role 2500 and the center of the windmill W. It is adjusted to enter mainly into the right part, and is adjusted to enter into the part on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W with a lower probability.

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the lower end of the guide path group 2520 in the center accessory 2500 and the normal winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 circulates through the first guide path 2521 of the guide path group 2520. The ball B is adjusted to enter any of the first opening 2431 of the attacker's right passage 2430, the normal winning opening 2003, and the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 with the same probability. The game ball B that has passed through 2522 is adjusted to enter the normal winning opening 2003 and the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 with a higher probability than the first opening 2431 of the attacker's right passage 2430 .

In the game area 5a, a game ball B is guided by an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 and hit upward along the periphery of the game area 5a from the left side. When the game ball B is hit so as to circulate on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. N is guided to enter either the warp entrance 2501 of the center role object 2500 or the part on the right side of the center of the windmill W, and the part on the left side of the center of the windmill W has a lower probability than these. induced to enter the

The game ball B guided to the left part of the center of the windmill W is guided rightward by the shelf part 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200 . Then, there is a possibility that it will be accepted in the three general prize winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 . The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then delivered to the back lower ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, and is transferred to the general winning opening sensor. After being detected by 3001 , it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 . When the game ball B is detected by the general prize winning hole sensor 3001, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided. A game ball B guided to a portion on the left side of the center of the windmill W is hardly accepted by the first starting port 2002 . Then, the game ball B not received by the general winning opening 2001 is discharged from the out opening 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W is moved to the center in the horizontal direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N diagonally arranged along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It may be guided to the side and received by the first starting port 2002 . In addition, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the general prize gate 2001 of

A game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied to the stage 2503 from the warp exit 2502 . The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and is released forward from the central portion in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center release portion 2503a in the center of the stage 2503, the center release portion 2503a is located directly above the first start port 2002, so there is a high probability that it will be the first ball. It is received in the starting port 2002 . When the game ball B is released from the side release portions 2503b on both the left and right sides of the central release portion 2503a, it is received in the first starting port 2002 with a certain degree of probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then delivered to the back lower ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, and the first starting. After being detected by the mouth sensor 3002 , it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 . When the game ball B is detected by the first starting hole sensor 3002, a lottery for the first special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided. The game ball B released from the stage 2503 and not received by the first starting port 2002 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

In addition, the game ball B on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a has no possibility of being accepted in the normal winning opening 2003 or the second starting opening 2004, and rarely enters the open big winning opening 2005. sometimes accepted.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the probability that the game ball B hit to the right side of the center role 2500 is accepted by the second starting port 2004 is higher than the probability that the game ball B hit to the left side of the center role 2500 is The probability of being accepted by the first starting port 2002 is set higher.

In contrast to the above, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is hit with such a strength that it enters above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 (upstream space portion 2505) of the center accessory 2500, A game ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 .

More specifically, the game ball B is struck with a strength that makes contact with the impinging portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 that constitutes a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). ), the game ball B in contact with the impingement portion 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521 (see FIG. 121(a)). The game ball B that has entered the first guide path 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the prize winning opening door 2511 that closes the prize winning opening 2006 in the middle of the first guiding path 2521, and then the guide path group. 2520 is released from the right outlet at the lower end toward the attacker unit 2400 below.

The game ball B released downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is hit by a plurality of obstructing nails N planted between it and the attacker unit 2400, and passes through the first opening 2431 of the attacker's right passage 2430, normal winning. It is guided to enter either the opening 2003 or the portion on the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 with the same probability.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit into the upstream space portion 2505 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the second guide passage 2522, it is twisted backward and in the first guide passage at the weighted portion 2520a. 2521 in the front-rear direction, it is twisted forward and released downward toward the attacker unit 2400 from the left exit of the first guide passage 2521 .

The game ball B released downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is hit by a plurality of obstructing nails N planted between it and the attacker unit 2400, and the normal winning opening 2003 or the portion on the left side of the normal winning opening 2003. and, rarely, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 .

Then, the game ball B that has entered the attacker's right passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is discharged onto the lower right rail 1004 from the ejection opening 2435 below the big winning opening 2005. It is released and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a. Also, the game ball B entering the normal winning opening 2003 is detected by the normal winning opening sensor 2401 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the normal winning hole sensor 2401, a normal lottery is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided.

In addition, the game ball B that has entered the left portion of the normal winning opening 2003 further contacts a plurality of obstacle nails N and flows down onto the second starting opening upper guide rack 2421 . In addition, the game ball B that has entered the left part of the normal winning opening 2003 rarely passes through the second opening 2432 between the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 to the attacker right passage 2430 may enter. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down onto the second start opening guide shelf 2421 passes between the second start opening top guide shelf 2421 and the second start opening left standing wall portion 2422 and flows down onto the big winning opening guide shelf 2424. .

At this time, when the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003 and "normal win" is drawn as a result of the normal lottery, the second start opening 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, so that the second start is performed. There is a possibility that the game ball B that has passed between the mouth guidance shelf 2421 and the second start opening left standing wall portion 2422 is received by the second start opening 2004 . When the game ball B is received by the second starting hole 2004, it is detected by the second starting hole sensor 2402 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2402, a lottery for the second special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided.

The game ball B that has flowed down onto the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 through the space between the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall part 2422 is pushed down from the left end of the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 to the big winning opening 2005. is released to the upper site of the Then, when the game ball B is released from the big winning opening guidance shelf 2424, the game ball B is received by the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result When a "big hit" is drawn, or when the game ball B is received in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, resulting in a big winning. The game ball B released leftward from the mouth guiding shelf 2424 is received in the big winning mouth 2005 with a high probability.

The game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is provided. In addition, the game ball B released to the attacker unit 2400 side through the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522 is accepted in any of the normal winning opening 2003, the second start opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005. If not, it is discharged from the out port 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a to the lower rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

In the above description, the case of hitting to the right has been described, but the game ball B that is hit with such force that it jumps over the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 that opens near the right end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 It enters the first guide passage 2521, resulting in the same result as above.

As described above, due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide path group 2520 and the attacker unit 2400, the number of game balls B passing through the second guide path 2522 is higher than that of the first guide path 2521. , the possibility of being accepted in the normal winning slot 2003 is high.

By the way, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and "small hit" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second lottery result, the first guide passage 2521 The accessory winning opening 2006 provided opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, and the distribution rotor 2531 of the first distribution device 2530 and the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 operate in a predetermined pattern. Therefore, when a "small hit" is drawn, the accessory winning opening 2006 opens and closes. "Right shot" can be performed so that the game ball B flows through the first guide passage 2521 provided with the mouth 2006. - 特許庁

In this embodiment, the "small hit" has a higher probability of being drawn than the "big hit", and the "small hit" includes "first small win", "second small win", and "third small win". Three patterns are set, and in each pattern, the prize winning opening 2006 is roughly divided and opens and closes twice.

First, the opening and closing of the prize winning opening 2006 for each "small hit" will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 123, after a certain period of time (3000 ms) has elapsed from the start of execution of the "first small win", the prize winning port 2006 is opened for a short period of time (80 ms) and then closed. After a short period of time (1252 ms) has passed, the state is again opened for a short period of time (80 ms) and then closed to complete the operation. After a certain period of time (3000 ms) has elapsed from the start of the execution of the "second small win", the prize winning port 2006 is opened for a short time (80 ms), and then closed. After a long time (5420 ms) has passed, the state is opened for a long time (9414 ms) and then closed to complete the operation. After a certain period of time (3000 ms) has passed from the start of the execution of the "third small win", the prize winning port 2006 is opened for a short time (80 ms), and then closed. After a long period of time (19366 ms) has passed, the state is opened for a long period of time (9404 ms) and then closed to complete the operation.

The second open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "first small win" is started after the time when the "first small win" is completed from the start of execution. In addition, the second open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "third small win" is started after the time when the "second small win" is completed from the start of execution.

In addition, in FIG. 123, in the second long time open state in the "second small win" and "third small win", eight open states (80 ms) are repeated at regular intervals (1252 ms). . In other words, the accessory winning opening 2006 opens and closes (opens) twice for the "first small win" and nine times for the "second small win" and the "third small win".

Next, the action of the distribution rotor 2531 of the first distribution device 2530 in the "small hit" is to rotate counterclockwise at the same time as the start of execution and turn the accommodation part 2531a upward for a predetermined time (3020 ms). After entering the accommodating state for the first time, and then turning clockwise to turn the accommodating portion 2531a to the right and becoming the unaccommodable state for a predetermined time (4560 ms), the second time (13446 ms), which is longer than the first time, is reached. After entering the unaccommodable state for a short period of time (500 ms), it enters the unaccommodable state for the third time (13446 ms) for the same time as the second time, and then enters the unaccommodable state.

The distribution rotator 2531 is in an unaccommodable state after the first accommodative state ends in the middle of the first open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "small hit". Also, the distribution rotator 2531 will be in the second accommodable state after the time when the "first small hit" is completed from the start of execution. Therefore, at the time of the "first small hit", the control of the distribution rotator 2531 ends before the second accommodable state is reached, and the second and third accommodative states are not executed. This distribution rotator 2531 starts the second accommodating state before the second open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "second small win", and the second open state is the closed state. After that, it becomes uncontainable.

In addition, the distribution rotor 2531 will be in a state capable of being accommodated for the third time after the time when the "second small hit" is completed from the start of execution. Therefore, at the time of the "second small hit", the control of the distribution rotator 2531 ends before the third accommodating state is reached, and the third accommodating state is not executed. In other words, the distribution rotator 2531 can be accommodated once for the "first small win", twice for the "second small win", and three times for the "third small win". This distribution rotating body 2531 starts the third accommodating state before the second open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "third small win", and the second open state ends. It will be in a non-accommodating state after being in a closed state.

Next, the operation of the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 in the "small hit" is the first closed state ( It becomes a state that can be distributed to the first V winning opening 2007), and then retreats and becomes an open state in which the second losing opening 2535 is opened (a state that is distributed to the third distribution device 2550) for a predetermined time (23006 ms ), the second closed state is set for a longer time (13446 ms) than the first open state, and then the open state is set.

The distribution door 2544 is opened after the first closed state ends in the middle of the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "small win". In addition, in the second distribution device 2540, the second closed state of the distribution door 2544 is started in the middle of the second opened state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "third small win", and After the second open state of 2006 becomes the closed state, the distribution door 2544 changes from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, in the second sorting device 2540, the second closing state of the sorting door 2544 is executed only at the time of the "third small win", and shaking is performed at the time of the "first small win" or the "second small win". A second closing of the minute door 2544 is not performed.

For this reason, in the "first small win", the opening and closing of the accessory winning opening 2006 is executed twice in a short period of time. Ball B is unlikely to be accepted by the prize winning slot 2006 . In addition, since the first open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "second small winning" and the "third small winning" is also for a short time, there is a possibility that the game ball B will be accepted by the winning opening 2006. is low. In addition, the time when the first accommodating state of the distribution rotor 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 overlaps with the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "small hit" is the winning opening. 2006, when the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened for the first time, the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is placed in the storage portion of the distribution rotator 2531. 2531a is even less likely. Then, since the time at which the first storable state of the sorting rotor 2531 and the first closed state of the sorting door 2544 in the second sorting device 2540 are the same, the sorting rotor 2531 The game ball B housed in the housing portion 2531a is not distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 side at the time of the first housing possible state.

On the other hand, the second open state of the prize winning port 2006 in the "second small win" and the "third small win" takes a long time. The likelihood of acceptance in mouth 2006 is high. At this time, after the distribution rotating body 2531 of the first distribution device 2530 is in a state that can be accommodated before the prize winning port 2006 is opened, the prize winning port 2006 is changed from the open state to the closed state. Since it will be in an unacceptable state after it becomes, there is a high possibility that the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 in the second open state will be received in the receiving portion 2531a of the distribution rotator 2531. .

Thus, in this example, the possibility that the game ball B will be accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006 in the first open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "second small winning" and the "third small winning" is low. In addition, when the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened for the first time, the possibility that the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotator 2531 is even lower. Nevertheless, at the same time as the start of execution of the small winning game state, the distribution rotating body 2531 is rotated counterclockwise to make the accommodation portion 2531a upwardly accommodated, and the accommodation portion 2531a is held for a predetermined period (3020 ms). After facing upward, it rotates clockwise to turn the accommodating portion 2531a to the right, making it unacceptable. That is, immediately after the start of the small winning game state, the distribution rotor 2531 is unlikely to distribute the game ball B to the first hit passage 2536 side, but the distribution rotor 2531 distributes the game ball B to the first hit passage 2536. The distribution operation by the distribution rotor 2531 is shown in advance by executing the distribution operation to the side.

Similarly, immediately after the start of the small winning game state, the distribution rotor 2531 is unlikely to distribute the game ball B to the first hit passage 2536 side, but at the same time as the start of execution of the small winning game state, the second distribution device The distribution door 2544 of 2540 is protruded forward to close the second loss opening 2535 to make it possible to distribute to the first V winning opening 2007, and after a predetermined time (3020 ms) has passed, retreat to the second loss opening 2535. is opened so that it is distributed to the third distribution device 2550 . That is, immediately after the start of the small winning game state, the distribution door 2544 is unlikely to distribute the game ball B to the first V winning opening 2007 side, but the distribution door 2544 moves the game ball B to the first V winning opening 2007. The sorting operation by the sorting door 2544 is shown in advance by executing the sorting operation to the side.

In this example, the distribution rotator 2531 and the distribution door 2544 are performed simultaneously with the start of execution of the small-hit game state, that is, the production at the start of the small-hit game state (opening production of the small-hit game state, for example, "accessory winning opening Aim for 2006", etc.", etc.), and after the operation of the distribution rotator 2531 and the distribution door 2544, the accessory winning opening 2006 opens for the first time. is open. As a result, the possibility of allocating the game ball B to the first hit passage 2536 side by the allocation rotator 2531 and allocating the game ball B to the first V winning port 2007 side by the allocation door 2544 is reduced. is doing. In addition, there is no possibility of allocating the game ball B to the first hit passage 2536 side by the allocation rotator 2531 and allocating the game ball B to the first V winning port 2007 side by the allocation door 2544. Alternatively, if it is infinitely low, the prize winning opening 2006 may be opened for the first time at the same time when the distribution rotator 2531 and the distribution door 2544 are operated.

Alternatively, only one of the distribution rotor 2531 and the distribution door 2544 may be operated in advance, and the other may not be operated in advance. That is, some of the movable parts (distribution rotator 2531, distribution door 2544) for distributing the game balls that have won the prize winning opening 2006 are operated in advance to show the distribution operation, Other movable parts may not be operated in advance. For example, the distribution door 2544, which has a high possibility of entering the game ball into the V winning opening (the first V winning opening 2007 in this example) by operating (high V winning expectation), should not be operated in advance. , Only the distribution rotator 2531 which has a lower possibility of entering the game ball into the V winning opening (in this example, the second V winning opening 2008) than the distribution door 2544 (the V winning expectation is low) is operated in advance. You may do so. As a result, although some of the distribution destinations of the game balls winning the variable winning opening 2006 can be known in advance, the other distribution destinations can be kept unknown, and the other distribution destinations can be clarified. To surprise a player and raise expectations by increasing the number of destinations to be distributed when a game is played, to make the player pay attention to the game balls to be distributed and to entertain the movement of the game balls, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the interest in the game.例文帳に追加can be done.

In addition, the existence of the movable part (distribution door 2544) that is highly expected to win a V prize is hidden by not operating in advance, and the player is made to believe that the game ball enters the third distribution device 2550. When the third small hit is executed, the movable part (distribution door 2544) having a high degree of V winning expectation operates and the game ball enters the V winning opening (in this example, the first V winning opening 2007). In addition to imparting unexpectedness, the game ball enters an unexpected distribution destination, thereby improving the game interest. In addition, the distribution to the first V winning port 2007 side is hidden as a distribution destination, and it is possible to make people think that there are only two, the first losing port 2535 side and the third distribution device 2550 side, and the third small prize. Even if the second small winning with a low V winning expectation is executed and the game balls are distributed to the third distribution device 2550 side, the player is not discouraged.

In addition, in this example, the distribution rotator 2531 is arranged in such a manner that the player can easily see it, while the distribution door 2544 is in the form of a flat plate that advances and retreats forward and backward of the game board 5, and the area on the front side is Since the area is narrow, it is difficult to notice the movement even if it is moving. As a result, it is difficult for the player to notice the passage on the side of the first V winning opening 2007 that can be entered by the sorting door 2544 protruding forward. Therefore, when the third small hit occurs, the distribution door 2544 operates and when the game ball enters the first V winning opening 2007, the behavior of the game ball becomes difficult to notice, and the game ball enters the first V. It is possible to give the player a feeling as if a V prize had suddenly occurred and a 15R jackpot had been executed without making the player aware that he/she had entered the prize winning opening 2007.例文帳に追加

In addition, by operating the distribution rotor 2531 in advance during the opening performance of the small winning game state, the contents of the instruction in the opening performance, for example, "Aim for the role winning opening 2006" In addition to the distribution rotor 2531 , the player can easily recognize the target to be hit, that is, the position to be aimed during the small winning game state.

When the "small hit" is drawn as described above, the game ball B flowing down the first guide passage 2521 is accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006 when the accessory winning opening 2006 is in an open state. , and is sent to the first sorting guideway 2534 of the first sorting device 2530 after being detected by the prize winning opening sensor 2513 . When the game ball B is detected by the accessory winning prize opening sensor 2513, a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided.

Among the "small wins", in the "second small win", when the prize winning port 2006 is opened for the second time, the sorting door 2544 of the second sorting device 2540 is open. When the body 2531 rotates from the storable state to the unstorable state, the game ball B stored in the storage portion 2531a passes through the first hit passage 2536 and the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540. , and flows through the second loss passage 2546 from the second loss port 2543 at the lower end to be sent to the third sorting device 2550 side.

The game ball B sent to the third distribution device 2550 side is detected by the third distribution detection sensor 2552, and is supplied onto the clone 2553 through the third distribution guideway 2551, and the inside of the clone 2553 swirl. Then, by being flipped by the sorting rotary vanes 2554 that are constantly rotating by the third sorting drive motor 2555 , it will be received in either the second V winning hole 2008 or the two third losing holes 2556 . Then, the game ball B received in the second V winning port 2008 passes through the third sorting ball discharge passage 2557 and is delivered to the back lower ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, After being detected by the 2V winning hole sensor 3003, it is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200. FIG. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the third losing port 2556 passes through the third sorting ball discharge passage 2557 and is delivered to the back lower ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, and After being detected by the rejection sensor 3004 , the substrate is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 . When the game ball B is detected by the second V winning opening sensor 3003, a privilege of opening and closing the big winning opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern is given.

On the other hand, in the "third small win", when the prize winning port 2006 is open for the second time, the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 is closed, so the distribution rotor 2531 When the is rotated from the storable state to the unstorable state, the game ball B stored in the storage portion 2531a flows down the second distribution guideway 2541 of the second distribution device 2540 through the first hit passage 2536. Then, it abuts on the upper surface of the distribution door 2544 in the closed state, is guided to the right, and enters (is accepted) the first V winning opening 2007 . The game ball B that has entered the first V winning opening 2007 passes through the first V winning passage 2542 and is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, and then the back right ball of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is discharged. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the unit 3130 . When the game ball B is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, a privilege of opening and closing the big winning opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern is given.

For this reason, in order to open and close the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400, the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 is made to receive the game ball B, and "small hit", "big hit", etc. It is necessary to draw lots for the results of the first special lottery or the results of the second special lottery. When the game ball B is hit so as to flow down the left side of the center accessory 2500, there is a chance that it will be accepted by the first starting port 2002, but there is no chance that it will be accepted by the second starting port 2004.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when hitting the game ball B so as to flow down the right side of the center role 2500, on the right side of the center role 2500 there is a guide path group 2520 consisting of a first guide path 2521 and a second guide path 2522. Although there is a chance to be accepted in the normal winning opening 2003 for opening and closing the second start opening 2004 even if any passage is passed, the first guidance is made by "right hitting" which is easy to operate. If the passage 2521 is circulated, there is a possibility that it will enter the attacker's right passage 2430 which is sent to the out port 1008 without a chance to be accepted by the normal prize winning port 2003, etc., and the game ball B is circulated to the second guide passage 2522. For this purpose, it is necessary to adjust the hitting strength of the game ball B. In addition, in order to receive the game ball B in the second start opening 2004, it is necessary to receive the game ball B in the normal winning opening 2003 and derive the ordinary lottery result of "normal winning". is lower for the second start port 2004 than for the first start port 2002.

Therefore, in a normal state, the player hits the game ball B so that the game ball B can be received by the first starting port 2002 and the game ball B can flow down the left side of the center accessory 2500. The operation can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the game ball B to the first start port 2002 can be enjoyed. It can raise expectations for the acceptance of

Then, when the game ball B is received into the first start opening 2002, and a "small hit" is drawn as a result of the first special lottery, the accessory winning opening 2006 opens and closes, so that a game is played in the accessory winning opening 2006. In order to accept the ball B, it is possible to change the hitting operation of the game ball B to "right-handed" and hit the game ball B into the first guide passage 2521 provided with the prize winning opening 2006. It is possible to heighten expectations for receiving the game ball B into the accessory prize winning opening 2006.例文帳に追加

Even if the game ball B hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is not received in the accessory winning opening 2006, it may be received in the normal winning opening 2003 on the downstream side. There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the second starting port 2004 that is opened according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the game ball B, and the result of the second special lottery will be "small hit" or "big hit". may be selected.

When the game ball B struck into the first guide passage 2521 is received by the accessory winning opening 2006, it is sent to the first distribution device 2530, so that the game ball B is placed in the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531. It is possible to make the player nervous and excited depending on whether or not it is accommodated.

When the game ball B sent to the first sorting device 2530 is accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531a of the sorting rotor 2531, the game ball B is sent to the next second sorting device 2540, so that the second The game ball B is distributed to either the first V winning opening 2007 or the second losing opening 2543 in the distribution device 2540, which makes the player excited and excited. In this second sorting device 2540, even if the game ball B is sorted to the second loss hole 2543, the game ball B passes through the second loss passage 2546 and enters the second V winning hole 2008. Since it is sent to the minute device 2550, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the second V winning port 2008, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

The game ball B distributed to the second losing port 2543 in the second distribution device 2540 is supplied to the cloon 2553 of the third distribution device 2550 and turns on the cloon 2553 . Then, when it is flipped to the peripheral wall side by the distribution rotary blade 2554 in the center of the croon 2553, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited depending on whether or not it is accepted in the second V prize opening 2008, and the player is entertained. be able to.

Then, when the game ball B is received in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, or when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, the first special When a "big win" is drawn as the result of the lottery and the result of the second special lottery, the large winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, thereby providing an opportunity to pay out a large number of game balls B. The game ball B can be hit toward the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can be received by the open/closed big winning hole 2005 .

At this time, the probability that the game ball B reaches the big winning hole 2005 is higher when the second guide passage 2522 is circulated than when the first guide passage 2521 is circulated. The hitting strength can be adjusted so that the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 by refraining from "right hitting", and the hitting operation of the game ball B can be enjoyed.

By the way, since the guide passage group 2520 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 has the weighted portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, the weighted portion Looking at 2520a, it is difficult to determine which path the game ball B is circulating, so the player should have hit the second guide path 2522, but it entered the first guide path 2521. It can be made to think that it may be, and attention can be made to the game ball B flowing through the guide path group 2520. - 特許庁In addition, the game ball B struck aiming at the second guide path 2522 of the guide path group 2520 can make the player's heart pound by whether or not the game ball B comes out from the exit of the second guide path 2522. , the expectation for the game can be heightened, and when it comes out of the unexpected exit of the first guide passage 2521, the player can be surprised by being given unexpectedness, and the player can be entertained. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[5-8g. Another Embodiment of Distribution Passage Group for Center Accessory]
Next, a guide path group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 of an embodiment different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. FIG. Figures 125(a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams showing embodiments of a group of guide passages different from Figure 117, and Figures 126(e) and (f) are explanatory diagrams showing embodiments of groups of guide paths that are still different. is. In addition, in FIGS. 125 and 126, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those described above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125(a), compared to FIG. 117, the entrance at the upper end of the second guide passage 2522 is separated to the left from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 by a longer distance. It is what I did. This group of guide passages 2520 can also provide the same effects as described above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125(b), the impact portion 1006 of the front component member 1000 is angled so that the game ball B in contact with the impact portion 1006 easily rebounds toward the entrance side of the second guide passage 2522. is changed, and the portion between the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 in the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 is inclined so that the second guide passage 2522 side (left side) is lower. It is what I let you do. This makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the second guide path 2522 side, so that the adjustment range of the hitting strength of the game ball B entering the second guide path 2522 is widened. It is possible to make it easy to perform the driving operation of the game ball B aimed at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522.例文帳に追加

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125(c), in the guide passage group 2520 of FIG. 117 and FIGS. In contrast to the opening, the upstream sides of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are extended to near the center in the left-right direction above the center accessory 2500, and the respective entrances are arranged vertically. It is made to open toward the left in the state.

In this embodiment, part of the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the play area 5a) constitutes part of the first guide passage 2521, and part of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 is part of the second guide passage 2522. make up the department. Also, in this embodiment, the length in the left-right direction of the upstream space 2505 between the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 and the outer rail 1001 (peripheral edge of the game area 5a) is the first guide from the left end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510. It has a length up to the entrance of each of the passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and is narrower than the upstream space 2505 shown above in FIG. 117 and the like.

In this embodiment, in order to enter the game ball B into the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, the striking strength to contact the narrow part on the left side of the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 in the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510, Since it is necessary to hit the game ball B with a hitting strength that directly enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 that opens toward the left, compared to the embodiment such as FIG. 117, the game ball The adjustment range of the striking strength of B becomes narrower. In addition, the game ball B hit into the upstream space portion 2505 on the left of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 partitions the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. When it contacts the left end of the wall (the part between the two entrances), there is a possibility that it deviates from the upstream space 2505 depending on the momentum and angle of the bounced game ball B to the left. In other words, even if the game ball B is hit with the strength to enter the upstream space portion 2505, it deviates leftward from the upstream space portion 2505 and enters neither the first guide passage 2521 nor the second guide passage 2522. There is a possibility that the left side of the center accessory 2500 will be distributed. As described above, since the difficulty of the operation of hitting the game ball B is increased, the player's motivation for the operation of hitting the game ball B can be increased, and the player can hit the game medium. It is possible to entertain the operation and suppress the decline in interest.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 125(d) is the embodiment shown in FIG. 125(c), in which a branch portion 2524 is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 to communicate with the second guide passage 2522 in a one-way manner. is. The branching portion 2524 is provided directly above a portion of the second guide passage 2522 extending left and right (upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 ) bent downward from the right end. In this embodiment, even if the game ball B is hit with the strength to enter the first guide passage 2521, depending on the hitting strength (if the hitting strength is weak), the game ball B will be pushed to the second Since it branches to the guide path 2522 side, the difficulty level of circulation of the game ball B to the second guide path 2522 can be made lower than in the embodiment of FIG. 125(c).

In addition, in order to enter the game ball B into the second guide path 2522, it is necessary to strike the game ball B entering the first guide path 2521 with a strength weaker than that of the game ball B, and the first guide path 2521 and Since the communicating branch portion 2524 is provided above the portion of the second guide passage 2522 that is bent downward, the game ball B that has entered the second guide passage 2522 is bent downward. It does not bounce upward (to the side of the branch 2524 ) and does not enter the first guide passage 2521 through the branch 2524 . That is, the branch portion 2524 communicates from the first guide passage 2521 to the second guide passage 2522 in one way.

Further, in this embodiment, when entering the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 having a branch portion 2524 on the way and flowing through the first guide passage 2521, the first guide passage 2521 side of the branch portion 2524 is reached. Or, since it branches to either the second guide passage 2522 side, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited depending on whether or not the game ball B branches to which side at the branch portion 2524, and the first guidance The flow of the game ball B in the passage 2521 can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the game ball B enters the entrance of the first guide path 2521 in spite of the player hitting the game ball B aiming at the second guide path 2522, , There is a possibility that the first guide passage 2521 branches to the second guide passage 2522 side at the branch portion 2524, so depending on whether or not the branch portion 2524 branches to the second guide passage 2522 side, It can make the player excited and entertain the player, and when branching to the second guide path 2522 side at the branch part 2524, the mistake of the player's hitting operation is covered and the desired second guide path 2522 can be used. The game balls B are circulated, and the player can be made to feel that he/she has won the game, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed from being lowered.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 126(e), the second guide passage 2522 has a bypass portion 2525 that traverses the frame of the center accessory 2500. FIG. In this embodiment, the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 opens upward at a position to the left of the left end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 . Therefore, all game balls B hit into the upstream space 2505 above the upper right peripheral wall 2510 flow through the first guide passage 2521 . According to this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the bypass portion 2525, the game ball B crosses the frame of the center accessory 2500. Since the circulation of the game ball B can be made conspicuous through the bypass portion 2525, the player can be made to think that something good will happen after the game ball B circulates through the bypass portion 2525. The operation of hitting the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 having the bypass part 2525 can be performed, and the operation of hitting the game ball B can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. can.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 126(f), the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 is provided behind the first guide passage 2521, and the respective entrances are arranged in the front-rear direction. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 , and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 is provided on the rear side of the front surface of the game panel 1100 . In this embodiment, the front surface of the game panel 1100 is inclined to the right rear in the vicinity of the impinging portion 1006 of the front structural member 1000 in the upstream space portion 2505, and the game ball circulated along the front surface of the game panel 1100. B is guided to the second guide passage 2522 side. In addition, the blocking portion 1006 of the front component member 1000 is inclined so that the portion near the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 moves rightward as it goes rearward, and moves toward the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. It is possible to reflect the game ball B hit with force to the entrance side of the second guide passage 2522.例文帳に追加In this embodiment, the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are aligned in the front-rear direction and appear to overlap. It is possible to make it difficult to determine which path the ball B has entered, and to attract the player's attention.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 113 to 116 and the like. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500 and effect display device 1600 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting a game ball B received in three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a third winning opening sensor provided in the starting opening unit 2100. A first starting opening sensor 3002 for detecting a game ball B received in a first starting opening 2002, and a second V winning opening sensor 3003 for detecting a game ball B received in a second V winning opening 2008 of the center accessory 2500. and a third loss opening sensor 3004 for detecting the game ball B received in the third loss opening 2556 of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 137).

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall and which is open at the front. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the cage effect display device 1600 is provided.

In addition, the back unit 3000 is driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006. Out ball detection unit 3030 for detecting unaccepted game ball B (game ball B not given a privilege), light guide plate effect unit 3100 provided at the front end of back box 3010, and light guide plate effect unit 3100 and a back effect unit 3200 provided in the back box 3010 behind the.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a penetrating through the rear wall, and a flat plate frame-like shape protruding rearward from the periphery of the opening 3010a at intervals. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed leftward from the inside of the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. A cutout portion 3010d is provided from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 near the center in the left-right direction of the right side of the rear box 3010 to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600 . Also, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the performance display device 1600 to be fitted within the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a vertically slidable manner.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the light guide plate effect unit 3100, the back effect unit 3200, etc., at appropriate positions.

[5-9a. Out ball detection unit]
Next, the out ball detection unit 3030 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 127 to 131 and the like. Figure 127 (a) is a front view of the out-ball detection unit in the back unit, (b) is a right side view of the out-ball detection unit, (c) is a rear view of the out-ball detection unit, and (d) ) is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit as seen from the front, (e) is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit as seen from the back, and (f) is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit and the front right lower position. (g) is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit as seen from the lower right rear. FIG. 128(a) is an exploded perspective view of the out-ball detection unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the out-ball detection unit as seen from the rear.

Also, FIG. 129(a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the game panel and the out-ball detecting unit, and (b) is a perspective view showing the state in which the out-ball detecting unit is in contact with the game panel. FIG. 130 is an enlarged cross-sectional view seen from the right side after being assembled on the game board and cut vertically at the center of the out-port right sensor. FIG. 131 is a perspective view showing the vicinity of the out port from the front in the state assembled on the game board.

The out ball detection unit 3030 of the back unit 3000 is driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the accessories It is for detecting a game ball B that has not been accepted by the winning opening 2006 (a game ball B that has not been given a privilege, also called an "out ball"). In this embodiment, the game ball B ejected from the out port 1008 is detected. This out ball detection unit 3030 is attached to the front surface of the backside ball discharge unit 3120 in the light guide plate effect unit 3100 .

The out ball detection unit 3030 is inserted into the out recess 1101 in the game panel 1100 from the rear, and includes a unit main body 3031 attached to the front surface of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 and an out outlet left sensor attached to the unit main body 3031. 3032 , an out-port right sensor 3033 , and a cover 3034 attached to the unit main body 3031 so as to cover the rear sides of the out-port left sensor 3032 and out-port right sensor 3033 .

The unit main body 3031 is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100, and includes a tubular portion 3031a extending in the front-rear direction in a tubular shape, and a partition portion 3031b dividing the inside of the tubular portion 3031a into left and right. , a flange portion 3031c projecting in the left-right direction from the rear end of the cylinder portion 3031a in a flat plate shape, and a rear end side of the cylinder portion recessed toward the front, into which the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033 are inserted. and an insertion recess 3031d. The cylindrical portion 3031a has a front end approximately the same size as the out port 1008 of the front component 1000, is long in the left-right direction, and has a lower inner surface that slopes downward toward the rear.

The partition part 3031b is provided near the rear end of the cylindrical part 3031a, and is partitioned into a size that allows one game ball B to pass through on both left and right sides. The front end of the partition 3031b is curved so as to protrude forward as it goes downward, and is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B and protrudes forward. The insertion recess 3031d is inclined so that the front side thereof is perpendicular to the lower inclined inner surface of the cylindrical portion 3031a and moves rearward as it goes upward.

The out-port left sensor 3032 detects a game ball B that has flowed through the left side of the partition portion 3031b in the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031 . The out-port right sensor 3033 detects a game ball B that has flowed through the right side of the partition portion 3031b in the tubular portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031 . The out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 are non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches.

The cover 3034 is curved so as to guide downward the game ball B that has passed through the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033, and has a partition plate 3034a in the center in the left-right direction.

This out ball detection unit 3030 is attached to the front surface of the back and bottom ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 at the flange portion 3031c of the unit main body 3031 (see FIG. 130). Further, the out-ball detecting unit 3030 is assembled on the game board 5, and the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031 is inserted into the out recessed portion 1101 of the game panel 1100, and the front surface of the flange portion 3031c is inserted into the game panel 1100. (see Figures 129 and 130).

When the out-ball detection unit 3030 is assembled on the game board 5, the upper front end of the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit body 3031 protrudes forward beyond the rear end of the out-guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000 (see FIG. 130). ). That is, the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 3031 a of the unit main body 3031 . In addition, the lower end of the cover 3034 protrudes below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200 through the ejection portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 (see FIG. 130).

This out-ball detecting unit 3030 detects the game ball B guided backward by the out-guiding section 1003 after flowing down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 in the game area 5a. It is supplied into the cylindrical portion 3031 a , detected by either the outlet left sensor 3032 or the outlet right sensor 3033 , and discharged downward by the cover 3034 . The out-ball detecting unit 3030 discharges the game ball B to the island equipment side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed without contacting the board holder 1200.例文帳に追加

According to the out ball detection unit 3030 of the present embodiment, it is driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and Since it is possible to detect a game ball B (“out ball”) that has not been received by any of the prize winning openings 2006, for example, acceptance of a game ball B into a specific winning opening can be continuously detected. If the "out ball" is not detected in spite of the presence of the player, it means that a fraudulent act is being carried out for a specific winning hole, and the fact that the fraudulent act is being carried out can be reported.

In addition, since the number of "out balls" can be counted by detecting "out balls", the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the accessories The ratio of "safe balls" in the pachinko machine 1 can be known from the number of "safe balls" and the number of "out balls" counted by detecting the game balls B received in the winning hole 2006.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, in the out-ball detection unit 3030, since the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033 provided on the left and right sides are separated by the partition part 3031b, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 can be guided to the out-port left sensor 3032 side, and the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center role 2500 can be guided to the out-port right sensor 3033 side, and the out-port left sensor 3032 can guide the center role The game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the object 2500 can be mainly detected, and the game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be mainly detected by the out-hole right sensor 3033 . Therefore, the number of game balls B detected per hour by the left sensor 3032 and the right sensor 3033 determines whether the player tends to hit left or right. Based on the determination, it is possible to prompt the player to perform the most suitable hitting operation for the game situation, thereby allowing the user to enjoy the intended game.

In addition, since the forward protrusion of the partition 3031b is shortened to make it easier for the game ball B to get over, when many game balls B enter the out port 1008 per time, the game ball of the partition 3031b is relatively large. The game ball B can be released to the left side or the right side where the circulation amount of B is small, and the game ball B can be discharged at the out port 1008 without delay.

In addition, since the lower end of the cover 3034 protrudes downward from the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005, and the game ball B ("safe ball") received by the accessory winning opening 2006 and ejected onto the board holder 1200 flows backward in the out ball detection unit 3030 and is detected by the out exit left sensor 3032 and the out exit right sensor. 3033 can be prevented from being detected, and only the "out ball" can be accurately detected.

Although the out-ball detection unit 3030 is attached to the back unit 3000 in this embodiment, the out-ball detection unit 3030 may be attached to the game panel 1100 without being limited to this. At this time, as long as the game panel 1100 has the out recess 1101, the out ball detection unit 3030 can be attached. In addition, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.例文帳に追加

Also, in the game board 5, all game balls B ("whole ball") hit into the game area 5a are detected, or all game balls B ("whole ball") ejected from the game area 5a are detected. ), the out-ball detection unit 3030 detects only "out-balls", so the numbers of "out-balls", "safe balls", and "global balls" are compared. Thus, it is possible to detect the occurrence of ball jam in the game board 5 .

[5-9b. Light guide plate production unit]
Next, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 134. FIG. FIG. 132(a) is a front perspective view of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the light guide plate effect unit. FIG. 133 is an explanatory view showing from the front the relationship between the light guide plate and the picture substrate in the light guide plate effect unit. FIG. 134(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate is illuminated, and FIG. 134(b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is illuminated.

A light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 . The light guide plate effect unit 3100 includes a square frame-like unit base 3101 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, a transparent plate-like light guide plate 3102 attached to the unit base 3101, and a unit base 3101 above the light guide plate 3102. A first picture board 3103 mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the upper surface of the light guide plate 3102, and a unit base 3101 on the left side of the light guide plate 3102. and a second picture board 3104 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the left side of the light guide plate 3102 are mounted.

In addition, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 covers the front of the transparent plate-shaped diffusion lens 3105 provided between the first pattern substrate 3103 and the light guide plate 3102, and the first pattern substrate 3103 and the diffusion lens 3105. , and is attached to the left side of the unit base 3101 so as to cover the front side of the upper back decorative body 3106 and the second pattern substrate 3104, which are decorated with a relief-like decoration on the front surface. and a strip-shaped left board cover 3107 that is

In addition, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 is attached to the front lower part of the unit base 3101, and includes the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200, and the third opening of the center accessory 2500. A back and bottom ball discharge unit 3120 that receives the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2556 of the strikeout device 2550 and discharges it downward, and a unit base 3101 attached to the lower right side. A back-right ball discharge unit 3130 and a back-lower ball discharge unit 3120 receive the game ball B received in the first losing port 2535 and the first V winning port 2007 in the center accessory 2500 and discharge it downward. A cooling fan 3140 is attached to cool the third distribution drive motor 2555 of the center role 2500, and it is provided in a part behind the warp entrance 2501 in the center role 2500, and it acts illegally. and a magnetic sensor (not shown) for detecting magnetism.

The light guide plate 3102 has a first pattern 3102a (see FIG. 134(a)) formed by a myriad of concave and convex first reflecting portions that reflect forward only light from above, and only light from the left side. and a second pattern 3102b (see FIG. 134(b)) formed by a large number of concave-convex second reflecting portions that reflect light forward. That is, when the LED of the first pattern substrate 3103 is caused to emit light, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 can cause the first pattern 3102a to emit light, and when the LED of the second pattern substrate 3104 is caused to emit light, the second pattern 3102b can be displayed by light emission.

In the light guide plate 3102, the countless first reflecting portions forming the first pattern 3102a and the countless second reflecting portions forming the second pattern 3102b are formed with fine unevenness. When the LED of the first pattern substrate 3103 and the LED of the second pattern substrate 3104 are not illuminated, the back effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 and the effect display device 1600 appear transparent. It is possible to visually recognize the effect image and the like displayed in the .

The first pattern 3102a is a pattern imitating one eye of a predetermined character along the concept of the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 134(a). Also, the second pattern 3102b is a pattern consisting of characters "CHANCE!", as shown in FIG. 134(b).

The light guide plate 3102 also has a lower cutout portion 3102c cut upward from the lower side and a right cutout portion 3102d cut leftward from the right side. The lower cutout portion 3102c is for preventing contact with the crown 2553 of the third sorting device 2550 in the center accessory 2500, and the right cutout portion 3102d is provided rearward in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500. This is to prevent contact with the twisted second guide passage 2522 .

The first pattern board 3103 is divided into three in the horizontal direction. The second picture board 3104 is vertically divided into two. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 and the second pattern substrate 3104 are full-color LEDs.

The backside ball discharge unit 3120 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and a first starting opening sensor 3002 that detects the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. A second V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008, a third losing opening sensor 3004 that detects the gaming ball B received in the third losing opening 2556, is provided.

The backside ball ejection unit 3120 can eject the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second V winning opening 2008, and the third losing opening 2556 onto the substrate holder 1200. can. An out ball detection unit 3030 is attached to the front surface of the backside ball discharge unit 3120 .

[5-9c. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 113 and the like. The back effect unit 3200 is attached inside the back box 3010 behind the light guide plate effect unit 3100 . The back effect unit 3200 has a plurality of hemispherical decorations surrounding the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 when viewed from the front. A decorative substrate mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward is provided behind these decorative bodies. Therefore, by properly lighting the LEDs of the decoration board, the plurality of decorations can be decorated with light emission, and the player can see the light emission effect of the decorations.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136 and the like. FIG. 135 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the light guide plate of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit is decorated with the second picture. FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board showing the light guide plate of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit in which the first pattern is decorated with light. The game board 5 performs the light guide plate performance of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. A unit 3100 and a back effect unit 3200 perform a predetermined light emission effect.

Specifically, as a light emitting effect using the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The second pattern 3102b is decorated with light by emitting light from the plurality of LEDs. As a result, the letters "CHAHCE!" are decorated with light in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that it is possible to suggest to the player the arrival of a chance. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by making the player think that there is no such thing and heighten the expectation for the game.

Further, as a light emission effect using the light guide plate effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. , the first pattern 3102a is decorated with light emission. As a result, the eye of the predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is illuminated in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600, thereby astonishing the player. A strong impact can be given, and an advantageous game state such as a "jackpot game" can be made to occur, thereby increasing expectations for the game.

In addition, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the light emission effect by the light guide plate 3102 as described above and the light emission effect of the decorative body can be appropriately combined, and the effect displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 It can also be combined with an image (display effect). As a result, various patterns of effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining light emitting effects, display effects, etc., and the player is less likely to get bored. It is possible to keep the player entertained and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

[6. control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown, is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control part 1511. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the . The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although not shown in detail, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control board that is a microprocessor that contains a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. MPU 1310a, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. A circuit, a setting display 1310g for displaying set values and error displays, and an out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 for displaying the number of game balls collected. and a base monitor 1310h. The main control MPU 1310a has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual (a unique code that exists only in the world). Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control MPU 1310a also incorporates a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "internal reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and if the contents of the register change to inconsistent contents, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly affected by electrical noise. This is the reset circuit. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be controlled and disabled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset is applied without executing the main control side power-off processing described later, and the main control side power-on processing described later is executed again. It will be done. In this case, since the main control side power failure processing has not been executed, as will be described later, a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control built-in RAM, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased ( cleared). In addition, even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control board 1310 (main control Only the MPU 1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in the started state.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a includes a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in hardware Random number circuit”) is built in. This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and the clock signal (main Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without overlapping, and the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When all the values of are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU 1310a determines the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a jackpot judgment random number. is set as

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various sensors are respectively input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit that

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002, and a second starting opening that detects the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004. An opening sensor 2402, a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in a general winning opening 2001, a normal winning opening sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B received in a normal winning opening 2003, and a large winning opening 2005. A large prize winning slot sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received by the player, a prize winning slot sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball B received in the role prize winning slot 2006, and a game ball B received in the first V prize winning slot 2007. The first V winning opening sensor 2514 to detect, the first losing opening sensor 2515 to detect the game ball B received in the first losing opening 2535, the second to detect the gaming ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 V winning opening sensor 3003, third losing opening sensor 3004 for detecting game ball B received in third losing opening 2556, out opening left sensor 3032 for detecting game ball B received in out opening 1008, and out opening right Either the sensor 3033, the magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, or the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 is detected. Detection signals from the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

A detection signal from a setting key 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. In addition, the signal from the RWM clear button 633z provided on the payout control board 633 is also input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The RWM clear button 633z is a RAM built in the payout control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, and a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 (main control built-in RAM). function as a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in each predetermined area of , function as an error reset switch for clearing the error displayed on the error LED display, and set values It also functions as a setting switching button for selecting and switching. Therefore, the signal from the RWM clear button 633z input to the main control board 1310 includes a signal (RAM clear signal) as a RAM clear switch for transmitting RAM clear and a signal (RAM clear signal) as an error release switch for transmitting error cancellation. error cancellation signal) and a signal for transmitting selection switching of set values as a setting switching button (setting value selection switching signal). While monitoring the input of the value setting change signal, it does not monitor the input of the error cancellation signal which is the control target handled by the payout control board 633 which is not related to itself.

In addition, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (i.e., via a payout control input circuit 633ab, which will be described later, and payout control When input to the main control board 1310 as they are without going through the output circuit 633ac, they are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the first starter sensor 3002 and the second starter sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without passing through another board, and are passed through the main control input circuit. input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, from the general winning gate sensor 3001, normal winning gate sensor 2401, first receiving gate sensor 2406, big winning gate sensor 2403, magnetic sensor 2010, out gate left sensor 3032, and out gate right sensor 3033 The detection signal is input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby causing the starter solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 from the main control solenoid drive circuit. , the prize winning opening solenoid 2512, the first sorting solenoid 2532, and the second sorting solenoid 2545, through the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, output the drive signal, or output the predetermined From the output terminal of the output port to the function display unit 1400 status indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal reserved indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special reserved number indicator, second special symbol indicator, second special Drive signals to the holding number display and the round display are directly output without going through other substrates. Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z of the setting change board 1311 by outputting the drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) about the game to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) is output to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, or a game ball is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port By outputting the launch permission signal for permitting the launch of B, a launch permit signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B is output to the payout control board 633 . The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch is set to the launch permission logic when launch is permitted, while the launch stop logic (fire non-permission logic) is the reverse of the launch permission logic when launch is not permitted. is set to As for the logic of the firing permission signal, as an initial value (default), after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after the power is restored), firing permission signal setting processing in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is started. Until then, it is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) is set by inverting the firing permission logic.

In this embodiment, the first start sensor 3002, the second start sensor 2402, the normal winning sensor 2401, the big winning sensor 2403, the accessory winning sensor 2513, the first V winning sensor 2514, the A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first loss opening sensor 2515, the second V winning opening sensor 3003, the third losing opening sensor 3004, the left outlet sensor 3032, and the right outlet sensor 3033. On the other hand, the general winning hole sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, and the normal winning hole 2003, so the first starting hole sensor 3002, the second starting hole sensor 2402, and the normal Detection of the game ball B by the winning hole sensor 2401 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the normal winning opening sensor 2401. FIG.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state ("big win" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning hole 2005 is opened and the game ball B enters frequently. Detection of B also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the big winning slot sensor 2403 . In addition, since a large amount of game balls B launched into the game area 5a are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a sectioned and formed on the game board 5, the game ball B is detected by the out port left sensor 3032. , and detection of the game ball B by the out-port right sensor 3033 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the outlet left sensor 3032 and the outlet right sensor 3033 as well. On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which the game ball B does not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used for the general winning hole sensor 3001 . It should be noted that regardless of whether or not the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001 frequently, a proximity switch with high durability and long life may be used.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to the control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. The main control MPU 1310 a , which will be described later in detail, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 , shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power board 630 of the board unit 620 . A power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "main control side Capacitor”). The main control side capacitor allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM during the power-off process even when the power is off. Various information stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is input to the main control MPU 1310a by a signal (RAM clear signal) that tells that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 has been operated when the power is turned on. Then, it is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when the voltages of these voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This blackout warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
A payout control board 633 that controls the payout of game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and a launching control unit that performs shooting control by a shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by a ball feeding solenoid 145. It is provided with a control section 633b, an error LED indicator for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, and an RWM clear button 633z having a pressing operation section that serves multiple functions. The RWM clear button 633z is a RAM built in the payout control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, and a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor provided in the main control board 1310 (main control built-in function as a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in each predetermined area of the RAM), function as an error reset switch for resetting the error displayed on the error LED indicator, and setting It also functions as a setting switch button for selecting and switching values.

The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch is the RAM clear determination period after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control side power-on processing described later by the main control MPU 1310a is started until the determination in step S14 in the same process is performed).

The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button is the setting switching effective period after the RAM clear determination period has passed (by the main control MPU 1310a, when the main control side power is turned on after the RAM clear determination period has passed. In the setting change process of step S37 in the process, the setting key inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 causes the setting key switch 1311a to be set to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder. to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) until it is determined that the setting key cylinder has been rotated clockwise by 60 degrees). there is

The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as an error canceling switch becomes a valid period from the time when the RAM clear determination period and the setting switching valid period have passed. In addition, during the RAM clear determination period and the setting switching effective period, even if a signal indicating that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is input to the payout control part 633a (payout control MPU described later), it is invalidated. It is

Note that the period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as the setting switching button is limited to the setting switching valid period after the RAM clear determination period has elapsed, as described above. However, during this setting change effective period, the main control MPU 1310a does not switch the setting key switch provided on the setting change board 1311 in the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process to be described later after the RAM clear determination period has passed. Since the setting key inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of 1311a continues to monitor the rotation position of the setting key cylinder, an interrupt permission setting for permitting the start of the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later is performed. (Step S52 in the main-control-side power-on process) cannot be performed, and the fraud detection process of step S112 in the main-control-side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, cannot be performed. In other words, the setting switching valid period is a fraudulent act undetectable period.

During this setting change valid period, that is, the fraud detection undetectable period, there is a possibility that the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 may be altered in some way by an unauthorized person.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to access (operate) the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the back cover 640 can first open the state covering the rear side of the game board 5 as described above. In order to secure the space, the structure is such that the body frame 4 must be opened wide (approximately 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2 . As a result, the body frame 4 is largely opened (approximately 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2 during the setting change effective period, that is, the fraudulent act undetectable period. If any unauthorized modification is attempted, the fraudulent act will be extremely conspicuous in the game hall, so countermeasures against such fraudulent behavior can be taken. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to prevention of fraud.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 633, is a microcontroller that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout It has a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input.

In the payout control MPU, in addition to its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") and its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM") In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in WDT") that monitors the operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud are also built in.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands about the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, and controls the RWM clear button 633z. In addition to inputting a signal indicating that the pressing operation unit has been operated via the payout control I / O port, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, a ball cut detection sensor 574, payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input. A signal indicating that the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is also output to the main control board 1310. FIG.

Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. input to the MPU.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, and a power failure of the main control board 1310. A power failure warning signal from the monitoring circuit 1310e is input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. , Output to the error LED indicator through the payout control I / O port, and send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 through the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Also, the number of game balls B actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

An error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is cut). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it informs that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "ball is caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 has malfunctioned based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it informs that a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, the fact that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). Notifies that when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR unconnected" (that the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a return requesting signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner. is entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the residual of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a residual display signal to the ball rental operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball rental display section of the operation unit 220 .

Various voltages are supplied to the payout control board 633 from the power board 630 of the board unit 620 . The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "payout control side Capacitor”). Due to this payout control side capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM even when the power is cut off in the process at the time of power cutoff. Various information stored in a predetermined area of the payout control built-in RAM is paid out when a signal (RAM clear signal) notifying that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is input to the payout control MPU when the power is turned on. It is completely erased (cleared) from the control built-in RAM. A signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is also output to the main control board 1310 .

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The shooting control unit 633b performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit that receives detection signals from various detection switches related to firing, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for firing the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , a ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 detects whether or not the palm or fingers are in contact with the handle 182, and detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. A detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing timing control circuit after being input to the firing control input circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit and the firing timing control circuit. A launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 for permitting launch of the game ball B is input to the launch timing control circuit after being input to the launch control input circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the intensity of hitting the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182, is input to a launch solenoid drive circuit.

Based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, the firing timing control circuit satisfies the firing condition 1 that the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182, and based on the CR connection signal, connects the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate. are electrically connected to each other, and the shooting condition 3 that game ball B is permitted to be shot based on a launch permission signal from main control board 1310 is not satisfied. , for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be fired.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this firing solenoid drive circuit applies a driving current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. Triggered by the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542 . On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feed reference pulse, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to move. One ball of B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side by stopping the output of the constant current. send. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

In this embodiment, the discharge control board 633 is provided with a discharge control section 633b that controls the ball feeding by the ball feeding solenoid 145 as well as the firing control by the firing solenoid 542. may be configured. In this case, the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be directly input to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. It may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that does not.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511, which performs effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I/O interfaces on one semiconductor chip. Integrated peripheral control ICs, peripheral control ROMs for storing various processing programs and various commands, sound source ICs for high-quality performances, and sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source ICs. and a stored sound ROM.

The peripheral control IC has a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip. The CPU of the control IC receives game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 through the serial I/O for the lamp drive board. For sending from the port to each decoration board of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700, and for outputting a drive signal to the drive motor that operates various effect units provided on the game board 5 The game board side drive data is transmitted from the game board decoration drive board serial I/O port through the panel drive board 1720 to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, or the operation ring drive motor provided on the door frame 3 342, and door-side drive data for outputting drive signals to the operation button lifting drive motor 367, etc., and a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting for the color LED, etc. provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 Door-side light emission data for outputting a signal and door-side drive light emission data composed of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board is transmitted to the door frame 3 side, and a screen displayed on the effect display device 1600. is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512, and a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is transmitted. Output to the sound source IC.

A detection signal from the third distribution detection sensor 2552 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5 is input to the peripheral control IC via the panel drive board 1720 . Detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 to inform that the performance display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and based on this operation signal, the performance display control unit 1512 activity is monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and uses the vibration speaker 354, the top central speaker 462, and the like provided in the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, etc. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects are played from the top side speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume control switch protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound of the body frame 4 are supplied with acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, etc.). signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound performance) than before.

The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and the external WDT are used together to diagnose whether or not the own system is running out of control.

A display command output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input/output port. Kilo (k) bps (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting and blinking command, the game board side lighting and blinking command, the movable body driving command, etc., which are output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side, are multiple serial input/output signals different from the display commands. It is performed by the port, and 250 kbps is set as the bit rate in this embodiment.

[6-3b. Effect display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the effect display device 1600 . Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands and various data, and a VDP that controls the display of the effect display device 1600. (abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have it.

This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to render the effect display device 1600 . are controlling. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511 . Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores not only various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, but also control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, the control data (display commands) and A plurality of corresponding nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data in chronological order to define the order when various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The non-resident area transfer data defines in advance the order of transferring various data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM for the screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs the screen data following the top screen data to the VDP. It extracts from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. Thus, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600 . Also, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. Note that the VDP employs a line buffer method. The "line buffer method" is to hold the drawing data for one line drawn in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 in a line buffer, and transfer the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer to the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. The sprite data is base data, which is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

A "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600. FIG. For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, a plurality of sprites are used when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600 . In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be made into one sprite. These sprites are drawn on the rendering display device 1600 after setting the position to be arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites are superimposed (hereinafter referred to as "sprite superimposition order").

A sprite is constructed by gluing together a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels each in length and width. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". A small sprite can be expressed using one sprite character, and a relatively large sprite such as a person can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters, for example, arranged horizontally 2 times vertically 3 times. can be expressed. Larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 sequentially repeats the main scanning for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front and the main scanning in the direction crossing the one direction. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially scans one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. are output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the pixels are sequentially output from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600, respectively, to pixels for one line.

[6-4. Mounting of SMD type electronic components]
Here, countermeasures against discontinued electronic components will be described. First, due to various circumstances of the pachinko machine 1, for boards treated as main boards such as the power supply board, main control board, payout control board, etc., lead-type electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface, which is the front side, and the back side is mounted. It is necessary to solder with the solder side which is the side. However, as described above, lead-type electronic components are important for manufacturers of game machines such as pachinko machines, slots, and hybrid game machines, but other general electronics manufacturers can downsize them. surface mounting type (so-called SMD type) is used. As a result, lead-type electronic components may be discontinued due to a decrease in production numbers. Therefore, a lead-type electronic component, which allows an SMD-type electronic component to be configured as a lead-type electronic component, can be mounted on the mounting surface of the substrate treated as the main substrate.

However, when configured as this lead-type electronic component, the outer shape (shape) of the lead-type electronic component becomes larger than the outer shape (shape) of the lead-type electronic component, and a part or a plurality of the lead-type electronic components has protrusions. It may be formed into a distorted outer shape (shape). When a lead-type electronic component having such an external shape (shape) is mounted on the mounting surface of a board treated as a main board, it may become difficult to arrange them on the board due to the positional relationship with other electronic components. For this reason, it may be difficult to configure an SMD type electronic component as the lead type electronic component described above. Therefore, in addition to such lead-type electronic components, among lead-type electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs, SMD-type electronic components are limitedly used as main boards. Mounting on the mounting surface may be permitted.

Here, an SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 to 141. FIG. FIG. 138 is an enlarged view (a) of a part of the area where SMD type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and a view of this enlarged view from the right side of the main control board (b). FIG. 139 is a schematic diagram (a) of the surface (mounting surface) of a board in which SMD type electronic components as substitutes for lead type electronic components are concentrated in a predetermined area. 140 is a schematic diagram (b) showing the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of a board on which electronic components of the type are integrated and miniaturized, and FIG. 140 is an enlarged view of FIG. 141 is a view showing the back surface (solder surface) of the main control unit, and FIG. 141 is a perspective view of the main control board box of the main control unit. 138 and 140, except for electronic parts necessary for explanation, other various electronic parts are omitted for the sake of visibility of the drawings.

The SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 is a substitute for a lead type Schmidt trigger inverter (DIP (Dual Inline Package) type) having the same function, and this lead type Schmidt trigger inverter is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310 . The SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 is one of the main circuits that make up the main control input circuit to which the detection signals from the various sensors described above are input. When it is missing from the board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, among various sensors, always determines that there is no entry for those that transmit the entry of the game ball, and illegality is the approach of the magnet and illegal vibration. Anything that conveys fraudulent behavior, such as, is always judged to be fraudulent. A plurality of types of electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs are mounted on the main control board 1310 as lead-type electronic components.

In this embodiment, green is used as the resist of the main control board 1310, and the entire surface (mounting surface) and the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are solidly coated with green resist except for various land patterns. It is

On the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. A lead-type high-frequency bypass capacitor MC30 (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor MC30") capable of removing noise voltage generated by the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 itself is mounted near the inverter MIC30. ing. Note that the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 and the capacitor MC30 are omitted from FIG. 138(a) for the sake of clarity.

The Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is a single SMD package in which six Schmitt trigger inverter circuits are integrated. In this embodiment, the SMD package of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is an SOP (Small
Outline Package) is adopted (hereafter, the SMD package of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 may be referred to as "SOP14"). In the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30, seven leads from two opposite sides of the SMD package body are bent outward with a lead-to-lead distance dimension (so-called “lead pitch”, 1.27 mm in this embodiment). After being mounted on a rectangular land pattern formed only on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 corresponding to each lead, each lead and the surface of the main control board 1310 ( A rectangular land pattern formed only on the mounting surface 1310x is soldered. The width dimension of each lead is 0.43 mm, and the width dimension of the rectangular land pattern is larger than the width dimension of each lead and is 0.76 mm (the length dimension of the rectangular land pattern is 1.27 mm). is. In this embodiment, the size of the SMD package body is 5.3 mm in width, 10.8 mm in length, and 1.5 mm in height. Including the length of the protruding leads, the width dimension of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is 7.8 mm.

Although the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 is soldered to the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the back surface of the main control board 1310 is used as the solder surface in order to mount lead-type electronic components on the main control board 1310. It is described as "back surface (solder surface) of main control board 1310" (same below).

The capacitor MC30 has two leads protruding from a body having a rectangular parallelepiped shape with a distance between the leads (so-called “lead pitch”, 5 mm in this embodiment) protruding outward in parallel straight lines. 1310x and 1310y of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the two leads, respectively of the ring-shaped land patterns (also called through-holes; hereinafter the same), the ring-shaped land patterns formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 are formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y. After the two leads are inserted toward the ring-shaped land pattern formed on the main control board 1310, the two leads protruding from the ring-shaped land pattern formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and the main control board A ring-shaped land pattern formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of 1310 is soldered. The diameter of the two leads is 0.5 mm, and the inner diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern is larger than the diameter of the two leads and is 0.7 mm (the outer diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern is 1.5 mm). 3 mm).

On the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the control signal, the wiring pattern for supplying the power supply, and the area other than the area where various land patterns are formed are grounded (GND). , is formed as a so-called solid ground, and the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is also provided with wiring patterns for transmitting control signals, wiring patterns for supplying power, and areas other than areas where various land patterns are formed. It is formed as a so-called solid ground, with the region being grounded (GND). The solid ground formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are different from both sides of the main control board 1310 (surface (mounting surface) and Electrically by a plurality of through holes (holes (copper-plated holes) penetrating both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310) formed on the back surface (solder surface)) By being connected, they have the same ground (GND). The diameter of the through hole is 0.3 mm, which is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern. In the through-holes, the solid ground formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are connected to the same ground (GND). In addition to the above, there are also a plurality of devices used to route various wiring patterns on both sides (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310 .

On the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 138(a), an area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including orientation designation) where the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged is printed in white as a silk screen. A solid line (or a solid black line) is printed, and a part number corresponding to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area MSLKMIC30 and on the lower left. Specifically, in the region MSLKMIC30, the lead serving as the first terminal of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is placed on the lower left side and the seventh terminal (ground) so that the longitudinal direction of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is the horizontal direction in FIG. 138(a). (GND) terminal) is placed on the lower right side, the lead for No. 8 terminal is placed on the upper right side, and the lead for No. 14 terminal (power supply terminal) is placed on the upper left side. .

Rectangular land patterns corresponding to the leads that become the 1st to 6th terminals and the 8th to 13th terminals of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 are electrically connected to the respective wiring patterns that transmit corresponding control signals. A rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead serving as the 7th terminal (ground (GND) terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is electrically connected to the solid ground formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. A rectangular land pattern corresponding to a lead serving as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is electrically connected to a wiring pattern for supplying power.

On the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, the name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols, such as "ABC") and the product number (the number listed in the catalog, such as "74XXYYZZ") are engraved. , or printed in a predetermined color (depending on the manufacturer). However, since the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is an SMD package called SOP14 and is small, the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 has a small package body surface area.

In addition, the main control board 1310, which will be described later in detail, is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game. It is housed and sealed in a main control board box 1320 composed of a transparent cover having a plurality of ventilation holes for heat dissipation and a transparent base. This heat-dissipating air vent can release the air inside the main control board box 1320 to the outside air.

Then, when confirming the product numbers (the numbers listed in the catalog) of the various electronic components of the main control board 1310, the surface of the main control board 1310 ( The name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols) and product number (the number listed in the catalog) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 when viewing the (mounting surface) side through the transparent cover. is small and difficult to see.

Therefore, in this embodiment, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, an information area is provided on the right in the vicinity of the area MSLKMIC30 in FIG. The size of the MIC30 part number (listed in the catalog) MSLK MIC30p is printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 so that it is easy to see compared to the size of the part number (listed in the catalog). It is printed in white (or black) as printing. Therefore, the product number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 (the number listed in the catalog) can be visually recognized with certainty.

In addition to the product number (the number listed in the catalog), the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing. In this case, the white (or black) silk-screen printing is printed in white (or black) so that the size is easy to see compared to the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. is preferably printed with As a result, the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 can be reliably recognized visually.

Also, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the capacitor MC30 is arranged near the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead serving as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. (The direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity.) is printed with a white solid line (or a black solid line) as silk printing, and in the vicinity of this region MSLKMC30 A part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing on the upper right. Specifically, the region MSLKMC30 is arranged such that the two leads of the capacitor MC30 are in the vertical direction in FIG. It instructs to insert the ring-shaped land pattern and the other lead into the lower ring-shaped land pattern paired with the upper ring-shaped land pattern, respectively.

The wiring pattern to which the upper ring-shaped land pattern is electrically connected is also electrically connected to a rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead serving as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. The ring-shaped land pattern on the lower side is electrically connected to a solid ground formed on the surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310 .

Here, the advantages of mounting SMD type electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate treated as a main substrate will be briefly described. As described above, SMD type electronic components can be made smaller than lead type electronic components. can be extremely suppressed compared to the electronic component mounting density when lead-type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. Therefore, when mounting an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the lead type electronic component on the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board on which the lead type electronic component is mounted, Since the SMD type electronic components are small, the peripheral area of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate on which the SMD type electronic components are mounted can be enlarged, and the lead type electronic components can be replaced with the SMD type electronic components. The area between the replaced parts can also be increased (that is, the electronic parts can be mounted in such a manner that there are many gaps on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate due to the replaced parts). As a result, SMD type electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board can be viewed from multiple directions, so unauthorized modification of SMD type electronic components It is possible to check the mounting state (soldered state) with the electronic component, and the state of various wiring patterns and various land patterns to the SMD type electronic component. Therefore, the use of SMD type electronic components can contribute to the detectability of tampering.

In addition, it is possible to increase the peripheral area of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate on which the SMD type electronic components are mounted, and also to increase the area between the components replaced by the SMD type electronic components instead of the lead type electronic components. Therefore, for these areas (board surface (mounting surface)), the SMD type electronic component product number (the number listed in the catalog) is stamped on the SMD type electronic component package body surface or It is possible to print in white (or black) as silk printing so that it is a size that is easy to see compared to the size of the printed product number (the number listed in the catalog), and this product number (the number listed in the catalog) number), the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) can also be printed in white (or black) as silk printing. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the ease of recognition of SMD type electronic components.

When the SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate, the distance between the back surface of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate is extremely short (for example, Schmidt trigger In the inverter MIC 30, the distance between the back surface of the body and the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is 0.1 mm to 0.2 mm. There is a problem that even if a fraudulent act of forming some kind of illegal circuit is performed in the gap between the mounting surface and the mounting surface, it is difficult to find such a false circuit.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the following configuration is adopted as a method for preventing the formation of some kind of illegal circuit in the gap between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate.

A configuration is adopted in which each wiring pattern for transmitting control signals is not arranged at all in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the rear surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 138(a), a region of the front surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310 corresponding to the rear surface of the main body of Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the lower portion of the main body of Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30) A configuration is adopted in which each wiring pattern for transmitting control signals is not arranged at all in the area passing through the .

In the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, a configuration is adopted in which no wiring pattern for electrical connection with the ground (GND) and no wiring pattern for supplying power are arranged. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 138(a), a region of the front surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310 corresponding to the rear surface of the main body of Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the lower portion of the main body of Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30) A configuration is adopted in which neither a wiring pattern electrically connected to the ground (GND) nor a wiring pattern for supplying power is arranged in the region passing through the .

A configuration is adopted in which no through holes are arranged in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the rear surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 138(a), through-holes MTH are arranged in the upper right and upper left of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30, and the main control board 1310 surface corresponding to the main body back surface of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. A configuration in which no through-holes MTH are arranged in the (mounting surface) area (in other words, the area passing through the lower portion of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30) is adopted. As described above, the through-holes MTH are electrically connected by holes (copper-plated holes) passing through both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310. can be set to the same ground (GND). In addition to the through-holes MTH, the main control board 1310 also has a plurality of through-holes MTH' (not shown) for routing various wiring patterns to both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control substrate 1310. Although present, such a through-hole MTH' also passes through the region of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, it passes through the lower portion of the body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30). A configuration in which through holes MTH' are not arranged at all in the region where the through holes are formed is adopted.

A wiring pattern electrically connected to one of the leads of an SMD type electronic component is formed in a region on the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. adopted a configuration in which the electronic components are not pulled out to the outside. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 138(a), various wiring patterns to each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are formed on the surface (mounting surface) area of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. In other words, it is not arranged at all in the area passing through the lower portion of the main body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30, but is arranged from above or below the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30.

In order to shorten the wiring pattern that electrically connects one of the leads of the SMD type electronic component to the other lead, the rear surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the corresponding substrate surface (mounting surface) ), the wiring patterns for transmitting control signals are not arranged at all. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 138(a), various wiring patterns to each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are formed on the surface (mounting surface) area of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. In other words, it is not arranged at all in the area passing through the lower portion of the main body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30, but is arranged from above or below the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30.

By soldering each lead of an SMD type electronic component to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, each wiring pattern is electrically connected to the land pattern. A configuration is adopted in which the control signal cannot be taken out without the Specifically, as shown in FIG. 138( a ), each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is soldered to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 to form a land pattern. A configuration is adopted in which the control signal cannot be taken out without passing through each wiring pattern electrically connected to the . In other words, a configuration is adopted in which the control signal cannot be taken out from a portion different from each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to illegally form a new circuit such as a short circuit or a disconnection circuit in the gap between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the board. can be difficult. In addition, since various wiring patterns for SMD type electronic components can be visually observed, it is possible to discourage a fraudulent person from providing an illegal circuit to SMD type electronic components. can be done. Therefore, tampering with SMD type electronic components can be prevented.

In addition, by completely not arranging each wiring pattern for transmitting the control signal in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the body of the SMD type electronic component, the back surface of the body of the SMD type electronic component and this SMD A control signal to the SMD type electronic component so that an unauthorized other IC (SMD type electronic component) is not mounted between the back surface of the main body of the type electronic component and the corresponding substrate surface (mounting surface). and an illegal control signal to another IC cannot be combined and used in the area of the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the corresponding surface (mounting surface) of the board.

In addition, by completely not arranging each wiring pattern for transmitting control signals in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, an unauthorized other IC (SMD type electronic component) can be detected. As for the type of , control signals can be easily routed between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of this SMD type electronic component. You can make it impossible to choose things.

In addition, a wiring pattern electrically connected to one of the leads of the SMD type electronic component is formed in a region of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. By not leading the SMD type electronic component to the outside, it is possible to prevent unauthorized use of the control signal that transmits the wiring pattern led to the outside.

Moreover, by soldering each lead of the SMD type electronic component to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, each wiring pattern electrically connected to the land pattern can be used. In order to prevent unauthorized use of the control signal transmitted through the wiring pattern, it is impossible to extract the control signal from a part different from each lead of the SMD type electronic component. can do.

In addition, in order to shorten the wiring pattern that electrically connects one lead and the other lead among the leads of the SMD type electronic component, the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the corresponding surface of the substrate ( By not arranging the wiring patterns for transmitting control signals in the area of the SMD type electronic component, the wiring patterns electrically connected to the leads of the SMD type electronic component can be arranged from above or below the SMD type electronic component. By arranging them, it is possible to prevent an illegal circuit from being formed around the leads. Among the leads of the SMD type electronic component, unused leads (also referred to as "empty terminals") are electrically connected to a wiring pattern electrically connected to the ground (GND), or Alternatively, when electrically connecting to a wiring pattern that supplies power, it is arranged from above or below the SMD type electronic component so that an illegal circuit cannot be formed around the empty terminal. can be done.

In addition, by arranging no through holes in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the main body of this SMD type electronic component can be To prevent control signals from being taken out through through-holes so that unauthorized other ICs (SMD type electronic components) are not mounted between the back surface and the corresponding front surface (mounting surface) of the board. It is possible to prevent unauthorized other ICs from being fixed (soldered) to the through-holes, and the through-holes are used as through-holes for control signals to flow from the back surface (solder surface) to the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. It can be made unavailable for retrieval.

In addition, by not arranging wiring patterns electrically connected to the ground (GND) and wiring patterns for supplying power in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, , An unauthorized other IC (SMD type electronic component) is mounted between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of this SMD type electronic component. It is possible to prevent the IC from becoming a driving source for other unauthorized ICs.

Next, a configuration will be described in which SMD type electronic components are collectively mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate treated as a main substrate. Since SMD type electronic components can be miniaturized as described above, the size of the board itself can also be miniaturized by collectively mounting them. Here, the main control board 1310 will be described as the main board, and when the main control board 1310 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and viewed visually, the SMD package is used to measure the visibility of the product number. Another configuration (hereinafter referred to as "configuration for improving the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the second and third embodiments") will be described. 139(a) and 139(b), the embodiment shown in FIGS. ) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are omitted for the sake of clarity.

[Comparison between configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to first embodiment and configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to second embodiment]

In the structure of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number, the leads are applied to the area of the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 on which the Schmidt trigger inverter, which is a lead-type electronic component, is mounted. The area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including direction specification) to place the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the type electronic component, is a solid white line (or a black line) as silk printing. ), and a part number corresponding to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area MSLKMIC30 and on the lower left.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as described above, information is provided near the area MSLKMIC30 and to the right. In this information area, the product number (number listed in the catalog) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 MSLKMIC30p is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it has a size that is easy to see compared to the original.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. Except for the lead-type ICs, resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, LEDs, and other electronic components, alternative SMD-type electronic components having the same functions are aggregated on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310′. ) 1310x′. The external dimensions (vertical dimension, horizontal dimension, and thickness dimension) of this main control board 1310' are the same as the external dimensions of the main control board 1310 in the configuration for the visibility measure of the part number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. .

The main control board 1310' has a straight line passing through the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side of the main control board 1310', respectively. and a part arrangement area 1310xa' for arranging various connectors, and a part number and a part number (listed in catalog number) is formed as a parts list area 1310xb' which is an information area written like a parts list of electronic parts arranged in a manner.

Specifically, in the component arrangement area 1310xa′, a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type main control MPU 1310a included in the lead type, various lead type connectors MCN1 to MCN4 (and a plurality of other connectors not shown), a resistor MR0 ~ MR4 (other resistors not shown), capacitors MC0 to MC5, MC30 (other capacitors not shown), diode D0 (other diodes not shown), Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (other various IC) is mounted. In the component placement area 1310xa′, a white solid line (or a black solid line) is printed as a silk screen to indicate the positions (orientation may also be specified) at which these various electronic components and various connectors are to be placed. In the vicinity of these various electronic components and various connectors, the corresponding part numbers are printed in white (or black) as silk printing. In addition, various types of connectors are of the lead type. This is because when wiring is connected to the connector, the stress caused by this wiring (this stress is caused by the routing in the wiring route until the wiring is connected to the connector). This is because the accompanying reaction force of the wiring acts on the connector.

In the parts list area 1310xb', a parts list of electronic parts configured in a manner in which part numbers and part numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) are aligned is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. The size of the part number and the part number is larger (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) than the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the part placement area 1310xa'. is printed in white (or black) as A delimiter ":" is provided between the part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) so that the part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. . With this delimiter, it is possible to distinguish and identify the part number from the part number (the number listed in the catalog).

In addition to the product number (the number listed in the catalog), the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may also be silk-screened in white (or black). Further, in addition to describing the information of such parts, notes regarding the gaming machine may be described. For example, a note such as "The main control board is a security-critical board and should be handled with great care" may be used to draw attention.

In this way, the surface (mounting surface) area of the main control board 1310' can be divided into the component placement area 1310xa' and the parts list area 1310xb', so that the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310' It is possible to make it easy to recognize various electronic components and various connectors mounted on the device.

Instead of the silk printing printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310', the foil-extracted area and the foil-extracted area in the configuration for the visibility measure of the product number by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment to be described later. Characters may be employed, and a resist removal region using two coats of resist and white resist removal characters using two coats of resist in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment for visibility measures of the product number. and may be adopted.

[Comparison between configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to first embodiment and configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to third embodiment]

In the structure of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number, the leads are applied to the area of the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 on which the Schmidt trigger inverter, which is a lead-type electronic component, is mounted. The area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including direction specification) to place the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the type electronic component, is a solid white line (or a black line) as silk printing. ), and a part number corresponding to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area MSLKMIC30 and on the lower left.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as described above, information is provided near the area MSLKMIC30 and to the right. In this information area, the product number (number listed in the catalog) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 MSLKMIC30p is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it has a size that is easy to see compared to the original.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. Except for the lead-type ICs, resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, LEDs, and other electronic components, alternative SMD-type electronic components having the same functions are aggregated on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310′. ) 1310x′. The size of the main control board 1310' can be reduced by integrating the SMD type electronic components and mounting them on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'. The external dimensions (vertical dimension, horizontal dimension, and thickness dimension) of this main control board 1310′ are the horizontal Only the dimensions are half the length (vertical dimension and thickness dimension are the same).

Various electronic components and various connectors are arranged on a surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'. These various electronic components and various connectors are arranged in the component arrangement area 1310xa' formed on the main control board 1310' in the configuration of the SMD package according to the above-described second embodiment for visibility of the product number. (In other words, areas not shown that indicate the positions (orientation designation may also be included) for arranging these various electronic components and various connectors are the same arrangement and are printed in white (or , black).), and the part numbers corresponding to the vicinity of these various electronic components and various connectors are also printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the same arrangement. In addition, various types of connectors are of the lead type. This is because when wiring is connected to the connector, the stress caused by this wiring (this stress is caused by the routing in the wiring route until the wiring is connected to the connector). This is because the accompanying reaction force of the wiring acts on the connector.

On the rear surface (soldered surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' is a parts list which is an information area formed on the main control board 1310' in the configuration for the visibility measure of the part number by the SMD package according to the second embodiment described above. In the area 1310xb′, a white (or black) silk-printed part number and a part number (listed in a catalog) are printed in white (or black), and a white (or , black). The size of the part number and part number (the number listed in the catalog) is compared to the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310'. Large (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. A delimiter ":" is provided between the part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) so that the part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. . With this delimiter, it is possible to distinguish and identify the part number from the part number (the number listed in the catalog). In addition to the product number (the number listed in the catalog), the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may also be silk-screened in white (or black). Further, in addition to describing the information of such parts, notes regarding the gaming machine may be described. For example, a note such as "The main control board is a security-critical board and should be handled with great care" may be used to draw attention.

In addition, on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310', each lead of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a (shown as part number "MIC1" in the figure) and lead-type electronic components are mounted. The leads of certain capacitors MC0 to MC5, MC30 and resistors MR0 to MR4 protrude from the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' and are soldered to the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310'. The part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) are the main control board 1310' so as not to overlap (avoid) this part. is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the parts list area 1310xb' formed in .

In this way, the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310' is used as an area for arranging components, and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' is used for the part number and the part number (listed in the catalog). ) are used as an area for use as a parts list of electronic parts configured in an aligned manner, the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310' and the back surface of the main control board 1310' Since the role of (solder surface) 1310y' can be distinguished, various electronic components and various connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310' can be easily recognized.

In addition, by integrating SMD type electronic components and mounting them on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310', the size of the main control board 1310' can be reduced. The number of ring-shaped land patterns required for mounting electronic components can be determined and reduced. As a result, various leads of lead-type electronic components protrude from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310', and the number of soldered portions is reduced. The solder surface 1310y' can be formed as a flat surface.

In addition, since various leads of lead-type electronic components protruding from the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' are soldered, when light from a fluorescent lamp or the like hits them, they are reflected and feel dazzling. Although it may be difficult to visually recognize the attached portion, as described above, various leads of lead-type electronic components protrude from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' for soldering. Since the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' can be formed as a flat surface by reducing the number of soldered portions, even if the flat surface is exposed to light from a fluorescent lamp or the like, There is no problem that it is difficult to visually recognize a parts list of electronic parts configured in a manner in which silk-printed part numbers and part numbers (listed in catalogs) are aligned.

Instead of silk printing printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x' and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310', the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, which will be described later, is used to improve the visibility of the product number. A foil-extracted area and foil-extracted characters may be employed in the configuration, and a resist-extracted area and a two-time coating using resist in the configuration for visibility measures of the product number by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment. It is also possible to employ white resist-extracted characters using a resist.

By the way, general electric appliance manufacturers use multi-layer substrates in which various wiring patterns can be formed on each layer. However, the main control board and payout control board used in game machines are two-layer boards (double-sided boards) that form various wiring patterns on the front side (mounting side) and back side (solder side) of the board in order to enhance security. ) is employed, and it is necessary to mount various electronic components only on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate, regardless of whether they are lead-type electronic components or SMD-type electronic components. For example, in order to improve security, it is necessary to mount a ZIP type main control MPU 1310a, which is included in the lead type, on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board. In some cases, the lead-type electronic parts are mounted without using the SMD-type electronic parts.

When SMD type electronic components and lead type electronic components are mounted together on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board or payout control board, the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board or payout control board Compared to the case where only lead-type electronic components are mounted on the substrate, the number of leads of the lead-type electronic components protruding from the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board and the dispensing control board is reduced. As a result, it is possible to increase the area used as the area for forming various wiring patterns on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board and the payout control board, and at the same time obtain the area used as the area used for other functions. can be done.

Therefore, for example, various SMD type ICs and various SMD type connectors are not mounted on the main control board that is produced as a mass-produced machine in the area on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board where the area has increased as described above. A mounting land pattern forming area 1310ya' (see FIG. 139(b)) can be provided in which various land patterns for mounting and pad patterns for extracting signals can be formed. In the main control board produced as a mass-produced machine, since SMD type electronic components are not mounted on various land patterns and pad patterns in the mounting land pattern forming region 1310ya', various lands in the mounting land pattern forming region 1310ya' The pattern and the pad pattern become non-mounted patterns, and the mounting land pattern forming area 1310ya' becomes an empty area.

When such a non-mounted pattern is formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, various electronic components and various connectors on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board are controlled by the area where the non-mounted pattern is formed. , and the routing of various wiring patterns are subject to restrictions. The entire area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board can be effectively used without being subject to restrictions on the placement of various electronic components and various connectors on the mounting surface and the routing of various wiring patterns.

In addition, since such an unmounted pattern is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board, it cannot be seen from the front surface (mounted surface) of the main control board, and the existence of the unmounted pattern can be hidden. , is preferred for security reasons.

It should be noted that part of such unmounted patterns may be formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board for convenience' sake. For example, a connector (SMD type connector) may be easier to connect with wiring if it is arranged on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board.

Further, part of such unmounted patterns may be formed as a lead-type electronic component or a lead-type connector for convenience' sake. For example, there may be a case where strong soldering strength is required, such as a connector that is inserted and pulled out many times.

Next, when the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, the surface area of the small Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30, which is an SMD package, is small. ) and another configuration of the present invention in which the part number (the number listed in the catalog) is small and difficult to see, and the visibility of the part number is taken by the SMD package (hereinafter referred to as "fourth to sixth embodiments. The configuration of the product number visibility countermeasure using the SMD package” will be described. 140(a) to (c), the embodiment shown in FIGS. 138(a) and 138(b) (hereinafter referred to as "configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to first embodiment"). ) are denoted by the same reference numerals.

[Comparison between configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to first embodiment and configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to fourth embodiment]
In the structure of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is provided with the position (orientation) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30, as described above. ) is silk-printed with a white solid line (or a black solid line), and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-printed in the vicinity of this region MSLKMIC30 and to the lower left. is printed in white (or black) as

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as described above, information is provided near the area MSLKMIC30 and to the right. In this information area, the product number (number listed in the catalog) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 MSLKMIC30p is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it has a size that is easy to see compared to the original.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 as described above. ), an area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is to be placed (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is silk-printed. It is printed with a solid white line (or a solid black line), and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC30 and on the upper right. .

On the other hand, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number, on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. An area MSLKMIC30′ indicating the position (including orientation designation) where the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is to be arranged is printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control board 1310 at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x. (or a black dashed line), and the part number corresponding to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this region MSLKMIC30' and in the upper left. This part number is printed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control board 1310 . This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component numbers and place and print them near the corresponding electronic components. On the other hand, since no electronic components are mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased and printed.

In addition, in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. Instead of the product number MSLKMIC30p, this product number MSLKMIC30p is provided on the rear surface (soldered surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and an information area is provided near and below the area MSLKMIC30'. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it is a size that is easy to see compared to the size of the product number stamped or printed on the surface of the package body (the number listed in the catalog). Therefore, the product number (the number listed in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be visually recognized with certainty.

The product number MSLKMIC30p may be the same size as the product number MSLKMIC30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, or may be larger. may This is because multiple electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p and place it near the corresponding electronic components for printing. On the other hand, since no electronic parts are mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p can be increased for printing.

In addition to the product number (the number listed in the catalog), the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing. In this case, the white (or black) silk-screen printing is printed in white (or black) so that the size is easy to see compared to the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. is preferably printed with As a result, the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 can be reliably recognized visually.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number, printed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. At a position corresponding to the region MSLKMC30 where the capacitor MC30 is arranged (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity), the region MSLKMC30' is printed with a white solid line (or a black solid line) as silk printing. Along with being printed, a part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC30' and on the upper left. This part number is printed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control board 1310 . This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the size of the part number is reduced in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number. While it is necessary to reduce the size and place it near the corresponding electronic component and print it, the electronic component is not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, so the size of the component number is increased. This is because it can be printed as

[Comparison between configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to first embodiment and configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to fifth embodiment]
In the structure of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is provided with the position (orientation) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30, as described above. ) is silk-printed with a white solid line (or a black solid line), and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-printed in the vicinity of this region MSLKMIC30 and to the lower left. is printed in white (or black) as

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as described above, information is provided near the area MSLKMIC30 and to the right. In this information area, the product number (number listed in the catalog) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 MSLKMIC30p is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it has a size that is easy to see compared to the original.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 as described above. ), an area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is to be placed (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is silk-printed. It is printed with a solid white line (or a solid black line), and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC30 and on the upper right. .

On the other hand, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 further includes main An area MSLKMIC30′ indicating the position (including direction designation) where the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is to be arranged is indicated by a dashed line as a foil extraction area at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control board 1310. In addition, a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed in the vicinity of this region MSLKMIC30' and in the upper left corner as foil-cut letters.

In the layer (copper plane) on which various wiring patterns are formed, the foil-extracted area is a wiring pattern that is copper foil, except for the wiring pattern that transmits control signals, the wiring pattern that supplies power, and various land patterns. This is an area formed by making a hole and removing the copper foil around it. A region MSLKMIC30' formed as a foil-cut region has a notch portion 1310yMIC30 in a part on the left side in FIG. 140(b). As a result, the region MSLKMIC30' becomes a U-shaped katakana character, and through the notch 1310yMIC30, the solid ground formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and the inner region of the U-shaped region MSLKMIC30'. are electrically connected to each other. Since the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 is mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the back surface (solder surface) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 corresponding to this mounting area is grounded (GND). This is because the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 can be prevented from malfunctioning due to noise (strengthened against noise) by securing the area of .

The foil-cut characters are formed by forming characters with a wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil. The part numbers formed as foil-cut characters are larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and are formed as foil-cut characters. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component numbers and place and print them near the corresponding electronic components. On the other hand, electronic parts are not mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, so the size of the part number can be increased to form foil-cut letters.

In addition, in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. Instead of the product number MSLKMIC30p, this product number MSLKMIC30p is provided on the rear surface (soldered surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and an information area is provided near and below the area MSLKMIC30'. It is formed as a foil-cut letter so that it has a size that is easy to see compared to the size of the product number stamped or printed on the surface of the package body (the number listed in the catalog). The foil-cut characters are formed by forming characters with a wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil. Therefore, the product number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 (the number listed in the catalog) can be visually recognized with certainty.

The product number MSLKMIC30p formed as foil-cut characters is the same size as the product number MSLKMIC30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment. It may be there, or it may be large. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p is reduced in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment. While it is necessary to reduce the size and place it near the corresponding electronic components for printing, no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p is increased. This is because it is possible to form foil-cut characters.

In addition to the product number (the number listed in the catalog), the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may also be formed as foil-cut characters. In this case, the name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 should be formed as foil-cut letters so that the size is easy to see. is preferred. As a result, the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 can be reliably recognized visually.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number, printed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. An area MSLKMC30′ indicating a position where the capacitor MC30 is arranged (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is formed as a foil extraction area by a dashed line at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMC30 where the capacitor MC30 is located. ' and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as foil-cut letters on the upper left. In the layer (copper plane) on which various wiring patterns are formed, the foil-extracted area is a wiring pattern that is copper foil, except for the wiring pattern that transmits control signals, the wiring pattern that supplies power, and various land patterns. This is an area formed by making a hole and removing the copper foil around it. The foil-cut characters are formed by forming characters with a wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil. The part numbers formed as foil-cut characters are larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and are formed as foil-cut characters. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component numbers and place and print them near the corresponding electronic components. On the other hand, electronic parts are not mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, so the size of the part number can be increased to form foil-cut letters.

In addition, the wiring patterns forming the foil-cut area and the foil-cut characters are electrically insulated from various electronic components, and also include wiring patterns for transmitting control signals, wiring patterns for supplying power, and various wiring patterns. It is formed electrically insulated from the land pattern and solid earth formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. FIG.

[Comparison between configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to first embodiment and configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to sixth embodiment]
In the structure of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is provided with the position (orientation) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30, as described above. ) is silk-printed with a white solid line (or a black solid line), and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-printed in the vicinity of this region MSLKMIC30 and to the lower left. is printed in white (or black) as

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as described above, information is provided near the area MSLKMIC30 and to the right. An area is provided in which the part number (the number listed in the catalog) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 MSLKMIC30p is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number listed in the catalog). It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it has a size that is easy to see compared to the original.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 as described above. ), an area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is to be placed (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is silk-printed. It is printed with a solid white line (or a solid black line), and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC30 and on the upper right. .

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for visibility of the product number, green is adopted as the resist of the main control board 1310, and the entire surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are used. ) The entire surface is solidly coated with green resist except for various land patterns.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. A region MSLKMIC30′ indicating the position (including direction designation) where the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is to be arranged is printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control board 1310, and the region MSLKMIC30′ is painted twice in white. The part number corresponding to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed by a dashed line as a white resist removal area using a resist, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 in the vicinity of this area MSLKMIC30' is in the upper left. It is formed as an outline character.

Further, in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. Instead of the product number MSLKMIC30p, this product number is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, near and below the region MSLKMIC30'. It is formed as white resist-cut characters using two-coat white resist so that the size is easy to see compared to the size (the number listed in the catalog).

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number, printed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The region MSLKMC30′ indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is placed (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is the white resist removal region using the white resist applied twice. , and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed in the vicinity of this region MSLKMC30' and in the upper left corner as white resist removal characters using double-coated white resist.

Specifically, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is entirely covered with the white resist as the first of the two-coat white resist (that is, the two-coat white resist). For the first time, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is entirely coated with a white resist except for various land patterns). Then, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is, as the second coat of white resist applied twice, at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMIC30 printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. , a region MSLKMIC30' indicating the position (including direction designation) where the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged is masked as a white resist removal region in a chain line fashion, and the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is located in the vicinity of this region MSLKMIC30' and to the upper left. is masked as characters without white resist, and an information area is provided near and below this area MSLKMIC30', and in this information area, the part number MSLKMIC30p of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is masked as characters without white resist. , and an area MSLKMC30 indicating a position where the capacitor MC30 is arranged (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. ' is masked as a white resist removal area in a chain line, and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is masked as white resist removal characters in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC30' and to the upper left.

In this masked state, the entire back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is covered with white resist except for various land patterns. In other words, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with a green resist except for various land patterns.

As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the whole is covered with the white resist of the first layer, and the white resist of the second layer is formed. By covering the entire area except for the masked area with the resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the area MSLKMIC30' indicating the position (including orientation designation) where the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged is white. A part number corresponding to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as a resist removed area by a dashed line, and a part number corresponding to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as white resist removed characters. MSLKMIC30p is formed as white resist characters, a region MSLKMC30' indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is arranged (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is formed by a chain line, and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is indicated. It is formed as a white resist removal character. Therefore, the product number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 (the number listed in the catalog) can be visually recognized with certainty.

When the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as characters with white resist removed, the part number is formed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. FIG. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component numbers and place and print them near the corresponding electronic components. On the other hand, since electronic components are not mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased to form white characters without resist.

When the product number MSLKMIC30p is formed as characters without white resist, the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for visibility measures of the product number. may be the same as or larger than This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p is reduced in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment. While it is necessary to reduce the size and place it near the corresponding electronic components for printing, no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p is increased. This is because the characters can be formed as white resist removed characters.

The product number (the number listed in the catalog) and the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be formed as white resist-cut characters. In this case, the characters are formed as white resist removed characters so as to have a size that is easy to see compared to the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. is preferred. As a result, the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 can be reliably recognized visually.

When the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as characters without white resist, the characters are printed larger than the size printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. FIG. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component numbers and place and print them near the corresponding electronic components. On the other hand, since electronic components are not mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased to form white characters without resist.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310 is solidly coated with green resist except for various land patterns. It may be configured such that it is solidly painted except for the pattern. In this case, the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 surface (mounting surface) is silk-printed to indicate the positions (orientation may also be specified) of the various electronic components to be mounted. The surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is printed in dark green, black, gray, etc., in dark solid lines, and the part numbers corresponding to various electronic components are printed in dark green, black, gray, etc. on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 as silk printing. are printed as dark characters. With this configuration, the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the other substrates are coated with green resist except for various land patterns. It can have a feature that the control board 1310 can be highlighted. In addition, among various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the product number of the SMD type electronic component (when the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) is also written in addition to this product number) ) may also be printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by silk printing.

The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns. It may be configured to be printed by silk printing using different color resists applied twice, in which the color of the resist (background) and the color of the resist for the second time are different colors. As the first time (base), the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is printed in white, except for various land patterns, by silk printing. Main control board 1310 for the second time while masking the area indicating the position (orientation may also be specified) of the various electronic components to be mounted and the part numbers corresponding to the various electronic components. The entire surface (mounting surface) of , except for various land patterns, may be silk-screen printed in any one of black, blue, yellow, and red. Even with this configuration, the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the other substrates are coated with a green resist, except for various land patterns, so that the other substrates are mainly It can have a feature that the control board 1310 can be highlighted. In addition, it is possible to visually recognize the area indicating the position (orientation designation may be included) of various electronic components and the part numbers corresponding to the various electronic components.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310 is solidly coated with green resist except for various land patterns. It may be configured such that it is solidly painted except for the pattern. In this case, on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, an area indicating the position (orientation may be specified) of various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 A solid line is formed as a white resist removal region, and the part numbers corresponding to various electronic components are formed as white resist removal characters on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 . In addition, among the various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the product number of the SMD type electronic component (in addition to this product number, the name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols)) It may be formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1310 as white resist-cut characters.

[Measures to prevent modification of SMD type electronic components]
Next, miniaturized electronic components called SMD type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and are replaced with illegal electronic components to acquire illegal game balls. I will explain the point of preventing the act.

As described above, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30, which is an SMD type electronic component mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, has a width dimension of 5.3 mm and a length dimension of 5.3 mm as the size of the SMD package body. is 10.8 mm, the height is 1.5 mm, and the width of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is 7.8 mm, including the length of the leads protruding from the two sides of the SMD package body.

The main control board 1310 is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game. It is housed and sealed in a main control board box 1320 composed of a transparent cover body having a plurality of pores and a transparent base body. In the main control board box 1320, as shown in FIG. 141, a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302 are crimped by a one-way screw of a crimping portion 1303 or the like. This crimping part 1303 is a sealing mechanism, and has a plurality of crimping parts. Main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping cover body 1301 and base body 1302 with a one-way screw or the like of crimping part 1303 using one sealing mechanism. must destroy its sealing mechanism. In other words, the structure is such that the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed.

However, the SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by some illegal means such as a thin wire in the main control board box 1320, and the SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is illegally removed. If a game ball is replaced with a bad electronic part, there is a risk that an illegal game ball may be acquired by a person who makes such illegal alterations.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 141, a plurality of ventilation holes 1301z having an inner diameter (2 mm in this embodiment) smaller than the size of the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are formed in the transparent cover body 1301. A configuration was adopted. As a result, even if the SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 is removed from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by some illegal means such as a thin wire attached to the main control board box 1320, the SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter The trigger inverter MIC30 cannot be removed from the main control board box 1320 through the vent 1301z. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 from being replaced with an illegal electronic component.

As described above, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is one of the main circuits that constitute the main control input circuit to which detection signals from various sensors are input. Then, the main control MPU 1310a, of the various sensors, always determines that there is no ball entry for those that convey the entry of a game ball, and always detects fraudulent actions such as the approach of magnets and fraudulent vibrations. It is determined that a fraudulent act is taking place. As a result, the SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and if the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 is missing, a person who makes unauthorized alterations will not be allowed to enter the ball. By maintaining the state, illegal game balls will not be acquired, and by reporting fraudulent activity, the fact that illegal alterations have been made will be communicated to the hall computer of the game form (hall) and the game will be played. The information can also be sent to a staff member such as a store clerk in the hall. In addition, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that a fraudulent act is always taking place with respect to sensors that report fraudulent activity such as the approach of magnets and fraudulent vibrations, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a firing permission signal as described above. is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) to control the game ball so that it cannot be launched toward the game area 5a. It cannot be done at all.

In the above-described embodiment, the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 as an SMD type electronic component. For example, when a resistor is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the SMD type resistor peels off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 and passes through the ventilation hole 1301z to the main control board box 1320. The inner diameter of the vent hole 1301z must be smaller than the resistance of the SMD type so as not to protrude from the inside of the .

Since such an SMD type resistor is small, even if it is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310, it is possible to visually check whether it is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310 or not. It may be difficult to determine Also, when the SMD type resistor peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 protrudes from the inside of the main control board box 1320 to the outside through the ventilation hole 1301z, the inside lower side of the main control board box 1320 Since there is no trace of the SMD type resistor that has peeled off, it becomes more difficult to visually determine whether or not it is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 .

Therefore, when a JIS standard 1/8 watt 2012 type is adopted as an SMD type resistor, the 2012 type has a length dimension of 2.0 mm and a width dimension of 1.2 mm. With such a small SMD type resistor, even if there is a problem that the main control board 1310 is bent and peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it can be removed from the inside of the main control board box 1320. In order not to protrude to the outside, the inner diameter of the vent hole 1301z is smaller than the smaller one of the length dimension and the width dimension of the small SMD type resistor (here, 1.2 mm of the width dimension). (here, for example, 1.0 mm).

As a result, even if the small SMD type resistor is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it is reliably prevented from jumping out of the main control board box 1320 through the ventilation hole 1301z. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an opportunity to visually check the peeled-off small SMD type resistor inside the main control board box 1320, and if the main control board box 1320 is shaken up and down or left and right, this A small chipped SMD type resistor collides with the inner wall of the main control board box 1320 and the main control board 1310 to generate a sound, and this sound provides an opportunity to recognize the small chipped SMD type resistor. Obtainable. In addition to this small SMD type resistor, when electronic parts such as SMD type capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs are used instead of lead type capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs, makes the inner diameter of vent 1301z smaller than the smallest of these dimensions.

In this way, even if small SMD type electronic components are peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310, they can be reliably ejected from inside main control board box 1320 to the outside through ventilation hole 1301z. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability of discovering the defect that the SMD type electronic component peels off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 due to the bending of the main control board 1310 .

In the above-described embodiments (including the configuration of the SMD package according to the first to sixth embodiments for visibility of the product number), SMD type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. Although the point has been described, SMD type electronic components can be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board treated as the main board such as the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633 .

[Test connector]
The pachinko machine 1 is tested by a specific testing institution and cannot be shipped to the gaming hall unless it is approved by the specific testing institution. The main control board 1310 is provided with a test connector 1310k for extracting various signals related to games. This test connector 1310k is an SMD type electronic component. The test connector 1310k is a straight SMD type connector (a type in which each pin of the connector is arranged vertically and parallel to the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board). , when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a testing machine to be tested by a specific testing institution, it is usually mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 and on the transparent cover body 1301 facing the test connector 1310k. While the test harness cover side opening 1301k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k is formed, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass-produced machine shipped to the game hall, the main control board 1310 is formed. The test harness cover body side opening 1301k is not formed in the transparent cover body 1301. As shown in FIG. Therefore, in the main control board 1310 produced as a mass-produced machine, the area for mounting the test connector 1310k is formed as an empty area on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 .

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a testing machine to be tested by a specific testing institute, the testing connector 1310k is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 in the mounting land pattern forming area 1310ya. ' (see FIG. 139(b)), and a test harness base body side opening 1302k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k is formed in the transparent base body 1302 facing the test connector 1310k. We adopted the configuration to form As a result, even when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a testing machine to be tested by a specific testing institution, or even when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass-produced machine shipped to game halls, the surface of the main control board 1310 Since the area where the test connector 1310k is mounted on the (mounting surface) is not formed as an empty area, other SMD type electronic components can be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. . Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310 can be increased.

In addition, with this configuration, in preparation for starting the test of the pachinko machine 1 at a specific testing institution, the test operator first moves from the board holder 1200 of the game board 5 shown in FIG. is removed, and then a test harness electrically connected to a test apparatus installed in a specific test institute is passed through the test harness base body side opening 1302k formed in the transparent base body 1302. are electrically connected to a test connector 1310k mounted in a mounting land pattern formation region 1310ya' on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310. FIG. Subsequently, the test operator attaches the main control board box 1320 to the board holder 1200 . In this state, the test harness can be sandwiched and held between the transparent base body 1302 of the main control board box 1320 and the board holder 1200, so that the test harness can be moved toward the test connector 1310k. By applying a load in the direction in which the test harness is pushed in, the electrical connection between the test connector 1310k and the test harness becomes unstable due to vibrations caused by the movable body operated by various electric drive sources provided in the pachinko machine 1. In addition, it is possible to prevent twisting and disconnection of the test harness for taking out various important signals related to the game in the test of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, the test connector 1310k is a straight SMD type connector (each pin of the connector is arranged vertically and parallel to the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board). However, right-angle SMD type connectors (the type in which each pin of the connector is arranged parallel to the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board) were mainly used. The side wall of the transparent cover body 1301 facing the test connector 1310k (the transparent cover body 1301 A test harness cover body side opening 1301k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k is formed in the side wall facing the test connector 1310k among the left side wall, the lower side wall, the right side wall, and the upper side wall of the may be adopted. Even with this configuration, the main Since the area for mounting the test connector 1310k on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1310 is not formed as an empty area, other SMD type electronic components can be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. can be implemented. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310 can be increased. Also, as preparation for starting the test of the pachinko machine 1 at a specific testing institution, the test operator first performs the specific test without removing the main control board box 1320 from the board holder 1200 of the game board 5 shown in FIG. A test harness electrically connected to a test device installed in an engine is attached to the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board through a test harness cover body side opening 1301k formed in a transparent cover body 1301. It can be electrically connected to the mounted test connector 1310k.

Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine in which a game control device (game control board) is provided with a test firing test terminal (test connector) to which a cable for transmitting game information to a test device in a specific testing institution is connected. (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013-128621 (paragraph [0054] and FIG. 6)). By the way, in the game machine described in this document, the test connector is mounted on the surface of the game control board when it is tested by a specific testing institution, whereas when it is used in a game hall Since the test connector is not mounted on the surface of the game control board and becomes a vacant area, there is a problem that the vacant area makes it impossible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface of the game control board.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which surface-mounted electronic components are mounted on a board (for example, JP-A-2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, the surface mount type electronic components in the game machine described in this document may have identifiers such as product numbers corresponding to the surface mount type electronic components. There is a problem that the identifier is difficult to visually recognize due to its small size.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which surface-mounted electronic components are mounted on a board (for example, JP-A-2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, when the surface-mounted electronic components in the game machine described in this document are mounted on a game control board capable of controlling the progress of the game, the surface-mounted electronic components may be removed by some illegal means. There is a risk that an illegal game ball may be obtained by removing it from the game control board and replacing it with an illegal electronic component.

Further, conventionally, a game machine has been proposed in which a tactile switch or the like is provided on a substrate so that a pressing operation part can be operated and the switch can be sensed to be turned on or off by a click feeling at the time of operation. JP-A-2017-023427 (paragraph [0071] and FIG. 20)). By the way, the electronic parts such as the tact switch described in this document are of a lead type in which each lead is inserted into a through hole provided in the substrate from the front surface to the back surface of the substrate and soldered on the back surface side of the substrate. electronic components. When such a lead-type electronic component is mounted on a board such as a game control board that controls the progress of a game, for example, when the board bends as the lead-type electronic component is operated, the board bends. There is a risk that the soldered parts of other electronic components mounted on the board may come off and cause electrical problems.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine in which various control boards are arranged at predetermined positions on the back surface of the game board (for example, JP-A-2013-128621 (paragraphs [0032] to 3)). By the way, the game control board that controls the progress of the game is an important board that determines whether or not to give a profit to the player. Preventive measures are required.

Also, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which surface-mounted components are mounted on a board (for example, JP-A-2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, when the surface-mounted components in the gaming machine described in this document are mounted on a game control board that can control the progress of the game, the surface-mounted components are mounted in the area of the surface of the game control board. If the wiring pattern is routed, the distance between the back surface of the surface-mounted component and the surface of the game control board is small, so even if this wiring pattern is modified by some unauthorized means, it will be difficult to see, and the surface-mounted type electronic component There arises a problem that it is impossible to prevent fraudulent acts against

[7. Game content]
The contents of games played by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 are rotated by the player rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 . is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182. The more the handle 182 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nail N, the game ball The flowing speed of B is suppressed, and various motions are imparted to the game ball B so that the motion can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG.

When the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 to the left of the highest part in front view (left side of the upper right peripheral wall part 2510), While contacting a plurality of obstructing nails N, it flows down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 . When the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2501 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2502 to the stage 2503.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and is released forward from the central portion in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center release portion 2503a in the center of the stage 2503, the center release portion 2503a is located directly above the first start port 2002, so there is a high probability that it will be the first ball. It is received in the starting port 2002 . When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, and the large winning opening 2005 in the open state. be.

By the way, if the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it will be moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the ledge 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200 , or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role object 2500 in the game area 5a is located on the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center role object 2500 (upstream space above the upper right peripheral wall part 2510). 2505), it passes through either the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522 of the guide path group 2520 of the center role item 2500, and is released above the normal winning opening 2003 of the center role item 2500, After coming into contact with a plurality of obstructing nails N planted above the normal prize winning opening 2003, it is received in the normal winning prize opening 2003 with a certain degree of probability.

The group of guide passages 2520 of the center accessory 2500 includes a first guide passage 2521 whose entrance is open near the impinging portion 1006, and an entrance which is spaced leftward from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. and a second guide passage 2522. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with the strength to contact the impingement portion 1006 (so-called right hitting), it enters the first guide passage 2521, enters the upstream space portion 2505, and hits the impingement portion 1006. When the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not touch (strength that is somewhat weaker than hitting to the right), it enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B hit into the upstream space 2505 flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 according to the hitting strength.

In the present embodiment, it is configured such that the normal prize winning opening 2003 has a higher probability that the second guide path 2522 is circulated rather than the first guide path 2521 is circulated.

When the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003 and detected by the normal winning opening sensor 2401, a predetermined number (for example, one) of the game is played from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. When the ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and the lottery result is "normal win", the closed second start opening in the attacker unit 2400. 2004 will be in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and reception of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 will be possible.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by receiving the game ball B in the ordinary prize winning opening 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

In addition, when the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2003 during the period from when the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the indication of the normal lottery result can be started. Since this is not possible, the start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is put on hold until the previous suggestion of the ordinary lottery result ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of reserved lottery results is 4, and even if the game balls B are received in the normal prize winning opening 2003, the game balls B are discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

The game ball B entering the attacker's right passage 2430 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is released onto the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 without a chance to be received in the second start opening 2004 or the big winning opening 2005, It is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a. On the other hand, the game ball B that has passed through the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 passes between the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422, and then passes through the big winning opening guide shelf 2424. , passes in front of the closed big prize opening 2005 and is released onto the lower right rail 1004 .

Then, when the game ball B passes between the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422, the normal lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B at the normal winning opening 2003 is " When the second starting port door 2411 is moving forward in a normal hit, the game ball B is guided by the second starting port door 2411 and received by the second starting port 2004 . When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

The game ball B that is not guided by the second starting door 2411 falls onto the large winning opening induction shelf 2424, passes from the left end of the large winning opening guiding shelf 2424 to the front of the large winning opening door 2413 in the closed state, and passes to the right. It is discharged onto the lower rail 1004 and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, although the game ball B was guided to the second starting port 2004 side by the second starting port door 2411, the second starting port door 2411 retreated on the way and was not received by the second starting port 2004. The attacker enters the right passage 2430 from the lower third opening 2433 of the start opening 2004, is discharged onto the lower right rail 1004 without passing in front of the closed big winning opening door 2413, and is discharged from the out opening 1008. It is discharged outside the game area 5a.

In addition, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the normal prize winning opening 2003 and the second start opening upper guide shelf 2421, and the second opening 2432 of the attacker's right passage 2430 is opened, A game ball B that has passed through the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 enters the attacker's right passage 2430 through the second opening 2432 with a low probability. The game ball B that has entered this attacker's right path 2430 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a without being involved in the big winning port 2005.例文帳に追加

From the above, the game ball B that has circulated through the first guide passage 2521 is not often accepted by the normal winning opening 2003, so the reception of the game ball B to the normal winning opening 2003 is not often derived, and the game ball B is not accepted in the second starting port 2004. On the other hand, the game ball B that has circulated through the second guide path 2522 is accepted by the normal winning opening 2003 with a higher probability than the first guiding path 2521. There is a high possibility that an ordinary lottery result (“ordinary win”) will be drawn in which the is open, and that the game ball B will be accepted by the second starting port 2004.

For this reason, the player will perform the operation of hitting the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. In addition, the hitting strength of the game ball B must be adjusted so that the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a with the hitting strength at which the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522. not. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored by giving variation to the hitting operation of the game ball B, and to make the player enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball B and suppress the decrease in interest. can be made

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 enters an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot") that is advantageous to the player. ”, “small hit”, “time reduction (time reduction) hit”) will be drawn for special lottery results. Then, the special lottery result of the lottery is indicated to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include "loss", "first small win", "second small win", " 3rd small hit", "2R big hit", "15R big hit", and the like. In this embodiment, the second special lottery result than the first special lottery result, "small hit" ("first small hit", "second small hit", "third small hit") lottery probability is set high.

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a "small hit", '', the prize winning slot 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern (see FIG. 123). Since the prize winning port 2006 is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the center prize 2500, when a "small hit" is drawn, "right hit" and enter the first guide passage. Hit the game ball B at 2521.

When the "small win" is the "first small win", the opening and closing time of the accessory winning opening 2006 is short, and the game ball B can hardly be accepted. In the case of the "second small win" or the "third small win", the time period during which the accessory winning opening 2006 is open is long, and the game ball B is accepted into the accessory winning opening 2006 by "right hitting". Probability is high. When the game balls B are received in the accessory winning opening 2006, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

When the ``small win'' is a ``second small win'' or a ``third small win'', when the game ball B is accepted into the accessory winning opening 2006, one of the accepted game balls B is the first distribution. It is housed in the housing portion 2531 a of the sorting rotor 2531 in the device 2530 . Then, when the "small hit" is the "second small win", the game ball B accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531a of the sorting rotor 2531 passes through the second sorting device 2540 and the third sorting device 2550. is supplied on the clone 2553 of After that, it is flipped by the distribution rotary blade 2554 and distributed to either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2556 . When the game ball B is received (divided) into the second V winning hole 2008, a "15R jackpot" is executed. On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the third losing hole 2556, the "15R jackpot" or the like is not executed, and the previous state is restored.

On the other hand, when the "small hit" is the "third small win", the game ball B housed in the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotator 2531 moves toward the first V winning opening 2007 in the second distribution device 2540. It is distributed and "15R jackpot" is executed.

The first special lottery result and the second When the result of the second special lottery is "2R big win" or "15R big win", a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening 2005 becomes open to accept the game ball B, or When any of the conditions of acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B to the big winning opening 2005 is satisfied, an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern) that makes the game ball B unacceptable is closed. 1 round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds, eg, 2 rounds or 15 rounds).

Since this big winning hole 2005 is mainly on the flow path of the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center role 2500, the player can drive the game ball B aimed at the right side of the center role 2500.例文帳に追加can be done. When the game ball B is received in the big winning opening 2005 when the big winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is sent from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. , are paid out to the upper tray 201. Therefore, when the big winning hole 2005 can receive the game ball B, by making the big winning hole 2005 accept the game ball B, a lot of the game balls B can be paid out and the player can be entertained. can.

In the guide passage group 2520 provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the first guide passage 2521 side is easier to drive than the second guide passage 2522 side. Since there is a lower possibility that the ball will be accepted in the big prize winning opening 2005 than on the side, the player can select which passage the hitting operation is aimed at, and it is difficult for the player to get bored with a variety of games. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, when the "15R big hit" or "2R big hit" occurs during the time saving state, after the "big hit" game is finished, the lottery is drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The fluctuation time of the special symbols for suggesting the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result to the player is shortened than usual until it reaches a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times), and then Accelerate the time until the "hit" of the lottery is drawn.

In addition, in the "jackpot" game aiming at the big winning hole 2005, since the game ball B has the normal winning hole 2003 and the second starting hole 2004 on the way to the big winning hole 2005, the big winning hole 2005 is aimed. There is a high possibility that the game ball B will be received by the second starting port 2004, and if the next "big win" or "small win" is drawn during the "big win" game, the player will be in an advantageous game state. continues for a long time, and the player can be more entertained.

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery to the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the special lottery result drawn is suggested, the first start port 2002 and Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Reserved. The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, it is discarded without withholding the special lottery result. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

By the way, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 indicate the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 . The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time, and then suggesting the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is a pattern row displayed in a state in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction, and each pattern row is varied. are successively stop-displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stop-displayed so that the patterns of the three stop-displayed pattern rows are combined corresponding to the result of the special lottery. When the special lottery result is other than ``losing'', after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a "small winning" game, a "big winning" game, etc.) occurs according to the special lottery result.

Note that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image does not appear). time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 300 on the door frame 3 is operated according to the special lottery result. A player-participation type effect can be performed in which the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player-participation type performance, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate the rotary operation unit 302, vibrate it, assist the rotary operation, or inhibit the rotary operation. By 367, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised to be conspicuous, and the operation of the production operation section 301 can entertain the player participation type production.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back By appropriately using the production unit 3200, etc., it is possible to perform light emission production, display production, etc., and it is possible to entertain the player with various productions, and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. can do.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to allow the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake in performing the operation to be performed or does not perform the operation in the player participation type presentation in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated. to notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when a pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is requested, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation portion 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 is caused to vibrate. The effect display device 1600 is made to display that effect.

[8. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522 of the guide path group 2520 in the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 of this embodiment are the guide paths of the present invention, the normal winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 of this embodiment, The second starting port 2004 and the big prize winning port 2005 respectively correspond to the privilege providing section of the present invention.

[9. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B hit from the left side along the peripheral edge into the upper part of the game area 5a is the first ball in the guide passage group 2520 on the right side of the center accessory 2500. When it passes through either the guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 and is accepted in the normal winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 provided on the downstream side, a predetermined privilege (with the payout of a predetermined number of game balls B, Ordinary lottery for opening and closing the second start opening 2004 is given, so the player is made to hit the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 where the ordinary winning opening 2003 is located. You can play games.

The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 have a twisted positional relationship so that they are lined up in the front-rear direction at the overlapping portion 2520a in the middle of being lined up in the left-right direction. On the entrance side of the upper part, the respective first guide passages 2521 and second guide passages 2522 are arranged in the left-right direction, and the respective first guide passages 2521 and second guide passages 2522 can be clearly distinguished. The hitting operation of the game ball B can be easily divided, and the hitting operation of the game ball B aimed at the desired first guide path 2521 or second guide path 2522 can be enjoyed.

On the other hand, in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the weighted portion 2520a is twisted so as to line up in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to determine which guide path is circulating, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game ball B circulating in the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522. can. These first guide passages 2521 and second guide passages 2522 allow the guiding (circulating) game ball B to be visible from the front, and the first guide passages 2521 and second guide passages 2522 are formed of a transparent member. Since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 appear to overlap each other at the portion of the weighted portion 2520a that is aligned in the front and rear direction, it is difficult to recognize the route of each guide passage at a glance. can be Furthermore, on the outlet side of the lower portion of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are twisted so as to be aligned in the left-right direction, each of the outlet sides Although the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be clearly distinguished, the upstream side is twisted twice. , the relationship with the arrangement of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the exit side is difficult to discern and can be unclear.

Therefore, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, when the game ball B is hit (entered) into one of the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522, it is difficult to know where it will come out. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize how the game result will be after the group 2520 is circulated, and if the game ball B is hit into which guide path out of the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522, it usually wins a prize. Since it is difficult to know whether the game ball B is likely to be accepted by the opening 2003, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which guide passage the game ball B is circulating when the game ball B is hit. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the game ball B that is playing.

Also, when the player pays attention to the game ball B circulating in either the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522, the guide path (second guide Whether or not the game ball B comes out from the exit of the passage 2522) can make the player's heart beat faster, and it can increase the expectation for the game, as well as the unexpected exit (the exit of the first guide passage 2521). ), it is possible to surprise the player by imparting unexpectedness, thereby entertaining the player and suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, in order to make the game ball B enter the second guide passage 2522 having an exit that is highly likely to be accepted by the normal winning hole 2003, it is necessary to adjust the hitting strength of the game ball B. It is possible to adjust the hitting strength of the game ball B and hit it. Therefore, a degree of difficulty can be imparted to the operation of hitting the game ball B, and the change in the operation of hitting the game ball B can make it difficult for the player to get bored, and the player can play the game ball. The hitting operation of B can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 have the portions of the weighted portions 2520a that are aligned in the front-rear direction, the width of the guide passage group 2520 in the left-right direction can be changed at this portion. Since the space can be narrowed further, it is relatively easy to secure a space on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and the accessory winning opening 2006, the first sorting device 2530, etc. are arranged in the secured space. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more amusing to the players by making it possible to play or arrange a performance device.

[10. Various control processing of the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 137 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 147. FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side power-on processing, FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 142, and FIG. 144 is an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. 145 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing, FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing, and FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, followed by movement of the initial value update type counter, main control side power on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, error display processing, setting value confirmation Display processing will be described. In the following description, the main control MPU 1310a may be simply referred to as "main control MPU".

[10-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a special random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big win game state or a small win game state, and an initial value for hit determination for use in determining the initial value of this special random number A decision random number, a reach determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a reach (reach loss) when not generating a jackpot gaming state, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 A variable display pattern random number for use in determining a variable display pattern of special symbols to be variably displayed on the symbol display device, and a first special symbol display device and a second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 when a jackpot game state is generated. A symbol random number used for determining the jackpot symbols and minor winning symbols derived and displayed on the symbol display (determining the winning type), and a random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol used for determining the initial value of this symbol random number. etc are provided. Also, in addition to these random numbers, the normal symbol hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece that allows the reception of the game ball of the second start port 2004, and this normal symbol hit determination An initial value determination random number for determination of a normal symbol hit for use in determining the initial value of the random number, and a normal symbol for use in determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400. A random number for a variable display pattern is prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit built into the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and performs a high-speed preselection based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another, and when all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the main control Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the MPU. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number. It is designed to

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determining a normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated when the power is turned on, it is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total of various information as numerical values is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power failure processing (at power failure). When clearing except for a specific area out of all areas of the main control built-in RAM, such as when they do not match, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol per determination is stored in the non-volatile RAM that the main control MPU incorporates The ID code is extracted from the extracted ID code, and an initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol per determination is executed based on the extracted ID code, and this derived fixed value is set. In other words, the initial value determination random number for normal per symbol determination is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by the execution of the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value set to the initial value determination random number for normal per symbol determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU. The first security measure is to prevent the ID code from being rewritten using an external device once the ID code is stored. A second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code by execution is taken to prevent analysis by taking a two-step security measure.

Here, the advantage of taking out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU and using the taken out ID code as the initial value determination random number for determining the normal per symbol will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains game balls to be paid out as prize balls obtains the game board 5 by some means, disassembles it, and uses the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for illegally obtaining and updating the random number for normal pattern hit determination coincides with the normal pattern hit determination value, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU' provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5'. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5', that is, in the other pachinko machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at every predetermined interval obtained and the game ball is passed through the normal winning opening 2003 at each predetermined interval, the game ball can be received into the second starting opening 2004 by opening and closing the movable piece. It is not possible to generate a game state that becomes

[10-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU is circuit-configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Under the control of the main control MPU, as shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, main control side power-on processing is performed. When this main-control-side power-on process is started, the main control MPU sets RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S10, the main control MPU performs power failure clear processing (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs (phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes smaller than the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input as a power failure forecast from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until it rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). It is

Following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S14). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error cancel switch) that also serves three functions. Acts as a RAM clear switch function to completely erase the information. In this judgment, the main control MPU judges that the RAM clear is not performed when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that tells that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 has been operated is HI. If the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that tells that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is LOW, the RAM is cleared. It is determined that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated. It should be noted that the period from the start of the main control side power-on process, which is this routine, to the determination in step S14 is extremely short. The operator turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z.

When the main control MPU determines in step S14 that the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S14 that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, it sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). In other words, the main control MPU is in a state capable of executing RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls This flag indicates whether or not to erase various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, etc.). . The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not the body frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU receives a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and detects whether the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. Then, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) to turn the setting key switch 1311a to the first ON position. The setting key 1311a is turned ON, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is used. The main control MPU determines that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. It is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied by determining that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b. and/or it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON by the setting key ON signal, thereby determining that the predetermined set value change permission condition is not established.

When the main control MPU determines in step S18 that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, it sets the value 1 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S18 that the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied, it sets the value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20B). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is the current set value (set key cylinder of the set key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU (a set value dedicated area in a specific area, which will be described later). is a flag that indicates whether or not it is permitted to change the setting of the set value of the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time of the first ON operation, and the setting value is changed. It is set to a value of 1 when it is permitted to change the settings, and to a value of 0 when it is not permitted to change the setting values. The value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. In addition, since the payout control board 633 completes booting in a short time compared to the peripheral control board 1510 at the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process, the payout control board 633 is controlled by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU ) can receive various commands.

Following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage drops below the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure forecast. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure warning signal. When the main control MPU determines in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, it returns to the determination of step S24 and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. A detailed description of the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be given later.

When the main control MPU determines in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it determines whether or not the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is 0 (step S25). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the setting change of the setting value is permitted, and set to a value of 0 when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted.

In the determination of step S25, the main control MPU determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is 0, that is, when it is not permitted to change the setting of the setting value. (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when various information is erased, and is set to a value of 0 when various information is not erased. In the determination of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it determines that various information is not to be erased, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S28). This checksum is calculated by regarding the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S28, the main control MPU compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off), which will be described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). When the main control MPU determines in step S30 that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the main-control-side power-off process has been completed normally, and set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , will be described later.

When the main control MPU determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When (the value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has not ended normally, error display processing is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power supply interruption processing has not completed normally at the time of power supply interruption, If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is determined to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication.

The pachinko machine 1 is powered off, the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is shifted from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). After turning clockwise by 60 degrees and performing the first ON operation, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, is started again. The main control MPU determines that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b in the determination of step S18 described above, and sets according to the setting key ON signal. By determining that the setting key of the key switch 1311a is turned ON, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and the value 1 is set to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG in step S20A described above. , it is determined that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is 1 in the determination of step S25 described above, that is, it is determined that the setting change of the setting value is permitted, and the setting change of step S37 described later is performed. Following the process, in the process of step S38 to be described later, by clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can proceed ( Hereinafter, it will be described as "first RAM error canceling method").

As a method different from the first RAM error canceling method, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633. As a result, the main control side power-on process, which is the present routine, is started again. The main control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated in the determination of step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. Therefore, in the determination of step S26 described above, it is determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1, that is, the various information is to be erased, and in the processing of step S38 described later, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared. By clearing all but the specific area, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can proceed (hereinafter referred to as "second RAM error canceling method").

Thus, in this embodiment, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination of step S30, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU When the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally, an error is displayed in step S33, and the main control built-in RAM If there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the memory (or it is unreliable), there are two canceling methods: the first RAM error canceling method and the second RAM error canceling method. It can be done by As a result, when there is no need to change the settings of the set values, the RAM error can be cleared by performing the second RAM error clearing method using the RWM clear button 633z.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has ended normally, the main control built-in A working area of the RAM is set (step S34). For this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU progresses the game based on the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. "Restoration of power" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and fraudulent means (e.g. A high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device) is irradiated to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU itself resets and then returns.

Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum values (sum values), etc. are changed as a result of subsequent various processes, so that the main control side power failure processing (to be described later) ends normally and the backup flag BK- If FLG is not set to 1, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, as will be described later.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S25, when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when the setting value is permitted to be changed, the main control MPU executes the setting change process. (step S37). This setting change process, which will be described in detail later, is performed based on a signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633. FIG. As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switching button, and error canceling switch) that also serves three functions. Works as a button function. Every time the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, a signal (setting value selection switching signal) is input to change the setting value and display it on the setting display 1310g, and the setting key switch 1311a is changed. When the setting key cylinder is turned from the first ON operation to the second ON operation, the changed setting value is determined based on the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and built in the main control MPU. stored in a predetermined area of the RAM.

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it is determined to erase various information, the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for the specific area (step S38). Here, the main control MPU writes the value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (all areas of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area). In this embodiment, when the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it is determined to erase various information, and when the setting change process ends, the main control built-in RAM (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area)) is cleared. Here, the "specific area" means a set value dedicated area in which set values are stored, and a count of the number of game balls collected through an out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a divided and formed on the game board 5. and an out-ball counting dedicated area in which the result (total number) is stored. The set value dedicated area stores the set values to be changed in the setting change processing described later, and the out ball counting dedicated area stores the game balls collected by the out port 1008 counted in the ball count processing described later. The number count result (total number) is stored.

Note that the main control MPU may read a predetermined value from the main control internal ROM as an initial value and set it. In addition, the main control MPU is when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch, and the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that conveys that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated When erasing various information by instructing RAM clearing, when the sum value does not match, or when the main control side power failure processing is not completed normally, the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU A unique ID code stored in advance is taken out, and an initial value deriving process is carried out for always deriving the same fixed value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for judging a normal pattern based on the taken out ID code. A fixed value is set as the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination for use in determining the initial value of the normal symbol hit determination random number described above.

Following step S38, the main control MPU sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize number information output determination counter is set (set) to 0, which is the initial value. Further, the main control MPU progresses the game based on the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer set value is set in the WDT control register") to activate the main control built-in WDT and start counting time until the main control MPU is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is activated, the main control built-in WDT starts clocking, and until this clocked time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the watch dog timer clear register ( hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and starts timing, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register before the clocked time reaches the time set by the timer set value, The clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and clocking is restarted. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the clocking by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the clocking. It is possible to monitor whether or not

Following step S41, the main control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built in the main control MPU (for example, serial input/output ports (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the payout control board 633, serial input/output ports (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the peripheral control board 1510 ), the transmission serial port prescaler is set for the communication speed and the presence or absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is set for initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

Following step S44, the main control MPU performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various test information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the game machine testing facility.

Following step S46, the main control MPU performs activation setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state is stored in a hardware random number control register built into the main control MPU in order to update the hardware. Along with making settings such as latching and acquiring, settings such as activation of the hard random number circuit incorporated in the main control are set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU, and the predetermined When all the values within the numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, and the predetermined numerical range is rapidly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. successively extract the other values in the , without duplication. When the main control MPU acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit. A random number (random value) extracted by the random number circuit is obtained from a hard random number latch register incorporated in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets this acquired random number as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU performs reservation setting of commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). Create a power-on state command, a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when power is turned on, and use it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. memorize to In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this various information may be stored. be. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information, then the state command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. A detailed description of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be given later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). By this setting, the main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e to the main control MPU as a power failure warning. be done. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

In the judgment of step S54, when the main control MPU judges that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, the main control MPU performs non-hit-or-lose random number update processing (step S56). In this non-hit-lose random number update process, the above-described ready-to-win determination random numbers, variable display pattern random numbers, big-hit symbol initial value determination random numbers, small-hit symbol initial value determination random numbers, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-hit-lose random number update process, software updates the random numbers that are not related to the hit-lose determination (big hit determination). Incidentally, the above-described random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random numbers, normal symbol variation display pattern random numbers, etc. are also updated by this non-hit-lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, and the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is called "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S54 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protecting the above-mentioned game information and various information including other information from being rewritten.

Following step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting to output the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S12 is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU, for example, stops outputting drive signals to various displays of the function display unit 1400, the starting solenoid 2404, the attacker solenoid 2405, the base monitor 1310h, etc. (step S62).

After step S62, the main control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This setting of RAM access prohibition disables access to the main control built-in RAM, thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

After step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S41, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the clocking starts again. As a result, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU performs the main control side power-on process again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power failure processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU cannot perform the determination of step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power failure processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU is reset without executing the main control side power failure processing, and the main control side power on processing is executed again. . In other words, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power failure processing based on immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored because the main control side power failure processing is not executed. The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power failure processing is executed at the time of power failure, and the checksum calculated in step S28 when restarting after forced reset by the built-in reset circuit. There is no way that the value (sum value) and the value (sum value) match, and it always becomes a checksum (sum value) error in the main control built-in RAM. It will be completely erased (cleared).

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM is normal. are inspecting. By double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM in this way, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information has been stored by fraud.

Further, when it is determined in step S25 that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it is permitted to change the setting value, setting change processing is performed in step S37, In the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1). When it is determined that the various information should be erased, the information is completely erased (cleared) in the process of step S38 except for a specific area in the main control built-in RAM. In this way, when the pressing operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch and the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation is performed), and when a setting change that can change and determine the setting value is performed (when the main control MPU performs the setting change process), the main control MPU is the main control. Always clear the specified area of the control built-in RAM. This is when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch and when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, a state of probability variation (probability variation) winning, etc.), it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information described above before the start of the next business. Therefore, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch, a staff member such as a game hall clerk needs to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. Also, when deciding to change the setting value, if the setting change process is performed (even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value obtained before the setting change process is performed) It is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information including various information such as game information etc. from the main control built-in RAM.As described above, the setting key can change the set value as well as the current setting Since it is an important key that can be used to check the setting values, etc., only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, are allowed to possess it, and the number is limited to 2 to 3 people. is not decided to change, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, a staff member such as a game hall clerk can erase (clear) the game backup information by RWM When the clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, the game backup information is erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM. ).

Here, it will be described that the determination of the presence/absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 after the wait time standby process in step S22, and the subsequent processing proceeds. I will explain the problems in

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, is charged with the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off. DC +5 V is applied for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the charge charged in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as a DC +5 V to the island of the game hall. The main control-side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the equipment is cut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the island equipment of the game hall When the power supply from the main control side is cut off, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power cut-off processing.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 when the power is restored, the waiting time (boot timer) until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots). 2.5 seconds is set.), and if an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs immediately before reaching the standby time, a hardware called an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. is applied as DC +5V, within a period of about 7 ms, interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, it may not be possible to complete the main-control-side power-off processing in the main-control-side power-on processing. Therefore, the main control side power-on processing is started when the power is restored again without storing the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on processing is started, and the wait time standby processing of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. Instead, in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. In other words, when the power is restored, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch, and the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated by a staff member such as a game hall clerk to clear the RAM. There is a problem that the aforementioned game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no indication of intention by a staff member such as a hall clerk.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the game cannot be progressed. Before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step When it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the game cannot be progressed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize number information output determination counter) can be prevented from being updated, so that the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64 match. Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure from being initialized.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, step S22 When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process is determined by the determination in step S24), when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is progressing the game, the pachinko machine 1, the supply of power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, supplies game information and other information (e.g., the number of main prize balls) according to the progress of the game. Information indicating the value of the information output determination counter), which is a backup process for storing various information including the process of steps S58 to S68 and the process when the main control side power is turned off, which is composed of an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of 1310 can be completed, the main control MPU of the main control MPU, when it restarts, receives the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process. Since it is determined that the result (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64) matches, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by restoring the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control built-in WDT causes the main control MPU to forcibly reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S24, the power failure warning signal has not been input. As a result, the main control side power failure processing can be reliably completed within the "power supply securing period for momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power restoration, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, as DC +5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power failure processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22 In step S24, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input, and if the power failure warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is performed. is repeated, the game cannot be progressed.

By preventing the progress of the game by such software, the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission is enabled in step S52). By blocking the progress to the control flow of setting and starting the main control side timer interrupt processing described later), the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize number information output determination A mechanism was adopted in which updating of various information (including information indicating the value of the counter for use) can be avoided. In this way, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize number information output judgment (Information indicating the value of the counter for use, etc.)) is covered by software so that it is not changed at all, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and Other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the number of main prize balls) is divided into two parts, one is covered by hardware so that it is not changed at all. , The content of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls information, etc.)) is reliably prevented from being changed. can be done.

Next, a description will be given of the fact that a command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50. In step S50, as described above, power is turned on (power restored) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to communicate, create a power-on state command that is classified as power-on, a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when power is turned on, and built in the main control as transmission information. Stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2404 and information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2405 . Here, first, the problem in the case where the main control return destination command at power-on does not include information indicating the drive state of the starter solenoid 2404 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2405, that is, Next, a problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is not performed for the main control return destination command at power-on in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big win game state screen (for example, the big win game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2405. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening and closing member, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 performs the main control in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is restored, and the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to be driven to open and close the big winning port 2005. The state of being closed by the member is transferred to the state of being open.

However, if an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a jackpot game state as a game state, an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will not operate the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state and returned, the jackpot game state It is not possible to indicate at all which round of That is, for example, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 and is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403, the main control board issues a large winning hole 1 count display command to convey the number of game balls that have entered the big winning hole 2005. Even if 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 produces the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2405 and the large winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member, for example, when finishing the 4th round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state. The main control board 1310 sends a large prize winning opening 1 closed display command to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the transition from the open state to the closed state (that is, the closing start of the large winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2100 between rounds). , and when the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, it starts driving the attacker solenoid 2405 and opens the big winning port 2005 from the state closed by the opening and closing member. The main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a large winning hole opening 5th display command that instructs the transition to the state where the large winning hole 2005 is opened (that is, the opening of the 5th round of the large winning hole 2005). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state from the screen corresponding to the probability and time saving state described above and displays it in the display area of the effect display device 1600 .

In addition, for example, a screen that informs the player that the game ball can be accepted into the second start port 2004 and that the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, a screen that tells the player that the movable piece is open) When the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the start opening solenoid 2404 to open the movable piece and open the second start opening 2004 is in the open state, and when power is restored after that, the main control board 1310 resets the main control built-in RAM in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is restored, so that the start opening solenoid 2404 is started to drive and the movable piece is closed. A transition is made to a state in which the second start port 2004 is closed.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. , and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 as the game state, and the game state is generated in an advantageous game state for the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it is possible to display and return to the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is in a game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004, and it is in a game state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the transmitted screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. Therefore, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised at the momentary power failure or power failure, and when the power is restored, the game ball is accepted into the second start port 2004 just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is possible to forget that the game state is enabled, and in such a case, the game state is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 as the game state at the time of power restoration. Nevertheless, the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second start port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the power is restored. There is also a problem that the player does not know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 powers on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified as power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the command at power-on A counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 receives from the main control board 1310 based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, for example, in the above-described example, in the 4 rounds of the jackpot game state, When power is restored after a momentary power failure or power failure, the main control board 1310 is returned to, and the attacker solenoid 2405 starts to be driven to open the large winning opening 2005 from the closed state by the opening/closing member. Since it is possible to tell the peripheral control board 1510 to shift to the state, the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen specifying that it is 4 rounds of the jackpot gaming state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds) can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but it is in a jackpot game state, the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to be driven, and the big winning port 2005 is opened by the opening and closing member. (For example, a screen that conveys a message to the player, "It's a big win. The big winning slot is open. Play the game so that the game ball enters the big winning slot.") It is possible to instruct a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine by displaying it in the display area to enter a game ball into the big winning hole 2005 after power is restored. In a state in which a game ball can be accepted into the second start port 2004 and a game state is advantageous to the player, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, the main control board 1310 As a return destination, a screen notifying that the drive of the starting port solenoid 2404 is started to open the movable piece to open the second starting port 2004 (for example, "The movable piece is open. Play the game so as to enter the game ball into the second starting port.”) is displayed on the display area of the performance display device 1600 by the peripheral control board 1510, and the front surface of the pachinko machine. A game of entering a game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored to the player seated on the seat can be instructed.

As a result, when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the main control board 1310 side can give detailed instructions on the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 . Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power is restored. In other words, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection. Calculation and determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the power supply of the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has not executed the control-side power-off processing even once, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, the state command at the time of power-on classified as power-on, the main control return destination command at the time of power-on, and the main prize number information at the time of power-on By creating an output determination counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the main prize ball when the power is turned on. Only three commands, namely, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, these commands first transmit a power-on state command, then transmit a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then transmit the number of main prize balls when power is turned on. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command is the RWM clear button of the payout control board 633 when the power is turned on (including when the power is restored when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure in addition to when the power is turned on). When the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch and the depressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to clear the RAM, information instructing that effect, and when the power is turned on (in addition to turning on the power, Including when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), any of the above-mentioned low-probability short-time state, high-probability short-time state, low-probability non-short-time state, and high-probability non-short-time state state (probability and time saving state) and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem in the case where the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is not included in the power-on state command will be described.

The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times ), it is possible to specify whether the game specification (so-called ST machine, etc.) is such that probability fluctuations occur in the state where the game is played.

In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed. Then, the worker of the production line is the owner of the copyright of which work out of the copyrights of multiple kinds of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, manga E, and manga F). It becomes unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright for the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is required to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also an assumption or misunderstanding that it is flowing to the production line.

For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the production line may It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is copyrighted, and even if the same work is copyrighted, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) type), and what kind of game specification (game specification or ST machine that when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big win game state occurs).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works coexists, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is produced. The main control board 1310 is sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 with the 1310 mixed. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches to the game board 5 the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine In step S50, in order to transmit a power-on state command including information indicating to the peripheral control board 1510, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on A counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, an operator on the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying which type it is, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, a game specification code for specifying the game specification (such as ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited; Based on this, by visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 belongs to. The model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what kind of game specifications (if the probability change occurs, the state will continue until the next big win game state occurs) It is also possible to discriminate whether it is a game specification or ST machine).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line The operator can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications by looking at the inspection monitor, so that the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work can be sorted into the following. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5 .

[10-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 142 and 143 .

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU switches register banks as shown in FIG. 144 (step S100). The general-purpose storage elements (general-purpose registers) of the main control MPU have two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, switch the register bank to the other register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine is started, the processing of saving each register to the stack is not required.

Following step S100, the main control MPU performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 light up according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmitted Time management such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not a payer ACK signal that informs that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands is input or not. . Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. Then, when the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU, for example, the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402 detection signal, detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403, detection signal from the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, detection signal from the first V winning opening sensor 2514, detection signal from the first losing opening sensor 2515, second A detection signal from the V winning opening sensor 3003, a detection signal from the third losing opening sensor 3004, a detection signal from the outlet left sensor 3032 and the outlet right sensor 3033, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, and a payout control board 633 Signal from the RWM clear button 633z (Since the signal from the RWM clear button 633z is not an important signal in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, it may be masked to omit reading.) , detection signal from the door frame open switch 4a, detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b, signal from the setting key switch 1311a, detection signal from the outlet left sensor 3032, detection signal from the outlet right sensor 3033, which will be described later. The payout control board 633 conveys that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process, respectively. store in the area. In addition, when the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402 are read, respectively, the corresponding starting opening winning command classified into others is stored in the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Store in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start sensor 3002, a start win prize command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second start sensor 2402 When there is a detection signal, a start-up winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

In the present embodiment, the state in which all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those subjected to vacant terminal processing) is changed when this switch input processing is started. , are read for the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, they are read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. A determination is made as to whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is not the same, it is read again for the third time, and the result of the third reading is compared with the result of the second reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the fourth time, and the result of the fourth reading is compared with the result of the third reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball or as if the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those subjected to vacant terminal processing) is changed over the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Since it is possible, the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, Detection signal from big winning opening sensor 2403, detection signal from accessory winning opening sensor 2513, detection signal from first V winning opening sensor 2514, detection signal from first losing opening sensor 2515, second V winning opening sensor A detection signal from 3003, a detection signal from the third loss sensor 3004, a detection signal from the outlet left sensor 3032 and the outlet right sensor 3033, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633. (For example, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button, it becomes a setting value selection switching signal for selecting and switching the setting value.), a detection signal from the door frame open switch 4a, the main body frame A detection signal from the open switch 4b, a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, a detection signal from the outlet left sensor 3032, a detection signal from the outlet right sensor 3033, and a prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later are paid out. It is possible to improve the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that informs that the control board 633 has received it normally.

Following step S104, the main control MPU performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal failure monitoring process, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU that have undergone idle terminal processing is checked based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to the ground (GND) as an idle terminal processing, so the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information obtained in the switch input process in step S104 determines whether or not the logic state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal process is performed is LOW among the input terminals of the various input ports. based on When the main control MPU judges that the logic state of the input terminal subjected to empty terminal processing is not LOW, the main control MPU is divided into a notification display to inform that a malfunction has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU. The defective command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU performs win-loss random number update processing (step S106). In this winning/losing random number update process, the above-described symbol random number is updated. Also, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 143, And the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols is also updated. These big hit symbol initial value determination random numbers and small winning symbol initial value determination random numbers are updated in the main control side main process and this main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby enhancing the randomness. . On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to win/lose determination (win/lose determination), each counter counts up only each time this win/lose random number update process is performed. Incidentally, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this win-lose random number update process.

For example, the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is, as described above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the minimum value is counted up toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by this win/lose random number update process. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value of the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value of the small winning symbol are set to the non The win/lose random number update process and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively, but each time an interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-hit-lose random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the small-hit symbol initial value determination random number may be updated only in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU performs ball number counting processing (step S107). In this ball counting process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a detection signal is input from the out-hole left sensor 3032, and a game area 5a is divided and formed on the game board 5. When the out-port left sensor 3032 detects a game ball collected by the out-port 1008 provided in the above, the value of the collected ball counter for counting the number of game balls collected by the out-port 1008 is set to 1. Addition (increment) operation is performed, and a detection signal from the out-hole right sensor 3033 is input, and the game balls collected by the out-hole 1008 provided in the game area 5a sectioned and formed on the game board 5 are moved to the out-hole. When the right sensor 3033 detects it, the value of the recovered ball counter that counts the number of game balls recovered through the out port 1008 is added (incremented) by one. That is, in the ball counting process, when the out-port left sensor 3032 detects a game ball collected by the out-port 1008 and the out-port right sensor 3033 detects a game ball collected by the out port 1008, , to add 2 to the value of the recovered ball counter. The main control MPU stores the value of the collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the count result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, in the out ball count dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. At the same time, the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor 1310h is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. In addition, when the value of the recovered ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, every time the number of game balls recovered at the out port 1008 reaches 10, the main control MPU creates a ball recovery command to notify that effect. and stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. It should be noted that the main control MPU, when the value of the recovered ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value is 65535) and further adds (increments) the value of the recovered ball counter by 1 to the value of the recovered ball counter, The value of the counter overflows and becomes a value of 0, and an operation to add from this value of 0 is performed.

Following step S107, the main control MPU performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read out from the input information storage area described above, and a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between boards. Then, the generated prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning hole 2005, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 prize balls, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10. Therefore, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, the output information is stored in the output information storage area, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, and this prize ball When the payout control board 633 does not receive a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received the command within a predetermined time, a self-check command for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is issued. It is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633 .

Further, in the prize ball control process of step S108, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, the input information is read out from the input information storage area and based on this input information. , a main prize number information output command classified as other is created to convey that effect, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize number information output determination counter is determined based on the input information read out from the above-described input information storage area. Based on the game ball that entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 (hereinafter referred to as "various winning openings provided on the game board 5") , the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is counted, and in the prize ball control processing of step S108, the memory is updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. . In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read out. is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of 10. (that is, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10), a main prize number information output command is created to notify that effect, and as transmission information In addition to storing in the output information storage area, the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize number information output determination counter. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (eg, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to notify the payout control board 633 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU formats the command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command)) are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S110, the main control MPU performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent act detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize balls is checked. If it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation") is being performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation counter is incremented by one. The value of this radio wave counter is incremented each time radio wave irradiation is determined in the fraudulent act detection process. When the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle at which the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed in the fraud detection processing. ), a radio wave irradiation notification command classified into a notification display indicating that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Further, in the fraud detection process in step S112, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 is input, fraud using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as "magnet goto") is detected. ) is being performed, and the value of the magnetic goto counter is incremented by one. The value of this magnet counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation is performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. A value of 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnetic goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle at which the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed in the fraudulent act detection processing. ), a magnet informing command classified into informing display indicating that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the magnetic goto with such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the fact that the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall can discover the magnetic goto at an early stage. It's becoming

Further, in the fraudulent act detection process of step S112, for example, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403 is input when it is not in the jackpot game state (big winning opening 2005 when a game ball enters), a winning abnormality display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. .

In the fraud detection process in step S112, when the radio wave irradiation goto and/or the magnet goto are detected, the value 1 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud, while the radio wave emission goto and the magnet When no fraud is detected, the value 0 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as no fraud is detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and is set to 0 (zero) as an initial value when the RAM is cleared. Also, when detecting the occurrence of an abnormal winning of a large winning opening, the value 1 may be set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud.

Following step S112, the main control MPU performs a firing enable signal setting process (step S113). In this firing permission signal setting process, the logic of the firing permission signal that tells the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 to allow the firing of the game ball B is set. Specifically, when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is 0 based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG, the main control MPU determines that fraud has not been detected. Sometimes, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing permission logic and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. is detected, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. The main control MPU reads out the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, receives a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a to open the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4. When the door frame open switch 4a detects that the door frame open switch 4a is open, the body frame open switch 4b detects that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by inputting a detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b. In this case, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the firing permission logic, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. As an initial value (default), the logic of the firing permission signal is set after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored). It is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the firing permission logic is set until the start of the firing.

Following step S113, the main control MPU performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is Obtained from a hard random number latch register built into the control MPU, and set this obtained random number as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU) matches the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (jackpot It is determined whether or not to generate a game state (referred to as "special lottery")), and the value of the counter for updating the symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type and the small hit type. It is determined (determines the hit type) whether it matches with any of the hit type determination values.

When these determination results (lottery results) are due to the first start opening sensor 3002, while creating various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, the determination results (lottery results) are the second start opening sensor 2402 If it is due to, various commands related to special figure 2 tuning effect are created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the above-described random number for the variable display pattern. Then, the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 so as to light up the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined special symbol fluctuation display pattern The output of the lighting signal to the display is set, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, according to the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big win game state, various commands (big win opening command, big winning mouth 1 open Nth time display command, big winning mouth 1 closing display command, big win Winning mouth 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or for example, a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 to open and close the opening and closing member. The output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. The output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round indicator lamp is set so as to light the round indicator lamp, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area. A function display unit 1400 for setting the output of a lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp so as to light the 15-round display lamp, storing it in the output information storage area as output information, and lighting the presence or absence of time saving in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control MPU performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the normal winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening prize processing, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol per judgment random number is extracted and incorporated into the main control as normal winning opening winning prize information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

0th section to 3rd section (four sections) are provided in this normal winning opening winning information storage area, and the normal winning opening is provided in order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning opening prize information is stored in the 0th to 2nd divisions of the normal winning opening winning information memory, when the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal of the input port, it is normal The winning opening winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When the normal winning opening winning information is set, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage and the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. The normal winning entry winning information of the section is stored in the first section of the normal winning entry winning information storage, and the normal winning entry winning information of the third section of the normal winning entry winning information storage is stored in the second section of the normal winning entry winning information storage. After shifting, the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the normal winning entry winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the normal winning entry winning information storage, the normal winning entry winning information in the first section of the normal winning entry winning information storage is the normal winning entry. The normal winning prize winning information in the second division of the normal winning prize information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the normal winning prize information storage, and the normal winning prize winning prize information in the second section of the normal winning prize winning prize information storage is shifted to the first section of the normal winning prize winning prize information storage. The 2nd section and the 3rd section of the normal winning opening prize information storage become empty areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first section to the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is regarded as a reserved ball, and the normal winning opening of the function display unit 1400 Based on the above-described normal winning opening winning prize information, the output of the lighting signal for the normal holding display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the holding display, and is stored as the output information in the above-described output information storage area.

Following the normal winning opening winning process, the normal winning opening winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining the normal winning opening is taken out from the read normal winning opening winning information, and the main control is performed. It is determined whether or not it coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on the determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 by opening the movable piece, and the game state is advantageous to the player. The normal symbol variation display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-described random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, various commands classified into the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, and the above-described transmission information storage is performed as transmission information. In addition to storing in the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for judging normal symbol hit matches the normal hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to normal electric role performance are created and transmitted. Information is stored in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2412 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. When the value of the random number for symbol hit determination does not match the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern. , create various commands classified into normal pattern synchronization production related, store as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and light the normal design indicator of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal design fluctuation display pattern The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to cause it to be set, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. In this example, the winning probability of the normal lottery (probability of winning a normal prize) is 1/2.

Following step S116, the main control MPU performs setting value confirmation display processing (step S117). In this setting value confirmation display process, which will be described in detail later, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area and, based on this input information, a process for detecting opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. A detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b and a setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is in the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder is rotated to turn off the setting key switch 1311a). position), the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by being rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a causes the external By judging that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the frame 2 and judging that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. is established, while it is determined that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b, and/or the setting key is determined by the setting key ON signal. By determining that the setting key of the switch 1311a is not ON, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied. In the setting value confirmation display process, when the setting value display permission condition is satisfied, a lighting signal for displaying the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g. is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. On the other hand, if the set value display permission condition is satisfied, the process ends and returns to this routine.

Following step S117, the main control MPU performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the above-described output information storage area from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control MPU, for example, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information, when the various commands from the payout control board 633 has been normally received, the payout control board 633 the main payout ACK signal Or, when in a jackpot game state, output a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 that performs the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member of the big winning port 2005, and output a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2412 that performs the opening and closing operation of the movable piece In addition, 15 rounds big hit information output signal, 2 rounds big hit information output signal, small hit information output signal, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, short time medium information output signal, start winning prize information Various information (game information) signals related to games such as output signals are output to the payout control board 633, or a launch permission signal set to the firing permission logic or firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) is output to the payout control board 633. Or output a display signal to the base monitor 1310h that displays the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, or store it in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM It outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S118, the main control MPU performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands that are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands that are classified into special figure 2 tuning effect related, and are classified into jackpot related Various commands (for example, a large winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to a large winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 2403 when a game ball entering the large winning opening 2005 is detected) , Various commands categorized as power on, various commands categorized as related to normal drawing synchronization effects, various commands categorized as normal electric role effects related, various commands categorized as notification display, various commands as categorized as status display Commands, various commands classified into test-related commands, and various commands classified into others (for example, the main control board 1310 is scheduled to pay out prize balls based on the game balls that enter various winning holes provided on the game board 5 Each time the number of game balls reaches 10, a main prize ball number information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 558 as main prize ball number information. number information output command, etc.), and various commands classified into a specific history (for example, a ball collection command that notifies each time the number of game balls collected at the outlet 1008 reaches 10 balls, and set values are set). A setting change command that informs that a change has been made, an error display command that informs that there is an abnormality (or is unreliable) in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM, a specific area of the main control built-in RAM A setting key ON operation command for confirming a setting value stored in a setting value dedicated area, which will be described later, is stored. One packet of the main circumferential serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. As described above, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. The main-circumference serial transmission port incorporated in the main control MPU transfers at least the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit, and completes transmission from the transmission shift register as main-circumference serial data. is now possible. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the power is turned on, the In order to notify that the power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be performed, the power-on status command, which is classified as power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information output judgment counter at power-on Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the order of the status, mode, and sum value that constitutes the power-on state command as the main peripheral serial data Transmit to the peripheral control board 1510, then transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value constituting the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then main prize ball number information when power is turned on. The status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the output determination counter notification command, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information, then the state command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

It should be noted that when the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10 balls, when a ball collection command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to that effect, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the command. For each ball collection command issued, the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 is counted, and ball collection information (counted value (that is, at the out port 1008 Information that associates the total number of game balls to be collected) with the updated date and time) is updated. It should be noted that, if the pachinko machine 1 is powered off due to the end of the business hours of the game hall without being able to receive the ball recovery command, the last counted value (that is, the game balls recovered at the outlet 1008) Ball recovery information in which the total number of balls (total number of balls) and the updated date and time are associated is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the game hall starts operating, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 stores and retains the ball collection information stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The ball recovery information is created again from the start date, and the ball recovery information is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) as ball recovery history information. It should be noted that the counted value to be stored as ball collection information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may be a value counted from 0 (zero) on that day, or a value counted from 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the sum of the counted values so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122) and ends this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT in step S122 is performed by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU. As a result, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, by restarting the clocking by the main control built-in WDT, the main control MPU can be prevented from being forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 has the above-described backup function for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The processing can be executed and completed, and at the time of power restoration, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup processing was executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. output to the peripheral control board 1510 when the main control is to be returned to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on. It is possible to do so. In other words, the main control board 1310, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at step S50 in the power-on process on the main control side shown in FIG. In order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of , a power-on state command classified as power-on, When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command and when the power is turned on, the main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in step S120 of this routine. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, as main peripheral serial data, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, and then the main control return destination at power-on. The status, mode, and sum value that make up the command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, followed by the status, mode, and sum value that make up the counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when the power is turned on. are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration to the display area of the effect display device 1600. can be displayed in As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while a player is playing a game and power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, since the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and notified, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding that the machine is out of order. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that there is a malfunction by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored.

Also, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. At step S38 in the main control side power-on processing shown, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are always cleared except for a specific area. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same processing shown in FIG. , main control return destination command when power is turned on, and main prize number information output determination counter notification command when power is turned on and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM State command, main control return destination command when power is turned on, and main prize number information output determination counter notification command when power is turned on. Only three commands are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on state command, are sent as the main peripheral serial data to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in this order. Then, transmit to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then output the main prize ball number information when the power is turned on. The status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the determination counter notification command, are transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in this order. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code for specifying which type is the above-mentioned model type from the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (For example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of special symbol changes is limited (ST machine), etc.), and based on this, detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process.

[16-4. Setting change process]
Next, setting change processing will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current setting values as shown in FIG. 145 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU obtains the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this setting value, it may be read out or taken out. When the setting value is taken out, the taken out setting value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is calculated by considering various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the sum. This is the same processing as the calculation of .

Following step S202, the main control MPU stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off) in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the checksum value (sum value) matches (step S204). When the main control MPU determines in step S204 that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 142, respectively. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control side power failure processing described later. A flag that indicates whether or not data is stored in the RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power failure processing has been completed normally, and to a value of 0 when the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally. be done.

When the main control MPU determines in step S204 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When (the value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main-control-side power-off processing has not ended normally, it is determined whether or not the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). . Here, the "normal range" is a value that can be set and changed. It is preset to values up to a value of 6. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM by proceeding to the determination of step S208, or when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally at the time of power-off. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). Therefore, in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU determines that the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM obtained in step S200 are set values 1 to 6, which are within the normal range. It is determined whether or not it is in any of the values, and when it is determined that it is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines that it is out of the normal range in the determination of step S208, it sets the set value 1, which is the initial value, to the set value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination of step S208, the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM obtained in step S200 is within the normal range of setting values 1 to 6. However, the main control MPU determines that the checksum value (sum value) does not match in the determination of step S204 without performing the determination of step S208. or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally. In some cases, the processing of step S210 may proceed and the setting value 1, which is the initial value, may be set for the setting value acquired in step S200.

In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when the main control side power failure processing has been normally completed, or in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU When the MPU determines that it is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to light the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value on the setting display 1310g, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). .

Following step S214, the main control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is being operated (step S216). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switching button, and error canceling switch) that also serves three functions. Works as a button function. This determination reads a signal (set value selection switching signal) that tells that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 has been operated, and inputs a set value setting change signal from the RWM clear button 633z. Determine whether or not The main control MPU determines that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated when the setting value selection switching signal is input from the RWM clear button 633z, while the main control MPU determines that the setting value from the RWM clear button 633z is changed. When the selection switching signal has not been input, it is determined that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated.

When the main control MPU determines in step S216 that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, the main control MPU adds (increments) the set value by 1 to update it (step S218). ). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set in .

Following step S218, the main control MPU outputs to the setting indicator 1310g a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting indicator 1310g, and the updated setting value is displayed on the setting indicator 1310g. is displayed (step S220).

Following step S220 or in the judgment of step S216, when the main control MPU judges that the depressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, the main control MPU determines whether or not the decision key has been operated. Determine (step S222). In this determination, the main control MPU sets the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. When the key cylinder is rotated by 120 degrees (that is, the setting key cylinder is rotated from the rotational position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). (rotation position) is turned counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and further turned counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it back to the second ON operation. 1311a determines that the enter key has been operated based on the enter key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and determines that the enter key has been operated when the enter key ON signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a; When the determination key ON signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the determination key has not been operated.

When the main control MPU determines in step S222 that the enter key has not been operated, it returns to the determination in step S216 to determine whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated. In the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, the processing of steps S218 and S220 is performed again, the determination of step S222 is performed, and the decision key is pressed. is not operated, the process returns to the determination of step S216 again, and each time the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the set value is changed to 1 until the decision key is operated. is added and updated and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and if the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the setting value updated immediately before by operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is displayed on the setting display 1310g. to be displayed. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored before it is determined in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the set value updated immediately before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is used by the main control system. Since it is not stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the built-in RAM, it is discarded and the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, when the determination in step S222 determines that the decision key has been operated, the main control MPU stores the updated set values in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area , the updated setting value is returned to the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. After completion of the process of step S224, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored, the updated set values when the enter key is operated before the power failure or momentary power failure occur are stored in the main control built-in RAM. is stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of

After step S224, the main control MPU determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S226). In this judgment, the main control MPU moves the setting key cylinder from the initial position (that is, setting key 1311a) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the turning position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the switch 1311a. When the OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. Sometimes it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

When the main control MPU determines in step S226 that the setting key has not been turned OFF, the main control MPU returns to the determination in step S226 and repeats the determination in step S226 until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S226 that the setting key has been turned OFF, it stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. Then, the updated setting values are hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

After step S230, the main control MPU sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to 0 (step S232). This setting change permission flag CS-FLG is, as described above, the current set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (when the set key cylinder of the set key switch 1311a is first turned ON). A flag that indicates whether or not to permit the setting change of the setting value of setting value 1 to setting value 6 at the time of operation, and is used when permitting the setting change of the setting value. It is set to a value of 1, and to a value of 0 when it is not permitted to change the setting of the set value. In the process of step S232, the value 0 is set to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG, thereby disallowing the setting change of the setting values thereafter.

After step S232, the main control MPU determines whether the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). "Normal range" is the same as the determination in step S208. It is preset to values up to a value of 6. In the determination of step S233, the main control MPU determines whether the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 is normal in order to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value. A determination is made as to whether or not the value is within the range of set values 1 to 6, and if it is determined to be within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

In the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU determines that it is within the normal range, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S234), then creates a setting change command to set transmission information (step S236), Subsequently, peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing is performed to transmit the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data (step S238), and this routine ends. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting of step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is mainly transmitted in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S238 prior to the serial communication initial setting of step S44. Although it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as peripheral serial data, this is prioritized before the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the processing at power-on on the main control side shown in FIG. This is to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed by the setting change command. The setting change command is a command for notifying the changed setting value and the completion of storing the setting value. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the setting value history information (information that associates the setting value with the date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). do.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range in the determination of step S233, it performs error display processing (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power supply interruption processing has not completed normally at the time of power supply interruption, If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is determined to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication.

[16-5. Setting value confirmation display process]
Next, setting value confirmation display processing will be described. This setting value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

When the setting value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU determines whether or not the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0 (step S350), as shown in FIG. This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Each is set to the value 0 when the value is not being acknowledged.

In the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0, that is, when the setting value is not displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU determines whether the body frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON. (step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, detects the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. A setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder moves clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to turn off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by being rotated by 60 degrees and the first ON operation is performed. is open, and it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by the setting key ON signal, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established. On the other hand, it is determined that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b, and/or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. It is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied by determining that there is no display.

When the main control MPU determines in step S352 that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU ends this routine as it is, while the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the setting value is to be displayed for confirmation, the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to 1 (step S354), and then the current setting value is obtained (step S356). Here, the main control MPU obtains the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

After step S356, the main control MPU determines whether or not the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The “normal range” is the same as the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. A value of 3, a set value of 4, a set value of 5, and a set value of 6 are set in advance. In the determination of step S357, the main control MPU, in order to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value, the set value acquired in step S356 (that is, the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM set value stored in ) is within the normal range of set values 1 to 6, and if it is determined to be within the normal range, use the set value as it is. do.

In the determination of step S357, when the main control MPU determines that the set value obtained in step S356 is within the normal range, it outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU creates a setting key ON operation command, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and sets the setting key ON operation command (step S360 ) to end the routine. This setting key ON operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The ON operation command of the setting key indicates that the set value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has started (that is, confirms the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM). This is the command to send.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key ON operation command, the setting key ON operation history information (set value confirmed) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) is stored. (Information that associates the message with the date and time) is updated.

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the above-described ball collection history information, set value history information, error display history information, and setting key ON operation history information are generated. A predetermined specific history information display permitting condition is satisfied that the display of the specific history information can be permitted. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 is controlled by a person who confirms the specific history information in a state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied. , the image that has been displayed so far is switched to a specific history information display image that selectively displays specific history information, and is controlled to be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 .

On the other hand, in the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU determines whether the setting key has been turned OFF. It is determined whether or not (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is pressed. The setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the decision key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning off the setting key switch 1311a. When the setting key switch 1311a receives an off signal from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned off. On the other hand, when the OFF signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

When the main control MPU determines in step S362 that the setting key has not been turned off, it terminates this routine as it is. The confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to 0 (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped. Then, the acquired setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S366), and then a setting key OFF operation command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , the OFF operation command of the setting key is set (step S368), and this routine is terminated. This setting key OFF operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The OFF operation command of the setting key indicates that the setting value confirmation display processing of this routine has ended (that is, the confirmation of the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been completed). is a command that tells

Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the above-described predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not satisfied. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 has performed control to display the above-described specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, immediately before switching to the specific history information display image. Control is performed to switch to the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and return to the original image.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S357, when the main control MPU judges that it is not within the normal range, it sets interrupt non-permission (step S370). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 144, which is repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

Following step S370, the main control MPU performs error display processing (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop in which the main control built-in WDT continues to be cleared (step S374). Due to this infinite loop, the main control built-in WDT continues to be cleared. By setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built into the control MPU, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and by restarting the clocking by the main control built-in WDT, the main control built-in WDT starts the main control. The MPU does not have to be reset forcibly. In addition, the infinite loop maintains the state in which the error display processing is completed, and the game cannot be progressed at all, so that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power supply interruption processing has not completed normally at the time of power supply interruption, If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is determined to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[16-6. Error display processing]
Next, error display processing will be described. This error display process is the process performed in step S33 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 142, and the process performed in step S37 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 146), and is the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 147 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal informs the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted. On the other hand, if the logic is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the launch permission logic, it is possible to tell that the launch is to be stopped (non-permission). .

The error display process of this routine is one of the processes performed in step S33 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 142 or the process performed in step S37 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. (Specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 145), the main control MPU interrupts step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Since the permission setting cannot be performed, the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 144 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting processing of step S113 in the same processing cannot be performed. Since the firing permission signal is output to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with the reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU, at the time of power recovery, The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is fire stop logic (fire non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the fire permission logic.

Therefore, the error display processing of this routine is the processing performed in step S33 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 142 or the processing performed in step S37 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. When started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 145), the main control MPU restores the power in step S400 and then displays an error display in this routine. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being shot even after the process has started, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic), and its predetermined output port is set. output terminal to the discharge control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function.

When the error display process, which is this routine, is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. In the determination, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM. Although the main control MPU has already performed the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 143, the error display process shown in FIG. Since the interrupt non-permission setting is performed in step S370 in the setting value confirmation display processing, when the error display processing of this routine ends, an infinite loop is entered as described above. Timer interrupt processing cannot be performed, and firing enable signal setting processing in step S113 in the same processing cannot be performed.

Therefore, when the error display process, which is this routine, is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired in a certain state, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) and reset from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. It outputs to the launch control section 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g to display an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400. FIG.

Following step S404, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), and then sets in step S406. A peripheral control board transmission command transmission process for transmitting transmission information (error display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data is performed (step S410), and this routine ends.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 145 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S410 is the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S238 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 145, and the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120. The error display processing, which is this routine, is the processing performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 146) and step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all.

Therefore, in this embodiment, serial communication initialization is performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 is used as main peripheral serial data in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S410. Sending to 1510.

The error display command is a command to notify that there is an abnormality (or that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is unreliable). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stores and holds error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the received date and time) in the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). ).

In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays a blue background image saying "A RAM error has occurred. Please call an attendant." Control is performed to display a message image of white characters, and an announcement of "A RAM error has occurred. Please call a member of staff." Control is performed so that the sound is forcibly set to the maximum volume without being dependent on the sound volume, and is played from various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, body frame speaker 622, etc.). The processing for notifying the RAM error by the error display command is the processing with the highest priority. Prioritize error reporting.

[11. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 151. FIG. FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit, FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit in FIG. 148, and FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the power-on process, and FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[11-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, as shown in FIGS. . When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU. In this embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing described later is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt processing occurs, the processing is performed preferentially.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input/output setting (input/output setting of I/O) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs (phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. . Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage after the power is turned on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 . Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage after the power is turned on and stabilized. ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is made based on a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. FIG.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated (step S512). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error cancellation switch) that also serves three functions, and here, it is stored in a predetermined area of the payout control built-in RAM Acts as a RAM clear switch function to completely erase the information. In this determination, when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that tells that the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is HI, it is determined that the RAM is not cleared, and the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is depressing. While it is determined that the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, if the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that tells that the depressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is to be cleared, and the RWM clear button 633z is pressed. It is determined that the pressing operation part is being operated.

In the judgment of step S512, when the payout control MPU judges that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, it sets the value 1 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S514). In other words, the payout control MPU makes it possible to perform RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) over a predetermined period of time from the power-on.

On the other hand, when the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, it sets the value 0 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, prize ball information storage area The logic state of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc., and the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area are set. This is a flag indicating whether or not to erase the payout information related to payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.). Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). This setting enables access to the payout control built-in RAM, and enables writing (storage) or reading of payout information, for example.

After step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or a temporary return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the register contents, return address, etc. are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased, and set to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it determines not to erase the payout information (step S524). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in payout control unit power-off processing (at power-off) described later. (step S526). When the payout control MPU determines that they match in step S526, it determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in payout control unit power failure processing described later. A value of 1 is set when the control unit power failure processing is normally completed, and a value of 0 is set when the payout control unit power failure processing is not completed normally.

In the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power failure processing has been normally completed, payout control built-in RAM is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM), Information is set in the working area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, which are the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various information stored in the various information storage areas (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area) Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area, in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of mismatch counter reset determination time, etc., stored in the time management information storage area. Note that "recovery of power" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, but also the state in which the power has been restored after a power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it determines to erase the payout information, or in the determination of step S526, When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, When it is determined that the processing at the time of power failure of the payout control unit has not ended normally, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the working area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set the interrupt period when the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). Due to this setting, the interrupt period set in step S536, that is, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every 2 ms.

After step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in this order.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. be done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination of step S540, when the payout control MPU determines that there is no power failure warning signal input, it determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU returns to step S540, and the payout control MPU receives the power failure warning signal. Determine whether or not

On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544 ).

After step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various kinds of information are read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information that informs that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command and self-check command) have been received normally, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display are stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 and the drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Alternatively, the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal plate 558 as a winning ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually pays out 10 game balls). A prize number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 each time the ball is played.

Specifically, a winning ball number information output determination counter is provided for determining whether or not to output the winning ball number information. The number of game balls put out is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550, which will be described later. is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) not shown for monitoring.

In the process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, the number of prize balls information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM The number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 to be described later, and the memory is updated.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize number information output determination counter value is read from the prize ball information storage area. In other words, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10, a prize number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as the value of the counter for determining the number of prize balls information output), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z (for example, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as an error clearing switch, it becomes an error clearing signal for notifying that the error displayed on the error LED indicator has been cleared), A detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, a BRDY signal, and a CR connection signal, which are transmitted by the command transmission process described later. The main payment ACK signal or the like from the main control board 1310 that informs that the main control board 1310 has received the various commands normally received is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, when determining whether or not the ball is stuck due to the payout vane 589 to which the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the ball stickiness determination time set as the determination condition; Skip determination time that is set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the bottom tray 202 is full with the game balls stored During the full tank judgment time, it is judged whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 is a predetermined number or more. In addition to performing time management such as the ball out judgment time set as the judgment condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591 When determining whether or not to reset an inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not inconsistent game ball payouts due to inconsistency between the number of balls detected in step 1 and the number of balls detected in step 1 are repeated Time management is performed for the mismatch counter reset determination time that is set as the condition. For example, when the ball jam determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms. By setting it to 0, it accurately measures the time it takes to determine if the ball is stuck. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) are input from the CR unit is checked. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage areas etc. (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout such as PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the signal is set.

By this process, for example, even if there is an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. just before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is executed and the payout operation cannot be continued due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the payout operation can be continued when the power is restored. Therefore, the game balls can be put out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 just enough. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit, and when game balls are being put out to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202, an instantaneous power failure or power outage causes the CR unit to Even if the exchange of various signals is interrupted and the game ball payout cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration By restoring the value stored as payout backup information to the value of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, the instantaneous The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before a power failure or power failure can be continued from the time of power restoration, and the payout of game balls can be continued. ing.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or stoppage when the power is restored even if the momentary power failure or stoppage occurs. This prevents the various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit from changing due to the effects of an instantaneous power failure or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be enhanced.

Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. If the PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever is set to, for example, a logic state of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is impossible, the PRDY signal is put out control. Output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU to the CR unit. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process, for example, which is performed as one process of the main operation setting process, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. , that is, the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is determined to be in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball stick operation determination setting processing, As an error status output setting to the CR unit, for example, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal is output to notify that the payout operation to pay out the rental balls is impossible when the CR unit is not in communication. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logic state of the PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt after the power is restored, and the PRDY signal is sent to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, the state is restored when the power is restored. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the dispensing operation for dispensing the rental balls is impossible can be output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU to the CR unit. It is possible to inform that the game ball payout operation by is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal, at an extremely early stage after power is restored.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to notify that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible. While outputting the logic state of the signal as HI to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU sets the logic state of the PRDY signal to LOW in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is impossible. is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. In addition, the logic state of the EXS signal that informs the start or end of one payout operation is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 633 and A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing (step S556). In this full-tank and ball-out check process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a game ball stored in the lower tray 202 is detected by a detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154. , and the number of game balls introduced into the guide passage 570a of the above-described ball guide unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 exceeds a predetermined number. and determine whether or not For example, the determination of whether or not the bottom tray 202 is full of stored game balls is made by using the timer interrupt period of 2 ms, and the full tank detection sensor 154 is detected in the current full tank and out of ball check processing. When the detection signal is ON, and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned OFF in the previous (2 ms ago) full tank and ball out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned from OFF to ON. When the transition is made, timing of the above-described full-tank determination time is started in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the full-tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full-tank determination time is reached, the full-tank and out-of-ball check process checks whether the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON. determine whether or not In this determination, when the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON, full-tank information indicating that the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls is stored in the above-described state information storage area. do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is not full with the stored game balls, and the full-tank information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

Judgment whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also performed using the timer interrupt period of 2 ms in this full tank and ball out check process. When the detection signal from the ball-out switch is ON, and the detection signal from the ball-out switch is OFF in the previous (2ms ago) full tank and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 is When it transitions from OFF to ON, it starts counting the above-mentioned dead ball determination time in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the dead ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the dead ball determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the dead ball detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and dead ball check process determine whether or not In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 is ON, the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is determined to be equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and the ball run-out is notified to that effect. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number. Bulb-out information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command and self-check command) are received. When these various commands are normally received, payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands can not be received normally, there is an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (abnormality occurs in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs main action setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, rental balls, ball removal, and ball picking are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of prize balls in stock) is monitored. .

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-described state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored as LED display information in the above-described output information storage area. do. For example, the above-mentioned out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, and based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a corresponding action is taken. Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created, and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various kinds of information are read out from the above-described state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into state displays are created based on the various information. and transmit it to the main control board 1310 . For example, when the out-of-ball information is read out from the state information storage area, if the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is less than a predetermined number based on this out-of-ball information, frame state 1 It creates commands and transmits them to the main control board 1310 .

After step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, returning to step S539, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines in step S540 whether or not a power failure warning signal is input, and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, 2 ms has elapsed, step S544. At step S546, the value 0 is set to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, the value B is set to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL at step S546, port output processing is performed at step S548, port input processing is performed at step S550, and step S552. performs timer update processing, performs CR communication processing in step S554, performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing in step S556, performs command reception processing in step S558, performs command analysis processing in step S560, and performs command analysis processing in step S562. Main operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. conduct. The processing of steps S539 to S568 is called "payout control unit main processing".

Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310, the processing contents of the payout control unit main processing differ. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU will fluctuate. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal that indicates that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received. there is Thereby, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so as to sufficiently perform other processing that fluctuates.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S540 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the payout control MPU sets interrupt prohibition (step S570). Due to this setting, the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt processing is not performed, preventing writing to the payout control built-in RAM and protecting the rewriting of the payout information described above.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of game balls is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU clears the watchdog timer (step S576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

After step S576, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, as numerical values.

After step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU performs prohibition setting of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading become impossible, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared because the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is not set to the values A, B and C in that order. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and thereafter, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. It should be noted that the processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power failure processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure, and the payout control unit power-on processing is performed by the subsequent restoration of power.

In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S528, it is checked whether or not the payout control unit power failure processing has been completed normally. are inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information has been stored by fraud.

[11-2. Dispensing Control Unit Timer Interrupt Processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt period (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on processing shown in FIGS. 148 to 150.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU, as shown in FIG. 151, disables the timer interrupt and switches (saves) the register (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the payout control unit main processing described above is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of general-purpose registers used in the payout control unit main processing.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms each time this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and has a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed, and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. set respectively.

After step S592, the payout control MPU switches (restores) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[12. Various control processing of the peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 156. FIG. FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 154 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. 155 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 156 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit power outage notice signal interrupt processing. First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing. . In this embodiment, as the priority of interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[12-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs initial setting processing (step S1000). This initial setting process includes a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, a hot start/cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after resetting, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), and the like. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs processing to initialize the peripheral control IC itself. can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, the command related to the control of the game effect output from the main control board 1310 and various commands such as commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after executing the current time information acquisition processing so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. are set to the value 0 when not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG receives a V-blank signal from the VDP of the peripheral control IC, which indicates that the screen data (information specifying the configuration of the screen) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in peripheral controller V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), it returns to step S1006 to check whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. Repeatedly determine whether or not By repeating such a determination, a standby state is established until the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. ing.

In the determination in step S1006, when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, that is, when determining to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG. A value of 1 is set (step S1008). The steady-processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs 1ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by starting this 1 ms interrupt timer is counted. 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this production operation unit monitoring process, in the production operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the press detection provided in the production operation unit 300 Rotation (rotation direction) and rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382 (hereinafter referred to as “various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300”). Various kinds of information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotating direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and pressing operation Operation history information of the unit 303, etc.) is set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. It is appropriately determined whether or not to reflect the operation state of the operation unit 303 in the game presentation. Specifically, if the sound volume has been adjusted in the effect operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness has been adjusted, the lighting mode is changed according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the schedule data for generation. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and brightness is reflected in real time, and the production progresses with the adjusted volume and brightness.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of LEDs used as direct light, the luminance of LEDs used as indirect light, and respectively. During the progress of the production, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, the player (or the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall) operates the production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303), and the first When one specified brightness value ranging from the specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness, is set, the above-described scale set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is set so as to achieve the specified specified brightness value. Tone information can be updated.

Here, the brightness designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. The specified brightness value can be set to one brightness specified value in a range of 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (turns off) to the 31st brightness specified value that is the maximum brightness. A normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance corresponding to the 0 (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, respectively. A player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall) operates an operable effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain a 31st luminance that is the maximum luminance from the first luminance specified value. A specified brightness value can be set up to a specified value.

For example, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall) designates the 0th (zero) brightness assuming that the current brightness is the minimum brightness (turns off) when rotating the rotary operation unit 302 clockwise. When the value is set to the first specified brightness value, which is the next highest level of brightness, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to be higher along the tone curve or spline tone curve), while the rotary operation unit 302 is reversed. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness in the case of the clockwise rotation operation, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, linear or spline tone curve), the luminance of the LED used as indirect light and the luminance of the LED used as direct light are changed to be lower. When the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 to select a desired luminance and presses the push operation unit 303, the selected desired luminance is confirmed. In this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance where the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) can set the brightness while the effect is in progress. , etc.) can set a desired brightness by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 . In addition, when the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the rotary operation unit 302, the predetermined luminance value to the 31st luminance are displayed at predetermined positions in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the progress of the effect. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator that indicates the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually indicate in the form of an image how much brightness the player (or staff such as a game hall clerk) desires. It is possible. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th luminance specified value is set as an initial value (default).

Normally, the pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are directly irradiated as light. be. For the normal palette value, one level is selected from among 17 levels in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the maximum value. A formula (for example, a linear tone curve , or a spline-like tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one luminance designation in the 32-step range from the 0 (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, which is the luminance designation value described above. (100%) is a value of 20%, and similarly for the other palette values, the values (%) written in parentheses are the above-described brightness specified values, 0 (zero) brightness specified value ~ It is the value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation in the 32-step range up to the 31st luminance designation value.

In this embodiment, the maximum palette value (100%) is normally selected in advance for various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are directly irradiated as light. Among the various decorative boards provided on the side of the game board that are set as the gradation information described above and that are directly illuminated as light, the pallet A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

The special palette value is set as the gradation information described above for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one level, and is one of the 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which are the brightness specified values described above. Palette values corresponding to luminance designations are set as the above-described gradation information along predetermined formulas (for example, linear tone curves or spline curve-like tone curves).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light at the first luminance designated value, which is the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance designated value, which is the minimum luminance (lights off). As the lowest possible brightness, it is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value Among them, one luminance designation value and the corresponding palette value are set according to a predetermined formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

In this way, in the lamp palette setting process, based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the luminance designation value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the LED used as indirect light When setting the brightness of each, the brightness by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 by the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) for the brightness of the LED used as direct light While set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 and presses the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. It is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the luminance designation value by the operation of 303 . As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and sets the brightness by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to reduce the brightness, The brightness of the LED to be used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (lights off), and the first brightness specified value that is the next highest level of brightness), and in conjunction with this In addition, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (lights off)). Even so, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The minimum brightness is set so that the light guide plate can be visually recognized as emitting light by indirect light.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually adjusts the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side for the LEDs used as direct light. Even without setting, the light emission mode accompanying the flow of performance is set, and the flow of performance by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side. , set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too bright (or a slightly darker luminance can produce a more dramatic effect), and other By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed very easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the operable effect operation section 301 (rotation operation section 302, pressing operation section 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness. Even if one specified brightness value is set up to the specified brightness value, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one specified brightness value is set for a particular decorative board. , one brightness designation value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set for the other decoration boards, respectively, so that the relationship between the mutually set light emission modes (bright or dark Therefore, the brightness can be adjusted very easily without destroying the relationship of .

Furthermore, indirect light from the light guide plate is more difficult to adjust the brightness than direct light, but for LEDs used as indirect light, a special palette value different from the normal palette value (that is, independent from the normal palette value) The brightness can be set by . As a result, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is managed by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is managed by the normal palette value. and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and generates one screen on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC in the display data creation process to be described later. One minute (one frame) of drawing data is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600 . In the display data output process, when drawing is performed in excess of the drawing capability of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent delays in processing time, but so-called dropped frames may occur. It is a mechanism that can give priority to performances by sound effects such as music and sound effects that match various performances from various speakers such as the speaker 622 (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers").

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the data to various speakers from the set output channel. . As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various presentations.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, to instruct which screen data from the first screen data is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC. , update the pointer.

Further, in the scheduler update process, the pointer is set to indicate the order of the light emission data to be output from the top light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Update.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the sound data of the production sounds such as music and sound effects arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, and the sound command data instructing the sound data of the notification sounds and notification sounds, The pointer is updated to indicate what number of sound command data from the head sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data, the drive data of what number from the head drive data is to be output. Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, are repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt, which will be described later. It is updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing, which is repeatedly executed each time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is executed. Update the pointer to the data, and update the pointer each time you do your own work. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated so that the drive data that should be instructed is instructed.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, which will be described later, and the received various commands are analyzed and used for various settings of effects. Update the random number (for example, the random number used for pending lookahead-related effects). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyzes various commands received. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, etc. from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands. (extracted) and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-described luminance designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value. and , respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads out (extracts) the schedule data for generating the lighting mode from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and executes the lamp palette setting process. Executed, the player (or staff such as a game hall clerk) operates the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303), and becomes the maximum brightness from the first specified brightness value. When one specified brightness value is set up to the 31st brightness specified value, the grayscale information described above can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to achieve the set brightness specified value. It is possible.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, a start winning prize command for instructing the start of the starting winning prize effect, normal symbol Ordinary design storage command for identifying the number of reservations (0 to 4), variation pattern for instructing the start of variable performance such as variable display of decorative designs in the performance display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of special designs It is analyzed whether it is a command, a pattern storage command output when the number of start pending changes, and a large winning opening 1 count display command output each time a game ball is accepted in the big winning opening 2005, and which game is currently being played. recognize the state.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyze various commands. Various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronization effect, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power on, normal Various commands categorized as related to figure synchronization effect, various commands categorized as normal electric role effect related, various commands as categorized as notification display, various commands as categorized as status display, various commands as categorized as test related, and In addition, there are various commands classified. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 executes lottery processing related to advance notice and the like based on the received command, and based on the result of the lottery, schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical Drive source schedule data and the like are read out (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

The peripheral control ROM stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the performance display control unit 1511, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sound for generating sound effects such as music and sound effects. There are schedule data for generation, and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission mode data defining light emission modes of various LEDs in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for indicating which of the plurality of output channels of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC is to be used, and a number of tracks of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. , and a track number for indicating in which track sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines operations of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 include various commands classified as notification displays, an abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of abnormalities can be simultaneously monitored without losing information that one abnormality has occurred due to the occurrence of another abnormality after the occurrence of one abnormality and before the abnormality is resolved. can be done.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. By this RCT acquisition information updating process, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, are updated, and based on this updated time information, the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Date is updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation is stored in the peripheral control ROM. is read (extracted) from and output to VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads out image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and renders (displays) one screen on the effect display device 1600. A minute (one frame) of drawing data is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is It is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , set the output channel to use according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady-state process is performed), the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is changed based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. are identified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the sound volume corresponding to the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is obtained, and in the sound data output processing of step S1018, the output set in the sound data generation processing is performed. Sound data is output from each channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various presentations.

Specifically, the resistance value is changed by rotating the volume control switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value is 0 to 0. It is converted into 1024 steps of values up to a value of 1023. In this embodiment, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the sound volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker 622 for the low tone of the body frame 4 Music and sound effects are played from In this way, music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the volume control switch. It's like

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the hall clerk of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraudulent action against the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Contains the subvolume value to be used.

Specifically, for the production sound, the board volume adjusted by turning the volume control switch is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the board volume is set as the sub-volume value. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is set for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display. A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit 0.5 seconds after receiving the variable pattern command and starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, or 0.5 seconds after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and after the fixed display of the decorative pattern. ) can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 .

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after power-on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), A certain period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) (in this example, peripheral Until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern after receiving the variation pattern command in the control unit, or 0.5 seconds after the peripheral control unit has received the stop display command and after the fixed display of the decorative pattern. Seconds), by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process is applied to the substrate. The voltage is converted into seven levels of volume 0 to 6, and further divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume control switch. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value accordingly, the sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume to set the substrate volume.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is Actually, it is amplified to the master volume value which is the sound volume flowing from the top central speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4, and serializes the amplified production sound. output as audio data.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the top center speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3 is amplified to the master volume value. , the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 are set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound effect, among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, the sound data of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used and the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the synthesized production sound, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually adjusted to the center of the top on the side of the door frame 3. The speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low bass of the main body frame 4 are amplified to the master volume value, which is the volume, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data, and is used as the notification sound. On the other hand, the sound data of the informational sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the informational sound incorporated in the track to be used The volume of this synthesized notification sound is actually set to the top center speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker 464, and the main body for bass of the main body frame 4 It amplifies up to the master volume value which becomes the sound volume flowing from the frame speaker 622, serializes this amplified notification sound, and outputs it as audio data.

Here, when the performance sound is flowing from the top central speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions and the pachinko machine To briefly explain the control of playing a notification sound to notify the staff of the hall of the fraudulent act against 1, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the sound effect is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this sound effect is suppressed. Synthesize the sound data of the embedded track, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track in which the informational sound is embedded, and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the informational sound is set to the maximum volume. , the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are compared with the volume actually flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4. is amplified to a master volume value, and the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, the sounds that are actually emitted from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound on the main body frame 4 are only the notification sounds with the maximum volume. At this time, since the sound effect is muted, the sound effect does not flow from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4. It progresses according to the sound generation schedule data.

In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the top central speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). When this predetermined period elapses, the volume of the effect sound progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute until now is reduced to the substrate volume adjusted by turning the volume control switch. The volume value is set again (at this time, if the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the adjusted effect sound sub The sound is set to a volume value), and flows from the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound on the body frame 4. FIG.

In this way, when the performance sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions and the pachinko is played. When a notification sound is played to notify a hall clerk or the like of a fraudulent act on the machine 1, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is emitted from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame. 4, but this muted effect sound progresses in accordance with the schedule data for sound generation, so that after a predetermined period of time the notification sound has passed, the top center speaker on the side of the door frame 3 462, when the top side speaker 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 cease to flow, the effect sound does not start to flow again from the point at which the informative sound started to flow, but continues for a predetermined period after the informative sound starts to flow. The sound starts to flow again from the point where it has progressed according to the sound generation schedule data until the time has passed.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are not dependent on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the peripheral volume from muted to maximum volume by program. The sound source of the IC can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall rotates the volume control switch to set the volume to a low volume, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers become small, but the pachinko machine 1 does not. When a problem occurs or the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for staff members such as store clerks in the game hall to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's dishonesty.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Copy and back up to the backup area for regular processing.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 as execution completion of the steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting a value of 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. That is, in step S1006, the system waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004. Thus, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

This peripheral control unit steady-state processing starts by setting a value 1 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed in step S1008, and starts 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010. , and step S1036, and finally in step S1038, the normal processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0 to indicate completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing, and the processing is completed. Become. The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006. This V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is, as described above, a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, which is executed when the signal is input to the CPU. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. .3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[12-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to indicate that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. will be explained. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 (step S1045), as shown in FIG. As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when the processing is completed.

In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it determines that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, Exit the routine. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the execution of the steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. They are each set to a value of 0 when no routine processing is executed.

In the present embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. When the processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1050. When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, it is determined in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing) in FIG. By setting the value 1 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG, the fact that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control of FIG. By setting the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the peripheral control unit of this routine indicates that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. By notifying the V blank signal interrupt processing, whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the judgment of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the peripheral controller steady-state processing cannot be completed until the next V blank signal is input after the V blank signal is input, ie, a so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing, if the processing cannot be completed within a time of about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral controller steady-state processing that has failed is approximately 66.6 ms. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is normally executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activating a 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. is executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is timer interrupt control are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral controller steady-state processing fails, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the presentation.

[12-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer at step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady-state processing of the peripheral controller power-on processing of FIG. 152 will be described. . When this peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral controller IC determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 154 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine after the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. .3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed at intervals of about 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. is executed, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, . will occur.

In step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and the 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit has started when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 times. When the determination is made, this routine is terminated as it is. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is prioritized over the peripheral control unit V Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, , the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, it adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increments it, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, a pointer indicates the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In accordance with the drive data, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series. Every time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed, the pointer is updated. do. As a result, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3, an electric drive source provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5, etc.) ) are driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 have been input. position history information, movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC, based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the original position (standby position) of the various movable bodies provided in the various effect units provided on the game board 5 or obtain the movable position to grasp the movable position.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, rotation operation unit 302 rotation (rotation direction) history information and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The rotation direction of the rotary operation unit 302 and whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 is operated can be obtained from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by operating the effect operation unit 301, the volume of the effect sound output from the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be adjusted, and the brightness of various LEDs mounted in plurality on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 can be adjusted.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to the SDRAM. It is backed up by copying it to the provided backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set in different areas, and the SDRAM The backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM and the backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 are executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the effects. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. there is In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, Therefore, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt causes the peripheral control unit After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. In other words, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the size of the liquid crystal of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is output even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, this It is possible to absorb the time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[12-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 start to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses this as a trigger to transmit the main peripheral serial data to the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC by 1 byte (8 bits). ) is fetched into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt occurs with this as a trigger, and the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing is performed. One packet of the main-circumference serial data consists of 3 bytes. The 1st byte is the status, the 2nd byte is the mode, and the 3rd byte is the status and mode. is assigned a sum value calculated from

When the peripheral controller command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral controller IC determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 155 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

In the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, out of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, reads 1-byte (8-bit) information. When it is determined that it is within the period in which reception is possible, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the main circumference serial data is read out from the reception buffer. When it is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. An initial value of 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, are sequentially sent from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that when the reception counter SRXC is not 3, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data Then, when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, has not been taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. A 1-byte reception period timer is set in step S1208, thereby setting a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, following the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, reads the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. In a certain mode, and when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). This calculation is performed by considering the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the mode, which is the second-byte of the main-circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, as numerical values, and summing them (sum value ).

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main-circumference serial data among the main-circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island facilities of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become electrically charged, electrostatic discharge occurs and noise is generated. in a receptive environment.

Therefore, in this embodiment, on the side of the peripheral control board 1510, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated using the main control board 1310, and does this calculated sum value match the sum value assigned as the 3rd byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310? is determining whether or not As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has been affected by noise between the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 and has changed to non-normal main peripheral serial data. can judge.

In step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the received main peripheral serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216 ), exiting this routine.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 is When it is determined that the period for which information can be received has passed, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC reads the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202. and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, the routine ends.

[12-5. Peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt process executed when the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 as a trigger. 156, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300) to determine whether a power failure warning signal has been input. (step S1302). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it ends this routine.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If it is determined in step S1304 that two macroseconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If so, this routine is terminated, and if it is determined that a power failure warning signal has been input, it is again determined in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. In other words, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine.

In the determination in step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, the power saving process is performed. (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially executing the turning off of the backlight of the performance display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception waiting process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, a period of at least 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control ICs can receive the commands being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control section command reception interrupt processing is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup process, commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and backed up.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1312). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or after step S1314, it returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure warning signal has been input. determine whether In other words, it continues infinitely to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. By endlessly continuing the determination in this way, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it is no longer possible to output a clear signal to the external WDT. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing in step S1314. CPU is not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 152 is started again.

As described above, if the input of the power failure warning signal continues in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power failure state by executing the WDT clearing process in step S1314. It is designed not to take. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It's becoming As a result, even if the peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the judgment in step S1302 is passed, step If it is determined in S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset because the WDT clear processing of step S1314 is not executed. Such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting.

[13. Control processing of the main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 157 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 157, the main control MPU of this main control board 1310 first On the condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and stored in the RAM. A first start opening passing process such as storing in one special symbol reservation storage area is executed (step S232). Also, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2402 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number A second starting port passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not a big win execution flag indicating that the big win game state is being controlled is set (step S235), and if the big win execution flag is set, the big win game state is controlled. A jackpot control process (step S235A) is executed. In addition, in the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) when the variable display is stopped becomes a mode suggesting "15R big hit", 15R A process of opening and closing the big winning opening 2005 is executed according to the big winning game state. In addition, when it becomes a mode suggesting "2R big win", the processing of opening and closing the big winning opening 2005 according to the 2R big win gaming state is executed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process (step S235A), after the opening control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, each setting process of the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating the time saving state, and the 2R jackpot game based on the fact that the result of the lottery process at the time when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped during the time saving state has become a mode suggesting "2R jackpot". When ending the state, it is set when ending the 15R jackpot game state during the time saving state and during the non-time saving state. Then, when the time saving flag becomes a big hit next time, or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 168 described later or the second special symbol stop not shown Reset by processing.

In addition, the time saving number counter is a counter indicating the remaining number of variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of times of continuation of the time saving state, and is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. In that case, when the big hit game state is terminated, the number of continuations of the time saving state is set. The time saving frequency counter is counted down every time the variable display of the special pattern is executed until the counter value becomes '0', but the next big hit occurs before the counter value becomes '0'. Sometimes, it is reset by the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 168 to be described later or the second special symbol stop processing (not shown) (the counter value is returned to "0").

Also, if the jackpot execution flag is not set, on the condition that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is "0" (Step S237), executes the first special symbol process processing including the lottery processing related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped (step S238), and the second stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S237), the second special design including the lottery process related to the display mode when the fluctuation display of the second special design is stopped Process processing is executed (step S239). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reservation number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 158 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first starting port passing process (step S232).

Now, in the process of step S231, if it is determined that the first starting hole sensor 3002 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the first starting hole 2002, as shown in FIG. Then, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special reservation number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and this Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is the maximum value (upper limit) of "4" (step S242). In the process of step S242, if it is determined that the first pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to the following steps S243 to newly suspend the variable display control of the first special symbol. The processing of S245 is to be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number obtained in step S241 is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. store in

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number acquired in step S241, the display result of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, whether the ready-to-win effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( Variation pattern type) and other advance determination information are executed before the start of the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S245), and then the process is terminated.

However, in the processing of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the number of the first reservation memory changes based on the game ball entering the first start port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reservation number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the first reservation memory. In addition to updating to correspond to the number, a command (first reservation number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0 to 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation command 0-4 (special symbol 1 memory command 0-4). It's like

FIG. 159 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random number obtained in the above step S241, specifically the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation By comparing with the random number, it is determined whether or not a big win will occur, and if a big win will occur, the type of the big win will be determined. The mode type of the game presentation is specified (step S261).

Then, the specified advance determination information (whether or not it will be a big hit, if it will be a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it will not be a big hit, whether to execute a ready-to-win production as a game production executed by the production display device 1600 Aspect type of game production to be played), type of special random number obtained (first special random number), and reserved memory number (value of reserved number counter) stored corresponding to the obtained special random number Set the pre-determination command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reservation memory number (the One special reservation number counter value) and the corresponding first special symbol pre-determination command are set (step S262).

Then, by transmitting the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), it is stored corresponding to the first start opening 2002 where the start winning has occurred. In addition to the number of pending memories, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated start winning is a big win, the kind of big win if it is a big win, and the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big win. Preliminary determination information such as whether the ready-to-win effect is executed as the game effect to be executed or the mode type of the game effect to be executed is performed by peripheral control mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before starting the variable display according to the start winning. You will be able to understand the IC.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first reservation storage area for storing pre-determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

The first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories. Store in order from the area. Then, when the advance judgment command is received when the advance judgment information is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, the advance judgment information notified to the (n+1)th storage area (n=1 to 3). is stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the first variation pattern command received when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is received. Discard the determination information and move the advance determination information stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area to the N-1th (N=2 to 4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). shift the stored pre-determined information). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the start of the variable display is postponed, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

When the variable display control is placed in a suspended state in this way, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (suspended state), the degree of expectation for the big hit (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control ) can be announced in advance at a predetermined timing, such as when the pending display is newly output or when the pending display is shifted according to the completion of the pending display. .

FIG. 160 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passing process (step S234).

Now, in the process of step S233, if it is determined that the second starting hole sensor 2402 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the second starting hole 2004, as shown in FIG. Then, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reservation storage number is set to its maximum value (upper limit value ) is "1" (step S252). In the processing of this step S252, when it is determined that the second pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253- The process of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number obtained in step S251 is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. store in

However, in the processing of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the second reservation memory number changes based on the game ball entering the second start port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reservation number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second reservation memory. While updating to correspond to the number, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a command (second reservation number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 1)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation command 0-1 (special symbol 2 memory command 0-1). It's like

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the number of first reserved memories based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 2002 is set to "4", while the game ball enters the second start port 2004. The upper limit of the number of second reserved memories based on the entry is set to "1". In addition, the second start port 2002 allows a large number of game balls to enter during the time saving state, and the second special symbol fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, so the number of second reserved memories Even if the upper limit is set to "1", the period in which the second special symbol is not displayed continues for a long time, or the period in which the second reserved memory number is the upper limit continues for a long time. Even if a game ball enters the game ball, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by not being able to obtain the chance of a big winning lottery.

FIG. 161 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S238). In addition, the first special symbol process processing executed in step S238 of the special symbol process processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S239 of the special symbol process processing are similar program modules, and random numbers used for determination And only the table is different, here only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S238 of the special symbol process processing will be described. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed according to the above-described first special symbol process flag.

1. Read the first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU, based on the read first special random number, lottery processing and the like for the display mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol is performed first special Design normal processing (step S280)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281 )
3. Variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and variation mode of the effect display executed corresponding to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. First variation pattern setting process (step S282) in which lottery process etc. are performed for
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S283) to wait until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. Regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped determined based on the result of the lottery process is displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing (step S284) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol so that

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control side power-on process (see FIG. 142).

FIG. 162 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of 2, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the pending state, then as the process of step S302, it is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. Random numbers (for example, first special random numbers, first pattern random numbers, reach random numbers, variable random numbers) related to the display mode of the first special symbol that is stored in the first storage area out of the random numbers are read out from the RAM. . And next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of special symbols is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning in order from the first (first) area. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurred is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

After that, as the process of step S305, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the hit/loss of the big hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. After that, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281), this process is terminated.

FIG. 163 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table shown in FIG. When the second special symbol normal process is executed, it is compared with the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal process (step S311).

The hit determination table shown in FIG. 164(A) is provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, one type of first special random number matches the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and three types different from the jackpot determination value. The first special random numbers are matched with the big hit determination value indicating that the first special random number has won the small win, and the first special random numbers of 315 kinds are matched with the loss determination value indicating that the first special random numbers are lost. It is associated (jackpot probability: 1/319, small hit probability: 3/319). In addition, in this example, in the second special symbol process processing, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the jackpot determination value indicating that one type of second special random number has won the jackpot 144 types of second special random numbers that match and are different from the big hit determination value match the small hit determination value indicating that the small win has been won, and the 174 types of second special random numbers are the loss determination that indicates that the above loss. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the values (big hit probability: 1/319, small hit probability: 144/319). That is, the determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of being determined as a small hit than the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number. , When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning to the second starting opening 2004 is executed than when the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting opening 2002 is executed The player is in a more advantageous state.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special As a result of comparison with a random number), when it is determined to be a big win (step S312), a big win flag indicating that the variation wins a big win is set (step S313), and the win determination process is terminated.

Also, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal process), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S314), a small hit flag indicating that the variation has been won as a small hit is set (step S315), and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if neither the big win nor the small win is won, that is, if it is determined to be a loss, the reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S302 are compared (step S316).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is a time saving state. and a reach determination table at the time of state. Then, in the reach determination table during the time saving state, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number will reach, and the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers will not reach. A random number is associated with each.

In addition, in the reach determination table in the non-time-saving state, five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time-saving state match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached, The reach random numbers are associated with each of the 67 types of reach random numbers so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not reached. Thus, in this embodiment, in the non-time saving state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is increased more than in the time saving state.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316), and when it is determined that the reach is lost (step S317), the change is A reach flag is set to indicate reach, and the process ends (step S318).

FIG. 165 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 165, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S321) and whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S324).

If the big hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process with the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 164(B). to determine the type of jackpot, and determine the mode (stopped pattern of the first special pattern) of the first special pattern corresponding to the decided type of jackpot when the variation control is stopped (step S322).

In particular,
1. After the big winning hole 2005 is open for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the big winning hole sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls have entered the big winning hole 2005, the opening/closing pattern is repeated 15 times. (15 rounds) By repeating (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to enter the big winning hole 2005 (easily) in a 15R jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are generated. 2. 15R jackpot controlled to a time-saving state that is terminated if the jackpot is not achieved before the variation display is executed 77 times; After the big winning hole 2005 is open for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or when the big winning hole sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls have entered the big winning hole 2005, the opening and closing pattern is repeated twice ( 2 rounds) By repeating this, the game ball is controlled to the 2R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and if it is controlled to the time saving state before the start of the 2R big win game state, the big win game state ends. After that, control is made to a time-saving state in which the game is terminated unless a big hit occurs before the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times, and non-starting before the start of the 2R big win game state. One of two types of big wins, ie, 2R big win controlled to the normal state after the end of the big win game state if it is controlled in the time saving state, is determined.

In the big hit symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number, 8 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 15R big hit, and 192 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 2R big hit. That is, when a lottery result of a big win is obtained by lottery based on the first special random number, a 15R big win has a probability of 4%, and a 2R big win has a probability of 96%. Similarly, in the big hit symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number, 196 determination values are distributed in the case of a 15R big hit, and 4 determination values are distributed in the case of a 2R big hit. That is, when a lottery result of a big win is obtained by lottery based on the second special random number, there is a probability of 98% that the game will be a 15R big win, and a probability of 2% that it will be a 2R big win. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the probability of determining a 15R jackpot is higher in the jackpot pattern determination table compared with the second pattern random number than in the jackpot pattern determination table compared with the first pattern random number. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the start winning to the second starting port 2004 is executed rather than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting port 2002, the game is played It is designed to be in an advantageous situation for those who

Further, when the type of the big win is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the big win is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the 2R jackpot pattern is determined, the 2R jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern. In the second special symbol stopping symbol setting process (not shown), when the 15R big win is determined, the 15R big winning symbol is determined as the big winning symbol, and when the 2R big winning is determined, the 2R big winning symbol is determined as the big winning symbol.

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, when the big hit flag is not set in step S131, if the small hit flag is set (step S324), read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process The type of the small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number and the small winning symbol determination table shown in FIG. mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S325).

In particular,
1. An opening/closing pattern in which the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to control a small winning game state in which the game ball can enter the accessory winning opening 2006 (easily). By guiding all the game balls winning the accessory winning opening 2006 during the small winning game state to the first losing opening 2535, it becomes difficult to accept the game balls to the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008.例文帳に追加First small hit 2. An opening/closing pattern in which the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed nine times to control a small winning game state in which the game ball can enter the accessory winning opening 2006 (easily). A second V prize winning port 2008 is obtained by guiding one game ball among the game balls winning the prize winning port 2006 during the small winning game state to a third sorting device 2550 after closing the prize winning port 2006.例文帳に追加In addition, when the game ball is accepted in the second V winning opening 2008, after the small winning game state, the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or A game ball can enter the big winning opening 2005 by repeating the opening/closing pattern of closing 15 times (15 rounds) when the big winning opening sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls have entered the big winning opening 2005. Control to an (easy) 15R big hit game state, and after the end of the big hit game state, the big hit must be achieved before the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times. 3. The second small win to control the time-saving state to be terminated. By executing an opening/closing pattern in which the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed nine times, the game ball can enter the accessory winning opening 2006 (easily) by controlling to a small winning game state, One of the game balls winning the accessory winning opening 2006 during the small winning game state is guided to the first V winning opening 2007 after the closing of the accessory winning opening 2006, and the game ball wins the first prize. After the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) after the small winning game state based on the acceptance in the V winning hole 2007, or 10 game balls win the big winning hole 2005. The opening/closing pattern to be closed when detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403 is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) to control the 15R big winning game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the big winning hole 2005, and the big winning game is played. After the end of the state, three types of third small hits that are controlled to a time-saving state that ends if the big hit does not occur before the fluctuation display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times. One of the small hits is determined as a big hit.

In the small hit symbol determination table compared with the first random number, 199 determination values are distributed when the second small hit is obtained, and 1 determination value is distributed when the third small hit is obtained. ing. That is, when a lottery result of a small hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a probability of 99.5% that it will be a second small hit, and a probability of 0.5% will be a third small hit. I don't win a single prize. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table compared with the second random number, 20 judgment values are distributed when the first small prize is obtained, and 130 judgment values are distributed when the second small prize is obtained. , 50 judgment values are distributed in the case of the third small hit. That is, when a lottery result of a small win is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, the first small win has a probability of 10%, the second small win has a probability of 65%, and the probability is 25%. It will be the third small hit. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the small winning symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number wins the prize winning slot 2006 compared to the small winning symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number. By guiding one game ball out of the game balls to the first V winning opening 2007, the probability of being determined to be the third small win in a 15R big win game state without fail after the end of the small win game state is increased. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the start winning to the second starting port 2004 is executed rather than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting port 2002 It is in an advantageous position.

Further, when the type of the small win is determined, the stop pattern corresponding to the type of the small win is determined as the mode of the stop of the first special symbol. Specifically, when the second small winning pattern is determined, the second small winning pattern is determined as the small winning pattern, and when the third small winning pattern is determined, the third small winning pattern is determined as the small winning pattern. . In addition, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when it is determined to be the first small hit, it is determined as the first small winning symbol as the small winning design, and when it is determined to be the second small winning design. As the second small winning pattern is determined, and when the third small winning pattern is determined, the third small winning pattern is determined as the small winning pattern.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, when neither the big-hit flag nor the small-hit flag is set, determines the winning pattern (step S327). Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S328, determines the above lottery result (type of big win, small win, loss of reach, loss (It may be one that instructs the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Set the determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result (step S328 ). And after that, as the process of step S329, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed, and left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → middle Stop and display in the order of the decorative patterns (the left, middle and right decorative patterns may be synchronously displayed with the same pattern and stopped and displayed at the same time)). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 specifies a small hit from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop pattern) when the variation of the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped, If the design (“final battle”) is determined, and if the 2R jackpot is specified, the 2R jackpot pattern (left, middle, and right decorative patterns are the same even-numbered pattern among patterns “0” to “9”) ), and when the 15R jackpot is specified, the 15R jackpot pattern (combination of left, middle and right decorative patterns of '0' to '9' with the same odd number pattern) is decided. In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the lost pattern with the reach (the left and right decorative patterns are a combination of the same patterns "0" to "9" and the middle decorative patterns are different; the reach loss If it is determined to be a design), and if a loss is specified, it is determined to be a design that does not involve reach (a combination in which at least the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are different patterns) and fluctuates When the fluctuation time specified from the pattern command has passed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop pattern is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and controlled.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to control the time saving state until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed up to 77 times after the jackpot game state, but the time saving state The time saving state may be ended based on the fact that a predetermined number of big hits have occurred after the shift control is performed to the state. Specifically, after the jackpot game state, control is performed to the time saving state, and when a predetermined number of (for example, two) jackpots occur after that, control is not performed to the time saving state after the predetermined number of times of the jackpot game state is completed. , may be controlled to a normal state. Also, even if the number of occurrences of big wins is less than a predetermined number, control may be performed to the non-time-saving state during the big-win game state, and control of the time-saving state may be performed again after the big win game state.

FIG. 166 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 166, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag. If it is (step S341), select a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the kind of big hit determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S342), and select a small hit flag. is set (step S343), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the small hit corresponding to the type of the small hit determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop design setting process is selected (step S344). , If the reach flag is set (step S345), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S346), and if neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, normal In the case of a loss (a loss in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 (step S349). In addition, the main control MPU sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the variation timer (step S350). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 only for the fluctuation time thus determined.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). It is stored in such a way that it is associated with each variable random number. Thus, the main control MPU, among the plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and symbol random number, the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process is compared, and the variation time information associated with the read-out variation random number is acquired from this table to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, it is set so as to determine the mode type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and the fluctuation random number. . For example, in the super ready-to-win performance among the ready-to-win performances, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than that in the normal ready-to-win performance, and when the super ready-to-win performance is executed, the player's expectation for the big winning game state is increased.

Further, when the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, as the process of step S351, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time saving number counter for which the number of times of continuation of the time saving state is set is "0". do. Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time saving number counter (step S352), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short number counter is "0" (step S353). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving control is ended is set (step S354).

When it is determined that the counter value of the time saving number counter is "0" in the process of step S351, when it is determined that the time saving number counter is not "0" in the process of step S353, at that point , the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process is terminated.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, while the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second during the time saving state is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), A special pattern variation pattern is set in such a manner that the special pattern variation time information set to about 12 seconds in a non-working time state is associated with the special pattern random number (first special pattern, second special pattern). . That is, in the variation pattern at the time of loss selected during the time saving state, compared to the variation pattern at the time of loss selected in the non-time saving state, so that the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol is extremely short, Fluctuation time information of the above special design is set.

FIG. 167 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of (1), 1 is subtracted from the variable timer in which the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the variable pattern is set. When it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of this step S373, this process is terminated when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

FIG. 168 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of , display control is performed to display the stop symbol determined by the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative design corresponding to the stop design of the first special design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Then, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), resets the time saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time saving flag (step S385). Thereby, when the variable display of a predetermined number of times (in this example, 77 times) of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed, the time saving control (control of the time saving state) is terminated and the non-time saving control is performed. (Normal state control) will start.

Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a big win start command indicating to start the big win game (step S387), and starts the big win game. The waiting time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process of setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot to a jackpot number counter indicating the number of remaining rounds is also executed. The jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process to be described later, and when the jackpot number counter becomes "0", the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the specified number of rounds has been executed. to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big win control process described later, the big win opening pre-opening process (step S401) and the big winning mouth opening process (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the big win number counter reaches "0". When the round is ended in the mouth opening process (step S402), when the big win number counter is subtracted by 1 and becomes "0", the process shifts to the big winning mouth post-opening process (step S403) and ends the big win game. Execute control that causes

Then, a jackpot in-execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set (step S389). Incidentally, the jackpot start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set. As a result, the effect of the big win game corresponding to the kind of the big win instructed by the big win start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set. It has become.

In addition, the jackpot in-execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set when the jackpot game is ended, specifically in the jackpot control processing (step S235A) after the jackpot opening (step S403). The opening and closing control of the first big winning hole 2005 according to the type (for example, after the first big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or that 10 game balls have won the first big winning hole 2005 is described above. It is reset when the opening/closing control that repeats the opening/closing pattern that closes when detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403 is completed 2 times or 15 times (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game). While the big hit control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S114) by resetting the jackpot executing flag, the first function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

Further, when the big hit flag is not set (step S386), if the small hit flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates to start the small hit game. A small-hit start command is set (step S391), and the waiting time until the start of the small-hit game (time for displaying the start of the small-hit game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S392). Then, a small-hit running flag indicating that the small-hit game is being executed is set (step S393). In addition, the small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the kind of the small hit. In step S391, a small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command, third small hit start command). As a result, the effect of the small-hit game corresponding to the kind of the small-hit instructed by the small-hit start command is executed by the production display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like. In addition, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, similarly, the small hit start command (first small Hit start command, second small hit start command, third small hit start command) is set.

In addition, when the small hit running flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed, when the small hit game is ended, specifically, the small hit medium processing (step S411 ) ends the opening/closing control of the prize winning port 2006 according to the type of the small win (for example, the opening/closing control of repeating the opening/closing pattern of opening the prize winning port 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it twice or nine times). reset when By resetting the small hit running flag, the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process (step S114), while the function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

In addition, when the small hit flag is not set, that is, when it becomes a loss, the waiting time (the time during which the stop design of the special design is displayed) until the variable display of the next special design is started is set in the interval timer. (Step S394), the process proceeds to step S395.

When the processing of steps S386 to S394 is executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value. (step S395), and the process ends.

FIG. 169 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S235A). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. The above-mentioned peripheral control board notifies the player that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are shifted to the above-mentioned jackpot game state based on the fact that the mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) has become a big hit symbol. 1510 or waits until the next round is started pre-opening big winning opening (step S401)
2. The first big prize winning port 2005 is controlled to an open state based on the fact that the mode when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped becomes a jackpot pattern, or the first big prize winning port 2005 is controlled based on the start of the next round. is controlled to an open state, and after the first big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or the fact that 10 game balls have won the first big winning hole 2005 is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403. Large winning opening open processing (step S402) to be closed when
3. A post-opening process for the big winning opening to wait until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the jackpot gaming state will end when all the rounds are completed (step S403).

The big win process flag is manipulated in the process of step S42 so as to indicate that the big winning hole pre-opening process (step S401) should be performed. In addition, in the process during the opening of the big prize winning opening (step S402), at the start of the round for controlling the opening of the first big winning opening 2005, a big winning round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set, and the first big winning prize is set. At the end of the round for controlling the mouth 2005 to be closed, a jackpot round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The jackpot round start command and jackpot round end command are commands sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the jackpot game effect corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the jackpot round start command and jackpot round end command is displayed. It is implemented by the device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speakers, and the like.

FIG. 170 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the small hit control process (step S236A). In the small-hit process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small-hit process flag.

1. Small hit start processing (step S410) for executing the setting process for starting the small hit game state
2. Small hit middle process (step S411) for monitoring the entry time of the game ball during the small hit game state and the opening time

The small hit process flag is operated in the process of step S42 so as to indicate that the small hit start process (step S410) should be performed. Further, when the entering of the game ball into the specific area is detected in the small-hit middle processing, the big-hit execution flag is set, and the number of rounds that can be executed in the big-hit game state (15 rounds in this example) is determined as the number of big hits. Set the counter and terminate the process. As a result, the big-hit game state is started following the small-hit game state.

FIG. 171 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, in the processing of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the normal winning hole sensor 2401 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the normal winning hole 2003, as shown in FIG. , the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the processing of step S802, first, acquires the normal random number of the normal symbol from the random number counter and stores it in the normal symbol reservation storage area of the RAM. Execute winning process.

Then, in the normal design process processing, one of the following five process processing is selectively executed according to the normal design process flag.

1. A normal design normal process (step S803) in which the normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read out, and a lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal design is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number.
2. Ordinary design fluctuation time determination processing (step S804) in which lottery processing and the like are performed for the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the ordinary design displayed on the ordinary design display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the normal design fluctuation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing (step S805) to wait until the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
4. The normal symbol display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process. Normal design stop processing to stop the fluctuation display of the design (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal pattern becomes a mode suggesting "normal pattern winning", the second start opening door 2411 retreats and the game ball to the second start opening 2004 Ordinary electric accessary product opening process (step S807) for executing the process to control acceptance

Incidentally, the normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the main control side power-on process (see FIG. 142).

[14. Game in small hit game state]
Next, the game in the small winning game state will be described. As described above, in this example, when the result of the variable display of the special symbol is a small hit, the opening and closing pattern of opening the accessory winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it is executed a predetermined number of times. state, and all game balls that enter the accessory winning opening 2006 during the small winning game state and are detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2513 are detected by the first losing opening sensor 2515, the third losing opening sensor 3004, When detected by either the first V winning opening sensor 2514 or the second V winning opening sensor 3003, that is, when discharged from the inside of the accessory winning opening 2006 to the rear of the game board 5, the small hit game state is entered. It is supposed to end. In addition, a game ball entering the accessory winning opening 2006 during the small winning game state is received by the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, and the first V winning opening sensor 2514 or the second V winning opening is received. When detected by the sensor 3003, it is controlled to the big hit game state after the small hit game state, and the game ball entering the accessory winning opening 2006 during the small hit game state enters the first losing opening 2535 and the third losing opening 2556 When it is accepted and detected by the first losing opening sensor 2515 or the third losing opening sensor 3004, after the small winning game state, it is controlled to the normal state or the time saving state according to the control state before the small winning.

In addition, as described above, in this example, the game balls that have won the role winning opening 2006 are controlled so that all the game balls that have won the winning opening 2006 are guided to the first losing opening 2535. One of the game balls is controlled to be guided to the third sorting device 2550, and after turning inside the croon 2553, it goes to either the second V winning opening 2008 or the two third losing openings 2556 A second small win controlled to be accepted, and a third small win controlled so that one of the game balls winning the accessory winning opening 2006 is guided to the first V winning opening 2007. , It is designed to control to one of the small hit game states.

In addition, in addition to the fact that the number of opening and closing of the accessory winning opening 2006 is smaller in the first small winning than in the second and third small winning, all the game balls that have won the accessory winning opening 2006 are 2006 is guided to the closest first losing opening 2535 and detected by the first losing opening sensor 2515, the execution period of the small winning game state (period from the start of the small winning game state to the end) is short, In the three small hits, one game ball among the game balls winning the accessory winning opening 2006 is guided to the first V winning opening 2007 which is the next closest to the first losing opening 2535 from the accessory winning opening 2006. Since it is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the execution period of the small hit game state is short next to the first small hit. On the other hand, in the second small hit, one game ball among the game balls winning the accessory winning opening 2006 is guided to the farthest third sorting device 2550 from the accessory winning opening 2006, and the third distribution is performed. After the game ball guided to the split device 2550 is rotated in the crew 2553, the game ball received in the second V winning opening 2008 is detected by the second V winning opening sensor 3003, or received in the third losing opening 2556. Since the game ball caught is detected by the third losing opening sensor 3004, the execution period of the small hit game state is the longest among the above three types of small hits.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, in the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, when it is determined as a small hit based on the first special random number, it is a second small win. The ratio is set high, and the second small hit is executed in most cases in the normal state, whereas in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state, the small hit is based on the second special random number. When it is determined that the third small win is executed, the ratio of the third small win is made higher than in the normal state, and in the time-saving state, the third small win is executed at a rate of one for four small wins. .

That is, in the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, if the game ball is received in the second V winning opening 2008 during the small winning game state, the time saving state after the 15R big winning game state is an advantageous state for the player. , one of the game balls entered into the accessory winning opening 2006 during the small winning game state is turned into the second V winning opening 2008 by turning in the cloon 2553 While making the player's heart throb as to whether it will be accepted or accepted in the third losing port 2556, the player's attention is made for a certain period of time, while in the variable display of the second special pattern executed in the time-saving state, the second V prize is won during the small winning game state. Even if the game ball is received in the mouth 2008, it is only controlled to the time-saving state again after the 15R jackpot game state, so one game ball out of the game balls that entered the role winning prize opening 2006 is in the rune 2553. When turning, there is a risk of causing a decrease in the amusement of the game. Therefore, in this example, in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state, by increasing the ratio of the third small win with a short execution period of the small winning game state, the small winning game state is shortened during the time saving state. It is designed to end on time.

Further, as described above, in the third small hit, when the distribution rotor 2531 rotates from the storable state to the non-storage state, the game ball housed in the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotator 2531 moves to the first strike passage. 2536, it flows down the second sorting guideway 2541 of the second sorting device 2540, contacts the upper surface of the sorting door 2544 in the closed state, is guided to the right, and enters the first V prize opening 2007. . Therefore, in the third small hit, the game balls distributed to the first hit passage 2536 by rotating the distribution rotating body 2531 from the storable state to the unstorable state are discharged to the rear of the game board 5 in a short time. It becomes a state in which the player cannot see it. In addition, the first V winning opening 2007 can be entered when the sorting door 2544 is moving forward above the second losing opening 2543, but the sorting door 2544 operates in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the operating state. In other words, the existence of the sorting door 2544 is difficult for the player to recognize (difficult to see), and the game balls sorted to the first V winning opening 2007 by the sorting door 2544 can be moved to the rear of the game board 5 in a short time. Since the existence of the first V winning hole 2007 is also difficult to recognize due to the fact that the game ball is discharged to the first V winning hole 2007, the player recognizes that the game ball has been guided to the first V winning hole 2007. It is difficult to notice the passing of In this way, in order to make it difficult for the player to notice that the game ball has been guided to the first V winning opening 2007 when the third small hit occurs in the time saving state, the lottery ( A small winning game state is executed and the small winning game state ends without making the player aware of whether or not the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening (first V winning opening 2007, second V winning opening 2008). A 15R jackpot game state can be executed later. As a result, the small winning game state and the 15R big winning game state are continuously generated in a short time, and the game amusement can be improved.

In addition, when the game ball is distributed to the third distribution device 2550 as the second small hit, and when the game ball is distributed to the first V prize opening 2007 as the third small hit, the effect display device 1600 The effects of the small winning game state to be executed are different. Specifically, it is determined whether the game balls distributed to the third distribution device 2550 enter the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2556 in the case of the second small hit. While an exciting effect is executed, in the case of the third small win, the effect is such that the rotation of the distribution rotator 2531 is not conscious (for example, in the case of the third small win, it is a big win). It is difficult for the player to realize that the small win game state is being executed by performing the same notification as when it becomes a third small win (such as notifying that it is a big win instead of a small win when the third small win is achieved). Then, as a special bonus chance to acquire prize balls different from the prize balls obtainable in the big win game state, the same prize ball acquisition opportunity as in the small win game state is executed before the start of the big win game state. As a result, a player who recognizes that he or she has won the 15R jackpot will receive a special bonus chance before the start of the 15R jackpot game state, and a prize different from the 15R jackpot game state. Since the ball can be obtained, the amusement of the game is improved.

In addition, if the time to reach the V winning opening is shorter for the third small winning than for the second small winning, the path ( The length of the first path) and the path (second path) until the game ball guided by the third small hit is accepted by the V prize opening is lengthened in proportion to the arrival time to the V prize opening. However, if the arrival time to the V winning hole is longer than the third small win, the path (first route) until the game ball guided by the second small win is accepted by the V winning hole is changed to the third small win. A game ball guided by a win may be shorter than the path (second path) until it is received in the V winning hole. For example, by providing deceleration means for decelerating the rolling speed of the game ball in the first path, the game ball passing through the second path may reach the V winning opening in a longer time.

In addition, in the above example, a plurality of V winning openings, ie, the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 are provided. One of the winning game balls is distributed to a third sorting device 2550 having a second V winning opening 2008, and in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state, the winning opening is selected. By guiding one game ball out of the winning game balls 2006 to the first V winning opening 2007, which is next to the first losing opening 2535 in distance from the accessory winning opening 2006, the small winning game state is established. Although the execution period is configured to be different, the distance to the V winning opening and the number of V winning openings are not limited to those described above. is applicable. Specifically, for example, means (obstacles, etc.) for obstructing or delaying the acceptance of game balls into the V winning opening, such as allowing the game ball to be received in the V winning opening after turning inside the crew 2553, is provided. There is no second small hit that takes a long time to reach the V winning opening and no means for inhibiting or delaying the acceptance of the game ball into the V winning opening (at least the number of small hits provided is less than the second small hit. By doing so, the third small hit with a short arrival time to the V winning opening, and the normal state (fluctuation display of the first special symbol) and the short time state ( You may make it change the execution ratio in the variable display of a 2nd special design).

[14-1. Error notification in small winning game state]
Next, the error notification in the small winning game state will be described. In this example, the time until the game ball that has won the prize winning opening 2006 is discharged in the small winning game state is monitored, and an error is notified when the ball is not discharged even after a predetermined period of time.

FIG. 172 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the above-described small winning start process (step S411). In the small-hit start process, a setting process for starting the small-hit game state is executed.

When the small hit start process is started, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the interval timer set in step S392 of the first special symbol stop process or the second special symbol stop process (step S421), and the interval timer times out (step S422), that is, when the standby time from the stop display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) to the start of the small winning game state elapses, the small winning game state is started. The initial value "0" is set to the elapsed timer for measuring the elapsed time (step S423).

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 selects the opening/closing pattern data corresponding to the type of small win being executed (first small win, second small win, third small win) (step S424), and selects Based on the opened/closed pattern data, the control of the accessory winning opening 2006, the distribution rotor 2531, and the distribution door 2544 is started (step S425), and the process is shifted to the process during the small hit (step S411). When the small hit process flag is updated (step S426), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the interval timer has not timed out in step S421, the process ends without executing the subsequent processes.

The opening/closing pattern data is provided for each type of small win, and indicates the operation mode of each of the prize winning opening 2006, the distribution rotor 2531, and the distribution door 2544 according to the elapsed time from the start of the small winning game state. It is a thing. In this example, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls the prize winning port 2006, the distribution rotator 2531, and the distribution door 2544 based on the opening/closing pattern data corresponding to the small hit type selected in step S424. 123, the prize winning port 2006, the sorting rotator 2531, and the sorting door 2544 operate.

FIG. 173 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the process during the small hit (step S412).

When the small hit middle process is started, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first adds 1 to the elapsed timer for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game state, and the discharge monitoring timer described later is set. If so, 1 is subtracted from the timer value of the discharge monitoring timer (step S431). When the elapsed timer is incremented by 1, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 selects the opening/closing pattern data in step S424 of the small winning start processing, and the opening/closing pattern corresponding to the elapsed timer (elapsed time from the start of the small winning game state). The data is read out, and opening/closing control is performed for the prize winning port 2006, the distribution rotor 2531, and the distribution door 2544 based on the read opening/closing pattern data (step S432).

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that if the accessory winning slot sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball received in the accessory winning slot 2006 is turned on (step S433), that is, the accessory winning slot 2006 If the ball is accepted, 1 is added to a residual ball counter that counts the remaining balls that have not yet been ejected from the prize winning opening 2006 among the game balls that have won the prize winning opening 2006 (step S434).

Also, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, when the first game ball is received in the accessory winning opening 2006 after the start of the small winning game state (when the first game ball enters) (Step S435), the assumed longest period provided corresponding to each small hit type is set as the longest period assumed until all the game balls including the game ball that have entered the prize winning opening 2006 are discharged. A discharge monitoring timer is set (step S436).

In this example, in the case of the first small hit, all the game balls received in the accessory winning opening 2006 enter the second losing opening 2535 without being distributed to the first hitting passage 2536 by the distribution rotating body 2531. Therefore, the shortest period among the three types of small hits is set as the assumed longest period (for example, 10000 ms). In the case of the second small hit, one of the game balls received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is distributed to the first hit passage 2536 by the distribution rotator 2531, and the first hit passage 2536 is distributed. Since the game ball that has passed through and entered the third distribution device 2550 enters either the second V winning opening 2008 or the two third losing openings 2556 after turning in the croon 2553, there are three types as the assumed longest period. The longest period of the small hits is set (for example, 180000ms). In the case of the third small hit, one of the game balls received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is distributed to the first hit passage 2536 by the distribution rotator 2531, but the first hit passage 2536 In order to accept the passing game ball at the second V winning opening 2008 without entering the third sorting device 2550, the shortest period is set next to the first small hit as the assumed longest period (for example, 60000 s).

The discharge monitoring timer is decremented in the above step S431, and the state of mismatch between the number of game balls that have entered the prize winning port 2006 and the number of game balls that have been discharged from the prize winning port 2006 continues until after the timeout of the discharge monitoring timer. If it continues, it is determined that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraudulent act has occurred.

In addition, the elapsed time from the start of the small winning game state is monitored, and if this elapsed time reaches the assumed longest period according to the type of small winning being executed, it is determined that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraudulent activity has occurred. Alternatively, the elapsed time from the first opening timing of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the small winning game state is monitored, and this elapsed time is the assumed maximum period corresponding to the small winning type being executed. If it becomes, it may be determined that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraudulent act is being performed, and the timing at which the game balls are actually distributed by the distribution rotator 2531 (in the first small hit, the small With the start of the winning game state, the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned ON (energized), and the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 faces upward. ) and the timing at which the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotator 2531 is directed to the right (first distribution operation timing of the distribution rotator 2531), and the distribution rotator 2531 in the second small hit After the timing of the first sorting operation, the first sorting solenoid 2532 is turned ON (energized) again, and the first sorting solenoid 2532 is turned OFF from the state in which the accommodating portion 2531a of the sorting rotor 2531 faces upward. The timing at which the storage portion 2531a of the distribution rotator 2531 is turned to the right (the second distribution operation timing of the distribution rotator 2531) in the (non-energized) state, and the third small hit is distributed After the timing of the second sorting operation of the rotating body 2531, the first sorting solenoid 2532 is turned ON (energized) again, and the first sorting solenoid is turned on from the state in which the accommodating portion 2531a of the sorting rotating body 2531 faces upward. 2532 is turned off (non-energized), and the time elapsed from the timing when the accommodating portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 is directed to the right (timing of the third sorting operation of the sorting rotator 2531). may be monitored, and it may be determined that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraudulent act is being performed when this elapsed time reaches the assumed longest period corresponding to the type of small win being executed.

In addition, when detecting the discharge of the game ball accepted in the role winning opening 2006, that is, when discharging the game ball accepted in the role winning opening 2006, the first loss opening sensor 2515, the first V winning When the game ball is detected by any of the mouth sensor 2514, the second V winning mouth sensor 3003, and the third losing mouth sensor 3004 (step S437), 1 is subtracted from the residual ball counter (step S438).

Then, whether or not the residual ball counter is "0", that is, whether or not the number of game balls received in the prize winning port 2006 and the number of game balls ejected from the prize winning port 2006 match. (step S439), and if the residual number counter is "0", it is determined that no abnormality or fraudulent act has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S442.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S439 that the remaining ball counter is not "0", it is determined whether or not the ejection monitoring timer has timed out (step S440) in order to determine whether or not an abnormality or fraud has occurred. . The discharge monitoring timer is provided corresponding to each of the small winning types as the longest period assumed from the start of the small winning game state to the discharge of all the game balls from the accessory winning opening 2006 as described above. It indicates the remaining period of the assumed maximum period. If the discharge monitoring timer has not timed out in step S440, the process ends without executing the subsequent processes. As a result, when the special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing (step S114) of the main control side timer interrupt processing is executed again, the small hit middle processing is executed and the remaining ball counter is monitored until the discharge monitoring timer times out. become.

If the discharge monitoring timer has timed out in step S440 when the residual ball counter is not "0", it is determined that an abnormality or fraud has occurred, and a discharge error is notified (step S441). It is designed to terminate the processing during the hit. The discharge error notification includes error display on the effect display device 1600, output of notification sound by speakers 622, 354, 462, 464, etc., lighting / Flashing and the like are included, and in this example, a display such as "Ejection is abnormal." That is, the state in which the residual ball counter is not "0" indicates a minor abnormality such as that most of the game balls that have entered the prize winning opening 2006 have not been discharged. is displayed so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable or uneasy. After performing the discharge error notification in step S441, by ending the small hit medium process without updating the small hit process flag, next special symbol of the main control side timer interrupt process and special electric auditors control process (step When S114) is executed, the process during the small hit is executed again. That is, the RWM clear button 633z is pressed by the game clerk under the condition that all the game balls received in the accessory winning opening 2006 are discharged or the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch. Until the information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU is completely erased (until it is reset) by operating the pressing operation part, the small winning game state is not terminated and the discharge error is notified. will be executed.

If it is determined in step S439 that the residual ball counter is "0", it is determined whether game balls have entered the first V winning opening 2007 and second V winning opening 2008 (step S442). If the game ball does not enter the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 in step S442, that is, the game ball enters the first losing opening 2535 or the third losing opening 2556, and the first losing opening sensor If detected by 2515 or the third losing opening sensor 3004, set a small winning end command for instructing the execution of the effect at the end of the small winning game state (step S443), to the small winning start processing (step S411). When the small hit process flag is updated so that the process is shifted (step S447), this process is terminated.

If the game ball enters the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 in step S442 and is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514 or the second V winning opening sensor 3003, until the start of the jackpot game. After setting the waiting time in the interval timer (step S444), the flag during execution of the small hit is reset and the flag during execution of the big hit is set (step S445). In addition, a V winning big winning start command for instructing the execution of the performance at the time of starting the big winning game state based on the reception of the game ball into the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 is set (step S446), and the small winning is performed. When the small hit process flag is updated (step S447) so that the process shifts to the start process (step S411), this process ends.

Thus, in this example, when a game ball is received in the accessory winning opening 2006, the value of the remaining ball counter is incremented by 1, and each time a game ball is discharged from the accessory winning opening 2006, the value of the remaining ball counter is incremented by 1. By subtracting, the number of game balls remaining without being ejected from the accessory winning device 2006 can be grasped. In addition, the period (assumed longest period) until the ejection error notification is executed is made different according to the small hit type, in other words, the distribution destination of the game ball, and the game ball that has passed through the first hit passage 2536 is sent to the third swing. In the third small hit received at the second V winning port 2008 without entering the splitting device 2550, the discharge error is more than the second small hit in which the game ball enters the third sorting device 2550 and turns inside the croon 2553. The period (assumed longest period) until the notification is executed is shortened. In other words, the period until the ejection error notification is executed is shorter for the minor winning that takes a shorter time (distance) to reach the V winning opening.

Normally, no game balls remain in the accessory winning opening 2006, so if the state in which the game balls remain in the accessory winning opening 2006 continues for a long period of time, some kind of abnormality (error) occurs. can be determined as occurring. In addition, when it is detected that more game balls are discharged than the number of game balls that have entered the role prize winning port 2006, a fraudulent act such as illegally winning game balls into the role prize winning port 2006 is performed. can be determined to be possible. The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment monitors the occurrence of these abnormalities and fraudulent actions, and when there is suspicion of these, an ejection error notification is made.

In addition, in this example, it is detected that game balls remain in the accessory winning opening 2006, or that a larger number of game balls than the gaming balls that have won the accessory winning opening 2006 are discharged. When the ball counter is not "0", even after the discharge error notification is performed based on the timeout of the discharge monitoring timer, the game is not stopped and the small winning medium process is executed each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is executed. is executed to monitor the value of the residual ball counter. It automatically returns to the state of discriminating the entry of the game ball into the mouth 2008, and terminates the small winning game state.

In this example, even if the value of the residual ball counter does not become "0" after the discharge error notification is executed in step S441 of the small hit middle processing, if a more serious abnormality occurs, Priority is given to error notification related to this serious abnormality. As a serious abnormality, for example, when one of the plurality of magnetic sensors 2010 detects magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a (magnetism detection error notification), when radio wave irradiation is detected (radio wave detection error notification ), and when it is detected that the door frame 3 has been opened (door open error notification). If such a serious abnormality occurs, the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small winning game state is terminated, and error notification related to these serious abnormalities (magnetic detection error notification, radio wave detection error notification, magnetic detection error notification etc.), and after the end of the error notification related to the serious abnormality, the discharge error notification of step S441 in the small hit game state may be restarted again, or the error notification related to the serious abnormality may be changed to the small hit game state. By overwriting the discharge error notification in step S441 and executing it, the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small hit game state is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the output of the speakers 622, 354, 462, 464, etc., the game board 5 and door frame 3 lamps, LEDs, etc. are not reflected in lighting, blinking, etc. (executed to be visible / audible) (executed behind the scenes), but an error notification related to a serious abnormality The content of the ejection error notification progresses with the passage of time even while the operation is being performed, and when the error notification related to a serious abnormality ends, the progressed content is displayed so that the ejection error notification can be viewed or viewed. It may be reflected in the display on the device 1600, the output of the speakers 622, 354, 462, 464, etc., and the lighting, blinking, etc. of the lamps, LEDs, etc. provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 (for example, a small winning game 5 seconds after starting the discharge error notification in step S441 in the state, when the error notification related to serious abnormality is started and this error notification is executed for 30 seconds, after the error notification related to serious abnormality is finished It is restarted from the content 35 seconds after starting the ejection error notification in step S441 in the small winning game state).

Further, in step S439 of the small hit medium processing, the mode of discharge error notification may be changed depending on whether the residual ball counter is "1" or more and when it is less than "0". If the residual ball counter is "1" or more, it indicates only a slight abnormality that the game balls that have entered the prize winning opening 2006 are not discharged, while if the residual ball counter is less than "0". indicates a serious anomaly in which more game balls are ejected than the number of game balls entered into the role winning opening 2006, and there is a possibility that game balls are entering the role winning opening 2006 illegally. There is Therefore, when a slight abnormality occurs such that the game ball that has entered the accessory winning opening 2006 is not discharged, as the discharge error notification 1, for example, as shown in FIG. is displayed, and the effect sound is continuously output from the speakers 622, 354, 462, and 464, so that the error sound is not output and a part of the LED provided on the door frame 3 is partially replaced. When a serious abnormality occurs in which more game balls than the number of game balls entered has occurred, a discharge error notification 2 is displayed in the entire area of the effect display device 1600, for example, "Illegal occurrence!" At the same time, the volume of the effect sound is suppressed from the speakers 622, 354, 462, and 464, and an error sound "Tampering is being carried out." The entire door frame 3 may emit light to notify the occurrence of fraudulent activity.

Also in this example, the detection signal of the third distribution detection sensor 2552 provided in the middle of the third distribution guideway 2551 is input to the peripheral control board 1510, and the second distribution device 2540 in the second small winning game state When the game ball guided to the three distribution guideway 2551 is detected by the third distribution detection sensor 2552 provided in the middle of the third distribution guideway 2551, the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the performance display device 1610 and the speaker 622. , 354 , 462 , 464 , lamps, LEDs, etc. provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are controlled, and the game balls that turn the cloon 2553 in the third sorting device 2550 enter the second V winning port 2008 and the third It is designed to execute an effect that excites whether it will be accepted in either of the failing openings 2556.例文帳に追加

In addition, the detection signal of the third distribution detection sensor 2552 provided in the middle of the third distribution guideway 2551 may be input to the main control board 1310. In this case, the third distribution detection sensor 2552 The presence or absence of the occurrence of an abnormality may be determined according to the detection of the game ball by. For example, when a game ball is detected in a V winning opening or a losing opening different from the V winning opening or losing opening scheduled according to the small winning type in the small winning medium processing, or when the game ball is detected in a V winning opening or losing opening different from the V winning opening or losing opening scheduled according to the small winning type If there is a possibility that the game ball is detected in a V winning opening or losing opening that is different from the V winning opening or losing opening that is set When the game ball is headed to the winning opening), it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred, and distribution error notification may be executed in step S441 of the minor winning process.

Specifically, as the V winning opening and the losing opening scheduled according to the type of the small hit, the first losing opening 2535 is scheduled in the case of the first small winning, and the second winning opening 2535 is scheduled in the case of the second small winning. A V winning opening 2008 or a third losing opening 2556 is planned, and a first V winning opening 2007 is planned in the case of a third small hit. Then, in the case of the first small hit, when it is detected that the game ball has been received in any one of the first V winning opening 2007, the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2556 in the small winning middle processing, the second When it is detected that the game ball has been received in one of the first losing port 2535 and the first V winning port 2007 in the case of the second small hit, in the case of the small win medium processing, in the case of the third small win. When it is detected that a game ball has been received in any one of the first loss port 2535, the second V winning port 2008 and the third loss port 2556, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, for example, as shown in FIG. , etc., is displayed in the entire area of the effect display device 1600, and the volume of the effect sound is suppressed from the speakers 622, 354, 462, and 464 to produce an error sound, "Tampering has occurred." ” is output at a high volume, and all of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 are illuminated to cause the entire door frame 3 to emit light, thereby executing a sorting error notification that notifies the occurrence of a fraudulent act. may In this case, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be immediately reported, and the fraudulent activity can be detected at an early stage.

In addition, in the middle of the second distribution guideway 2541, a second distribution detection sensor that detects the game ball circulating inside the second distribution guideway 2541 is provided, and the detection signal of the second distribution detection sensor It may be input to the main control board 1310, and in the case of the first small hit, the game ball is placed in one of the first V winning opening 2007, the second V winning opening 2008, and the third losing opening 2556 in the middle processing of the small winning. When there is a possibility of being accepted, that is, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second distribution guideway 2541 by detecting the game ball by the second distribution detection sensor, in the case of the second small hit Although the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball in the small hit middle process, the game ball passing through the second distribution guide path 2541 is the first because the third distribution detection sensor 2552 cannot detect the game ball. When it is determined that it is heading to the V winning opening 2007, in the case of the third small hit, the game ball is detected by the third distribution detection sensor 2552 after the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball in the processing during the small hit. When it is determined that the game ball passing through the second sorting guideway 2541 is heading toward the third sorting device 2550, a V winning mouth different from the scheduled V winning mouth or losing mouth When there is a possibility that a game ball is detected at a loss opening, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred, and distribution error notification may be executed. In this case, it is possible to notify when a state in which a fraudulent act is likely to occur can be made, and the fraudulent act can be detected at an early stage.

In addition, depending on the degree of abnormality (fraudulent level), the mode of distribution error notification may be changed. When it is determined that the ball has entered the second distribution guideway 2541, or in the case of a second small hit, the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball in the small hit middle process, but the third distribution detection sensor When it is determined that the game ball passing through the second distribution guideway 2541 is heading toward the first V winning opening 2007 because the game ball cannot be detected by 2552, it is determined that the degree of abnormality is high, for example In addition to displaying a message such as "Fraud has occurred!" in the entire area of the effect display device 1600, the speakers 622, 354, 462, and 464 output "Fraud is committed." is reported, and in the case of the second small hit, the small hit medium process is performed, and in the case of the third small hit, the small hit medium process is performed. After the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball, the game is played with the third distribution detection sensor 2552 When it is determined that the game ball passing through the second distribution guideway 2541 is heading toward the third distribution device 2550 by detecting the ball, it is determined that the degree of abnormality is low, and for example, the effect display device It is also possible to notify the occurrence of an abnormality that is not a fraudulent act by displaying a message such as "Ejection is abnormal." . That is, when the game ball passes through the route of entering the V winning opening at a rate higher than the rate of game ball entering the V winning opening set in advance according to the small hit type (executed When the degree of expectation for V prize winning is higher than the degree of expectation for V prize winning set in advance according to the type of small win), it is determined that the degree of abnormality is high and that cheating is being performed. When the game ball passes through the route of entering the V winning opening at a rate lower than the rate of game ball entering the V winning opening set in advance according to the small hit type (execution When the degree of V winning expectation is lower than the degree of V winning expectation set in advance according to the type of small win), it is determined that the degree of abnormality is low, and an abnormality different from fraud occurs. may be notified. In addition, when the V winning expectation is lower than the V winning expectation set in advance according to the type of small win being executed, although the player himself/herself suffers a disadvantage, the game parlor side suffers damage. Since it does not occur, if the degree of such an abnormality is low, the sorting error notification may not be performed.

In addition, the game ball is detected in a V winning opening or a losing opening different from the V winning opening or losing opening scheduled according to the small winning type, or the V winning opening scheduled according to the small winning type During the period in which the distribution error notification is performed based on the possibility of detecting the game ball in the V winning opening or the losing opening different from the losing opening, the special winning opening 2006 is selected in the small winning medium processing. Even if it is determined that a minor anomaly has occurred such that the game ball that has entered is not ejected, the game ball is not ejected at a V winning opening or losing opening that is different from the V winning opening or losing opening scheduled according to the type of small win. It is executed based on the fact that the game ball is detected or the possibility of detecting the game ball in a V winning opening or losing opening different from the V winning opening or losing opening scheduled according to the type of small win. Distribution error notification is continuously executed without ending. However, the ejection error notification 1 based on the determination that a slight abnormality has occurred in which the game ball that has entered the accessory winning opening 2006 has not been ejected in the above-mentioned minor winning process is not in a visible/viewable state. Although it is not executed, it is executed behind the scenes, and the contents of the discharge error notification 1 are advanced with the passage of time. Also, in this case, when the game ball that has entered the accessory winning opening 2006 is discharged and the value of the residual ball counter becomes "0", there is a slight abnormality that the game ball that has entered the accessory winning opening 2006 is not discharged. Ejection error notification 1 based on the fact that it is determined to have occurred ends. In this way, even if a minor abnormality occurs during the period in which error notification (distribution error notification in this example) is performed based on the occurrence of a serious abnormality, error notification based on the occurrence of a minor abnormality ( In this example, the ejection error notification 1) is never visually and audibly performed. However, it is quietly executed behind the error notification based on the occurrence of a serious abnormality (distribution error notification in this example), and when the minor abnormality is resolved, the error notification based on the occurrence of a minor abnormality (this In the example, the discharge error notification 1) is terminated.

In this example, even when the small winning game state and the big winning game state do not occur, the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the first losing opening sensor 2515, the second V winning opening sensor 3003, The detection of the game ball by the third loss opening sensor 3004 is monitored, and when the game ball is detected by any of these, it is determined that a fraudulent act is being performed, and the occurrence of the fraudulent act is notified. It's becoming In addition, in a state where the small winning game state or the big winning game state does not occur, the detection of the game ball by the second distribution detection sensor or the third distribution detection sensor 2552 may be monitored, and the second distribution When the game ball is detected by any of the detection sensor and the third distribution detection sensor 2552, the degree of abnormality is high, that is, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act is being performed, and the occurrence of the fraudulent act is notified. good. That is, in a state where the small winning game state or the big winning game state does not occur, regardless of the degree (high or low) of the game ball entering the V winning opening, the game ball can pass through any path in the accessory winning opening 2006. It is also possible to determine that a fraudulent act is being performed even if the vehicle has passed through, and notify the occurrence of the fraudulent act.

In the above example, when the ejection error notification is executed in step S441, or when the game ball is detected in a V winning opening or losing opening different from the V winning opening or losing opening scheduled according to the small hit type Or, when a distribution error notification is made based on the possibility of detecting a game ball in a V winning opening or losing opening different from the V winning opening or losing opening scheduled according to the type of small hit. Although the value of the residual ball counter is monitored by repeatedly executing the minor winning middle process, the progress of the game may be stopped without monitoring the value of the residual ball counter. In addition, even when the progress of the game is not stopped, the value of the residual ball counter is monitored, and when the value of the residual ball counter becomes normal ("0"), the abnormal state is automatically restored to win a small hit. The game state may not be ended. This makes it possible to reliably grasp the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, after the distribution error notification, if the game ball is detected at the V winning opening or losing opening (regular acceptance opening) scheduled according to the small hit type, or if the game ball is detected according to the small hit type When a game ball rolling on the route (regular route) is detected (for example, when the third distribution detection sensor 2552 is detected in the case of the second small hit), the distribution error notification is terminated. You may make it In addition, after performing the discharge error notification, if the game ball is detected at the V winning opening or losing opening (regular acceptance opening) scheduled according to the small hit type, or if the game ball is detected according to the small hit type When a game ball rolling on a route (regular route) is detected (for example, when the third distribution detection sensor 2552 is detected in the case of the second small hit), the discharge error notification is terminated. good too. In addition, the measurement value of the discharge monitoring timer that causes the execution of the discharge error notification is detected by detecting a game ball rolling on a route (regular route) scheduled according to the small hit type (for example, the second small hit In this case, the discharge monitoring timer may be reset every time the third distribution detection sensor 2552 detects Emission error notification may be made executable when the assumed maximum period corresponding to the small hit type is reached.

[15-1. volume control]
The volume control switch is set for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display (the second One special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) for a certain period of time when starting or stopping the fluctuation display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (in this example, the fluctuation pattern in the peripheral control unit Until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern after receiving the command, or until 0.5 seconds have passed after the fixed display of the decorative pattern after receiving the stop display command in the peripheral control unit) Except for this, the volume of the sound effects such as music and sound effects flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 can be adjusted by rotating the volume control switch. It can be adjusted by manipulating. As described above, the volume control switch has a variable resistance value when it is rotated. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted to a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023.

In this embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The sound source IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the music is played from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4. and sound effects. In this way, by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch, music, sound effects, etc. can be heard from the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound on the body frame 4. The sound of the production is designed to flow.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the effect sounds such as music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the pachinko hall clerk of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or of an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 are provided. (For example, the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 is made more powerful, or the possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is announced. etc.) also flows from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4, but the volume of the notification sound and the notification sound can be adjusted It is a mechanism that flows without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the switch, and the volume from mute to maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the peripheral control IC by program.

The volume adjusted by this program can be changed in five stages from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into seven stages described above. As a result, for example, even if a hall clerk or the like turns the volume control switch to set the volume to a low level, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are connected. Although the production sounds such as music and sound effects that flow from the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound are reduced, the volume is increased when there is a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating (this implementation). In the form, a notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's cheating due to the notification sound.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined period after power-on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special A certain period of time (in this example, peripheral control 0.5 seconds after receiving the variable pattern command in the unit and starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, or 0.5 seconds after the stop display command is received in the peripheral control unit and after the fixed display of the decorative pattern. ), the volume control switch is rotated to adjust the volume of the music and sound effects, and a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically Peripheral control unit initial setting process (step S1000) and the period until the current time setting process (step S1002) is completed) and special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) in the special symbol (first special design, second special design) for a certain period of time when starting or stopping the fluctuation display (in this example, after receiving the fluctuation pattern command at the peripheral control unit, 0.5 after the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative design until 0.5 seconds have passed since the stop display command was received by the peripheral control unit and after the decorative pattern has been confirmed and displayed), and the rotation operation unit 302 of the production operation unit 300 set in the variable production Except for the operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 (effective period for accepting the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in the so-called button effect), etc. By operating the operation unit 303, it is possible to adjust the volume of the sound effects such as music and sound effects. Specifically, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a special symbol display (first Special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) for a certain period of time when starting or stopping the fluctuation display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (in this example, the fluctuation pattern command at the peripheral control unit until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern after receiving the The operation period of the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 set in the variable effect (effective period for accepting the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in the so-called button effect), etc. Except for , when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated, an indicator composed of a plurality of scales is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated. can be adjusted to a desired volume (either from the minimum volume of 1 to the maximum volume of 5) by changing the volume of the effect sound of music or sound effects.

Specifically, the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated to the right without operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, and when the amount of rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined amount of rotation, the volume of the effect sound is reduced to 1. The sound volume is changed to a stepped-up, the rotary operation part 302 is rotated counterclockwise without operating the pressing operation part 303 of the production operation unit 300, and when the rotation amount of the rotary operation part 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the production sound is produced. The volume is changed to one level lower.

FIG. 175 shows a top central speaker 462 and a top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and a bass speaker of the body frame 4 in accordance with the turning operation of the volume control switch and the turning operation of the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. In a state in which the volume of the effect sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 is set to volume 5, the effect display device 1600 starts a variable effect for variably displaying the decorative pattern, and during this variable effect, the effect operation unit 300 is operated. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a pressing operation section 303 is pressed and then a rotating operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated;

As shown in FIG. 175, in order to change the volume of the effect sound from volume 5 to volume 4 during the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600, without operating the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300, When the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise and the amount of rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined amount of rotation, the volume of the effect sound is lowered by one step from volume 5 to volume 4, and the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated. The change according to the operation is immediately reflected in the effect sound output from the top central speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4. - 特許庁That is, in order to change the volume of the effect sound output from the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, the rotary operation part of the effect operation unit 300 is operated. At the timing of t1 when the 302 is rotated, the volume after this change is reflected in the outputs from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4. It has become.

Also, the scale of the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes according to the rotation operation of the rotary operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300 . This makes it possible to visually determine the current volume setting. Also, in this example, an indicator displayed in accordance with the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 that executes the effect effect using decorative symbols or the like. Also, this indicator is displayed on the top surface of the images displayed on the effect display device 1600 . In this example, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 is translucently displayed so that the image of the variable effect or the like executed behind the indicator can be recognized. In addition, a sub display device different from the effect display device 1600 that executes a variable effect by decorative patterns etc. may be provided. The indicator may be displayed on a sub display device. Further, in this example, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 . Note that after the indicator is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the rotational operation of the rotary operation unit 302, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. You can let it run. Note that the above-described indicator may be displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600, or the lower right display region or the like that does not overlap the effect image or the like in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be partitioned and An indicator may be displayed in the lower display area. Also, a display device for displaying various settings of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided separately from the performance display device 1600, and an indicator may be displayed on this display device.

Further, when the scale of the indicator and the volume of the production sound of music or sound effects are changed by rotating the rotary operation unit 302 of the production operation unit 300, a specific sound (such as “beep”) corresponding to the volume after the change is changed. electronic sound) is output from the top central speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound of the body frame 4. As a result, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the production operation unit 300 is rotated, the production sound of music and sound effects is produced by the top central speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body for bass sound of the main body frame 4. Even if it is not output from the frame speaker 622, the actual volume is determined by the specific sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4. You can adjust the volume while checking the It should be noted that the specific sound may not be output during execution of the variable effect. That is, during execution of the variable performance, a performance sound corresponding to the content of the variable performance is output, and the actual sound volume can be confirmed without outputting the specific sound. As a result, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest caused by the output of the specific sound irrelevant to the content of the variable performance during the variable performance, which hinders the variable performance being executed.

This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which the sound data of the effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated, among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound and notification sound described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case where the volume of the production sound of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the volume adjustment switch, and in the case where the rotation operation section 302 or the pressing operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is By adding or subtracting a predetermined value to the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch in accordance with the operation, the value of the board volume is increased or decreased, thereby adjusting the volume of the sound effects of music or sound effects. There are two methods, one and the other. Since the volume control switch is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 , the body frame 4 must always be left open from the outer frame 2 . Then, only the store clerk in the hall can rotate the volume control switch. However, with the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, the player may find it too small to hear the music and sound effect sounds, and the player may feel loud and the music and sound effect sounds too loud. be. Therefore, when the rotary operation part 302 or the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the volume of the effect sound such as music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. It's like As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music or sound effects to a desired volume. can be increased to a desired volume by operating the rotary operation section 302 or the pressing operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300, and the production sound of music and sound effects can be increased by feeling the volume adjusted by the hall clerk to be large. If the sound is too loud, the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired volume.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a non-playing state for a predetermined period of time and the customer waiting state is reached and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times), the previous time, The volume adjusted by the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game is canceled and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is set to the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk directly turning the volume control switch. As a result, when a player who has been sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 playing a game last time feels that the adjusted sound volume is low and it is difficult to hear the production sounds of music and sound effects, the player can play the game in front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. A player who sits down to play a game can operate the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 to increase the volume to a desired level. When the player who is playing the game feels that the adjusted sound volume is loud and the production sound of music and sound effects is loud, this time, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game operates the production operation unit 300. By operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

[15-2. Volume control for specific frequency bands]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the rotation operation section 302 or the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated, by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to or from the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch, In addition to adjusting the sound volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume, the sound volume of a specific frequency band can be adjusted. Specifically, it is possible to suppress (or mute) the sound output in the high sound range (above a predetermined frequency band).

That is, a predetermined period after turning on the power (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a special symbol display (first special symbol Display device, second special symbol display) for a certain period of time when starting or stopping the fluctuation display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (In this example, the peripheral control unit receives a variation pattern command (until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative patterns, or until 0.5 seconds have passed since the stop display command was received by the peripheral control unit and after the decorative patterns have been confirmed and displayed), and further fluctuation effects. The operation period of the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 set in (effective period for accepting the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in the so-called button effect), etc. Except for this, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed, an environment change mode for setting various environments of the pachinko machine 1 (whether or not high-pitched sound is output, whether or not the LED of the door frame 3 emits light, etc.) is performed. is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . On the screen for performing the environment change mode, a list of environments that can be changed (whether or not high-pitched sound is output, whether or not the LED of the door frame 3 emits light, etc.) is displayed. By operating the pressing operation unit 303 with the environment setting selected, processing for changing the environment setting can be executed. In this way, by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 according to the screen of the environment change mode, the sound output of a specific frequency band can be suppressed, the volume adjustment switch can be rotated, and the operation can be performed. Output can be made at a volume set according to the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300 . In addition, although the environment change mode screen is displayed on the topmost surface of the images displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is displayed semitransparently so that the back image can be recognized.

Specifically, when the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed without rotating the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation unit 300 , a screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . Then, in a state where the rotary operation unit 302 is operated to select the volume control of a specific frequency band, the pressing operation unit 303 is operated to suppress the sound output of the specific frequency band and the specific frequency band. A screen for selecting the state where the sound output is not suppressed is displayed (for example, a mini character for volume setting is displayed, and "high range cut on" or "high range cut off" is displayed in the balloon of the mini character, and the rotation operation The display is switched each time the unit 302 is rotated by a predetermined amount), and the state where the sound output of the specific frequency band is suppressed and the state where the sound output of the specific frequency band is not suppressed by operating the rotary operation unit 302 again. is selected, the change to the selected state is determined by pressing the pressing operation unit 303, and the determination screen is displayed (in the balloon of the mini character for volume setting, "high range (there is a cut in the high range" or "there is no cut in the treble range"). After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the setting screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears, thereby terminating the environment change mode. After the determination screen is displayed, the determination screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 may disappear based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 . The screen for performing the environment change mode, the selection screen, and the determination screen may be displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600. A lower left display area or the like that does not overlap the display of the indicator when adjusting the sound volume may be defined, and the screen for performing the environment change mode, the selection screen, and the decision screen may be displayed in this lower left display area. In addition, a display device for displaying various settings of the pachinko machine 1 is provided separately from the performance display device 1600, and a screen for performing the environment change mode, a selection screen, and a determination screen are displayed on this display device. may

By pressing the pressing operation portion 303 without rotating the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation unit 300, after the screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the rotation operation is performed. Even if the part 302 is rotated, the volume adjustment of the effect sound is disabled, and no indicator is displayed on the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁Then, after the environment change mode is finished, when the rotary operation part 302 is rotated without pressing the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the volume control of the effect sound becomes effective and an indicator is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It will be done.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 175, the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band can be adjusted during the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600 by turning the volume adjustment switch or rotating the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 . If the rotation operation section 302 or the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to suppress the volume below the volume set according to the operation, the rotation operation of the effect operation unit 300 is performed at the timing t2 when these operations are completed. The change corresponding to the operation of the unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is not reflected in the production sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4. . Then, the timing of t3 when the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600 ends (determining and stopping the decorative design based on the reception of the stop display command instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative design from the main control MPU) The change corresponding to the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 performed during the variable production is reflected at the timing), that is, the volume of the production sound in a specific frequency band is changed by the volume adjustment switch. and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300.

It should be noted that after the timing t2 at which the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are completed in adjusting the volume of the effect sound in the specific frequency band during the variable effect, the volume adjustment of the effect sound in the specific frequency band is disabled. be. Then, at the timing t3 when the variable effect ends, when the change in the volume control of the effect sound in the specific frequency band corresponding to the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is reflected, a specific Volume control of the sound effects in the frequency band becomes effective. Further, in this example, even if the volume adjustment of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is disabled, pressing the pressing operation part 303 without rotating the rotation operation part 302 of the effect operation unit 300 will cause the environment to change. A screen for performing the change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, but volume control of a specific frequency band cannot be selected. It should be noted that during the period in which the volume adjustment of the effect sound in the specific frequency band is disabled, the environment change mode can be performed even if the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed without rotating the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation unit 300. screen may not be displayed on the effect display device 1600 .

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound of a specific frequency band during the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600, the rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300 or the pressing operation is performed. When the part 303 is operated, the change corresponding to these operations is not reflected immediately, but is reflected after the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600 is finished. Usually, from the start to the end of the variable performance, the performance sound corresponding to the content of the variable performance is continuous from the top center speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4. Therefore, when adjusting the volume of the sound effect of a specific frequency band in the middle of a variable effect (the sound effect that is continuously output is momentarily interrupted, and then the volume of the specific frequency band When the output of the suppressed effect sound or the unsuppressed effect sound of a specific frequency band is resumed, the player may feel uncomfortable.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the rotation operation section 302 or the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the performance sound of a specific frequency band during the variable performance, the variable performance is performed. By reflecting the change according to this operation until the end, by reflecting it after the end of the variable effect, the effect sound that is continuously played during the variable effect is output with the contents set in advance, and the variable After the production is finished and the output of the production sound that has been continuously played according to the content of the variable production is stopped, the volume of the specific frequency band by operating the rotary operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300. Since the performance sound reflecting the adjustment can be output, the player does not feel uncomfortable. That is, during the variable effect in which the effect sound is continuously output, the effect sound that has been continuously output is stopped without reflecting the volume control of the specific frequency band, and the next effect sound is output. By reflecting it at the switching timing before outputting, it is possible to change the effect sound according to the adjustment without discomfort.

On the other hand, when the rotation operation section 302 or the pressing operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the production sound of a specific frequency band during the period in which the variable production is not performed, this operation is performed. The corresponding change is immediately reflected and the production sound in which the volume of the specific frequency band is adjusted is output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4. be done.

In this way, while the volume adjustment of the effect sound during the variable effect is immediately reflected, the volume adjustment of the effect sound in the specific frequency band is not reflected immediately. That is, for sound-related information that may adversely affect the performance scheduled in the variable performance being executed, such as giving the player a sense of incongruity due to the change in the performance sound, the change during the variable performance is prohibited to reduce the performance effect. It is designed to deter.

Also, when the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is not reflected immediately, the fact may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 to notify the player. For example, when the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the production sound of a specific frequency band during the variable production, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is Although it is not reflected immediately, a mini character for volume setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a waiting display such as "Wait a minute" is displayed in the balloon of this mini character to adjust the volume of the effect sound of a specific frequency band. The player may be notified that the operation of the rotation operation section 302 or the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 for performing is normally accepted. In addition, a standby display for notifying the player that the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 for adjusting the volume of the effect sound of a specific frequency band is normally accepted is specified. For example, a mini character for setting the volume may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 and a speech balloon of this mini character may say, "Wait a minute." The player is notified that the operation of the rotation operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 for adjusting the volume of the production sound of the specific frequency band is performed normally by performing the standby display 1 such as , and when the remaining time until the timing for reflecting the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band reaches a predetermined time, a mini character for volume setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a speech bubble of this mini character is displayed. A standby display 2 that counts down "3", "2", "1", etc. may be performed. Furthermore, when the timing for adjusting the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band has arrived, notification to that effect may be made. A reflection display such as "Selection reflection start!" may be displayed in the balloon.

Further, in the above example, as the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band, equalizer setting A in which the volume in a specific frequency band is not suppressed and equalizer setting B in which the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed are preset equalizer setting patterns. By switching between the equalizer setting A and the equalizer setting B by adjusting the volume of the effect sound in the specific frequency band, a state in which the volume in the specific frequency band is not suppressed and a state in which the sound volume in the specific frequency band is not suppressed. It is designed to switch between two stages (on and off), one in which the volume of the band is suppressed and the other. A plurality of equalizer settings with different degrees of volume suppression in specific frequency bands are stored in advance as equalizer setting patterns, and by switching between these multiple equalizer settings, multiple equalizer settings with different degrees of volume suppression in specific frequency bands can be obtained. You may make it switch to a state. For example, an equalizer setting A in which the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, an equalizer setting B in which the volume of a specific frequency band is muted, and a volume of a specific frequency band is controlled by rotating the volume adjustment switch or effecting operation unit 300. Equalizer setting C (for example, if the set volume is volume 6, change to volume 3) that is suppressed to half the volume set according to the rotation operation of the rotary operation unit 302 is stored as a setting pattern, and by switching among equalizer setting A, equalizer setting B, and equalizer setting C by adjusting the volume of the effect sound of the specific frequency band, the volume of the specific frequency band is changed. A state in which the volume is not suppressed, a state in which the volume of the specific frequency band is muted, and a volume of the specific frequency band are set according to the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the production operation unit 300. It may also be possible to switch between three stages: a state in which the volume is suppressed to half of the normal volume. As a result, it is possible to make settings that match the tastes of various players.

In addition, the production sound of a specific frequency band is not limited to the above-mentioned, but also includes the frequency band and low range of the voice. (If there are a plurality of characters, they may be adjusted collectively or individually), or the volume of the bass range may be adjusted. Also, the effect sound (determined sound) for announcing the determination of the big win, the payout sound at the time of payout of prize balls, etc. may be adjusted. Moreover, the volume of a plurality of frequency bands may be adjusted as specific frequency bands, and for example, the volume of both the high and low frequencies may be adjusted. In this case, the treble range and the bass range may be adjusted together (for example, an operation to switch between a state in which the treble range is not suppressed and a state in which the treble range is suppressed, and a state in which the bass range is not suppressed and suppressed) and the operation to switch to one of the states in one operation), and adjust each (for example, an operation to switch between the state of not suppressing the high range and the state of suppressing the low range and the state of not suppressing the low range and suppressing the low range). and the operation of switching to one of the states may be performed separately). That is, the player may be allowed to select one of a plurality of setting modes (treble sound cut, payout sound cut, big hit determination sound cut, etc.). As a result, it is possible to make settings that match the tastes of various players.

In addition, in the case of outputting a continuous effect sound during the big win game state or the small win game state, etc., the volume control of the effect sound is performed by the top center speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker 464, While the output from the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 is immediately reflected, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band may be reflected after the big win game state and the small win game state are finished. As a result, the output of the continuous effect sound is stopped, and at the switching timing until the next effect sound is output, the volume of the specific frequency band is adjusted by the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3. By reflecting this in the output from the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4, it is possible to change the effect sound in accordance with the adjustment without discomfort. It should be noted that during the jackpot game state and the small win game state, since the player's attention to the content of the performance is lower than in the variable performance, the volume control of the specific frequency band is performed in the same manner as the volume control of the above-mentioned effect sound. The output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side 3, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 may be reflected immediately.

In addition, when outputting a continuous effect sound in a game state different from the normal state such as the time saving state, the volume control of the effect sound is performed by the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3. , the output from the main body frame speaker 622 for low bass of the main body frame 4 is immediately reflected, and the volume control of the specific frequency band is performed during the fluctuation production in order to adjust the volume of the production sound of the specific frequency band. When the rotary operation part 302 or the pressing operation part 303 of the unit 300 is operated, the change corresponding to this operation is not reflected until the variable performance is completed, and is reflected after the variable performance is completed, and the variable performance is performed. The top center speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3 and the top The output from the side speaker 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 for bass may be reflected immediately. That is, the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is not reflected during the execution of the variable performance, which the player pays the most attention to, but is reflected after the variable performance is completed to specify when the player is not paying much attention. The sound volume adjustment of the frequency band may be reflected so that the effect sound can be changed according to the adjustment without discomfort.

Note that even when the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected, the effect sound is actually produced from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4. The production sound after the change is not output until is output. Therefore, if the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the production sound in a specific frequency band during the variable production, the specific frequency Even if the volume adjustment of the band is reflected, the production sound after the change is produced by the top central speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4 after the start of the next variable production. output from That is, the actual output is performed after the lottery processing (hit determination lottery or the like) for starting the next variable effect is performed. Similarly, when the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound of a specific frequency band during the period when the demonstration is being performed on the effect display device 1600 is to immediately reflect the volume adjustment of the effect sound of a specific frequency band, but if the effect sound is not output as a demonstration, the effect sound after the change is applied to the door frame 3 until the next variable effect is started. The sound is not output from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the body frame speaker 622 for bass of the body frame 4, but is output after the start of the variable effect.

Also, the volume control for a specific frequency band is initialized at the same time as the volume of the effect sound is initialized. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a non-playing state for a predetermined period of time and the customer waiting state is reached and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times), the front face of the pachinko machine 1 is the last time. At the same time as the volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the floor and playing the game is canceled and the volume is initialized, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is also initialized (the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed state).

In addition, the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit 300 can be used to adjust the volume of the effect sound of a specific frequency band during the execution of the error notification in which the notification sound is output at a high volume (may be the maximum volume). 303 is operated, depending on the degree of abnormality (unauthorized level) that caused the error notification, it may be appropriately set whether or not the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound. good.

For example, as shown in FIG. 176, when a minor abnormality (full-tank error) occurs, such as when the full-tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is full of game balls. When the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the specific frequency band during the full tank error notification, the volume of the specific frequency band is immediately adjusted to the notification sound. When a minor abnormality (full tank error) occurs after adjusting the volume of a specific frequency band, the state in which the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound is continued, and the top center speaker on the side of the door frame 3 462 , the changed notification sound may be output from the top side speaker 464 and the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 for bass. In this example, the sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 (for example, "Please remove the ball!") reflects the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band as a full tank error notification. (For example, if the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, output as a female voice, and if the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed, output as a male voice).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 177, when a serious abnormality (door open error) such as detection of the opening of the door frame 3 occurs, the sound volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed during the door open error notification. When the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated for adjustment, or when a serious abnormality (door opening error) occurs after adjusting the volume of the specific frequency band, the specific frequency band volume adjustment may not be reflected in the notification sound. In this example, it is possible to adjust the volume in a specific frequency band of the voice output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side as door open error notification (for example, "The door is open!"). (For example, if the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, output as a female voice, and if the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed, output as a male voice), serious When such an abnormality occurs, the volume adjustment in the specific frequency band is disabled, and a notification sound in which the volume in the specific frequency band is not suppressed is output.

That is, as shown in FIG. 176, a full-tank error occurs when a minor abnormality (full-tank error) such as when the full-tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is full of game balls. During notification, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated to adjust the volume, the operation is accepted as valid, but the volume adjustment is not reflected in the notification sound. The volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound, and the changed notification sound is output from the top central speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4. do. Also, as shown in FIG. 177, when a serious abnormality (door open error) such as detection of the opening of the door frame 3 occurs, during the door open error notification, the effect operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume. When the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated, the operation is accepted as valid, but this volume adjustment is not reflected in the notification sound, and the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is not reflected in the notification sound. It's like In this way, by appropriately setting whether or not to reflect the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band in the notification sound according to the degree of abnormality (unauthorized level) that caused the error notification, serious abnormalities can be reliably detected. become discoverable.

Further, as shown in FIG. 177, the rotation operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 are operated so as to suppress the volume of the specific frequency band, and the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 are activated. 464, and in the state where the changed production sound is being output from the main body frame speaker 622 for low bass of the main body frame 4, if a serious abnormality occurs, the environment change mode or the operation of the production operation unit 300 is performed. Suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band is forcibly released (turned off) without adjusting the volume of the specific frequency band, and the notification sound in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed is output. As described above, the notification sound is output for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when the output of the effect sound is resumed after the stop of the notification sound, a specific operation corresponding to the environment change mode or the operation of the effect operation unit 300 is performed. Without adjusting the volume of the frequency band, the suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band that was forcibly canceled is set (on) again, and the production sound with the suppressed volume of the specific frequency band is produced on the side of the door frame 3. The sound is output from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 for bass.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment enables volume adjustment of a specific frequency band, and the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band by operating the rotary operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is reflected. In the case of making it possible to immediately output the effect sound and the notification sound, and without immediately reflecting the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band by the operation of the rotary operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in the output of the effect sound. A case where the timing is delayed to enable the output of the effect sound or the notification sound after the change is appropriately set according to the state of the pachinko machine 1 (game state, error state, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation effect and to reliably find a serious abnormality.

[16. Change settings such as winning probability]
In the above pachinko machine 1, an example will be described in which the probability of a big hit or a small hit is changed according to the set value. Here, it is assumed that operation signals from the setting keys, setting change switches, and setting confirmation switches on the setting board are output to the payout control board 633, and the payout control board 633 is not provided with the RWM clear button 633z having multiple functions. A RAM clear switch, an error release switch, etc. shall be provided separately. Although the setting board is connected to the payout control board 633 in this example, it may be connected to the power board 630 in the power board cover 631 or the setting board may be connected to the main control board 1310 . Further, the setting board may be a part of the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, or the main control board 1310 instead of an independent board. That is, either the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630 or the main control board 1310 may be equipped with a setting key, a setting change switch, a setting confirmation switch and a setting display.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the board unit 620 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 has a setting board for setting the game performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board is connected to the payout control board 633 of the board unit 620, and the payout control unit 633a acquires the operation state of each switch provided on the setting board, and displays the setting value set or selected. control the instrument.

The setting board includes a setting key for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode, a setting change switch for changing the setting value, a setting confirmation switch for confirming and inputting the changed setting value, and , and a setting display for displaying the setting value that is set or selected, and functions as a setting change operation section that receives an operation for changing the setting. As described above, the setting board is provided in the board unit 620 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and in a state where a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are arranged on the game island in the game parlor, the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. This makes it possible to change the settings.

In this embodiment, operation signals of the setting keys, setting change switches and setting confirmation switches on the setting board are taken into the payout control section 633a. Also, the setting display is controlled by the payout control unit 633a. The determined setting is transmitted from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU uses a special lottery etc. as a table (hit determination table, big hit design determination table, small hit design determination table, etc.) according to the setting. select the table that A table used in a special lottery or the like is provided for each setting, and each table is set so that at least some values are different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178, in this example, "big hit probability", "small hit probability", "small hit type", "normal pattern per probability" and "second The opening/closing pattern of the starting port" is set corresponding to each of set values 1 to 6.

In addition, the jackpot probability (ratio of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won in the hit determination table) is set to a different value for each set value. Setting value 3 is "1/299", setting value 4 and setting value 6 are "1/279", and setting value 5 is "1/289". In this example, the higher the setting value is from setting value 1 to setting value 5, the higher is the probability of big hit. there is Incidentally, the probability of a big win may be improved in proportion to the set value. In this case, the higher the set value among the set values 1 to 6, the higher the probability of a big win.

In addition, the small hit probability (the ratio of the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won in the hit judgment table) is set to a different value for each set value, and in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, Set value 1 to set value 4 are "1/100", set value 5 and set value 6 are set to "1/90", and in the table used for the special lottery of the second special symbol, set value 1 to Up to setting value 5 is "50/100", and setting value 6 is "66/100". In this example, in the case of a high set value (set value 5 or set value 6), the occurrence frequency of the big hit game state is indirectly increased by increasing the small hit probability more than the other set values (low set value). It has become. Thus, in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, by changing the small hit probability according to the set value, the set value is estimated by the winning frequency of the small hit in the normal state, while the second special symbol is used. In the table used for the special lottery, the probability of a small hit is set to be substantially the same for all set values, so that the continuation of the short-time state (Ren-chan) is purely enjoyed during the short-time state.

In addition, in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol that is mainly executed in the normal state, the set value 5 and the small hit probability of the set value 6 are set higher than the set value 1 to set value 4. On the other hand, only the set value 6 small hit probability is set higher than the set values 1 to 5 in the table used for the special lottery of the second special symbol executed mainly in the time saving state. Therefore, in the setting value 4 and the setting value 5, although the lottery is performed with a different small hit probability in the special lottery of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, in the special lottery of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state , the small winning lottery is performed with the same probability. However, set value 5 is set higher than set value 4 for the big hit probability and the determination ratio of the small hit type, which will be described later, so that set value 5 is more advantageous than set value 4 as a whole. It is

In addition, while the probability of a big hit in the normal state is high, the probability of a small hit is low. A game with a low possibility of becoming a big hit through a "small hit" and a hit as a trigger for shifting control to a time-saving state like a set value 5 has a low possibility of being a "big hit", while a "small hit" is possible. To provide a new game property capable of realizing a game with a high possibility of winning a big win through a game by changing a set value, and making the set value to be guessed according to the type of the win as an opportunity for shift control to a time saving state.例文帳に追加can be done.

In addition, the small-hit probability may be improved in proportion to the set value, and in this case, setting values 1 to 6 may be set so that the higher the set value, the higher the small-hit probability. . Further, the small-hit probability corresponding to some of the setting values 1 to 6 is lower than the small-hit probability corresponding to any of the setting values lower than the partial setting values. You may make it For example, the small-hit probability of setting value 4 may be 1/100, and the small-hit probability of setting value 3, which is lower than setting value 4, may be 1/90. In this case, setting value 4 is set higher than setting value 3 to determine the ratio of the small win type (in this example, the third small win) that is advantageous when the small win occurs. The setting value 4 may be more advantageous than the setting value 3.

In addition, as a result of the special lottery (hit determination process (step S305)), the determination ratio for determining the small hit type based on the fact that it is decided to be a small hit is also set in the small hit symbol determination table. selection ratio), and different values are set for each set value. In this example, when it is determined to be a small hit as a result of the special lottery of the first special symbol, the set value 1 to set value 3 is determined to be the second small hit at a rate of 9/10 and 10 minutes. It is determined to be the third small hit at a ratio of 1, and at the set value 4 and set value 5, it is decided to be the second small hit at a ratio of 8/10 and the third small hit at a ratio of 2/10. , at a set value of 6, the first small win is determined at a rate of 1/10, the second small win is determined at a rate of 6/10, and the third small win is determined at a rate of 3/10. It's like

Also, when it is determined to be a small hit as a special lottery result of the second special symbol, it is determined to be the first small hit at a rate of 3/10 with the set value 1 and set value 2, and 6/10. It is determined to be the second small hit at the ratio, the third small hit is decided at the ratio of 1/10, the set value 3 and the set value 4 is decided to be the first small hit at the ratio of 2/10, and 10 minutes It is determined to be the second small hit at a rate of 6, and is determined to be the third small hit at a rate of 2/10, and at the set value 5 and set value 6, it is decided to be the first small hit at a rate of 1/10. , is determined to be the second minor win at a rate of 6/10, and is determined to be a third minor win at a rate of 3/10.

In addition, as described above, the first small hit guides the game ball received in the accessory winning opening 2006 to the first losing opening 2535, and there is no possibility of occurrence of the big winning game state, or the possibility of the big winning game state. The probability of occurrence is extremely low. Then, in this example, when it is determined to be a small hit as a special lottery result of the first special symbol, the first small hit is selected only when the set value is 6, and another set value (set value 1 to set value 5) are not selected, so that if the set value 1 to set value 5 is set value 1 to set value 5, the jackpot game is always played when the small hit is made in a state disadvantageous to the player compared to the time saving state of the normal state. A small winning game state can be executed while generating expectations for a big winning game state by generating a second small winning or a third small winning having the possibility of generating a state. That is, in the case of the set value 1 to set value 5, when a small win is made in a state more disadvantageous to the player than in the normal state, which is a time-saving state, attention is paid to the small win game state while having expectations for the big win game state. , All of the game balls received in the accessory winning opening 2006 are guided to the first losing opening 2535, and if the player recognizes that there is no possibility of the occurrence of a jackpot game state, the player will be disappointed, but at least By generating either the second or third small win having the possibility of generating the big win game state, it is possible to draw attention to the big win game state during the small win game state and reduce the amusement of the game. can be suppressed. On the other hand, in the case of the set value 6, although the first small win may be selected, it can be determined that the set value is 6, which is the highest set value, by executing the first small win in the normal state. , the player can be given more joy than the disappointment of winning the first small prize, and the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

Also, when it is determined to be a small hit as a special lottery result of the second special symbol, the first small hit is selected. In the time saving state, the execution frequency of the small winning game state is high because the small winning probability is increased as compared with the normal state. Therefore, even if it is recognized that all the game balls received in the accessory winning opening 2006 after the execution of the first small winning are guided to the first losing opening 2535 and there is no possibility of occurrence of the big winning gaming state. Do not discourage players. Also, when it is determined to be a small hit as a special lottery result of the second special symbol, the low setting value (setting value 1 or setting value 2) increases the determination ratio of the first small hit, and the high setting value It is designed to reduce the determination ratio of the first small hit. That is, at the high set value, when it is determined to be a small win as a result of the special lottery of the second special symbols, the ratio of determining the small win type disadvantageous to the player is lower than at the low set value. Therefore, a high setting value is more advantageous to the player than a low setting value.

In addition, as described above, the third small win guides the game ball received in the accessory prize winning port 2006 to the first V prize winning port 2007. It is in almost the same state. In other words, the fact that the determination ratio of the third small win is high means that the probability of winning the big win is high. By increasing the ratio, the probability of occurrence of the jackpot game state is indirectly improved.

In addition, the probability of winning the normal lottery (the ratio of the normal per design judgment value indicating that it is a normal per normal per design judgment random number) is set to a different value for each set value, and in the set value 1 to set value 5 It is set to "1/2", and the set value 6 is set to "1/1". Therefore, when a game ball is received in the normal winning opening 2003 and a normal lottery is performed at the set value 6, the second start opening door 2411 is always moved forward so that the second start opening 2004 can receive the game ball. This is a state that is more advantageous to the player than other setting values.

Also, in this example, when it is determined to be a normal hit as a normal lottery result, the normal pattern per A (normal pattern per pattern A) and normal pattern per B (normal pattern per pattern B (normal pattern per pattern B1 ~ One of a plurality of normal pattern per types, normal pattern per pattern B5)) and normal pattern per pattern C (normal pattern per pattern C), is determined according to the normal pattern per type determined. Modes (symbol A per normal pattern, pattern B per normal pattern, pattern C per normal pattern) are derived and displayed on the normal pattern display. Moreover, the opening/closing mode of the second starting door 2411 is varied for each set value. Specifically, when it becomes A per normal pattern in the normal state, all setting values (set value 1 to set value 6) are executed "0.1s open once" opening and closing mode, time saving state When it becomes normal per symbol A, execute the opening and closing mode of "perform 6s open once" with all set values (set value 1 to set value 6), and when it becomes normal per symbol B in normal state Executes the opening and closing mode of "executing 0.1s opening twice" with odd setting values (setting value 1, setting value 3, and setting value 5), and even setting values (setting value 2, setting value 4, setting Execute the opening and closing mode of "execute 0.1s open once" with value 6), and when it becomes B per normal symbol in the time saving state, set value 1 to set value 3 "execute 6s open once" At set values 4 and 5, the open/close mode of "execute 3s open twice" is performed, and at set value 6, the open/close mode of "execute 3s open once" is performed.

In addition, in the case of the set value 1 to set value 5, one of the two types of normal symbol per type, normal symbol per A and normal symbol per B, is determined as the normal symbol per type. In the case of the set value 6, one of the three types of normal symbol per type, that is, normal symbol per A, normal symbol per B and normal symbol per C, is determined as the normal symbol per type. . Then, when the normal pattern per C is reached in the normal state, the opening and closing mode of "executing 0.1s opening 6 times" is executed with the set value 6, and when the normal pattern per C is obtained in the time saving state, the setting is performed. With a value of 6, the opening/closing mode of "execute 1s opening 6 times" is executed.

In this way, the operating mode of the second starter door 2411 (opening/closing mode of the second starter 2004) that opens the second starter 2004 based on the result of the normal lottery being a normal win is set for each set value. , the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 can be suggested by the operation mode of the second starting door 2411.

By inserting a predetermined key into the keyhole (key insertion part) and turning the key to the setting position, the setting key maintains the short-circuited or open state of the contact, and serves as a trigger for changing to the setting change mode. A switch that outputs a signal. It should be noted that another switch may also be used instead of providing the setting key. In this case, the setting change mode is started by operating (long pressing) the setting change switch for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and the setting change mode is terminated by pressing the setting change switch for a long time during the setting change mode. may

Alternatively, the setting change mode may be started/finished by operating the RAM clear switch. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch, and continuing to operate the RAM clear switch for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) (long press). Also, the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is being operated, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch is less than a predetermined time, RAM clear processing is executed. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by pressing the RAM clear switch for a long time during the setting change mode.

By doing so, even an employee who does not have a key for the setting key can change the setting, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled in the hall. Further, since the operation time of the setting change switch is detected, it is preferable to detect the operation when the setting change switch falls.

The setting change switch is composed of, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to sequentially switch and select setting values (1 to 6). That is, when the setting change switch is pushed once, the set value is increased by 1, and when the set value is 6 and the setting change switch is operated, the set value becomes 1. The setting value may be selected by operating the RAM clear switch without providing the setting change switch. It should be noted that the set value is not limited to six steps, and may be set in fewer steps (for example, two steps) or more steps (for example, eight steps).

In addition, the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device (that is, the probability of winning a special symbol), and the set value = 1 has a low hit probability, and the set value = 6 has a high hit probability. In addition, depending on the setting value, the ratio of the probability variable jackpot, the ratio of time saving (ST) after the jackpot, the number of times of time saving, the number of rounds and counts of the jackpot, the probability of winning the general prize, the starting prize, and the prize ball of the big prize Various parameters related to the game, such as number, may be changed to change the number of prize balls a player can win.

The setting confirmation switch is composed of, for example, a momentary type switch, and is a switch for confirming a setting value selected by operating the setting change switch and inputting it to the pachinko machine 1 . The setting confirmation switch may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary switch. The setting change switch and the setting confirmation switch should preferably be configured with switches having different operating methods (operating directions) and different shapes so as not to mistakenly operate both switches. For example, the setting change switch may be a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch may be a momentary toggle switch.

Alternatively, the selected setting may be confirmed by returning the setting key to the normal position without providing the setting confirmation switch. Alternatively, the set value selected with the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1 as a trigger may be determined. For example, operation of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, contact detection by the handle touch sensor 192 by touching the handle 182, operation of the single button operation sensor 194, operation of the ball lending button, operation of the return button, The selected setting may be confirmed by detection of winning of a game ball to the starting ports 2002 and 2004, or the like. The operation unit substituting the setting confirmation switch may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used in the game) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

In other words, in order to set the game performance of the pachinko machine 1 of this example, three switches (including setting keys) were provided on the setting board, but it is sufficient to provide one or two switches on the setting board. .

Further, setting change operation may be enabled only by the RAM clear switch without providing any of the setting key, the setting change switch and the setting confirmation switch. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch, and continuing to operate the RAM clear switch for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) (long press). Also, the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is being operated, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch is less than a predetermined time, RAM clear processing is executed. Furthermore, instead of the setting change switch, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) during the setting change mode, and instead of the setting confirmation switch, the RAM clear switch can be operated for a predetermined time. The setting value can be determined by the above operation (long press). Furthermore, the setting change mode may be terminated by pressing the RAM clear switch for a long time after the setting is confirmed.

The setting indicator is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and displays a setting value selected by operating a setting change switch, and displays a current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, operating a setting key). The setting indicator may be configured by LEDs of the number of settable values instead of the 7-segment LEDs. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value lights up to display the set value.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, an error type indicator by a 7-segment LED for displaying the type of payout error is provided on the payout control board 633. The set value that has been set or the current set value may be displayed on the error type indicator. In this case, it is preferable to change the display mode so that the display of the error type and the display of the set value can be distinguished from each other. For example, dots may be turned off when displaying error types, and lit when displaying set values. Alternatively, the error type display may be lit (not blinking), and the setting value may be blinking.

[16-1. Setting change process]
Next, processing related to setting change will be described. FIG. 179 is an explanatory diagram showing the procedure for changing the set values.

In this example, when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, main control side power-on processing is executed, and when the conditions for starting the setting change mode are satisfied in the main control side power-on processing, It is designed to change the above setting value.

Specifically, the main control MPU performs initial value setting and start-up setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S12) in the main control side power-on process, and then determines the state of the setting key to turn on the setting key. If operated, a setting change mode for changing the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. When the setting key is operated, a setting key operation signal is output from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310, and when the main control MPU receives the setting key operation signal, it determines that the setting key is operated to be ON. . It should be noted that the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 is operated, the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the handle 182 is touched, or the prepaid card is inserted into the CR unit (the prepaid card has a balance). , the setting change mode may not be started when there is a balance in the cash sand. In addition, even if there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 1 is being tampered with (for example, a magnetic error is detected), the setting change mode may not be started.

When the setting change mode is started, the main control MPU uses data other than the game state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state, information on prize balls) in the game control area (also called specific area) of the built-in RAM Then, the first RAM clearing process for clearing the data indicating the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is executed.

Next, the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 are switched by performing a setting change operation. That is, when the main control MPU ends the first RAM clearing process, it transmits a first RAM clearing process end command to the payout control unit 633a. , the initial value (for example, setting value 0) is displayed blinking, and the setting value displayed on the setting display is switched each time the setting change switch is operated (loop from setting value 1 to setting value 6).

Note that the setting value is cleared by the main control MPU executing the first RAM clearing process and becomes unset. Also, if the setting value is not set, the setting change mode cannot be terminated. If the power is turned off while the setting value is not set, the power will be turned on again. Then, the setting change mode is performed. At this time, if the setting key is turned off, loop processing is performed to monitor the state of the setting key until the setting key is turned on. will be started.

In addition, the payout control unit 633a checks whether or not the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, that is, whether or not the body frame open switch is turned off. is not opened), it loops until the main body frame open switch is turned off, and does not accept the operation of the setting confirmation switch. That is, the setting change operation is not completed until the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 .

When the main body frame open switch is off, or when the main body frame open switch is turned off, when the setting confirmation switch is operated, the payout control unit 633a confirms the setting value displayed on the setting display ( (blinking display is terminated and lighting display is performed), and a setting change end command indicating the determined set value is transmitted to the main control MPU.

When the main control MPU receives the setting change end command, it stores the set value indicated by the received setting change end command in the game control area of the built-in RAM. As a result, a lottery process or the like is performed in accordance with the determined set value.

Then, when the conditions for ending the setting change mode are established, that is, when the setting key is turned off, the main control MPU performs a power failure clearing process (step S14).

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the setting values are changed by the above-described processing.

When the setting change mode ends, that is, when the setting key is turned off, the payout control unit 633a terminates the display of the setting value on the setting display (does not display the setting value). may Further, when the setting key is turned on after the setting change mode is finished, the current setting value is displayed on the setting display although the setting change mode is not executed. As a result, the game clerk can change the set value after grasping the current set value.

Further, when the setting change mode is to be executed, the fact may be notified. For example, when it is determined that the setting key is turned on, a setting change mode start command for notifying the start of the setting change mode is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511, and when the setting change mode start command is received. Based on this, the peripheral control unit 1511 may perform a predetermined display (during setting change, etc.) on the effect display device 1600 . In this case, when the setting change mode is to be ended, that is, when the setting key is turned off, a setting change mode end command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify that the setting change mode is to be ended. The peripheral control unit 1511 may terminate the predetermined display performed by the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the change mode termination command. It should be noted that the set value determined as a predetermined display or the set value displayed on the setting display may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this case, the setting value may be erased when the setting change mode ends. good.

In addition, when the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies the setting change mode, the main control MPU may also notify the setting change mode. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be a display of a special mode that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all special symbol indicators are turned off or turned on).

On the other hand, after the initial value setting and startup setting of the main control built-in WDT in the main control side power-on process (step S12), the state of the setting key is discriminated, and if the setting key is not turned on, step The processing after S14 is executed.

In the main control side power-on process, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, erases various information, or determines in step S30. When it is determined that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S32, or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in the determination of step S32, that is, main control side power failure processing is not completed normally, in the game control area in step S38, data other than the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 and the game state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state, information on prize balls ), the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set (step S40). As described above, unlike the first RAM clear process, the setting value information is not initialized in the second RAM clear process. That is, by turning on the setting key when the power is turned on, the first RAM clear processing can be executed and the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 can be cleared, and when the power is turned on, the second RAM can be cleared by operating the RAM clear switch. It is possible to clear the information about the game state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state, information on prize balls) by executing the processing. Further, when the power is turned on, the setting key is turned on to execute the first RAM clearing process to clear the set value information of the pachinko machine 1, and then the RAM clearing switch is operated to execute the second RAM clearing process to play the game. Clear information about the state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state, information about prize balls), that is, information about the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 and game state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state, information about prize balls) It is also possible to clear both. In this manner, one or both of the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process can be selectively executed according to the information to be cleared.

In this example, the main control MPU determines whether the setting key is operated, but the payout control section 633a may determine. In addition, the setting key operation signal transmitted from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310 can be transmitted by serial communication, by transmitting a predetermined pulse signal (pulses of a predetermined frequency for a predetermined number of times), or by transmitting a power supply voltage to the ground. A signal of an intermediate potential, which is not a voltage, may be output. In order to prevent a fraudulent act of activating the setting change mode by short-circuiting the terminals of the setting keys, a signal related to the operation of the setting keys is sent from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310 by a signal that cannot be generated by shorting the terminals. This is because it is preferable to transmit to

[16-2. Fluctuation effect according to the set value]
Next, a variable effect corresponding to each set value will be described. Figure 180 is a variation pattern table referred to in the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process, second variation pattern setting process).

In this example, a variation pattern table is provided for each set value, and the variation pattern type selected according to the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is different. Specifically, when the first special lottery result is out of reach in the normal state, the special figure 1 loss variation pattern table ( In FIG. 180(A), for example, the effect display device 1600 displays a mini character for suggesting settings, and also displays "Is it low?" or "Is it 1, 2 or 3?" By doing so, a set value 1 to a set value 3 can be selected for a deviation variation pattern 25 that executes a "low setting suggestion effect" that suggests that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is one of 1, 2, and 3. For example, a mini-character for suggesting setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and at the same time, "Maybe it's expensive?" A set value 4 to set value 6 can be selected as a failure variation pattern 26 for executing a "high setting suggestion effect" suggesting that the set value is any one of 4, 5, and 6. Therefore, when the "high setting suggestion effect" is executed in the variable effect, the player can recognize that the set value is at least 4 or more, so that the game interest can be improved.

In addition, for example, by displaying a mini character for suggesting settings on the effect display device 1600, and displaying "May be an even number?" The set value of 2, 4, or 6 is any one of 2, 4, or 6. The set value 2, set value 4, and set value 6 can be selected for the deviation fluctuation pattern 27, for example The set value of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed by displaying a mini character for suggesting setting on the performance display device 1600 and displaying ``may be an odd number?'' or ``may be 1, 3 or 5? A set value 1, a set value 3, and a set value 5 are selectable for the failure variation pattern 28 that executes an "odd number setting suggestive effect" suggesting that is any one of 1, 3, and 5. Therefore, when the "even number setting suggestion effect" is executed in the variable effect, the set value is 2, the set value 4, or the set value 6, and when the "odd number setting suggestion effect" is executed, the set value is 1, the set value The player can recognize that it is either 3 or set value 5. In addition, it is possible to guess the set value by combining with the execution history of "low setting suggestive effect" and "high setting suggestive effect". That is, if the "odd number setting suggestion effect" and the "low setting suggestion effect" are executed, the set value is 1 or 3, and the "odd number setting suggestion effect" and the "high setting suggestion effect" are executed. If so, the set value is 5, and if the "even number setting suggestive effect" and "low setting suggestive effect" are being executed, the set value is 2, and the "even number setting suggestive effect" and "high setting suggestive effect" are performed. is executed, it can be inferred that the set value is 4 or 6. Thus, in this example, a new game feature is provided in which a set value is guessed by a combination of setting suggestion effects executed out of a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects.

In addition, in this example, for example, by displaying a mini character for suggesting settings on the effect display device 1600, and displaying "maybe the best?" or "maybe 6?" A failure variation pattern 29 that executes a "maximum setting suggesting effect" suggesting that the value is 6 can be selected only with a set value of 6. - 特許庁Therefore, when the "maximum setting suggesting effect" is executed in the variable effect, the player can recognize that the set value is the maximum set value 6, thereby improving the game interest. In addition, in the case of the set value 6, it is possible to select a loss variation pattern 31 in which the "maximum setting fixed effect" is executed in the case of a loss that does not result in a reach or in the case of a loss of reach. It is possible to notify that the set value 6 of the maximum setting is fixed, and to make the player recognize that the maximum setting is fixed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Also, when the first special lottery result is a small hit in the normal state, the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation pattern table (Fig. 180 In (B)), for example, a mini character for suggesting setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and "maximum setting confirmed!" A small hit variation pattern 33 and a small hit variation pattern 34 for executing the "maximum setting fixed effect" for informing that the value is 6 can be selected only at the set value 6. - 特許庁Therefore, when the ``maximum setting fixed performance'' is executed in the variable performance in the case of a small win, the player can recognize that the set value is the highest set value 6, and the game interest is improved. .

Also, when the first special lottery result is a big hit in the normal state, the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table (Fig. 180 (C )), the big hit variation pattern 34 for executing the “maximum setting fixed effect” can be selected only with the set value 6. Therefore, when the "maximum setting confirmation effect" is executed in the variable effect in the case of a big hit, the player can recognize that the set value is the maximum set value 6, and the big win game state is executed. By doing so, it is possible to provide the player with a double pleasure, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Also, when the second special lottery result becomes a small hit during the time saving state, the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern table (Fig. 180 In (D)), the small hit variation pattern 34 for executing the "maximum setting fixed effect" can be selected only at the set value 6. - 特許庁Therefore, when the ``maximum setting fixed effect'' is executed in the variable effect in the case of a small win, the player can recognize that the set value is the highest set value 6, and furthermore, the character prize winning opening. By guiding the game ball that entered 2006 to the first V winning port 2007 and winning the third small win that generates a big win game state, double joy can be given to the player. Increased interest.

As described above, in this example, the small hit probability is changed according to the setting value of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. That is, in the normal state, the set values 1 to 4 have a small hit probability of "1/100", while the set values 5 and 6 are higher than the set values 1 to 4, "90 minutes 1 of the Similarly, in the time saving state, the setting value 1 to setting value 5 are set to a small hit probability "1/10", while the setting value 6 is higher than the setting value 1 to setting value 5 "1/9" It is said that

In addition, when the second special lottery result becomes a small hit during the time saving state, the small hit fluctuation pattern 34 that executes the "highest setting fixed effect" that can be selected in the second fluctuation pattern setting process is over a long period of time (155 s). and is longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation patterns that can be selected with set values 1 to 5 lower than set value 6. Also, in the set value 6, the selection rate of the small hit variation pattern 20 having a longer variation time than the small hit variation patterns 1 to 3 is higher than the set value 1 to the set value 5 lower than the set value 6. That is, at the set value 6 where the small hit probability is higher than the other set values, the variation time of the variation performance executed during the time saving state is long. As described above, with the set value 6, the probability of a small hit is higher than with the set values 1 to 5, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball that entered the accessory winning hole 2006 is placed in the first V winning hole 2007. Since the ratio of determination to the third small win that induces the player to induce a big win game state is also set higher than the set value 1 to set value 5, it is possible to obtain a large amount of prize balls in a short time. Therefore, in the case of the set value 6, by increasing the selection rate of the small hit variation pattern 20 or the small hit variation pattern 34 in which a longer variation time is set than the other small hit variation patterns than the set value 1 to the set value 5 By suppressing the number of execution times of the variable presentation per unit time, improvement of gambling property is suppressed.

In addition, in this example, although the random numbers for determining the variation pattern are distributed in substantially the same way for all the set values, in the variation pattern table corresponding to the set value 6, the variation patterns peculiar to the set value 6 (loss variation pattern 29 to deviation variation A pattern 31, a small hit variation pattern 33, a small hit variation pattern 34, and a big hit variation pattern 34) are provided, so distribution of variation pattern determination random numbers is different. Therefore, in this example, only the variation pattern determination random numbers assigned to a specific variation pattern (adjustment variation pattern) in the variation pattern table corresponding to the set value 6 are adjusted and the variation pattern determination random numbers are distributed. In this way, only the random numbers for determining the variation pattern assigned to the specific variation pattern are adjusted without changing the distribution of the random numbers for determining the variation pattern for each of all the variation patterns in the variation pattern table corresponding to the set value 6. As a result, the load of adding or deleting variation patterns is reduced, and the design of the game machine is facilitated. In addition, the specific variation pattern is one that maintains a certain or more appearance frequency even if the number of distribution of the random number for determining the variation pattern is reduced, and at least the random number for determining the variation pattern set in other setting values It should be adjusted so that it has 60% or more of the distribution number, and the appearance rate does not decrease excessively compared to other set values.

Thus, in this example, the small winning probability and the fluctuation time of the variable presentation executed when the result of the special lottery results in a small winning are made different according to the set value of the pachinko machine 1, thereby balancing the gambling property. is taking

In addition, the above setting suggestion effect (low setting suggestion effect, high setting suggestion effect, even number setting suggestion effect, odd setting suggestion effect, highest setting suggestion effect, highest setting fixed effect) is the first special lottery result in the normal state. Or, it is most likely to be executed when the reach is lost, and there are many types of setting suggestion effects that can be executed. On the other hand, if the second special lottery result in the time saving state is lost or the reach is lost, or the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) in the normal state and in the time saving state is a small hit or a big hit In this case, it is difficult to execute compared to the case where the first special lottery result in the normal state is lost or the reach is lost, and there are fewer types of setting suggestion effects that can be executed. That is, during the time-saving state or when a small hit is made, attention is paid to the acceptance of the game ball into the V winning opening by reducing the execution frequency of the setting suggestive effect compared to the case of the loss or the reach loss in the normal state. there is

[17. Guide passage group consisting of first guide passage and second guide passage]
[17-1. Regarding the case where the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in the first guide passage]
As an embodiment different from the above, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting a game ball B that has entered the first guide path 2521 of the guide path group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is provided. Description will be made with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in the first guide passage 2521, and FIG. 182 is a specific example of the warning effect when the right detection sensor 2404 is executed. .

As shown in FIG. 181, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting passage of the game ball B is provided slightly below the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 (in the vicinity of the entrance). This right detection sensor 2404 is provided at such a position that the game ball B entering the first guide passage 2521 certainly passes through. In other words, when the game ball B enters the upstream space 2505 and hits the game ball B with the strength of contacting the impinging portion 1006 (so-called right-handed hitting), it enters the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, When the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521 , the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 . On the other hand, if the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2505 and hits with a strength that does not abut against the impinging portion 1006 (strength somewhat weaker than right-handed hitting), it enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. When the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 because the right detection sensor 2404 is provided inside the first guide passage 2521. no.

The right detection sensor 2404 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 , and a detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404 is input to the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 . Based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404, the peripheral control MPU monitors whether or not the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521. Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that the game ball B is hit into the first guide passage 2521, and the right detection sensor 2404 detects the game If the passage of the ball B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B is not hit into the first guide passage 2521.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, it is necessary to change the hitting method (shooting intensity) of the game ball B according to the game state, and to change the area and the passage where the game ball B is hit. First, during the small winning game, the accessory winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521 is opened, and the game ball B is entered into the opened accessory winning opening 2006.例文帳に追加is required. Therefore, during the small winning game, the game ball enters the upstream space 2505 and hits the impact part 1006 so that the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520. It is necessary to shoot B (so-called right shot).

Also, during the jackpot game, the big winning hole 2005 provided at the bottom right of the center accessory 2500 is opened, and it is required to enter the game ball B into the opened big winning hole 2005. - 特許庁However, in the guide path group 2520, the game ball B discharged from the exit of the second guide path 2522 than the exit of the first guide path 2521 is configured to enter the big winning hole 2005 with a higher probability. ing. In addition, during the time-saving state, the second starting hole 2004, which is also provided at the lower right of the center role 2500, is opened based on the entry of the ball into the normal winning hole 2003, which is provided at the lower right of the center role 2500. It is required to enter the game ball B into the second starting port 2005 that has been opened, but the second guide path 2522 The game ball B ejected from the exit of the game ball B enters the normal winning hole 2003 and the second start hole 2005 with a higher probability. For this reason, during the jackpot game and during the time saving state, the game ball B enters the upstream space 2505 and does not come into contact with the impact part 1006 so that the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520. It is preferable to hit the game ball B with a sharpness (strength somewhat weaker than right-handed hitting).

Also, during the normal state, it is required to enter the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 provided below the center accessory 2500 . For this reason, during the normal state, the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 is the highest so that the game ball B can enter the first start port 2002 and flow down the left side area of the center role 2500. It is necessary to hit the game ball B with the strength to enter the front view left side (left side of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) from the turned part (so-called left hitting).

In this embodiment, it is necessary to change the hitting method (shooting intensity) of the game ball B according to the game state, and to change the area or passage where the game ball B is hit. If B has not been hit, the player is reminded to hit the game ball B into the recommended area or path. Specifically, the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide path 2521 detects the passage of the game ball B when the game ball B should not be hit into the first guide path 2521 of the guide path group 2520. When this state continues for a predetermined time, the player is alerted.

First, during the big hit game and the time saving state, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 When the passage of the game ball B is detected, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and this state continues for a predetermined time (for example, five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds). ), the player is warned that the game ball B should be driven into the second guide passage 2522 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 182(A), the effect display device 1600 is executing the first warning effect of notifying the message "Please hit the second guidance passage". As a result, during the jackpot game and the time-saving state, the hitting method is changed to a strength that does not enter the upstream space 2505 and abut against the impinging portion 1006 (strength somewhat weaker than right-hand hitting), and the second guidance is provided. The player can grasp that the game ball B should be hit into the path 2522 . After the execution of the first warning effect, if the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the game ball B is guided to the first guide passage 2521. It is determined that the state in which the is driven is eliminated, and the first warning effect is terminated.

More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B during the jackpot game and the time saving state, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide path 2521, and the monitoring timer is set. As soon as it starts, the count value is incremented each time the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 during monitoring by the monitoring timer. Then, after the start of the monitoring timer, when the state in which the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time (for example, when five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds), the second 1 warning effect is executed, but when the state does not continue for a predetermined time (for example, when game balls B are detected less than 5 balls in 5 seconds and ends), the first guide passage 2521 The first warning effect is not executed assuming that the state in which the ball B has been struck has been resolved, and the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. Also, after the start of the monitoring timer, the game state is switched from the jackpot game or the time saving state, and even when the state in which the game ball B should be hit into the second guide passage 2522 is not reached, the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. ing. Then, after the execution of the first warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first In addition to terminating the first warning performance assuming that the state in which the game ball B is struck into the guide passage 2521 is eliminated, the second guide passage 2522 is also displayed when the game state is switched from the jackpot game or the time-saving state. The first warning effect is terminated because it is no longer in a state in which the game ball B should be hit.

Also, during the normal state, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 detects the passage of the game ball B. Then, it is determined that the game ball B is hit into the first guide path 2521, and if this state continues for a predetermined time (for example, five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds), the center role is determined. The player is warned that the area to the left of object 2500 should be hit with game ball B. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 182(B), the effect display device 1600 is executing the second warning effect of notifying the message "Please hit left". As a result, during the normal state, the hitting method is changed to the strength of entering the left side (left side of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 in front view. , the player can grasp that the game ball B should be hit in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 . When the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the state in which the game ball B is struck into the first guide path 2521 is canceled. Then, the second warning effect is terminated.

More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B during the normal state, it is determined that the game ball B has been hit into the first guide path 2521, and the monitoring timer is started. Each time the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 during monitoring by the monitoring timer, the count value is incremented. Then, after the start of the monitoring timer, when the state in which the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time (for example, when five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds), the second 2 When the warning production is executed, but the state does not continue for a predetermined time (for example, when the game ball B is detected less than 5 balls in 5 seconds and ends), the first guide passage 2521 The second warning effect is not executed assuming that the state in which the ball B has been hit has been resolved, and the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. Also, after the monitoring timer is started, the game state is switched from the normal state, and even when the state where the game ball B should be hit into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 is lost, the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. ing. Then, after the execution of the second warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first In addition to terminating the second warning effect assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been hit into the guide passage 2521 is resolved, even when the game state is switched from the normal state, the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 The second warning effect is terminated because it is no longer in a state in which the game ball B should be hit.

As described above, the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide path 2521 detects the passage of the game ball B when the game ball B should not be driven into the first guide path 2521 of the guide path group 2520. When this state continues for a predetermined time, a warning screen (first and second warning effects) is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the contents of the warning change according to the game state. As a result, even if the game ball B is hit into the first guide path 2521 when the game ball B is not in the game state in which the game ball B should be hit into the first guide path 2521, which area or path is recommended? , the player can accurately grasp.

On the other hand, during the small winning game, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 detects the game ball B If the passage is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B is not hit into the first guide path 2521, and if this state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the game moves to the first guide path 2521. Warn the player that he should hit ball B. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 182(C), the effect display device 1600 is executing the third warning effect of notifying the message "Please hit the first guide passage". As a result, during the small winning game, the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521 by changing the hitting method to the strength of entering the upstream space portion 2505 and contacting the impinging portion 1006. can be grasped by Then, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state in which the game ball B is not hit into the first guide passage 2521 is resolved, and the third warning effect is terminated. I have to.

More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B during the small winning game, it is determined that the game ball B is not driven into the first guide path 2521, and the monitoring timer is activated. is starting. Then, after the start of the monitoring timer, if the state in which the game ball B is not hit into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the third warning effect is executed. When the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B within the time (for example, 5 seconds), a third warning is issued as the state in which the game ball B has not been hit into the first guide path 2521 has been resolved. The performance is not executed, and the information such as the watchdog timer is cleared. Further, after the start of the monitoring timer, the game state is switched from the small winning game, and even when the game ball B is not in the state to be driven into the first guide passage 2521, the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. After the execution of the third warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the state in which the game ball B is not driven into the first guide path 2521 is reached. In addition to ending the fourth warning performance as being canceled, even when the game state is switched from the small winning game, the state where the game ball B should be driven into the first guide path 2521 is no longer the state, and the third warning performance is given. is finished.

In this embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided slightly below the entrance (near the entrance) which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, but the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is always For example, it may be provided inside the first guide passage 2521 , as long as it passes through the first guide passage 2521 , at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 , at the lower end of the first guide passage 2521 at the outlet.

Further, in the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided upstream of the prize winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521, but is located downstream of the prize winning opening 2006. may be provided. In such a case, when the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 during the small winning game, there is a high possibility that the game ball B will enter the accessory winning opening 2006 that is in the open state. Therefore, the frequency of the game ball B passing through the right detection sensor 2404 located on the downstream side is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the right detection sensor 2404 from malfunctioning due to excessive passage of the game ball B.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first to third warning effects are exemplified by displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600. When a betting area instruction display (for example, a right-handed shot display with a right arrow image or a left-handed shot display with a left arrow image) is separately provided for allowing the player to always grasp that the player should hit the shot, this shot is displayed. It is desirable to execute the first to third warning effects so as not to obstruct the closed area indication display. For example, in the upper right part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, a "display area for displaying the hitting area instruction display" is divided and provided, and a display area of the effect display device 1600 other than that area is provided. It is desirable to divide and provide a "display area for displaying the first to third warning effects" in the upper left part of , so that each guidance is not obstructed by being superimposed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first to third warning effects are illustrated by displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but such warnings are realized as sound effects instead of display. In that case, the priority of allocation to channels finitely provided for outputting sound is higher than various effects set during the normal state, during the jackpot game, or during the time saving state. It is desirable to set such that the data is output as much as possible even when there are no vacant (unused) channels in the finitely provided channels. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent a player who is unfamiliar with the game characteristics of hitting a variety of game balls B from being disadvantaged.

[17-2. Regarding the case where detection sensors are provided in the first guide passage and the second guide passage]
As an embodiment different from the above, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting a game ball B that has entered the first guide path 2521 of the guide path group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and a game ball B that has entered the second guide path 2522 A case where a left detection sensor 2405 capable of detecting the game ball B that has been played is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184. FIG. FIG. 183 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which detection sensors are provided in the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and FIG. This is a specific example of production during execution.

As shown in FIG. 183, slightly below the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 (in the vicinity of the entrance), a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting passage of the game ball B is provided, and a second A left detection sensor 2405 capable of detecting the passage of the game ball B is provided slightly below the entrance which is the upper end of the guide passage 2522 (in the vicinity of the entrance). This right detection sensor 2404 is provided at such a position that the game ball B entering the first guide passage 2521 certainly passes through. In other words, when the game ball B enters the upstream space 2505 and hits the game ball B with the strength of contacting the impinging portion 1006 (so-called right-handed hitting), it enters the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, When the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521 , the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 .

On the other hand, the left detection sensor 2405 is provided at a position through which the game ball B that has entered the second guide passage 2522 must pass. In other words, if the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not enter the upstream space 2505 and abut against the impinging portion 1006 (strength somewhat weaker than right-handed hitting), it will enter the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. , when the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B is detected by the left detection sensor 2405. As shown in FIG.

The right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 are connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and detection signals from the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 are sent to the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. is entered. Then, the peripheral control MPU, based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404, monitors whether the game ball B is driven into the first guide path 2521, based on the detection signal from the left detection sensor 2405 Then, it monitors whether or not the game ball B is hit into the second guide passage 2522.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that the game ball B is hit into the first guide path 2521, and the left detection sensor 2405 detects the game When the passage of the ball B is detected, it is determined that the game ball B is driven into the second guide path 2522, and if the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 do not detect the passage of the game ball B, It is determined that the game ball B has not been driven into either the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522 .

In this embodiment, as described above in detail, it is necessary to change the hitting method (shooting intensity) of the game ball B according to the game state, and to change the area and the path where the game ball B is hit, but it is recommended. If the game ball B has not been hit into the area or path to be played, the player is reminded to hit the game ball B into the recommended area or path. Specifically, since the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in both the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522, the normal state in which the game ball B should be driven into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 , either the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide path 2521 or the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide path 2522 detects the passage of the game ball B for a predetermined time. If continued, it is possible to alert the player.

More specifically, during the normal state, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 When the passage is detected, it is determined that the game ball B is driven into the first guide path 2521, and when the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide path 2522 detects the passage of the game ball B, the second It is determined that the game ball B is hit into the guide passage 2522, and these states continue for a predetermined time (for example, the game ball B is detected in 5 seconds by one or both of the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405). If five or more balls are detected), the player is warned that the game ball B should be hit in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 184(A), the effect display device 1600 is executing the fourth warning effect of notifying the message "Please hit left". As a result, during the normal state, the hitting method is changed to the strength of entering the left side (left side of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 in front view. , the player can grasp that the game ball B should be hit in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 . Then, when the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 do not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 It is determined that the state in which the game ball B is hit is eliminated, and the fourth warning performance is terminated.

More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B during the normal state, the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522. Then, a monitoring timer is started, and the count value is incremented every time the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 during monitoring by the monitoring timer. After the start of the monitoring timer, when the state in which the game ball B is hit into the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 continues for a predetermined time (for example, five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds) case), while the fourth warning effect is executed, if the state does not continue for a predetermined time (for example, if less than 5 game balls B are detected in 5 seconds), the 4th Assuming that the state in which the game ball B is hit into the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 is resolved, the fourth warning effect is not executed, and the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. Also, after the monitoring timer is started, the game state is switched from the normal state, and even when the state where the game ball B should be hit into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 is lost, the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. ing. After the execution of the fourth warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). , in addition to ending the fourth warning effect assuming that the state in which the game ball B is hit into the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 has been resolved, when the game state is switched from the normal state Also, the fourth warning effect is terminated because it is no longer the state in which the game ball B should be hit into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 .

During the small winning game, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 If the passage is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B is not hit into the first guide path 2521, and if this state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the game moves to the first guide path 2521. Warn the player that he should hit ball B. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 184(B), the effect display device 1600 is executing the fifth warning effect of notifying the message "Please hit the first guidance passage". As a result, during the small winning game, the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521 by changing the hitting method to the strength of entering the upstream space portion 2505 and contacting the impinging portion 1006. can be grasped by Then, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state in which the game ball B is not hit into the first guide passage 2521 is resolved, and the fifth warning effect is terminated. I have to.

More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B during the small winning game, it is determined that the game ball B is not driven into the first guide path 2521, and the monitoring timer is activated. is starting. Then, after the start of the monitoring timer, if the state in which the game ball B is not hit into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the fifth warning effect is executed. When the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B within the time (for example, 5 seconds), the state in which the game ball B is not hit into the first guide path 2521 is resolved, and a fifth warning is issued. The performance is not executed, and the information such as the watchdog timer is cleared. Also, after the start of the monitoring timer, the game state is switched from the small winning game, and even when the game ball B should not be hit into the first guide passage 2521, the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. After the execution of the fifth warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the state in which the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521 is reached. In addition to ending the fifth warning performance as being canceled, even when the game state is switched from the small winning game, the state where the game ball B should be driven into the first guide path 2521 is no longer the state to drive the game ball B into the first guide path 2521. is finished.

On the other hand, during the big hit game and the time saving state, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520, but the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide passage 2522 If the passage of the game ball B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B is not hit into the second guide path 2522, and if this state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the second guide path The player is warned that he should hit game ball B at 2522. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 184(C), the effect display device 1600 is executing the sixth warning effect of notifying the message "Please hit the second guidance passage". As a result, during the jackpot game and the time-saving state, the hitting method is changed to a strength that does not enter the upstream space 2505 and abut against the impinging portion 1006 (strength somewhat weaker than right-hand hitting), and the second guidance is provided. The player can grasp that the game ball B should be hit into the path 2522 . Then, when the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state in which the game ball B has not been hit into the second guide path 2522 has been resolved, and the warning effect is terminated. there is

More specifically, if the left detection sensor 2405 does not detect the passage of the game ball B during the jackpot game and the time saving state, it is determined that the game ball B is not driven into the second guide path 2522. , starting a watchdog timer. Then, after the start of the monitoring timer, if the state in which the game ball B is not hit into the second guide passage 2522 continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the sixth warning effect is executed. When the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B within the time (for example, 5 seconds), the state where the game ball B is not hit into the second guide path 2522 is resolved, and a sixth warning is given. The effect is not executed, and the information such as the watchdog timer is cleared. Also, after the start of the monitoring timer, the game state is switched from the jackpot game or the time-saving state, and when the game ball B should not be hit into the second guide passage 2522, the information of the monitoring timer, etc. is cleared. After the execution of the sixth warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B, the state in which the game ball B is not driven into the second guide path 2522 is reached. In addition to ending the sixth warning effect as being resolved, even if the game state is switched from the jackpot game or the time-saving state, the sixth warning effect is given as the state where the game ball B should be driven into the second guide path 2522 is no longer possible. The warning rendering has ended.

In this embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided slightly below the entrance (near the entrance) which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, but the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is always For example, it may be provided inside the first guide passage 2521 , as long as it passes through the first guide passage 2521 , at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 , at the lower end of the first guide passage 2521 at the outlet. Similarly, the left detection sensor 2405 is provided slightly below (in the vicinity of the entrance) the entrance which is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522. Any position is acceptable, for example, the inlet at the upper end of the second guide passage 2522 , the outlet at the lower end of the second guide passage 2522 , or the inside of the second guide passage 2522 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided upstream of the prize winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521, but is located downstream of the prize winning opening 2006. may be provided. In such a case, when the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 during the small winning game, there is a high possibility that the game ball B will enter the accessory winning opening 2006 that is in the open state. Therefore, the frequency of the game ball B passing through the right detection sensor 2404 located on the downstream side is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the right detection sensor 2404 from malfunctioning due to excessive passage of the game ball B.

In the present embodiment, both the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522 of the guide path group 2520 are provided with detection sensors (the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405). One detection sensor may be provided at a position through which the game ball B entering the path group 2520 must pass. For example, one detection sensor is provided in the path on the near side of the game ball B that has entered the upstream space 2505 branching into either the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522. It is possible to detect whether or not the game ball B enters the path group 2520 by one detection sensor. That is, when one detection sensor detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the guide path group 2520, and the one detection sensor has not detected the passage of the game ball B. Then, it can be determined that the game ball B is not hit into the guide path group 2520 . Even in such a case, when the state in which one detection sensor detects the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined period of time in the normal state in which the game ball B should be hit into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500, the game is started. By alerting the player, the player can grasp at least whether or not the game ball B should be hit into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500.例文帳に追加

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning effects are illustrated by displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600. If a betting area instruction display (for example, a right-handed shot display with a right arrow image or a left-handed shot display with a left arrow image) is separately provided for allowing the player to constantly grasp that the player should hit the shot, then this shot is displayed. It is desirable to execute the fourth to sixth warning effects so as not to hinder the closed area indication display. For example, in the upper right part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, a "display area for displaying the hitting area instruction display" is divided and provided, and a display area of the effect display device 1600 other than that area is provided. It is desirable to partition the "display area for displaying the fourth to sixth warning effects" in the upper left part of the above so that each guidance is not obstructed by being superimposed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning effects are illustrated by displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but such warnings are realized as sound effects instead of display. In that case, the priority of allocation to the channels finitely provided for outputting the sound is higher than the various effect sounds set during the normal state, during the jackpot game, or during the time saving state. It is desirable to set such that the data is output as much as possible even when there are no vacant (unused) channels in the finitely provided channels. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent a player who is unfamiliar with the game characteristics of hitting a variety of game balls B from being disadvantaged.

[17-3. Regarding the case where the ball clogging elimination hole is provided in the weighted portion where the first guide passage and the second guide passage are arranged in the front-rear direction]
As an embodiment different from the above, in the weighted portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side can be removed. A case where clogging elimination holes 2523 are provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 and 186. FIG. FIGS. 185 and 186 are explanatory diagrams showing an embodiment in which ball clogging elimination holes 2523 are provided in the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. FIG.

As described above in detail, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are aligned in the front-rear direction at a portion extending vertically on the left side of the prize winning opening 2006 in the first guide passage 2521. It has a weighted portion 2520a that appears to overlap from the top. The second guide passage 2522 is located on the rear side of the first guide passage 2521 in the weighted portion 2520a.

As shown in FIGS. 185 and 186(A), a predetermined rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 into the weighted portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the longitudinal direction. A ball clogging clearing hole 2523 is provided which can be inserted and can clear the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side by inserting the rod-shaped member. Specifically, ball clogging elimination holes 2523 are provided in the front side of the first guide passage 2521 and the portion where the rear side of the first guide passage 2521 and the front side of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other. Also, the clogged ball elimination hole 2523 provided in a portion where the rear side of the first guide passage 2521 and the front side of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other is provided on the front side of the first guide passage 2521 when viewed from the front. It is positioned so as to match the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 , and is provided so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522 . Thereby, the rod-like member can be smoothly inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522 . That is, when ball jam occurs in the second guide passage 2522, by inserting a rod-shaped member from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side A stick-shaped member can come into contact with the clogged game balls B, and by moving the stick-shaped member in the front-rear direction, the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 can be removed.

In addition, when a cover member is provided on the front side of the guide passage group 2520 composed of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the cover member is also visible from the front, and the first guide passage The clogged ball clearing hole 2523 may be provided at a position matching the clogged ball clearing hole 2523 provided on the front side of 2521 . As a result, when ball clogging occurs in the second guide passage 2522, the bar member can be inserted from the front side of the cover member toward the second guide passage 2522 without removing the cover member.

Also, the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is formed in a circular shape with a diameter slightly larger than that of the rod-shaped member. As a result, when the rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member can be freely moved not only in the front-rear direction but also in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. . In other words, when ball clogging occurs in the second guide passage 2522, the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 can be easily removed by moving the rod-shaped member not only in the front-rear direction but also in the vertical and horizontal directions. be able to.

In addition, a plurality of ball clogging elimination holes 2523 are provided at predetermined intervals in portions extending vertically from the weighted portion 2520 in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction. As a result, even if ball clogging occurs at any position in the second guide passage 2522 in the weighted portion 2520, the rod-shaped member can be inserted from the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 provided near the position. , ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 can be easily removed.

The first guide path 2521 of the guide path group 2520 is curved only in the left-right direction, while the second guide path 2522 is a complex structure in which the path is curved not only in the left-right direction but also in the front-back direction. The second guide passage 2522 is more likely to be clogged with balls than the first guide passage 2521 . In addition, the weighted portion 2520 in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction can be either the entrance that is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 or the exit that is the lower end. Also, since it is a portion after bending from the entrance or the exit, even if the rod-shaped member is inserted from the entrance or the exit, the rod-shaped member will not reach that portion. In this regard, a rod-shaped member can be inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522 into the weighted portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction. A possible ball jam clearing hole 2523 is provided. As a result, even when ball clogging occurs not only in the first guide passage 2521 on the front side of the weighted portion 2520a, but also in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side, the rod-shaped member can be inserted. Ball clogs can be easily removed.

In the above, in the weighted portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, the ball is formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. Although the clogging clearing hole 2523 is provided, another example of the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 capable of clearing the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side will be shown below.

As a first alternative example, as shown in FIG. 186(B), on the left side of the second guide passage 2522 in the weighted portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, A ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided in which a predetermined rod-shaped member can be inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 and the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 can be removed by inserting the rod-shaped member. may In such a case, when a ball jam occurs in the second guide passage 2522, by inserting a rod-shaped member from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, a game ball B clogged in the second guide passage 2522 can be inserted into a rod-shaped member. It becomes possible for the members to come into contact with each other, and by moving the rod-shaped member in the left-right direction, ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 can be removed. In this embodiment, a transparent light guide plate 3102 is provided to the left of the guide path group 2520 composed of the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522. The light guide plate 3102 is It is located behind the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 and allows the rod member to be inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 without being blocked by the light guide plate 3102 .

As a second alternative example, as shown in FIG. 186(C), the weighted portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction has a front side of the first guide passage 2521. A ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the second guide passage 2522. may be formed in In such a case, when a rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member can be moved greatly in the vertical direction, and the ball in the second guide passage 2522 can be moved. Clogs can be easily removed.

In addition, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are provided side by side in the left-right direction near the entrance, which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 . As a third alternative example, as shown in FIG. 186(D), a predetermined rod-shaped member is inserted into the second guide passage 2522 at a location where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are aligned in the front-rear direction. A clogged ball clearing hole 2523 may be provided which can be inserted from the left side of the ball clogging hole 2523 and can remove clogged balls in the first guide passage 2521 on the right side (back side) by inserting the rod-shaped member. That is, the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 may be provided so as to penetrate in the left-right direction from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 toward the first guide passage 2521 . In such a case, when ball clogging occurs in the first guide passage 2521, by inserting a rod-shaped member from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, the ball clogging occurs in the first guide passage 2521 on the right side (back side). A rod-shaped member can come into contact with the game ball B, and by moving the rod-shaped member in the left-right direction, ball clogging in the first guide passage 2521 can be removed.

Further, as in the first example and the third example, when the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided on the left side of the second guide passage 2522, the ball clogging elimination hole is formed from the left side of the second guide passage 2522. By inserting a rod-shaped member through 2523, it is possible to remove ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522. Therefore, when a rod-shaped member is inserted through the clogged ball elimination hole 2523 , the rod-shaped member may come into contact with the light guide plate 3102 . Then, if the light guide plate 3102 is damaged by the rod-shaped member, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emitting patterns (the first pattern 3102a and the second pattern 3102b), the damaged part unrelated to the pattern may also be damaged. Light is guided (light is reflected), but if the damaged portion overlaps with the pattern, there is a problem that the pattern is difficult to see. For this reason, it is desirable not to provide a light guide decorative area where a pattern is displayed in the right area of the light guide plate 3102 adjacent to the second guide passage 2522 . The light guide plate 3102 is attached to a square frame-shaped unit base 3101 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 . , and when inserting the rod-shaped member through the ball clogging elimination hole 2523, as a preliminary step, the rod-shaped member can be moved to a position where it does not contact the light guide plate 3102. You may Further, on the left side of the second guide passage 2522, there is a movable member that can move between a position that hides and a position that does not hide the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 provided on the left side of the second guide passage 2522. It may be provided so that when inserting the rod-shaped member through the clogged ball clearing hole 2523, the movable member can be moved to a position that does not cover the clogged ball clearing hole 2523 as a preliminary step. With such a configuration, when there is no need to clear the clogged balls in the second guide passage 2522, the movable member is positioned to hide the clogged ball holes 2523 so that the player can visually recognize the clogged ball holes 2523. There is an advantage that it becomes difficult and the decoration as a whole including the second guide passage 2522 is not spoiled.

[17-4. Ball clogging prevention structure in the vicinity of the outlet of the first guide passage and the second guide passage arranged in parallel]
As described with reference to FIG. 121(a), the game ball B is hit with a strength that makes contact with the impinging portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 forming part of the periphery of the game area 5a ( So-called right hitting), the game ball B in contact with the impact portion 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521 . The game ball B that has entered the first guide path 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the prize winning opening door 2511 that closes the prize winning opening 2006 in the middle of the first guiding path 2521, and then the guide path group. 2520 is released from the right outlet at the lower end toward the attacker unit 2400 below. Then, the game ball B released downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is struck by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the attacker unit 2400 and the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430, It is guided to enter either the normal prize winning opening 2003 or the portion on the left side of the normal winning prize opening 2003 with the same probability.

On the other hand, as explained in FIG. 121(b), when the game ball B struck into the upstream space 2505 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the second guide passage 2522, it is twisted backward. After being lined up in the front-rear direction with the first guide passage 2521 at the weighted portion 2520a, it is twisted forward and released from the left exit of the first guide passage 2521 toward the attacker unit 2400 below. Then, the game ball B released downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is caused by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between it and the attacker unit 2400, and the normal winning opening 2003 or the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 and, rarely, the first opening 2431 of the attacker's right passage 2430 .

In addition, the game ball B that has entered the attacker's right passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is discharged onto the lower right rail 1004 from the ejection opening 2435 below the big winning opening 2005. It is released and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

At the lower end of the guide path group 2520, the exits of the first guide path 2521 are located on the right side and the exits of the second guide path 2522 are located on the left side. In the vicinity of the exits of the passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a large amount of game balls B discharged from those exits flow in a short time, and ball clogging is likely to occur below those exits. In this regard, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided on the right side of the normal prize winning opening 2003, and the first opening 2431 When the game ball B enters , it is guided to the out port 1008 through the attacker's right passage 2430 . Thereby, in the vicinity of the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, some of the game balls B discharged from those exits are guided from the first opening 2431 to the out port 1008, so that they It becomes difficult for the game balls B to stay in the vicinity of the exit of the , and the occurrence of ball clogging can be prevented. Also, even if ball clogging occurs below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the game balls B discharged from those exits are guided to the out port 1008 from the first opening 2431. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from piling up inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 .

Thus, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. It is provided so that the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is closer than the first guide passage 2521 . Inside the first guide passage 2521, there is provided a prize winning opening 2006 that is open during the small winning game, but due to ball clogging below the exit of the first guide passage 2521, the first When the game balls B are piled up to the position of the accessory winning opening 2006 provided inside the guide passage 2521, more game balls B than expected flow into the opened accessory winning opening 2006, and the player is cheated. You will be able to get a lot of profit. In this regard, since the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided so that the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is closer than the exit of the second guide passage 2522, the first guide passage 2521 and the second Even if ball clogging occurs below the exit of the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B near the exit of the first guide passage 2521 can be efficiently guided from the first opening 2431 to the out port 1008, It is possible to prevent the game balls B from accumulating up to the position of the accessory winning opening 2006 provided inside one guide passage 2521 .

In addition, in this embodiment, below the exits of the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522, on the right side of the normal prize winning opening 2003, there is a right attacker capable of guiding the game ball B to the out opening 1008. Although the first opening 2431 of the passage 2430 is provided, the attacker's right passage 2430 is provided with an out port different from the out port 1008, and the game ball B entering from the first opening 2431 is You may make it discharge|eject outside the game area 5a from an out mouth. Even in such a case, some of the game balls B discharged from the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are efficiently guided out of the game area 5a from an out port different from the out port 1008. This makes it difficult for the game balls B to stagnate in the vicinity of these exits, thereby preventing the occurrence of ball clogging.

In addition, below the exits of the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522, at a position near the exit of the first guide path 2521, an attacker's right path capable of guiding the game ball B to the out port 1008 Although the first opening 2431 of 2430 is provided, there is also a passage that can guide the game ball B to the out port 1008 even at a position near the exit of the second guide passage 2522, and to the outside of the game area 5a. An out port other than the out port 1008 through which the game ball B can be discharged may be provided. Even in such a case, some of the game balls B discharged from the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be efficiently guided out of the game area 5a, and near those exits It becomes difficult for the game balls B to stay, and the occurrence of ball clogging can be prevented.

In the above, near the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 capable of guiding the game ball B to the out port 1008 is provided. However, in the vicinity of the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, there is a passage that can guide the game ball B to the out port 1008, and the game ball B can be discharged outside the game area 5a. An out port other than the possible out port 1008 may be provided. Below, in the vicinity of the entrance of the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522, another example of the case where the second out port 1013 capable of discharging the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a is provided. show. FIG. 187 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second out port 1013 is provided near the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 187, between the entrance that is the upper end of the first guide path 2521 and the entrance that is the upper end of the second guide path 2522, it is possible to discharge the game ball B outside the game area 5a. A second out port 1013 is provided. In such a configuration, when the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2505 and hits the game ball B with the strength to contact the impingement portion 1006 (so-called right-handed hitting), it enters the first guide passage 2521 with a high probability. , a part of the driven game ball B enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. - 特許庁Similarly, if the game ball B enters the upstream space 2505 and hits it with a strength that does not abut against the impinging portion 1006 (strength somewhat weaker than right-handed hitting), it enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. However, part of the hit game ball B enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 . In other words, a part of the game ball B hit so as to enter the upstream space 2505 enters the second out port 1013 . As a result, even when the player aims at either the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 or the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, a portion of the game ball B that has been hit enters the upstream space 2505. However, since it is guided out of the game area 5a from the second out port 1013, the number of game balls B entering the inside from those entrances is reduced, and the balls are clogged inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. can be prevented from occurring.

In addition to the above, only when the ball jam occurs inside the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, the out port 1008 that can discharge the game ball B outside the game area 5a Another outlet may be provided. Below, in the vicinity of the exit inside the first guide passage 2521, another example of the case where the second out port 1013 capable of discharging the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a is provided is shown. FIG. 188 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second outlet 1013 is provided near the outlet inside the first guide passage 2521. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 188(A), slightly above the exit, which is the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, on the front surface of the game area 5a (game board 5), which is flush with the rear surface of the first guide passage 2521. A second out port 1013 is provided which opens and is capable of ejecting the game ball B out of the game area 5a. In addition, inside the first guide passage 2521, there is provided an accessory winning opening 2006 that is open during the small winning game, and the second out-out opening 1013 is downstream of the accessory winning opening 2006. It is set in a position where With such a configuration, when ball clogging does not occur below the second out port 1013, such as below the exit of the first guide passage 2522, when the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, the second out The ball passes in front of the second out hole 1013 without entering the hole 1013. - 特許庁

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 188(B), when the ball clogging occurs below the second outlet 1013, such as below the outlet of the first guide passage 2521, the position of the second outlet 1013 is reached. When the balls B are piled up, the game balls B that have circulated through the first guide passage 2521 enter the second out port 1013. - 特許庁That is, in the inside of the first guide passage 2521, the game balls B are not piled up to a position above the second out port 1013. - 特許庁As described above, inside the first guide passage 2521, the accessory winning opening 2006 that is open during the small winning game is provided. When the game balls B are piled up to the position of the accessory winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521, more game balls B than expected flow into the opened accessory winning opening 2006, Players will be able to obtain illicit profits. In this regard, on the downstream side of the accessory winning opening 2006 inside the first guide passage 2521, only when the ball clogging occurs inside the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is discharged outside the game area 5a. Since the second out port 1013 is provided, even if ball clogging occurs near the exit of the first guide passage 2521, the prize winning port 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521 Before the game balls B are piled up to the position, the game balls B can be discharged from the second outlet 1013 to the outside of the game area 5a, and the player can obtain an illegal profit. can be prevented.

[18. Regarding the detection of the outlet when an abnormality occurs]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the power is turned on, the ball is inserted into the ball entrance provided on the game board 5 (first start opening 2002, second start opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, prize winning opening 2006, etc.). , and when the game ball B enters the out port 1008, the number of entered balls is counted and a predetermined calculation is performed, and the result of the calculation is used as information about the pachinko machine 1. The information is displayed on a predetermined display device (for example, the base monitor 1310h). In addition, when an abnormality occurs, depending on whether the abnormality is mild or severe, it determines whether to continue or stop (stop) the calculation. I am trying to cancel (stop) it. The state of execution of operations when such an abnormality occurs will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 189 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution state of computation when an abnormality occurs.

First, in the main control board 1310, as the ball entrances provided on the game board 5, there are a general winning opening 2001, a normal winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2002, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and accessories. When the game ball B enters the winning opening 2006, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the big winning opening sensor 2403, and the prize winning. A mouth sensor 2513 detects game balls B and adds them to the corresponding number-of-entered-ball counters. With such a ball entry counter, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls B that have entered the respective ball entry holes among the game balls B that have been hit into the game area 5a.

Further, in the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5, either the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033 detects the game ball B are detected and added to the number-out counter. With this out number counter, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls B that have entered the out port 1008 among the game balls B hit into the game area 5a.

Then, the main control board 1310 performs predetermined calculations using the number-of-entered-balls counter and the number-of-outs counter. As a specific example, the total number of game balls B that have entered the ball entrance provided on the game board 5 among the game balls B that have been hit into the game area 5a is calculated by adding up all of the ball entry counters. can be calculated. Further, the total number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a can be calculated by adding all of the incoming ball number counter and the out number counter.

The above calculation result is displayed on a predetermined display device as information about the pachinko machine 1 . However, as the information displayed on the predetermined display device, the number of game balls B entered into each ball entry hole and out hole 1008 is displayed as it is based on each ball entry counter and out number counter. It is also possible to output. Further, as the predetermined display device, there are a performance display device 1600 provided on the game board 5, a hall computer managed outside by the hall side, and the like. Also, a monitor (base monitor 1310h) may be mounted on the main control board 1310 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and displayed on the monitor (base monitor 1310h). Of these, when information is displayed on the performance display device 1600, it can be grasped at a position where both the player and the hall side can visually recognize it, whereas the hall computer and the monitor of the main control board 1310 When information is displayed on (base monitor 1310h), it can be grasped at a position where only the hall side can visually recognize it.

In addition, as the information displayed on the predetermined display device, the total number of game balls B that have entered the ball entrance provided on the game board 5 and the total number of game balls B that have entered the out port 1008 are displayed. In such a case, it can be determined from the ratio of them whether or not the degree of entry of the game ball B into the ball entry opening and the exit opening 1008 is within a normal numerical range. When the game is played normally, the game balls B hit into the game area 5a enter the entrance at a predetermined rate. If the total number of game balls B entering the ball opening is too large, it can be suspected that the balls are being entered into the ball opening through an illegal act. On the other hand, if the total number of game balls B entering the out port 1008 is too large, it can be suspected that the balls are entered into the out port 1008 by an illegal act.

In the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 850, the payout detection sensor 950 detects the game ball B and adds it to the payout number counter. With this payout counter, the number of game balls B paid out to the player can be grasped. Since the total number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a, which is calculated from the total number of entered balls and the out number counter, is the total number of game balls B used by the player, By calculating the difference from the number of put-out game balls B, the net increase of the game balls B can be calculated, and the net increase of the game balls B can be displayed on a predetermined display device. can be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball B entering the ball-in hole or the out-hole 1008 provided on the game board 5 passes through the ball discharge port 629 provided in the main body frame 4 and exits the pachinko machine 1. A frame-side out-port sensor 3037 capable of detecting game balls B passing through the ball discharge port 629, which is discharged to the rear outside (island facility side of the game hall) (see FIG. 94), is provided. there is When the frame-side out-port sensor 3037 detects the game ball B that has passed through the ball discharge port 629, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. FIG. Then, in the main control board 1310, after the game ball B has entered the ball entry hole or the exit hole 1008 provided on the game board 5, when the merged game ball B is discharged outside the pachinko machine 1. Then, the frame side out hole sensor 3037 detects the game ball B and adds it to the frame side out number counter. With this frame-side out number counter, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a.

In this embodiment, as described above, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the dispensing device 580 also passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower full ball. After passing through the lower ball removal passage 610c of the path unit 610 and being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the discharged ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629. In addition to the game balls B hit into the game area 5a, the game balls B are discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580. The frame-side out mouth sensor 3037 can also detect the game ball B. Here, considering the purpose of grasping the number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a, the number of game balls B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is It is desired to eliminate (invalidate) and perform various calculations. In response to this, in the configuration in which the frame side outlet sensor 3037 also detects the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580, the frame side outlet sensor 3037 is positioned upstream of the frame side outlet sensor 3037. is provided with another ball detection sensor (not shown), and this ball detection sensor detects the game ball B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580, and furthermore, the ball removal detection sensor It is desirable that the number of game balls detected by is subtracted from the out number counter. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 is detected by the ball removal detection sensor, is subtracted from the out number counter once, and is detected by the frame side out outlet sensor 3037. As a result, the number of game balls B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 can be prevented from being reflected in the out number counter. In addition, such a form is applied when the game ball B is released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 in a state where the gaming machine 1 is not energized (when the ball is pulled out of the payout device 580). , there is no problem because neither the ball removal detection sensor nor the frame side outlet sensor 3037 can perform the detection itself, but when the game machine 1 is energized, the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 is pushed downward. When the game ball B is discharged (when the ball is discharged from the payout device 580), or when the game machine 1 is not energized, the game ball B is discharged downward from the ball discharge passage 580b of the payout device 580. (the action of removing the ball from the payout device 580 is performed), but the game machine 1 is energized while the ball is being removed. In addition, the game ball B hit into the game area 5a and the game ball B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 do not merge and pass through separate passages to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1. It may be configured such that only the game ball B struck into the game area 5a can be detected by the frame-side out-port sensor 3037 so as to be discharged to (island facility side of the game hall). Such a configuration eliminates the need for a configuration for subtracting the number of game balls detected by the ball detection sensor described above from the number-of-outs counter.

As described above, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a by the frame-side out number counter. The total number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a can be calculated. That is, in a state in which no game is being played and no game ball B has been hit into the game area 5a, the frame-side out number counter coincides with the value obtained by adding all of the entering ball number counter and the out number counter. It will be done. On the other hand, in the state where the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a, after the game ball B passes through the detection sensor provided in the ball entrance and the out entrance 1008, the frame side out exit which is separated by a predetermined distance is detected. Since the ball passes through the sensor 3037, the value obtained by adding all of the number-of-entered-balls counter and the number-of-outs counter is slightly larger than that of the frame-side out-counter.

In this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs, whether the addition to the counter or the calculation is continued or stopped (stopped) depends on whether the abnormality is mild or severe. As shown in FIG. 189(A), when a minor abnormality occurs, addition to the counter and calculation are continued without being interrupted (stopped). This minor abnormality includes a state in which game balls B cannot be paid out from the payout device 580 because the upper tray 201 is full of game balls B, and a game state in which game balls B should be driven into the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500. The state of not hitting to the right is mentioned. In these states, an effect of warning to guide the game ball B on the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202 and an effect of warning to hit to the right are executed. Also, in these states, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are not opened from the outer frame 2, and the ball entrance and the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 are not opened. This is a state in which the game ball B cannot be entered artificially. For this reason, in the event of a minor abnormality, the counter for the number of pitches entered or the counter for the number of outs will not increase due to fraudulent acts, and additions to the counters and calculations will continue without stopping (stopping). there is

On the other hand, when a serious abnormality occurs, addition to the counter and calculation are stopped (stopped). A state in which the door frame 3 or the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 can be cited as a serious abnormality. In these states, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are released from the outer frame 2, and the ball entrance and the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 are artificially opened. This is a state in which the game ball B can be entered. For this reason, when a serious abnormality occurs, addition to the counter and calculation are stopped (stopped) so that the counter for the number of incoming balls and the counter for the number of outs do not increase due to illegal acts.

In addition, when a serious abnormality occurs, addition to the counter and calculation are stopped (stopped), but the detection sensor itself provided at the entrance and exit 1008 prevents the game ball B from passing. Detecting. In addition, when a serious abnormality occurs, the numerical values of the counters such as the number of incoming balls and the number of outs before the occurrence and the calculation results are held, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are stored. After the serious abnormality is resolved, such as being closed to the In addition, when a serious error occurs and the addition or calculation to the counter is stopped (stopped), the addition or calculation to the counter can be stopped by displaying an image on the specified display device or outputting sound from the speaker. An effect at the time of discontinuation that notifies that the program has been discontinued is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 189(B), the addition to the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the out outlet left sensor 3032 and the out outlet right sensor 3033 and the calculation related to the out number counter may cause a serious abnormality. From time until a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) elapses, addition to the out count counter and calculations related to the out count counter continue without stopping (stopping), and when the predetermined time elapses, the out count counter Aborts (stops) addition to and calculations related to its out number counter. Thus, when a serious abnormality such as the door frame 3 being released from the outer frame 2 occurs, the number of game balls B entering the out port 1008 can be grasped until the predetermined time elapses. .

For example, when the game ball B becomes grape-shaped in the game area 5a and clogging occurs, normal games cannot be played. However, there is a high possibility that the removed game ball B will flow directly into the out port 1008 at the lower end. Such a grape-shaped game ball B is originally a game ball B with a high possibility of being discharged from the out port 1008 if it does not become grape-shaped. In this regard, when the door frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 in order to remove the grape-shaped game ball B, addition to the out number counter and calculation related to the out number counter are performed until a predetermined time elapses. is continued without stopping (stopping), the number of balls that the grape-shaped game ball B has flowed into the out port 1008 can be grasped, and the reliability of the information on the out port 1008 can be improved. It should be noted that after a predetermined period of time has passed, the possibility of the grape-shaped game ball B flowing into the out port 1008 is low, and it is suspected that the ball is entered into the out port 1008 by a fraudulent act. addition to and calculations related to its out number counter are suspended (stopped).

Further, as shown in FIG. 189(C), the addition to the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the out outlet left sensor 3032 and the out outlet right sensor 3033 and the calculation related to the out number counter may cause a serious abnormality. Until a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has passed since the time, addition to the number of outs counter and calculation related to the number of outs continue without stopping (stopping), but the predetermined time has passed. Even before, when the out-port left sensor 3032 or the out-port right sensor 3033 continuously detects a large amount of game balls B in a short period of time, addition to the out number counter or the out number counter is performed at that time. Aborts (stops) the calculation related to . In such a case, when the door frame 3 is opened, there is a possibility that more than the number of balls expected to flow into the out port 1008 by removing the grape-shaped game balls B flowed into the out port 1008. Since it is highly suspected that the ball has been entered into the out hole 1008 by an illegal act, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are stopped (suspended).

Further, as shown in FIG. 189(D), when the door frame 3 is opened among the cases where a serious abnormality occurs, the number of out counters corresponding to the detections by the out outlet left sensor 3032 and the out outlet right sensor 3033 are activated. Regarding the addition and calculations related to the number of outs counter, stop (stop) the addition to the number of outs counter and the calculation related to the number of outs counter until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the door frame 3 is opened. On the other hand, when the body frame 4 is opened, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped) at that point. This is because when the door frame 3 is opened, it is opened for the purpose of removing the grape-shaped game balls B in the game area 5a, whereas when the main body frame 4 is opened, the game area 5a This is because the body frame 4, which does not need to be opened, is opened for the purpose of removing the grape-shaped game ball B. In other words, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is opened for another purpose such as removing a clogged ball on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so addition to the number-of-outs counter and computation related to the number-of-outs counter are stopped (stopped). I am planning to

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the game ball B has entered the ball entry hole and the exit hole 1008 provided on the game board 5, the merged game ball B is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. 189(E), the frame side out number counter corresponding to the detection by the frame side out mouth sensor 3037 is detected. With respect to addition to the frame side out number counter and computation related to the frame side out number counter, addition to the frame side out number counter and computation related to the frame side out number counter are stopped (stopped) when a serious abnormality occurs. For this reason, when a person on the hall side opens the door frame 3 and removes the grape-shaped game ball B, an out corresponding to the detection by the out exit left sensor 3032 and the out exit right sensor 3033 is performed for a predetermined period of time. While addition to the number counter is performed, addition to the frame side out number counter corresponding to detection by the frame side out opening sensor 3037 is not performed. and the number of frame-side out number counters, the number of grape-shaped game balls B removed when the door frame 3 is opened can be grasped. It should be noted that the number of the grape-shaped game balls B entered can be displayed on a predetermined display device as information about the pachinko machine 1 .

Further, as described above, in a state where no game is played and no game ball B is hit into the game area 5a, the frame-side out counter counts all of the entered ball counter and the out counter. It will match the added value. On the other hand, in the state where the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a, after the game ball B passes through the detection sensor provided in the ball entrance and the out mouth 1008, the frame side out mouth which is separated by a predetermined distance is detected. Since the ball passes through the sensor 3037, the numerical value obtained by adding all of the number of entered balls and the number of outs counter is slightly larger than that of the frame side outs counter. In this way, as long as the game is played normally, the value obtained by adding all of the number of entered balls counter and the number of outs counter may have a difference of a predetermined number or more compared to the number of outs counter on the frame side. Therefore, by monitoring whether or not a difference equal to or greater than the predetermined number has occurred, it is possible to determine whether or not the game is being played normally.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 190, when a difference equal to or greater than a predetermined number is generated in the numerical value obtained by adding all of the number-of-entered-balls counter and the number-of-outs counter to the number-of-outs counter on the frame side, a special is determined to have occurred, and addition to the counter and calculation are stopped (stopped). In addition, when a special abnormality occurs and the addition or calculation to the counter is stopped, the addition or calculation to the counter is stopped by displaying an image on a predetermined display device or outputting sound from a speaker. A stop-time production is being executed to notify that there is. Then, if there is a difference equal to or greater than a predetermined number in comparison with the frame-side out number counter in the numerical value obtained by adding all of the number-of-entered-balls counter and the number-out-of-outs counter, for example, the game board 5 may be charged with a fraudulent act. Objects other than the game ball B are allowed to pass only through the provided ball entrance and out port 1008, and after the game ball B passes through the detection sensor provided in the ball entrance and out port 1008 It is possible to suspect the possibility that the balls are clogged before passing the frame-side outlet sensor 3037 . As a result, it is possible to detect the occurrence of troubles such as fraudulent actions and ball jamming at an early stage, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, a state in which the door frame 3 or the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 is exemplified as a severe abnormality. Even if is not released from the outer frame 2, if it detects a situation where it is assumed that the game is progressing due to fraudulent acts, addition to various counters and calculations will be stopped (stopped) can be For example, when a magnetism level that attracts the game ball B is detected in the vicinity of the game area 5a, or when a predetermined vibration (shock) to the game area 5a is detected, it is determined that the game is not being played normally. As an example, addition to various counters and calculations are stopped (stopped). In addition, when the door frame 3 or the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 or when the door frame 3 or the body frame 4 is not released from the outer frame 2, the false magnetism or vibration is detected. In addition, addition to various counters and calculations are stopped (stopped), but only when illegal magnetism or vibration is detected in a state where the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is not released from the outer frame 2, it is considered illegal. A decision may be made to stop the progress of the game including the shooting of the game ball B immediately.

[18-1. Out port detection when multiple out ports are provided]
As an embodiment different from the above, apart from the out port 1008 provided on the downstream side of the game area 5a, a second out port 1013 is provided on the upstream side, and a third out port 1014 is provided on the midstream side. A case where a detection sensor capable of detecting the game ball B to be discharged is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 and 192. FIG. FIG. 191 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second out port 1013 and a third out port 1014 are provided separately from the out port 1008. FIG. FIG. 192 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution state of computation when the second out port 1013 and the third out port 1014 are provided separately from the out port 1008. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 191, between the entrance that is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance that is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522, it is possible to discharge the game ball B outside the game area 5a. A second out port 1013 is provided. In such a configuration, when the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2505 and hits the game ball B with the strength to contact the impingement portion 1006 (so-called right-handed hitting), it enters the first guide passage 2521 with a high probability. , a part of the driven game ball B enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. - 特許庁Similarly, if the game ball B enters the upstream space 2505 and hits it with a strength that does not abut against the impinging portion 1006 (strength somewhat weaker than right-handed hitting), it enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. However, part of the hit game ball B enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 . In other words, a part of the game ball B hit so as to enter the upstream space 2505 enters the second out port 1013 .

In addition, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, a first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided. A third out port 1014 separate from the out port 1008 is provided, and the game ball B entering from the first opening 2431 is discharged from the third out port 1014 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The effect of providing the second outlet 1013 around the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 in the guide passage group 2520, and the fact that the third outlet 1014 is provided around the outlet. The effect of (2) is described in detail above, but the provision of the second out port 1013 and the third out port 1014 prevents ball clogging inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. can be prevented from occurring.

In this embodiment, the second outlet sensor 3035 capable of detecting the game ball B discharged to the outside from the second outlet 1013 and the game ball B discharged to the outside from the third outlet 1014 are detected. A third out port sensor 3036 is provided that is capable of detecting that the When the second outlet sensor 3035 detects the game ball B entering the second outlet 1013, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310, while the third outlet sensor 3036 When the game ball B entering the third out port 1014 is detected, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310 . Then, in the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the second out port 1013, the second out port sensor 3035 detects the game ball B and adds it to the second out number counter. On the other hand, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the third out port 1014, the third out port sensor 3036 detects the game ball B and adds it to the third out number counter. The number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 is grasped by the second out number counter, while the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 is grasped by the third out number counter. It is possible to grasp the number of incoming balls.

It should be noted that the main control board 1310 performs predetermined calculations using not only the number-of-entered-balls counter and the number-of-outs counter, but also the second-out-number counter and the third-out-number counter. As a specific example, by adding the out number counter, the second out number counter, and the third out number counter, out of the game balls B hit into the game area 5a, the first ball provided on the game board 5 It is possible to calculate the number of game balls B ejected to the outside without entering a ball entrance such as the starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 . Further, the total number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a can be calculated by adding the entered ball number counter, the out number counter, the second out number counter, and the third out number counter.

In this embodiment, when the game ball B is hit in the right area of the game area 5a, a predetermined number or more per unit time (for example, 30 or more out of 100 balls that can be shot in one minute) It is designed so that the ball will not enter 1013. Therefore, in the time-saving state or the jackpot game state, the second out number counter is used to check whether or not the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time. It is monitored, and if the number exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, it is determined that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 192(A), when the number of game balls B entering the second outlet 1013 exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, an image is displayed on a predetermined display device. A warning effect is executed to warn that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game by outputting sound from the player and the speaker. This warning effect is terminated when the number of game balls B entering the second outlet 1013 becomes less than a predetermined number per unit time.

For example, when the number of game balls B that enter the second out port 1013 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time, an input located downstream of the second out port 1013 in the right region of the game area 5a Opportunities for the game ball B to enter the ball opening (ordinary winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, accessory winning opening 2006) are reduced, and the situation is disadvantageous to the player. becomes. In this regard, when the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time, the game board is designed so that the game ball B can easily enter the second out port 1013. 5 may be illegally altered. As a result, it is possible to early discover that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

In the above, in the time-saving state or the jackpot game state, it is monitored whether or not the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time. The number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013, and the number of entering balls and out ports (out port 1008, third out port 1014) on the downstream side of the second out port 1013 A ratio to the number of game balls B entering may be calculated, and whether or not the ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined ratio may be monitored. Even in such a case, when the ball entry rate of the game ball B entering the second out port 1013 per unit time is too high, it can be determined that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game.

Similarly, in the state where the game ball B is hit in the right area of the game area 5a, a predetermined number or more per unit time (for example, 30 or more out of 100 balls that can be shot in 1 minute) enter the third out port 1014. It is designed so that it will not enter the ball. Therefore, in the time-saving state or the jackpot game state, the third out number counter is used to check whether or not the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time. It is monitored, and if the number exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, it is determined that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 192(B), when the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, an image is displayed on a predetermined display device. A warning effect is executed to warn that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game by voice output from the player and the speaker. This warning effect is terminated when the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 becomes less than a predetermined number per unit time.

For example, when the number of game balls B entered into the third out port 1014 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time, an input downstream of the third out port 1014 in the right region of the game area 5a Opportunities for the game ball B to enter the ball openings (regular winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005) are reduced, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player. In this respect, when the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time, the game board is designed so that the game ball B can easily enter the third out port 1014. 5 may be illegally altered. As a result, it is possible to early discover that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

In the above, in the time-saving state or the jackpot game state, it is monitored whether the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 is a predetermined number or more per unit time. Ratio between the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 and the number of game balls B entering the entrance downstream of the third out port 1014 and the out port 1008 may be calculated, and whether or not the ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined ratio may be monitored. Even in such a case, when the ball entry rate of the game ball B entering the third out port 1014 per unit time is too high, it can be determined that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the time saving state or the jackpot game state, when the number of balls B entering the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014 becomes a predetermined number or more per unit time, Addition to the second out number counter and the third out number counter and calculation related to these out number counters are continued. Alternatively, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the addition to the second out number counter or the third out number counter or the computation relating to these out number counters may be stopped. With such a configuration, even if the game ball B is entered into the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014 by a fraudulent act, the second out number counter or the third out number counter will not increase. , the reliability of information on the second outlet 1013 and the third outlet 1014 can be enhanced.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal state, the game ball B should be hit in the left area of the game area 5a, but when the game ball B is hit in the right area of the game area 5a, the second area in the right area A game ball B may enter the out port 1013 or the third out port 1014 . Therefore, in the normal state, when the second outlet sensor 3035 or the third outlet sensor 3036 detects the game ball B, by displaying an image on a predetermined display device or outputting sound from a speaker, the game ball is changed from right-handed to right-handed. An instruction effect is being executed that instructs to change to left-handed hitting.

[19. About light emission history after light emission effect using light guide plate]
In this embodiment, based on the variation pattern transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 variably displays the decorative symbols. The light guide plate 3102 provided in front of the display area of is decorated with light emission a plurality of times, and the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is changed stepwise in the plurality of times, so that the light emission suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit with respect to the variable display. It is possible to perform production. In addition, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light, the plurality of decorations 3210 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 (around the opening 3010a of the back box 3100) are illuminated with the same luminescent color as the light guide plate 3102. Light is emitted, but even after the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is extinguished, as a history of the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102, the plurality of decorations 3210 continue to emit light in the light emission color immediately before the light guide plate 3102. It is executable.

Specifically, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (the start condition is established), the main control board 1310 transmits a variation pattern command. Then, in the command analysis process of step S601, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the variation pattern command is received, based on the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command, whether or not to execute the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 determine whether Further, when it is decided to execute the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light emission color pattern table is referred to based on the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command, and the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 in the light emission effect is determined. One of a plurality of kinds of emission color patterns set over a plurality of times is determined.

In addition, the light guide plate 3102 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged on the upper side of the light guide plate 3102. By changing the emission color of the plurality of LEDs, the light guide plate 3102 has a first color of white, green, blue, or red. It is possible to decorate the pattern 3102a (see FIG. 136) with light emission. I'm trying to decorate it with light emission at the right time. In addition, the time during which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at one timing is a short time (for example, less than 1 second). The time spent is longer. Also, the number of times the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at one timing is only once, but the light guide plate 3102 may be decorated with light emission a plurality of times at each timing.

In addition, the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed during the normal fluctuation before the reach is formed among the variable display of the decorative pattern, but at the timing during the reach effect after the reach is formed For example, 1 to 3 out of 3 light emitting decorations on the light guide plate 3102 may be executed at the timing during the ready-to-win effect after forming the ready-to-win.

In addition, in the light guide plate 3102, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first design substrate 3103 arranged above the light guide plate 3102 can emit light to decorate the first design 3102a. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side of the front view can be caused to emit light, and the second pattern 3102b can be decorated with light emission. , the first pattern 3102a is decorated with light emission. This allows the user to clearly understand that the three light emitting decorations of the first pattern 3102a in the light emitting effect are a series of effects.

Next, an emission color pattern table in which emission color patterns of light guide plate 3102 are set will be described with reference to FIG. The emission color pattern table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. FIG. 193 is an emission color pattern table in which emission color patterns of the light guide plate 3102 are set.

As described above, a plurality of types of emission color patterns are set in the emission color pattern table. How it changes is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, the emission color pattern table is set with emission patterns so that the light guide plate 3102 can be changed twice after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a predetermined emission color.

Also, the luminescent color of the light guide plate 3102 set in the luminescent color pattern is set to be decorated with one of the four colors of white, green, blue, and red. When determining the luminescent color pattern from the luminescent color pattern table, as a result of changing the luminescent color of the light guide plate 3102 to the end, it is set so that the expectation of a big win increases in the order of white→green→blue→red. It is In other words, when the lottery result specified from the variation pattern is a big win, the final luminescent color of the light guide plate 3102 is determined with a high probability to be a luminescent color (for example, red) that is highly expected to be a big win, When the lottery result specified from the variation pattern is a loss (loss, reach loss), the final emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is a light emission color pattern with a low expectation of a big hit (for example, white) with a high probability. I am going to decide. As a result, when the final luminescent color of the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a luminescent color with a high degree of expectation for a big win, the player's expectation for a big win is heightened.

In the luminescent color pattern, the luminescent color of the light guide plate 3102 does not change in the reverse order of white→green→blue→red. is set so that the emission color is maintained, or the emission color is set so that the probability of winning a big hit is high. As a result, even if the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with luminescence in a luminous color with a low degree of expectation for a big win, there is still a possibility that the luminescence color will change to a color with a high degree of expectation for a big win, unless the three timings of the luminous effect are completed. This allows the user to pay attention to the luminescent color of the light guide plate 3102 with anticipation until the luminous effect is completed.

In addition, the luminescent color pattern does not necessarily have to change in the order of green→blue→red after the luminescent color of the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with white light. It is also set to skip the above emission colors and change to the next emission color (for example, change from white to red). As a result, even if the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emitting colors with low expectations for big wins, it is not possible to predict which color the next light emitting color will change to, and the light guide plate will continue to operate until the end of the light emitting effect. The luminescent color of 3102 can be drawn with anticipation.

Next, the plurality of ornaments 3210 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. 194. FIG. As described above, the back effect unit 3200 has a plurality of hemispheric decorations 3210 surrounding the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, that is, surrounding the display area of the effect display area 1600 when viewed from the front. there is Specifically, as shown in FIG. 194, on both the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display area 1600, four ornaments 3210 are arranged vertically. In addition, behind these decorations 3210, there is provided a decoration substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward are mounted. In addition, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 can be decorated with white, green, blue, or red light, similarly to the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 .

When the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, a plurality of decorations 3210 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 emit light in the same color as the light guide plate 3102. In addition, in the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission three times at predetermined timings. 3210 emission is maintained. In this way, when executing the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 has a history of the color of the light emitted from the light guide plate 3102, and the light guide plate 3102 continuously emits light in the color immediately before the light guide plate 3102. Running.

Specifically, at the timing of the first or second time when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 emit light in the same color as the light guide plate 3102, and the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission next time. The luminescence of the plurality of decorations 3210 is maintained until the timing of luminescence decoration. In addition, at the third timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 emit light in the same color as the light guide plate 3102, and after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission, the variable display of the decorative pattern ends. The luminescence of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is maintained until the light is emitted. As a result, although the time during which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light at one timing is a short time (for example, less than 1 second), the plurality of decorations 3210 emit light in the same color as the light guide plate 3102. By maintaining , even if the light emission color is missed when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission, the light emission color can be grasped after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission.

Also, the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 are provided in a number corresponding to the number of luminescent colors that can decorate the light guide plate 3102 with luminous effect. In addition, the number of decoration bodies 3210 that emit light is made different according to the light emission colors of the light guide plate 3102 and the decoration bodies 3210. The number of the decorations 3210 that emit light is set to increase in order from the lower side of the decorations 3210 . Specifically, when the luminescent color of the light guide plate 3102 that is decorated with luminescence in the luminous effect is white, which is the luminescent color with the lowest expectation of a big hit, four lights on the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display area 1600 are displayed. Among the decoration bodies 3210, one decoration body 3210a on the lower side is set to emit white light. When the light guide plate 3102 emits green light, the lower two decorations 3210a and 3210b are set to emit green light. When the light guide plate 3102 emits blue light, the lower three decorations 3210a to 3210c are set to emit blue light. Further, when the luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 is red, which is the luminous color with the highest probability of winning a big hit, all the four decorations 3210a to 3210d are set to emit red light. Thus, even if the degree of expectation for a big win cannot be grasped from the light emitting colors of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorations 3210, the degree of expectation for a big win can be easily grasped from the number of the decorations 3210 emitting light.

In addition, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are positioned behind the light guide plate 3102 and are capable of emitting light forward. When the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emitting effect, the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 emit light in the same color as the light guide plate 3102. However, since the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 are positioned behind the light guide plate 3102 , the light guide plate 3102 is irradiated with light not only by the plurality of LEDs for decorating the light guide plate 3102 with the first pattern 3102a, but also by the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 emitting light. As a result, the first pattern 3102a decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 is further emphasized, and the presentation using the light guide plate 3102 can be made more conspicuous.

In addition, the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed during the normal variation before the reach is formed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, but during the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 Another notice effect using the effect display device 1600 is not newly started. In other words, another advance notice effect using the effect display device 1600 is started at the timing when the light guide plate 3102 is not decorated with light. As a result, the light guide plate 3102 is positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 does not hinder the visual recognition of other notice effects, and the other notice effects are started. I can't miss it. In other words, it is possible for the player to grasp the light emission effect of decorating the light guide plate 3102 with light emission and the other notice effect respectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 195, a specific example of the effect with the light guide plate 3102 and the plurality of decorations 3210 during execution of the light emission effect will be described. FIG. 195 is a specific example of the effect with the light guide plate 3102 and the plurality of decorations 3210 when executing the light emission effect.

FIG. 195 describes a case where a luminous color pattern is determined in which the luminous color for decorating the light guide plate 3102 in the luminous effect changes from white to green to red. First, as shown in FIG. 195(A), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 195(B), when it comes to the first timing of luminous decoration of the light guide plate 3102 with the luminous effect, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3102b in white, and the effect display area 1600 is displayed. Of the four decoration bodies 3210 on the left and right sides of the display area, one decoration body 3210a on the lower side emits light in the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102, which is white. . Then, as shown in FIG. 195(C), the luminous decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is extinguished in a short period of time (for example, less than 1 second). Until the second timing, it maintains its white light emission.

Further, as shown in FIG. 195(D), at the second timing of luminous decoration of the light guide plate 3102 in the luminescence effect, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3102b in green, and the effect display area 1600 is displayed. Of the four decoration bodies 3210 on the left and right sides of the display area, the lower two decoration bodies 3210a and 3210b are increased so as to emit light, and the emission color is the same as that of the light guide plate 3102. It emits green light. Then, as shown in FIG. 195(E), the luminous decorations of the light guide plate 3102 are extinguished in a short period of time (for example, less than 1 second). maintains its green light emission until the third timing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 195(F), when it comes to the third timing of luminous decoration of the light guide plate 3102 in the luminescence effect, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3102b in red, and the effect display area 1600 is displayed. Of the four decoration bodies 3210 on the left and right sides of the display area, all four decoration bodies 3210a to 3210d are increased to emit light, and the emission color is red, which is the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102. is emitting light. Then, as shown in FIG. 195(G), the luminous decorations of the light guide plate 3102 are extinguished in a short period of time (for example, less than 1 second). , as shown in FIG. 195(H), maintains its red light emission until the end of the variable display of decorative symbols.

In this embodiment, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emitting effect, the plurality of decorations 3210 emit light in the same color as the light guide plate 3102. However, the light guide plate does not emit light at that time. A plurality of luminous bodies may emit light in the luminous color immediately before the light guide plate 3102 from the time when the luminous decoration 3102 is turned off. Even in such a case, the luminescent color can be grasped after the luminescent decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of decorations 3210 that emit light is different depending on the light guide plate 3102 and the color of the decorations 3210. The more the number of decorations 3210 that emit light, the higher the likelihood of a big win. However, the number of times the light guide plate 3102 has already been decorated with light emission out of the three timings at which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission may be indicated. For example, at the first timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, one of the four decoration bodies 3210 on each of the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display area 1600 is made to emit light. Then, at the second timing, the lower two decorations 3210a and 3210b are made to emit light, and at the third timing, the lower three decorations 3210a to 3210c are made to emit light.

Further, in the present embodiment, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission three times at predetermined timings in the light emission effect. A pattern in which the light guide plate 3102 is not decorated with light emission, or a pattern in which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at the first and second timings but not decorated with light emission at the third timing may be provided. In such a case, it is not known how many times the luminous decoration of the light guide plate 3102 will continue in the luminescence effect, and attention can be paid to how many chances the luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 will change.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the variable display of the decorative symbols, as a performance indicating the degree of expectation for the big hit with respect to the variable display of the decorative symbols, the light-emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed. Or light emission using the light guide plate 3102 over a plurality of fluctuations from the time when the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 (the start condition is satisfied) until the decorative pattern is displayed by the entering ball. You may make it perform production|presentation. For example, when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (starting conditions are established), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510 sends the pre-determination command is received, based on the variation pattern specified from the advance determination command, whether or not to execute the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, and if it is determined to execute the light emission effect, the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is determined. It may be configured to determine In addition, in the lighting performance using such a light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission a plurality of times at predetermined timings among the plurality of variations, and the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated even after the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off. The configuration may be such that the light emission of the plurality of light emitters is continued with the light emission color immediately before 3102 . In such a case, it is possible to draw attention to how the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 changes over a plurality of changes until the light emission effect is completed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged on the upper side thereof are caused to emit light, and the first pattern 3102a is decorated with light emission. However, when a plurality of LEDs do not emit light due to a failure or the like, the light guide plate 3102 is not decorated with light emission at the timing of light emission decoration, and the degree of expectation for a big hit indicated by the light emission color can be grasped. can't In this regard, since the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 emit light in the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102 after the timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission, even if the light guide plate 3210 cannot be decorated with light emission, the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 emit light. The degree of expectation for a big hit can be grasped from the luminescent color of the decorative body 3210. - 特許庁

Further, in the present embodiment, when an abnormality (error) occurs, a warning effect is executed to notify that the abnormality has occurred, prior to other effects. For example, when a magnetism level that attracts the game ball B is detected in the vicinity of the game area 5a, or when a predetermined vibration (shock) to the game area 5a is detected, it is determined that the game is not being played normally. and execute the warning rendition. In this regard, when an abnormality (error) occurs at the timing of executing the light emitting effect and light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102, the warning effect is prioritized, and the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 and the light emitting of the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 are given priority. However, when the abnormality is resolved after the timing of luminous decoration of the light guide plate 3102 (before the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the plurality of decorations 3210 are made to start emitting light. there is In this way, even when the warning effect is executed with priority over the light emitting effect, the degree of expectation for a big win can be grasped from the luminescent colors of the plurality of decorations 3210 after the abnormality is resolved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 and the luminous color of the plurality of decorations 3210 in the light emitting effect and the history effect suggest the degree of expectation for the big hit. is executed, and the set value may be suggested by the luminescent color of the light guide plate 3102 or the luminescent colors of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 . In such a configuration, for example, when the emission color pattern is determined from the emission color pattern table, as a result of changing the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 to the end, the set values are higher in the order of white→green→blue→red. It should be set to suggest that That is, among the setting suggestion effects, a light emission pattern in which the final light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is red is executed as the high setting suggestion effect, and the final light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is executed as the low setting suggestion effect. What is necessary is just to execute the light emission pattern which becomes white. As a result, when the luminescent color of the light guide plate 3102 or the luminescent color of the plurality of decorations 3210 is decorated with a luminescent color that suggests that the set value is high, the player's response to the high set value (set value 6) You can raise your expectations.

[20. Regarding image production similar to light emitting decoration of light guide plate]
In this embodiment, the light guide plate 3102 is provided in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600. In addition to decorating the light guide plate 3102 with a predetermined pattern, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the By displaying a pattern that is a visual mode similar to the pattern decorated with light emission on the light plate 3102, it is possible to execute an imitation effect that makes it look as if there are a plurality of light guide plates. In this imitation effect, the pattern decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and finally one of the patterns is displayed. , The reach effect executed after that is different.

Specifically, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (the start condition is established), the main control board 1310 transmits a variation pattern command. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis processing of step S601, the variation pattern is specified from the variation pattern command, and the variation pattern for executing the first ready-to-win effect is specified. In this case, the pattern that is decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the pattern that is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and finally the pattern is decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102. By executing the production, the first ready-to-win production is performed after that. On the other hand, when the variation pattern for executing the second ready-to-win effect is specified, the pattern decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. By finally executing the imitation effect of displaying the pattern in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second ready-to-win effect is subsequently performed.

Note that the above-described imitation effect is executed during the normal fluctuation before the ready-to-win state is formed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In addition, the first ready-to-win effect among the ready-to-win effects is set so that the degree of expectation for big hit is higher than the second ready-to-win effect. As a result, in the imitation production during the normal fluctuation, when the light guide plate 3102 is finally decorated with the pattern, the process proceeds to the first ready-to-win production with a high expectation of a big hit, so that the pattern is finally displayed on the light guide plate 3102. It is possible to draw attention to whether or not to luminous decoration.

Next, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 196 shows a pattern displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 196(A), on the light guide plate 3102 during execution of the imitation effect, as a second pattern 3102b, the characters "CHANCE!" . In the light guide plate 3102, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first design substrate 3103 arranged above the light guide plate 3102 can emit light to decorate the first design 3102a with light emission. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side of the front view can be caused to emit light, and the second pattern 3102b can be decorated with light emission. , only the luminous decoration of the second pattern 3102b is used.

Further, as shown in FIG. 196(B), in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during execution of the imitation effect, as the imitation pattern 1600a, the characters "LUCKY!" it's shown. A moving image can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but a still image such as the above-described imitation pattern 1600a is displayed during execution of the imitation effect.

The light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the characters "CHANCE!" as the second pattern 3102b, while the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the characters "LUCKY!" as the imitation pattern 1600a. However, the characters of the imitation picture 1600a have the same line thickness, font type, and size as those of the characters of the second picture 3102b. In this way, in the imitation effect, since the form of each character is the same, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

In addition, while the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the effect pattern as the second pattern 3102b, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the effect pattern as the imitation pattern 1600a. The effect pattern which is a part is the same pattern as the effect pattern which is a part of the second pattern 3102b. In this way, in the imitation effect, since the common effect pattern is displayed as part of each pattern, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

In addition, while the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3102b in a single color by a plurality of LEDs, the display area of the effect display device 1600 similarly displays the imitation pattern 1600a in a single color. In addition, in the light guide plate 3102, when the second pattern 3102b is decorated with light, the light and shade of the light emission decoration of the second pattern 3102b are varied depending on the distance from the plurality of LEDs. The pattern 1600a is displayed so as to have shading. Further, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3102b, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays a black image that does not display any information. When the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area, a black image is displayed as the background image. In this way, in the imitation effect, since the visual appearance of the pattern is the same as a whole, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

Further, the light guide plate 3102 is positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the size of the light guide plate 3102 is configured to be larger than the display area of the effect display device 1600. The region 3102 in which the second pattern 3102b is decorated with light emission is substantially the same as the region in which the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display region of the effect display device 1600. FIG. In this way, in the imitation effect, since the areas where the patterns are displayed are substantially the same, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

In the imitation effect, the second pattern 3102b decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. About time, it is assumed that all are the same time. Further, during execution of the imitation effect, at the timing of displaying each of the second pattern 3102b and the imitation pattern 1600a, a predetermined sound is output from the speaker, or the light guide plate 3102 or the effect display device 1600 The provided members are operated in a predetermined operation mode (for example, lighting of lamps provided on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, operation of movable members, etc.). Even at the timing of displaying the pattern of , a common effect is executed as a composite effect. However, at the timing of displaying each of the second pattern 3102b and the imitation pattern 1600a, the lamps provided on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are lit, but the luminous colors are different. may Thus, in the imitation effect, there is no effect difference between the case where the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3102b and the case where the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp which of the light plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 197, a specific example of effect on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed will be described. FIG. 197 shows a specific example of the effect on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed.

In FIG. 197, the variation pattern for executing either the chance ready-to-win effect as the first ready-to-win effect or the lucky reach effect to execute as the second ready-to-win effect is determined, and the imitation effect is executed before executing these ready-to-win effects. A case of execution will be explained. First, as shown in FIG. 197(A), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 197(B), when the imitation effect is started, the light guide plate 3102 displays the characters "CHANCE!" for example, less than 1 second), it is decorated with red light. Then, as shown in FIG. 197(C), when the luminous decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the imitation pattern 1600a along with the characters "LUCKY!" An effect pattern is displayed in blue for a predetermined period of time (for example, less than 1 second). The display time for displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is the same as the display time for the light guide plate 3102 to be decorated with the second pattern 3102b.

As described above, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3102b in red, while the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the imitation pattern 1600a in blue. In this way, in the imitation effect, the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 are arranged in the case where the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3102b and the case where the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although it is difficult to grasp which one is used, it is possible to grasp which of the second pattern 3102b and the imitation pattern 1600a is being displayed from the display color.

In the imitation effect, the second pattern 3102b decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately repeated multiple times (for example, five times). 197(D), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out to display a black image that does not display any information. there is As a result of this, it is possible to draw attention to which of the second pattern 3102b decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 stops as a result of the imitation effect. can.

Then, as shown in FIG. 197(E), after the display area of the production display device 1600 is blacked out, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3102b in red, the variable display of the decorative pattern is reached. is formed, as a ready-to-win effect corresponding to the second pattern 3102b, a chance ready-to-reach effect (first ready-to-win effect) is performed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 197(F), after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display region of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. After the ready-to-win effect is formed in , the process advances to a lucky ready-to-win effect (second ready-to-win effect) as a ready-to-win effect corresponding to the imitation pattern 1600a. Also, the display time for displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in FIG. (for example, 3 seconds).

In the present embodiment, the second pattern 3102b decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 display characters and effect patterns. It suffices to display a pattern having a similar visual appearance so as to match the elements of (1).

Further, in the present embodiment, after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, the second pattern 3102b decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102, the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display region of the effect display device 1600, However, after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, neither the second pattern 3102b nor the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed. A pattern that does not proceed to any of the ready-to-win effects may be set. In such a case, as a result of the imitation effect, more attention can be paid to what kind of result is notified after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out.

In addition, in the present embodiment, at the start of the imitation effect, of the second pattern 3102b decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second pattern Although it starts with the luminous decoration of 3102b, a pattern starting with the display of the imitation pattern 1600a may be set. In the imitation effect, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3102b in red, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in blue. For the color development of , a pattern to be executed in a color different from that may be set. In this way, when the imitation effect is executed with a display or color different from usual, by setting the degree of expectation for a big hit with respect to the variable display of the decorative pattern to be high, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission. Not only which of the two patterns 3102b and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 will stop, but also the content of the effect can be noticed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the imitation effect is executed, the second pattern 3102b decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. However, other than the imitation effect, the effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed. For example, as an effect other than the imitation effect using the light guide plate 3102, the imitation pattern 1600a is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the light guide plate 3102 is suddenly decorated with the second pattern 3102b. can do.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the imitation effect, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3102b in red, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in blue. In addition to this pattern, there is a pattern in which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3102b in blue so as to reverse the color development, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in red. have set. In these patterns, red is used as a color to indicate that the expectation of a big win is higher than that of blue. It is notified that the degree of expectation is high, and similarly, when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in red in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is notified that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than when it is displayed in blue. Thus, in the imitation effect, both the second pattern 3102b and the imitation pattern 1600a can be displayed in blue and red. It can be difficult to grasp whether you are using

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the imitation effect, the second pattern 3102b decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. By actually displaying one of the patterns, it suggests the reach effect that will be executed after that, but by executing the imitation effect as the setting suggesting effect described above and finally displaying one of the patterns , may be configured to suggest a set value. In such a configuration, for example, as a high setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion effect, an imitation effect of finally decorating the light guide plate 3102 with the second pattern 3102b in red is executed, and as a low setting suggestion effect, the final Basically, the imitation effect of displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be executed. As a result, when the second pattern 3102b is finally decorated in red on the light guide plate 3102 when the imitation effect is executed, the player's expectation for the high set value (set value 6) can be increased.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the light guide plate 3102, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first design substrate 3103 arranged on the upper side of the light guide plate 3102 can be caused to emit light to decorate the first design 3102a. On the other hand, it is possible to emit light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side in the front view to decorate the second pattern 3102b with light emission. With respect to the brightness of , the player can change the setting by operating the pressing operation section 303 . In other words, when the brightness of the plurality of LEDs is set to be low, the second pattern 3102b decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 is displayed in a dark display mode, whereas the brightness of the plurality of LEDs is set to be high. When set, the second pattern 3102b decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 becomes a bright display mode. In the imitation effect, when the second pattern 3102b decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 is in a dark display mode, the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a dark display mode. On the other hand, when the second pattern 3102b decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 is in a bright display mode, the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a bright display mode. In this way, in the imitation effect, the effect is executed so that the brightness corresponds to either of the second pattern 3102b and the imitation pattern 1600a. It can be difficult to grasp whether you are using When adjusting the brightness, when the player operates the pressing operation unit 303, both the brightness of the plurality of LEDs for the light guide plate 3102 and the brightness of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 are changed. good too.

[21. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, some of the various commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 to 200. FIG. 198 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control boards, and FIGS. 199 and 200 show the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control boards in FIG. is a table.

[21-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. and a mode showing variations of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 198 to 200, various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, special figure 2 synchronization effect related, jackpot related, power on, normal figure synchronization effect related, normal electric role effect related, notification display , status display, and others.

[21-1-1. Special figure 1 synchronization production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect relation is based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, and as shown in FIG. It consists of commands named FIG. 1 synchronization production start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization production end, and change state designation. These various commands are assigned a status of "A*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

Special figure 1 synchronization production start command (fluctuation pattern command) is intended to instruct the start of special figure synchronization production with the production pattern (variation pattern) specified in the mode, special design 1 designation command is off, specific jackpot, It designates a non-specific big hit, the special figure 1 synchronization production end command instructs the end of the special figure 1 synchronization production, and the state specification command at the time of fluctuation instructs the game state. In addition, the game state consists of a time-saving state that indicates that it is a time-saving state, a probability-variable state that indicates that it is a probability-variable state, and a normal state that indicates that it is neither the time-saving state nor the probability-variable state. It is

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a special figure 1 synchronization effect start command (fluctuation pattern command) and a special figure 1 synchronization effect end command are provided for each setting value of the pachinko machine 1 . Then, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits the special figure 1 tuning effect start command (fluctuation pattern command) and the special figure 1 tuning effect end command, the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM Select and send a command according to the stored setting value. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by differentiating the mode of the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command (fluctuation pattern command) and the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command which have been conventionally used, the peripheral control board 1510 The setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 can be transmitted, the setting value information is periodically transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side. It's like

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol 1 synchronization production start, Special figure 1 synchronization The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the special symbol win-loss information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

[21-1-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronization Production Related]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the second start opening sensor 2402, and as shown in FIG. It consists of commands named FIG. 2 synchronization production start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization production end. These various commands are assigned a status of "B*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

Special figure 2 synchronization production start command (variation pattern command) is intended to instruct the start of special figure synchronization production in the production pattern (variation pattern) specified in the mode, special design 2 designation command is off, specific jackpot, It designates a non-specific big hit, and the special figure 2 synchronization production end command instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization production.

Also, as with the special figure 1 synchronization production start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 1 synchronization production end command, the special figure 2 synchronization production start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 2 synchronization production end command are pachinko machine 1 When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits a special figure 2 tuning effect start command (fluctuation pattern command) and a special figure 2 tuning effect end command, a specific area of the main control built-in RAM selects and transmits a command corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in . It should be noted that the special figure 2 tuning production (fluctuation production of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 2004) is mainly executed in the probability variable state and the time saving state. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by differentiating the mode of the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command (fluctuation pattern command) and the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command which have been conventionally used, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with pachinko The setting value information of the machine 1 can be transmitted, and the setting value information is periodically transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 even in the variable probability state and the time saving state, and the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted on the peripheral control board 1510 side. setting value can be grasped.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special figure 2 tuning effect, special figure 2 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[21-1-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 198, the section related to big win includes big win opening, big win 1 open N-th display, big win 1 closed display, big win 1 count display, big win ending, big win pattern display, small win opening. , small-hit open display, small-hit count display, and small-hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening. During the opening of the round or starting to open), the command to display the closing of the large winning gate 1 is the start of closing the large winning gate 1 between the rounds (during or starting to close the first large winning gate 2005 between the rounds). ), and the command to display the number of game balls counted from 0 to 10 (the number of game balls counted from 0 to 10 is counted (detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403, the first big winning hole 2005 The number of game balls entered) is transmitted, the jackpot ending command instructs the start of jackpot ending, and the jackpot pattern display command instructs the display of jackpot pattern information.

In addition, the small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command instructs the start of opening the small hit (during or starting to open the prize winning opening 2006 at the time of the small hit) The small hit count display command is a small hit middle big winning opening winning effect (when a game ball entering the role winning opening 2006 during the small winning is detected by the role winning opening sensor 2513 The V passing command instructs the V winning mouth winning performance (the game ball that has won the prize winning mouth 2006 during the small hit is detected by the first V winning mouth 2007 and the second V winning mouth 2008 A small hit ending command instructs the start of a small hit ending. It should be noted that the V passing command corresponding to each of the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 (the first V winning opening command when the game ball is detected by the first V winning opening 2007, the second V A second V winning opening command when a game ball is detected by the winning opening 2008 may be provided.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, and the big win opening 1 open Nth display command is when the big win 1 opens in the 1st to 15th rounds (first big win 2005 when the N-th round is opened), and the command to close the big winning gate 1 is sent when the big winning gate 1 closes (starts closing the first big winning gate 2005), and the big winning gate 1 count is displayed. The command is when the big winning hole 1 is opened and when the count changes to the big winning hole 1 (when the first big winning hole 2005 is opened and when the game ball entering the first big winning hole 2005 is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403 is detected), a big win ending command is sent when the big win ending starts, and a big win pattern display command is sent when the big winning hole is opened (when the first big winning hole 2005 is opened).

In addition, the small winning opening command is transmitted at the start of the small winning opening, and the small winning opening display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small winning (at the time of opening the prize winning opening 2006 at the time of the small winning), and displaying the small winning count. The command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit medium or large winning prize (when a game ball entering the prize winning hole 2006 during a small win is detected by the prize winning hole sensor 2513), and the small winning ending command is , Sent at the start of the small winning ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[21-1-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 199, the power-on category has the following names: power-on state, main control return destination at power-on, setting key ON operation command, setting key OFF operation command, setting change command, and error display command. command. These various commands are assigned a status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command is when the power is turned on (including when power is restored when power is restored due to power failure or momentary power failure, in addition to when power is turned on), the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633 is operated (when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch and the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button is operated), information instructing to that effect when the RAM is cleared, and when the power is turned on (power In addition to the case of turning on, it also includes the time of power recovery when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure. and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

In addition, the model code of the pachinko machine, for example, when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, which work is copyrighted, and what kind of game specifications (for example, probability fluctuation) When this happens, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big win game state occurs, the game that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). It specifies whether the pachinko machine is a specification (so-called ST machine, etc.), and whether the pachinko machine has a plurality of set values or only one set value. In other words, the information on the model code of a pachinko machine consists of a series code for specifying which type of machine type is the max type, middle type, or sweet digital type, and a series code for specifying the copyright of the work. and the game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, the game specification that the state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs, in addition to the probability change in a state where the number of special symbol fluctuations is limited It mainly consists of a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) that causes a , and a setting value code indicating whether the pachinko machine 1 has one or a plurality of setting values.

The main control return destination command at power-on instructs the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information that instructs the drive state of the starter solenoid 2412 and information that instructs the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2414 and the award winning solenoid 2512.

The setting key ON operation command instructs to check the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the control built-in RAM. This indicates that the confirmation of the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area has been completed.

The setting change command instructs that the changed setting value and the setting value have been changed. In this example, setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 by changing the mode of the setting change command. The setting value of the machine 1 can be grasped. Note that the setting change command may be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 at power-on regardless of whether the setting value is changed, or if the setting value has not been changed at power-on, the current setting value may be changed. may be transmitted. As a result, each time the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp the latest set values.

The error display command indicates that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM.

These commands are transmitted at the time of turning on the power of the main control board (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure). Specifically, when powering on the pachinko machine 1, when recovering from a power failure or momentary power failure, transmission of the main control built-in RAM in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of powering on in step S50 in the main control side game control main process It is stored in the information storage area, and the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on are transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[21-1-5. Related to Futsuzu Synchronization Production]
The general pattern synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, and as shown in FIG. , general pattern designation, general pattern synchronization production end, and state designation at the time of change. These various commands are assigned a status of "E*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general pattern synchronization production start command (the general pattern variation pattern command) instructs the start of the general pattern synchronization production with the production pattern (the general pattern variation pattern) specified in the mode, and the general pattern specification command is off, specific It designates a big hit or a non-specific big hit, the general pattern synchronization production end command instructs the general pattern synchronization production end, and the state specification command at the time of fluctuation instructs the game state. In addition, as described above, the game state includes a time saving state indicating that the time saving state is set and a normal state indicating that the time saving state is not set.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general pattern synchronization production start command is sent at the start of normal pattern fluctuation, the general pattern specification command is sent immediately after the general pattern synchronization production start, and the general pattern synchronization production end command is It is transmitted when the normal pattern fluctuation time elapses (when the normal pattern is determined), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the normal pattern hit-loss information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[21-1-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The normal electric role effect relates to the second starting door 2411 that is advanced and retracted by driving the starting solenoid 2412, and as shown in FIG. It is composed of a command named "Ending per figure" and "Ending per figure". These various commands are assigned a status of "F*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general pattern per opening command is for instructing the general pattern per opening start, and the general pattern open display command is for the general pattern opening start (the second start door 2411 projects forward by driving the start port solenoid 2412 It is intended to indicate the state or when protruding), and the ending command per normal pattern instructs the start of the ending per normal pattern.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal per pattern opening command is transmitted at the start of per normal pattern opening, and the general power open display command is transmitted when the general power is opened (the second start door 2411 drives the start port solenoid 2412 When protruding forward by), the ending command per normal pattern is sent at the start of the ending per normal pattern. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[21-1-10. others]
Other divisions include, as shown in FIG. 200, start-up winning, variable reduction operation end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, special symbol type look-ahead, variation pattern look-ahead 1, variation pattern look-ahead 2, variation pattern It consists of commands named look-ahead 3, look-ahead variation pattern 4, look-ahead variation pattern 5, look-ahead variation pattern 6, normal prize winning, and normal symbol memory. These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start opening winning command instructs the start of starting opening winning effect, and starts the effect when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002. , and the start of the effect when the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 2402, respectively. It instructs the state transition from the shortened operating state to the variable shortened non-operating state, and the special symbol 1 storage command is 0 to 4 special symbol 1 reservations (the game ball enters the first start port 2002 and functions The first special symbol display device of the display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (number of reservations) that have not yet been used for the variable display of special symbols, and the special symbol 2 storage command is 0 to 4 special symbol 2 reservations. (The number of balls that have entered the second start port 2004 and have not yet been used for the variable display of special symbols on the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 (the number of pending balls)), The special symbol type look-ahead command reads ahead before the special symbol 1 reservation is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the first special symbol based on the special symbol 1 reservation. Before the display result (loss pattern, jackpot pattern) by the display device and the special pattern 2 reservation are used for the variable display of the special pattern in the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400, the special pattern 2 is read ahead. It designates the display result (small hit design, big hit design) by the second special design display device based on the reservation, respectively.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command 1 to the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command 6 read ahead and read the special symbol before the special symbol 1 reservation is used for the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400. Before the variation pattern used in the variation display of the special symbol based on 1 reservation and the special symbol 2 suspension are used for the variation display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, the special The variation pattern used in the variation display of the special symbol based on the symbol 2 hold is specified respectively, and the variation pattern look-ahead command 1 is a command according to the setting value 1 of the pachinko machine 1, and the variation pattern look-ahead command 2 is a command corresponding to the setting value 2 of the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern look-ahead command 3 is a command corresponding to the setting value 3 of the pachinko machine 1, and the variation pattern look-ahead command 4 is a command corresponding to the setting value 4 of the pachinko machine 1 The variation pattern look-ahead command 5 is a command corresponding to the setting value 5 of the pachinko machine 1, and the variation pattern look-ahead command 6 is a command corresponding to the setting value 6 of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, commands including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 described above (special figure 1 synchronization production start command, special figure 1 synchronization production end command, special figure 2 synchronization production start command, special figure 2 synchronization production end command, setting change command ) is an example, and other commands may be provided for each set value.

In addition, the normal winning opening winning command instructs the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003, and the normal symbol storage command is normally 0 to 4 design reservations (the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and functions The normal symbol display device of the display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (reserved number) that is not yet used for variable display of normal symbols.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting opening winning command is set at the time of starting opening winning (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, or when the game ball enters the second opening opening). When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting port sensor 2402), it is transmitted mainly by voice from the speakers 462, 464, 622 to notify that effect, and the fluctuation is shortened. The operation end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is fixed after the fluctuation reduction of the specified number of times has been completed (after the stop period has passed), and the special symbol 1 storage command is sent when the special symbol 1 operation pending ball number changes ( When the game ball enters the first start port 2002 and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations decreases when the number of reservations is used for the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device from the number of reservations). The special symbol 2 storage command is transmitted, when the special symbol 2 operation reserved ball number changes (when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations increases, the second special symbol display from the number of reservations It is sent when the number of reserved symbols is reduced by using it for variable display of special symbols on the device), and the special symbol type look-ahead command is sent when the number of special symbols 1 and 2 operation reserved balls increases (first start port 2002 and second When the game ball enters the starting port 2004 and the number of reservations increases), the variation pattern look-ahead command is sent immediately after the special symbol type look-ahead command is sent. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

In addition, the normal winning opening winning command is transmitted when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and the normal symbol storage command is transmitted when the number of normal symbol operation pending balls changes (the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and the number of pending It is sent when it increases or when the number of reservations is reduced by using the normal symbol display for variable display of normal symbols from the number of reservations. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is issued at the time of starting opening winning (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, or when the game ball enters the second starting opening When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 2402, the information is transmitted mainly by voice from the speakers 462, 464, 622 to notify that effect, but peripheral control How the circuit board 1510 uses the start-up winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is designed to be used not only to notify by voice from the speakers 462, 464, and 622 but also to monitor whether there is fraudulent activity. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, there are specifications in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start-up winning command and does not announce it by voice from the speakers 462 , 464 , 622 .

[22. Setting information error notification]
Next, based on the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 among the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 described above, the process of informing when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal will be explained. FIG. 201 is a flow chart showing the procedure of setting information determination processing executed when a command including setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is received from the main control board 1310 in the received command analysis processing (step S1022).

When starting the setting information determination process, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not a setting abnormality notification flag, which will be described later, is set (step S1500). The setting abnormality notification flag is a flag that is set when a setting value abnormality is notified. If the setting error notification flag is set in step S1500, it is determined that the setting value abnormality is notified, and the process proceeds to step S1507. is not notified, and the process advances to step S1501.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the received command is the setting change command (step S1501). The setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is stored in the setting information storage area based on the setting value information of No. 1 (step S1502), and the process ends. As a result, the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 set when the power is turned on are stored in the setting information storage area, and the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side.

Also, if the received command is not the above setting change command (in this example, special figure 1 synchronization production start command, special figure 1 synchronization production end command, special figure 2 synchronization production start command, special figure 2 synchronization production end command, variation pattern If prefetch command 1 to fluctuation pattern prefetch command 6 are received), the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command matches the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area in step S1502. (step S1504), and if they do not match, it notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the set value information (step S1504), and sets an abnormality notification flag indicating that an abnormality in the set value information is being notified. It is set and the process ends (step S1505).

Further, when it is determined in step S1500 that the setting abnormality notification flag is set, that is, when abnormality notification of the setting value information is in progress, the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command is set in step S1502. It is determined whether or not the setting value information stored in the information storage area matches (step S1507), and if not, the abnormality notification of the setting value information is continued.

On the other hand, if the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command matches the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area in step 1502, the abnormality notification of the setting value information is terminated (step S1508). , the setting error notification flag is reset, and the process ends (step S1509).

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by transmitting a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 are changed on the peripheral control board 1510 side. If there is an abnormality in the setting value information indicated by the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310, specifically, normal processing (setting value change processing) has not been performed. In spite of this, when the setting value is changed, it is determined that an error or illegality has occurred, and a process of notifying that effect is executed. It should be noted that the game progresses even during the notification of the abnormality of the set value information, and the effect display device 1600 executes variable effects and the like. Therefore, the abnormality notification of the set value information is performed so as not to hinder the execution of the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600 . Specifically, control to display "setting error!" etc. in an area that does not overlap with the variable performance being executed in the performance display device 1600, so that the variable performance being executed in the performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized Control for translucent display of "setting error!" The light emission control of the lamps, LEDs, etc., in a predetermined manner (for example, blinking in red), etc., is executed in combination.

In addition, when there is an abnormality in the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the abnormality notification of the setting value information is not executed, or the abnormality notification of the setting value information is executed. In addition to this, the effect suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 to be described later is not executed, and when the effect suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is being executed, the execution of this effect is stopped. can be That is, the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is affected by noise or the like, and the setting value information indicated by this command changes to an abnormal value, or the peripheral control board 1510 , the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area has changed to an abnormal value due to the influence of noise, etc., and the setting of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the command sent from the main control board 1310 If there is an abnormality in the consistency between the value information and the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510, and if the effect suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed, the reliability of this effect increases. descend. Therefore, in such a case, the effect suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is not executed, and if the effect is being executed, the effect may be stopped to suppress the decrease in reliability. .

Also, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 may determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the set value information. can be For example, when the set value is changed in the set value change process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is stored in a reference area different from the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Also stores the setting value after the change, and at any timing (such as the timing of sending the special figure 1 tuning effect start command or the special figure 2 tuning effect start command etc.) The setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area and for reference It is also possible to determine whether or not the set value stored in the area matches, and if it is determined that the set value does not match, the game may be stopped and the abnormality of the set value information may be notified.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, after starting the abnormality notification of the setting value information, when the abnormality is resolved, the abnormality notification of the setting value information is automatically terminated without any operation by the game clerk. Therefore, when the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is affected by noise or the like and the setting value information is changed to an abnormal value, the setting value information is stored in the setting information storage area. When the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received in a normal state after starting the abnormality notification of the setting value information because it does not match the setting value information, the setting is immediately performed. Abnormal notification of value information can be terminated.

In the above example, when the setting value is changed in the setting change process, a setting change command indicating the changed setting value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting value indicated by the command is changed to the peripheral control board 1510 side. , and it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the set value information depending on whether or not it matches the stored set value. The determination method is not limited to this. For example, when a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is received from the main control board 1310, the setting indicated by the setting value information indicated by the command and the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 received last time It is also possible to determine whether or not the values match with each other, and to notify the abnormality of the set value information if they do not match. In this case, when a setting change command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received based on the setting value being changed, the setting value information abnormality notification may not be performed.

In addition, in relation to the variable effect, a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted multiple times from the main control board 1310, and if at least a part of the command does not match, an abnormality of the setting value information is notified. You can do it. Specifically, the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the special figure 1 synchronization production start command and the special figure 2 synchronization production start command and the special figure 1 synchronization production end command and the special figure 2 synchronization production end command Shown by It may be determined whether or not the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 matches, and if the setting value information does not match, the abnormality notification of the setting value information may be performed.

Also, in the above example, the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command, the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command, the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command, the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command, and the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command are the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 However, if the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is notified from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. The command to be notified is provided separately from the special figure 1 synchronization production start command, the special figure 1 synchronization production end command, the special figure 2 synchronization production start command, the special figure 2 synchronization production end command, and the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command, and the main control Whenever any command is transmitted from the board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, or when a specific command is transmitted, a command for notifying the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 may also be transmitted. For example, setting notification command 1 to setting notification command 6 for notifying the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 are provided, and the setting notification command (setting value 1 If so, setting notification command 1, setting value 2, setting notification command 2, setting value 6, setting notification command 6) may be sent to the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to change the command design for each model (one with a plurality of set values and one with only one set value), and design work can be saved.

Also, in this case, the command (for example, special figure 1 synchronization production start command, special figure 1 synchronization production end command, Not only at the time of transmission of special figure 2 synchronization production start command, special figure 2 synchronization production end command, and fluctuation pattern prefetch command, etc.), command not involved in production executed by production display device 1600 (for example, normal winning mouth winning command etc. ), a command for notifying the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is also sent, and the consistency between the setting value information indicated by the command and the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510 may be determined whether or not there is an abnormality. With this configuration, it is possible to frequently determine whether or not the set value information stored in the set information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal, thereby avoiding problems caused by noise and the like. can further improve the accuracy of

[23. Suspension notice effect]
Next, the suspension notice effect will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the number of first reserved memories changes based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 2002, a command (first reserved number Designated commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to display the first reserved memory number on the performance display device 1600, and the second based on the game ball entering the second start port 2004 When the number of reserved memories changes, a command (second reserved number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 memory command 0 to 1)) is set to instruct the second reserved memory number, and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the second The number of pending memories is displayed on the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002, the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002, and based on the detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 2402, When the special symbol type look-ahead command and the variation pattern look-ahead command are received from the main control board 1310 based on the game ball entering the second start port 2004, based on the special symbol type look-ahead command and the variation pattern look-ahead command Suggestion of the special lottery result by changing the display mode of the first reserve memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserve memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 corresponding to the special lottery result whose start of suggestion is withheld. It is possible to execute a pending notice performance suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit at the time of execution of.

In this example, the first reservation number specified by the first reservation number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 or the second reservation number designated by the second reservation number storage command, the fluctuation pattern prefetch command and special Peripheral control board 1510 according to each of the advance determination information (losing, small hit, big hit, etc., may be notified of the type of big hit such as probability variable big hit or normal big hit) indicated by the symbol type look-ahead command has a hold notice determination table for determining the presence or absence of a hold notice and a hold notice pattern type when executing the hold notice.

Then, when the decision to execute the pending notice is made and the type of pending notice pattern to be executed is determined, the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are changed from normal. It is displayed in a display mode (a display color different from usual in this example). In this example, the first reserved memory 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a are normally displayed in white, which is the basic color, and when executing the reservation notice, they are displayed in either blue, green, red, or ladybug pattern. do. Also, the display modes of the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a are set so that the degree of expectation for a big hit increases in the order of white→blue→green→red→ladybug pattern.

In addition, when the lottery result is specified as a big hit as the advance determination information, the final reservation display mode determines with a high probability a reservation notice pattern in which the degree of expectation for the big win is high (for example, red color or ladybug pattern). When the lottery result is determined to be a loss as the determination information, the final reservation display is determined by determining with a high probability a reservation notice pattern in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is low (for example, blue color) as the final reservation display mode. When a mode with a high degree of expectation for a big win is displayed as a mode, the player's degree of expectation for the big win game state increases.

In addition, in the pending notice pattern, every time a suggestion of a special lottery result (variable display of decorative patterns (variable display of special patterns)) is performed during the execution of the pending notice effect (each time the hold is digested), the effect display It is set how the display modes of the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a displayed on the device 1600 change. In addition, in the pending notice pattern, the display mode of the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is reversed from the order of white→blue→green→red→ladybug pattern. It is set so that it does not change in order (that is, the expectation of a big hit does not decrease), and every time a suggestion of a special lottery result (variation display of decorative patterns (variation display of special patterns)) is performed (holding is digested Each time) the display mode of the first reservation memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reservation memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or it becomes a mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. is set to Therefore, even if the first reservation memory 1700a to 1700d and the second reservation memory 1701a are displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode with a low degree of expectation for a big hit, the suggestion of the special lottery result, which is the execution target of the reservation notice, starts. There is still a possibility that the mode of the pending display will change to a mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit until the game is played, and the mode of the pending display can be paid attention to with expectation until the end.

Further, in the pending notice pattern, it is not necessary to display the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a in white (basic color) and then change them in the order of blue → green → red → ladybug pattern. Start from the display mode in the middle (for example, based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3002 based on the game ball entered the first start opening 2002 to display the first reservation memory 1700c in red) , the display mode changes to the next display mode without going through the middle display mode (for example, when the first reserved memory 1700d is displayed in white, the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and the next special lottery result is displayed. It is also set to change from white to ladybug pattern when first reserved memory 1700d is moved to first reserved memory 1700c upon initiation. For this reason, even if there are few opportunities (number of reservations) to change the display mode of the first reservation memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reservation memory 1701a, the first reservation memories 1700a to 1700d and the first reservation memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reservation memory 1700a to 1700d can be It allows two reserved stores 1701a to be displayed. In addition, even if the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a are displayed in a display mode with a low degree of expectation for a big hit, it is not possible to predict which display mode will change next. It is possible to make the viewer pay attention to the display modes of the reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a with anticipation until the end.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a is different from the above-mentioned suspension notice, together with the suspension notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation of the big hit, or independently. , it is possible to execute a setting value holding suggestion effect that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In this example, according to the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 instructed by the fluctuation pattern prefetch command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 executes presence/absence of the setting value holding suggestion effect and the setting value holding suggestion effect. A setting value holding suggestion determination table is provided for determining setting value holding suggestion pattern types in the case of setting value holding suggestion patterns. Then, when the decision to execute the setting value holding suggestion effect is made and the set value holding suggestion pattern type to be executed is determined, the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in an unusual display mode (in this example, an unusual shape).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 202(A), the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a are usually displayed in circles, which are the basic shapes, and when executing the setting value reservation suggestion effect, 202(B), a triangle indicated by 1700c in FIG. 202(C), or a star indicated by 1701a in FIG. 202(D). In addition, the display modes of the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a increase the degree of expectation for the set value of the pachinko machine 1 (the degree of expectation for the high set value) in the order of circle→square→triangle→star. is set to

Further, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 5 or 6 based on the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command, the setting value holding becomes a high-expectation aspect (for example, a star) for the high setting value as the final holding display aspect. When the suggested pattern is determined with a high probability and the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 3 or 4, the setting value becomes a mode (for example, a triangle) with a moderate degree of expectation for the high setting value as the mode of the final pending display. When the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 1 or 2 by determining the hold suggesting pattern with a high probability, the set value becomes the form (for example, square) with the lowest expectation for the high set value as the form of the final hold display. By determining the pending suggestion pattern with a high probability, when a mode with a high degree of expectation for the high set value is displayed as the final mode of the pending display, the player's degree of expectation for the high set value increases. there is

In addition, in the set value hold suggestion pattern, each time a special lottery result suggestion (decorative pattern fluctuation display (special pattern fluctuation display)) is performed during the execution of the set value hold suggestion effect (every time the hold is digested ), how the display modes of the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are changed are set. In addition, in the setting value reservation suggestion pattern, the display modes of the first reservation memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reservation memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are in the order opposite to the order of circle→square→triangle→star. It is set so that it does not change (that is, the expectation for the high setting value does not decrease), and every time a suggestion of a special lottery result (variation display of decorative symbols (variation display of special symbols)) is performed (holding is digested each time) the display mode of the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or the degree of expectation for the high set value It is set to be high. Therefore, even if the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a are displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode with a low degree of expectation for the high set value, the special effect that is the execution target of the set value suspension suggestion effect is displayed. Until the suggestion of the lottery results is started, there is still a possibility that the mode of the pending display will change to a mode with a high degree of expectation for the high set value, and it is possible to draw the attention of the mode of the pending display with expectation to the end. can.

Further, in the setting value reservation suggestion pattern, it is not always necessary to display the first reservation memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reservation memory 1701a in circles (basic shapes) and then change them in the order of square→triangle→star. Starting from the display mode (for example, based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002, the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002, and the first reservation memory 1700d is displayed in a square), on the way (For example, when the first reserved memory 1700d is displayed in a square, the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and the next special lottery result starts. Accordingly, it is also set to change from a square to a star when the first reserved memory 1700d is moved to the first reserved memory 1700c. For this reason, even if there are few opportunities (number of reservations) to change the display mode of the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a, the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700a are displayed in the display mode with high expectations for the high set value. 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a can be displayed. Moreover, even if the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a are displayed in a display mode with a low expectation for high setting values, it is impossible to predict which display mode will change next. , the display modes of the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a can be watched with anticipation until the end.

In addition, since the pending notice pattern of the pending notice effect and the set value pending suggestion pattern of the set value pending suggestive effect are determined separately, the second effect displayed on the effect display device 1600 is based on the pending notice pattern of the pending notice effect. The display mode of the first suspension memory 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a is changed to a mode with a high degree of expectation for the high set value, and is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the set value retention suggestion pattern of the set value retention suggestion performance. When changing the display mode of the first suspension memory 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a to a mode with a high degree of expectation for the high set value, and the display on the effect display device 1600 based on the suspension notice pattern of the suspension notice effect While changing the display mode of the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a to a mode with a high degree of expectation for the high set value, based on the set value suspension suggestion pattern of the set value suspension suggestion performance, the effect display device 1600 When maintaining the display mode of the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension storage 1701a displayed in the display device 1600 based on the suspension notice pattern of the suspension notice performance, the first suspension memory 1700a ~ While maintaining the display mode of 1700d and the second reservation memory 1701a, the first reservation memory 1700a to 1700d and the second reservation memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the set value reservation suggestion pattern of the set value reservation suggestion performance is changed to a mode with a high degree of expectation for the high set value.

For example, first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and second When the second pending memory 1701a is moved, the display mode of the pending notice effect "white" is changed to "red", and the display mode of the setting value pending suggestion effect "circle" is changed to "square" (color and shape change). change both), the first suspension memory 1700a displayed on the effect display device 1600 after the suspension is terminated when the display mode of the suspension notice effect is "red" and the display mode of the set value suspension suggestion effect is "circle" When moving 1700d or the second suspension memory 1701a, the display mode of the pending notice effect "red" is maintained without changing, while the display mode of the set value pending suggestion effect "circle" is changed to "square". (The color is maintained and the shape is changed.) When the display mode of the suspension notice effect is "white" and the display mode of the set value suspension suggestion effect is "triangle", the suspension is terminated and displayed on the effect display device 1600. When moving the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a, the display mode of the suspension notice effect "white" is changed to "blue", while the display mode of the setting value suspension suggestion effect "triangle" is changed. It may be maintained without change (change color and maintain shape).

That is, in this example, the process of determining the pending notice pattern of the pending notice effect and the process of determining the set value pending suggestion pattern of the set value pending suggestive effect are performed separately, and the special lottery result suggestion ( Display of the first reservation memory 1700a to 1700d and the second reservation memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 each time the variable display of the decorative design (variable display of the special design) is performed (every time the reservation is digested) The mode is maintained (the display mode is not changed), or the mode is changed to a mode with a high degree of expectation for high setting values.

It should be noted that the final display mode of the pending notice effect and the set value pending suggestive effect are determined separately, and the change scenario of the display mode of the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a according to the determination result is shown. Any one of a plurality of types of change patterns may be executed.

In addition, the start timing of the setting value holding suggestion effect (the timing of displaying the display mode in a mode different from the normal mode) is based on the fact that the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Not limited to the timing of displaying the reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a, the timing after that (the timing after displaying in the basic shape, for example, when the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and the next special lottery result starts accordingly, such as when first reserved stores 1700b-d are moved to first reserved stores 1700a-c. As a result, even if the setting value holding suggestion effect is not executed, the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a can be expected to be watched until the end.

Note that the execution frequency of the setting value suspension suggestion effect is set lower than that of the suspension notice effect. That is, the pending notice effect is executed based on the preliminary determination information, and when the special lottery result is suggested based on the tobetsu lottery result based on the pending memory executing the pending notice effect, the content of the pending notice effect is reset. On the other hand, since the contents of the setting value holding suggestion effect continue without being reset until the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, the execution frequency of the set value holding suggesting effect is lower than that of the holding notice effect. This setting prevents the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 from being specified.

Also, as shown in the first suspension memory 1700c in FIGS. 202(A) and 202(B) and the second suspension storage 1701a in FIG. In addition, there are cases where the setting value suspension suggestion effect is executed alone as shown in the first suspension memory 1700c of FIG. 202(C). It should be noted that the holding notice pattern may include a change pattern of the display mode of setting value holding suggestion performance, and in this case, a holding notice determination table may be provided for each set value of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 203, the pachinko machine 1 of this example has a plurality of types of image data in which the display mode of the suspension notice effect and the display mode of the setting value suspension suggestion effect are combined, and the suspension notice of the suspension notice effect is provided. The pending memory of the object is displayed based on the image data according to both the pattern and the set value pending suggestion pattern of the set value pending suggestive effect. That is, after determining the color as the display mode of the pending advance notice effect of the target pending memory and the shape as the display mode of the setting value pending suggestion effect, a display mode combining these is generated, and this combined display mode is generated. is displayed as a pending memory.

Specifically, in the example of FIG. 203(A), in which only the pending notice effect is executed and the set value pending suggestion effect is not executed, the first pending memories 1700a and 1700b are displayed as "synthetic pattern white 1 , and the first reserved memory 1700c is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern blue 1". In addition, in the example of FIG. 203(B) in which the pending memory in which both the pending notice effect and the set value pending suggestive effect are executed is displayed, the first pending memories 1700a and 1700b are the image data of "synthetic pattern white 1". , and the first reserved memory 1700c is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern blue 2". Further, in the example of FIG. 203(C), in which the pending memory in which only the pending notice effect is executed and the pending memory in which only the setting value pending suggesting effect is executed are displayed, the first pending memory 1700a is set to "composite pattern The first reserve memory 1700b is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern white 1", and the first reserve memory 1700c is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern white 3". is displayed.

Also, in the second pending memory 1701a, the pending notice effect and the set value pending suggesting effect are executed, and the pending memory in which both the pending notice effect and the set value pending suggesting effect are executed is displayed (Fig. 203D). In this example, the second reserved memory 1701a is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern red 4".

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the display control of the first reservation memory 1700a to 1700d and the second reservation memory 1701a in a manner different from the usual display of the reservation notice effect and the pachinko machine 1 suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit. A set value holding suggestion effect for suggesting a set value can be executed. Note that while the pending advance notice effect is executed based on the preliminary determination information, the setting value pending suggestion effect is not based on the preliminary determination information. That is, the pending notice effect can be executed by acquiring the pending special lottery result in advance, while the setting value pending suggesting effect can be executed without acquiring the pending special lottery result in advance. be.

The special lottery result of which the start of suggestion is pending is not limited to being displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d or the second pending memory 1701a. The pending memory corresponding to the result may also be displayed on the effect display device 1600 as pending memory during execution. In this case, the final display mode of the pending notice effect and set value pending suggesting effect may be displayed in the pending memory during execution, and by configuring in this way, the special lottery result can be suggested. Since it is possible to make the player pay attention to the holding notice performance and the setting value holding suggesting performance until the performance is executed, and to make the player have expectations for the big hit and the high setting value, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

In the above example, the display color of the pending memory is changed as the display mode of the pending notice effect, and the shape of the pending memory is changed as the display mode of the setting value pending suggestion effect. It is not limited to the above as long as it can be determined that it is being executed. For example, as the display mode of the pending notice effect, the display color of the pending notice effect is changed, and as the display mode of the set value pending suggestive effect, the numerical value and the pending memory that are suggested without changing the shape of the target pending memory Additional information such as effect mode (glittering effect or flame effect) around the image may be displayed in association with the reserved storage.

Also, when the first holding memory 1700a ~ 1700d is displayed based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002, or the second holding memory based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004 When displaying 1701a, when updating and displaying the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a based on the fact that the reserved When moving or moving the first reservation memory 1700a or the second reservation memory 1701a to the execution reservation memory), the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 may be suggested by outputting a sound effect. For example, when suggesting that the setting value is "1", a sound effect (for example, "beep") corresponding to the setting value "1" among a plurality of types of sound effects is output, and the setting value is "2". When suggesting that the set value is "5", output a sound effect (for example, "beep") corresponding to the set value "2" among multiple types of sound effects, ... suggesting that the set value is "5" In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the set value "5" (e.g., "beep beep beep") is output among a plurality of types of sound effects, and if the set value is "6", a plurality of types of effects are output. Of the sounds, a sound effect corresponding to the set value "6" (for example, "Panpakapan") may be output.

Further, when the suspension notice performance or the set value suspension suggestion performance is executed, the big hit expectation degree and the pachinko machine 1 are set according to the operation of the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the performance operation part 301 in the performance operation unit 300. In this case, after the operation instruction image for instructing the operation of the rotation operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the production operation section 301 in the production operation unit 300 is displayed on the production display device 1600 The degree of expectation for a big hit or the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 may be suggested according to the operation of the rotary operation section 302 or the pressing operation section 303 of the presentation operation section 301 in the presentation operation unit 300 . In addition, the operation instruction image may be shared between the case of maintaining the expected degree of big win and the suggested set value and the case of further increasing the expected degree of big win and the suggested set value, whereby the pending notice effect and the set value may be used. It becomes impossible to discriminate whether or not the degree of expectation for a big win or a setting value to be suggested is increased by the performance (the performance of displaying the operation instruction image) that is a precursor to the execution of the pending suggestion performance, and the rotation of the performance operation part 301 in the performance operation unit 300. It is possible to induce the user to actively operate the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 .

Also, during the demonstration (demonstration effect that is performed while the player is waiting), it may be possible to select the presence or absence of the suspension notice effect or the presence or absence of the setting value suspension suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to execute performances that match the tastes of the players, and execution of suspension notice performances and set value retention suggestion performances is also performed for players who do not want to be suggested the degree of expectation for big wins, the set values of the pachinko machine 1, etc. It is possible to suppress that the big hit expectation degree and the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 are suggested.

In addition, an explanation of the mode suggested by the setting value holding suggestion effect (a mode that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 and not a mode that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit, etc.) It may be executed during the execution of the demonstration effect performed) or the execution of the suggestion of the special lottery result (during the variable display of the decorative pattern). As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the expectation for the big win due to misidentification as the degree of expectation for the big win when the setting value holding suggestion performance is executed.

In addition, during execution of the time saving state and the variable probability state, advance determination information indicated by the variation pattern prefetch command and special symbol type prefetch command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the game ball enters the first start port 2002 To the advance determination information indicated by the variation pattern look-ahead command and the special symbol type look-ahead command sent from the main control board 1310 when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 without executing the holding notice effect based on It is also possible to make it possible to execute only the pending advance notice effect based on. In addition, even during the execution of the time saving state and the variable probability state, the setting value reservation suggestion related to the first reservation storage 1700a to 1700d displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 2002 You may make it perform production|presentation. As a result, even when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 during the time saving state or the variable probability state, it is possible to make the player have expectations for the set value hold suggesting effect.

[24. Set value continuous suggestion effect]
Next, the setting value continuous suggestion effect will be described. In this example, it is possible to execute the setting value continuous suggestion performance for suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 over a plurality of times of variable display of decorative symbols. In addition, the variable display of decorative symbols is not limited to the one that is executed once for one variable display of special symbols, and the one that is executed multiple times for one variable display of special symbols (so-called pseudo-continuous display). fluctuation).

In this example, according to the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 instructed by the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command and the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 continuously suggests the setting value A set value continuous suggestion performance table for determining the presence or absence of performance and the set value continuous suggestion performance pattern type in the case of executing the set value continuous suggestion performance is provided. Then, when the determination to execute the set value continuous suggestion effect is made and the set value continuous suggestion effect pattern type to be executed is determined, the set value is set every time the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in the effect display device 1600 Any one of a plurality of setting suggesting characters 1702 having different display modes appears depending on the setting.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 204(A), when the effect display device 1600 starts the variable display of decorative patterns, a setting suggesting character 1702 corresponding to the setting value 1 is drawn with "1" on its head. The setting suggesting character 1702 is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 204(C), when the effect display device 1600 starts the next variable display of the decorative pattern, a setting suggesting character 1702 corresponding to the set value 3 is drawn with "3" on its head. Then, as shown in FIG. 204(E), when the effect display device 1600 starts the next variable display of the decorative pattern, the setting suggesting character 1702 corresponding to the set value 4 is displayed. A setting suggesting character 1702 with "4" drawn on its head is made to appear.

In addition, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as "6" based on the special figure 1 synchronization performance start command and the special figure 2 synchronization performance start command, setting suggestion according to the setting value "6" as a final mode A setting value continuous suggesting performance pattern to be a character 1702 is determined with a high probability, and when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 1, the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the setting value "1" is set as a final mode. By determining the continuous value suggesting production pattern with a high probability, when the setting suggesting character 1702 corresponding to the high set value is displayed as the final mode of the setting suggesting character 1702, the player's expectations for the high set value are met. It's getting more intense.

In addition, in the set value continuous suggestion effect pattern, each time the variable display of the decorative pattern is started during the execution of the set value continuous suggestion effect, how is the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600? It is set whether to change to In addition, in the setting value continuous suggesting effect pattern, the display mode of the setting suggesting character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 does not change in the reverse order of 1→2→3→4→5→6 ( That is, the degree of expectation for the high set value is not lowered), and the display mode of the setting suggesting character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 each time the variable display of the decorative pattern is started is maintained. (the display mode does not change) or is set so as to be in a mode according to the high set value. Therefore, even if setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed on effect display device 1600 in a display mode corresponding to the low set value, the mode of setting suggestion character 1702 remains at the high set value until the set value continuous suggestion effect ends. There is still a possibility that the mode will change according to the setting suggestion character 1702, and the mode of the setting suggesting character 1702 can be expected to be noticed until the end.

In addition, in the setting value continuous suggesting effect pattern, it is not always necessary to change the setting suggesting character 1702 in the order of 2→3→4→5→6 after displaying the setting suggesting character 1702 in a manner corresponding to the setting value “1”. (for example, the setting suggestion character 1702 is first displayed with the setting value "2" after starting the setting value continuous suggestion effect), and the display mode changes to the next display mode without going through the intermediate display mode. (For example, when the setting suggesting character 1702 corresponding to the set value "2" is displayed, the setting suggesting character 1702 corresponding to "4" is displayed according to the start of the next variable display of the decorative pattern. It is also set to Therefore, even if the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the low set value, it is not possible to predict which display mode will change next, and the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 cannot be predicted. It is possible to draw attention with anticipation to the end.

Incidentally, the execution frequency of the setting value continuous suggestion effect is set lower than that of the suspension notice effect, similarly to the setting value pending suggestion effect. That is, the pending notice effect is executed based on the preliminary determination information, and when the special lottery result is suggested based on the tobetsu lottery result based on the pending memory executing the pending notice effect, the content of the pending notice effect is reset. On the other hand, since the contents of the setting value continuous suggestion effect continue without being reset until the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, the execution frequency of the setting value continuous suggestion effect is lower than that of the pending notice effect. This setting prevents the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 from being specified.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting suggesting character 1702 is displayed over a plurality of times of variable display of the decorative symbols, thereby executing the set value continuous suggesting performance suggesting the set value of the pachinko machine 1. It is designed to be obtained. Incidentally, since the setting value continuous suggestion effect is not based on the prior determination information like the setting value holding suggestion effect, it can be executed without obtaining the special lottery result in advance.

Note that the setting value continuous suggestion effect for displaying the setting suggestion character 1702 can be executed exceeding the upper limit of the number of reserved memories (the upper limit of the first reserved memory number is 4, and the upper limit of the second reserved memory number is 1). (eg, over 5 or more variations of decorative symbols). In addition, when the number of pending memories becomes 0 during execution of the setting value continuous suggestion performance, the variation display of the decorative pattern is based on the game ball entering the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. is started, the setting suggesting character 1702 may be displayed by resuming the set value continuous suggesting effect. The display device 1600 may continue to display. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the setting value continuous suggestion performance is continuing and the game can be continued, and even if the player quits the game, the setting value continuous suggestion performance being continued can be given to a new player. can be induced to play a game on the game machine by arousing interest in the game machine.

Further, the setting value continuous suggestion effect may be executed in parallel with the setting value holding suggestion effect. Thus, it is possible to provide a new game in which the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is estimated from both the performance mode of the setting value holding suggestion performance and the performance mode of the setting value continuous suggestion performance. Also, a plurality of types of setting suggesting characters 1702 may be provided, and one of the setting suggesting characters 1702 may be displayed according to the degree of expectation for a big hit.

[25. Use of surplus settings other than jackpot probability and small hit probability]
In this embodiment, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button in a state in which the setting value can be changed, the setting value (setting Values 1 to 6) can be changed, and as a table used in a special lottery (hit determination table, big hit design determination table, small hit design determination table, etc.), a table corresponding to the fixed set value is used. I am using In the above-described embodiment, the table corresponding to each setting value includes "big hit probability", "small hit probability", "small hit type", "normal pattern per probability", and "general pattern per type" The combination of "opening and closing patterns of the second starting port" is set to be different. Information other than "hit probability" may be set so that the fraud monitoring system is different.

As described above, in the fraud detection process of step S112, various frauds are monitored. Specifically, a magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 1 to change the path of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5, and various winning openings and gates (gates) provided on the game board 5 are changed. ), a magnetic sensor 2010 is provided to detect fraud such as entering a ball, and the main control MPU determines the presence or absence of fraud based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, and monitors fraud with a magnet. ing. In addition, shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 vibrates the pachinko machine 1 to change the path of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 to change the path of the game ball B to the game board 5.例文帳に追加By installing vibration sensors that detect cheating such as entering balls into various prize-winning openings and gates, the main control MPU determines whether there is cheating based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. Monitors fraudulent behavior by vibration. In this example, as a fraud monitoring system, the detection sensitivity of the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detects fraud is changed, or the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detects fraud is It is possible to change the part (target area) judged to be fraudulent, or to change the conditions for canceling the error state when it is judged to be fraudulent and shifts to an error state.

As shown in FIG. 205, in this example, "big win probability", "minor win probability", and "fraud monitoring system" are set to set values 1 to 3 and set values 1' to 3', respectively. are set accordingly.

Specifically, as the jackpot probability (the ratio of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won in the hit determination table), set value 1 and set value 1' are "1/319", set value 2 and set value 2′ is set to “1/309”, and set values 3 and 3′ are set to “1/299”. In this example, the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 1' to 3' are set so that the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a big hit.

In addition, as a small hit probability (percentage of the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won in the hit judgment table), in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, set values 1 to 3, set value 1 While "1/100" is set for each of '-3', in the table used for the special lottery of the second special symbol, setting values 1-3 and setting values 1'-3' are set respectively. is set to "50/100". Incidentally, the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 1' to 3' may be set so that the higher the set value, the higher the small hit probability.

Further, as a fraud monitoring system, "fraud monitoring A" is set for setting values 1 to 3, and "fraud monitoring B" is set for setting values 1' to 3'. In this example, the monitoring system is set to be stronger in "fraud monitoring A" than in "fraud monitoring B".

In this example, setting value 1 and setting value 1', setting value 2 and setting value 2', and setting value 3 and setting value 3' have the same set value for "big hit probability" and "small hit probability". However, the fraud monitoring system is set to either "fraud monitoring A" or "fraud monitoring B". For example, in the setting change board 1311 provided with a setting key switch 1311a, etc., if it is possible to set six setting values, and it is necessary to set only three types of "jackpot probability", three types In addition to the three set values corresponding to the "jackpot probability", three surplus set values are generated. In this way, when the setting change board 1311 capable of setting six setting values is also used for other gaming machines, redundant setting values may occur. By also using the value to change the fraud monitoring system, it is possible to effectively utilize the surplus setting value and minimize changes in the program.

As for the display mode of the selected setting value when changing the setting, for settings 1 to 3, "1", "2", and "3" are displayed on the setting display 1310g composed of a single 7-segment LED display. In addition, while the 7-segment LED is displayed so as to blink normally, in settings 1' to 3', "1", "2", and "3" are displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the 7 The segment LED is displayed so as to blink at high speed (blinking faster than settings 1 to 3). As a result, when the operator changes the setting values, it is possible to clearly distinguish whether the setting values being changed are settings 1 to 3 or settings 1' to 3'. However, when the setting value is determined after the setting value is changed, the 7-segment LED normally flashes or high-speed It stops blinking and is displayed in normal lighting. Therefore, when the operator determines the set values after changing the settings, it is unclear whether the set values are settings 1 to 3 or settings 1' to 3'.

In addition, as another example of the above, regarding the display mode of the selected setting value at the time of operation related to setting change, in settings 1 to 3, the setting display 1310g configured by a single 7-segment LED display displays "1", "2 ' and '3' are displayed in settings 1' to 3'. You can also add a dot with In the case of such another example, even if all the 7-segment LEDs normally blink during change, it is possible to clearly distinguish whether the setting values being changed are settings 1 to 3 or settings 1' to 3'. be able to. In addition, when the setting value is determined after the setting value is changed, even if the 7-segment LED stops blinking normally and is displayed in normal lighting as the display mode of the setting value, the determined setting value is set to 1. ~3 or settings 1'-3' can be clearly distinguished.

Next, specific examples of the monitoring system for "unauthorized monitoring A" and "unauthorized monitoring B" include first to fifth specific examples. In this example, any one or more of the first to fifth specific examples may be executed as "fraud monitor A" and "fraud monitor B". First, as a first specific example, a case in which the detection sensitivity of the detection sensors (the magnetic sensor 2010 and the vibration sensor) for detecting fraudulent activity is varied will be described below.

As a first specific example, in "fraud monitoring A", the detection sensitivity of the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) for detecting fraud is increased, while in "fraud monitoring B", fraud is detected. The detection sensitivity of the detection sensor (the magnetic sensor 2010, the vibration sensor) is lowered. When the detection sensor for detecting fraudulent activity detects excessively due to individual differences of the pachinko machine 1 or the installation location in the hall, the excessive detection is prevented by selecting "fraudulent monitoring B". be able to. On the other hand, when the detection by the detection sensor for detecting fraud is slow, selecting "fraud monitoring A" can prevent the slow detection. Further, if it is desired to strengthen countermeasures against magnetic and vibrating gotos, by selecting "fraudulent act A", it is possible to strengthen monitoring of fraudulent acts by means of magnetic and vibrating gotos.

In addition, in "fraud monitoring A", when a detection signal is input from a detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detects fraudulent activity, if the time for which the detection signal is input is short, or if the detection signal is Even if the number of inputs is small, it is determined to be fraudulent. If there are many, it may be determined that the act is fraudulent. In such a case as well, the same effects as those obtained when the detection sensitivities of the detection sensors for detecting fraudulent actions are varied can be obtained.

Next, as a second specific example, a case in which the detection sensors (the magnetic sensor 2010 and the vibration sensor) that detect fraudulent behavior change the parts (target regions) that are determined to be fraudulent behavior will be described below.

In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting fraudulent activity using a magnet, a setting operation unit capable of detecting the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 is provided. A magnetic sensor 2010a and a game area section magnetic sensor 2010b capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 are provided. Depending on the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a, it is monitored whether the magnet approaches the area in which the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. Unauthorized acts such as changing settings or trying to display confirmation are monitored. On the other hand, the game area portion magnetic sensor 2010b monitors whether the magnet approaches the area in front of the game area 5a, changes the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a, and is provided on the game board 5. We monitor fraudulent acts such as entering the ball into various prize openings and gates (gates).

Similarly, as a vibration sensor for detecting cheating due to vibration, a setting operation unit vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 and a game area vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the third sorting device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5 . Depending on the setting operation section vibration sensor, it is possible to monitor whether or not the area in which the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is vibrated, and a person other than the person who changes the setting of the setting value or performs confirmation display may Unauthorized acts such as changing settings or trying to display confirmation are monitored. On the other hand, depending on the game area part vibration sensor, it monitors whether or not vibration is applied to the third distribution device 2550, changes the course of the game ball B in the third distribution device 2550, and changes the second V winning opening 2008 It monitors illegal acts such as entering a game ball B into a ball.

As a second specific example, in "fraud monitoring A", all of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detect fraud are used to increase the number of parts that are determined to be fraudulent, In "fraud monitoring B", fraudulent activity is determined using only the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a and the setting operation section vibration sensor, which are part of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010 and vibration sensor) that detect fraudulent activity. The number of parts to be used is reduced. In other words, in the “fraud monitor A”, not only the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 is detected, but also the game area located on the front side of the game board 5 is detected. While it is possible to detect the occurrence of magnetism and vibration in front of the game board 5a, in the "fraud monitoring B", the magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 It is possible to detect only the occurrence of vibration and vibration. For example, if a malfunction occurs in the game area magnetic sensor 2010b or the game area vibration sensor, and such detection sensors frequently detect fraudulent activity even though no fraudulent activity is performed, "fraud monitoring B" is performed. can prevent its frequent detection. In addition, if it is desired to strengthen countermeasures against magnetic and vibrating gotos, by selecting "fraud monitoring A", fraudulent acts in front of the game area 5a are also monitored, and fraudulent acts using magnetic and vibrating gotos are monitored. monitoring can be strengthened.

In this example, two magnetic sensors, a setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a and a game area section magnetic sensor 2010b, are provided as the magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting fraudulent activity using a magnet. It is possible to specify the location (whether it is around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5, or in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5). A single magnetic sensor may be provided. Similarly, two vibration sensors, a setting operation section vibration sensor and a game area section vibration sensor, are provided as vibration sensors for detecting cheating due to vibration. It is possible to specify whether it is around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side, or around the third sorting device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5). A single vibration sensor may be provided. Even in such a case, in the "illegal monitoring B", only when it is specified that magnetism or vibration has occurred around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5, it is considered a fraudulent act. By judging that there is, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Next, as a third specific example, a case will be described below in which the conditions for canceling the error state are changed when it is determined that a fraudulent act has occurred and the error state is shifted to.

As a third specific example, in the "fraud monitor A", when it is determined that there is fraudulent activity and shifts to an error state, it is possible to cancel the error state by turning on the power again. , "fraud monitoring B" makes it possible to automatically release the error state after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 minutes) elapses when it is determined that a fraudulent act has occurred and the state shifts to an error state. ing. That is, in the "fraud monitoring A", when it is determined that fraudulent activity has occurred and the state shifts to an error state, the hall clerk opens the body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 and operates the power switch 630a. The error state cannot be canceled unless the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again. In addition, when the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detects fraudulent activity detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, it shifts to an error state, and the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker , an abnormal state is executed to notify the player of an abnormal state due to the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, making it difficult to normally grasp the progress of the game. For this reason, when "fraud monitoring A" is selected, when it is determined that fraudulent activity has occurred and the state shifts to an error state, work by the hall clerk is required, and the hall clerk must be aware of the fraudulent activity. Therefore, deterrence against fraud can be enhanced. In addition, if it is desired to strengthen countermeasures against magnetic and vibrating gotos, by selecting "fraud monitoring A", it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of fraudulent acts by means of magnetic and vibrating gotos.

Next, as a fourth specific example, when it is determined that it is a fraudulent act and it shifts to an error state, information about the error state is sent to the hall installed on the game hall side via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1. A case in which whether or not to output to a computer is differentiated will be described below.

As a fourth specific example, in the "fraud monitor A", when it is determined that there is fraudulent activity and shifts to an error state, information about the error state is sent to the game hall via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. In contrast to the output to the hall computer installed on the side, "fraud monitoring B" outputs information on the error state to the hall computer even if it is determined to be a fraudulent act and shifts to an error state. I try not to. In other words, in the "fraud monitoring A", when it is determined that a fraudulent act has occurred and the state shifts to an error state, the hall clerk can immediately grasp the fraudulent act without being present at the place. deterrence can be increased. Further, if it is desired to strengthen countermeasures against magnetic and vibrating gotos, by selecting "unauthorized monitoring A", it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of fraudulent actions using magnetic and vibrating gotos.

Next, as a fifth specific example, whether or not to externally notify information about the error state by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker when it is determined that it is a fraudulent act and it shifts to an error state. A case of making the difference is described below.

As a fifth specific example, in "fraud monitoring A", when it is determined that fraudulent activity has occurred and the state shifts to an error state, magnetism and vibration are generated by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Information about the error state is reported externally by executing an abnormality occurrence effect that notifies that it is in an abnormal state. , the information about the error state is not notified to the outside. In other words, in "fraud monitoring A", when it is determined that a fraudulent act has occurred and the state shifts to an error state, the fraudulent person is warned by external notification of information on the error state, thereby enhancing the deterrence against fraudulent activity. can do. Further, if it is desired to strengthen countermeasures against magnetic and vibrating gotos, by selecting "unauthorized monitoring A", it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of fraudulent actions using magnetic and vibrating gotos.

In this example, the set values 1 to 3 are set to "fraud monitor A" and the set values 1' to 3' are set to "fraud monitor B". By transmitting the value-related information as a command, the peripheral control board 1510 side can determine which of "fraud monitor A" and "fraud monitor B" should stand by. For this reason, when the main control MPU sends information about the error state as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 when it is determined that the misconduct has occurred and the error state is entered, the peripheral control board 1510 side: It can be determined whether or not to externally report information about the error state.

In addition, in "illegal monitoring B", when it is determined that an illegal act has occurred and an error state occurs, information regarding the error state is externally notified. may be executed in a more restrained (inconspicuous) manner than "unauthorized monitoring A". For example, in "improper monitoring B", when the information about the error state is notified to the outside, the output from the lamp or the speaker may be stopped and only the image of the effect display device 1600 may be displayed. Even in such a case, it is possible to obtain the same effect as described above, which is the case where it is determined whether or not to externally report the information on the error state.

In the above description, the setting change board 1311 capable of setting 6 setting values is used, and only 3 types of "jackpot probabilities" need to be set, and 3 surplus setting values are generated. In other words, in setting values 1' to 3', even though the setting values 1 to 3 have the same "big hit probability" and "small hit probability", the fraud monitoring system is set to "fraud monitoring A". Although the setting values 1 to 3 are set to "unauthorized monitoring B", the setting values 1 to 5 corresponding to 5 types of "jackpot probabilities" are set. In the event that one surplus set value occurs, the fraudulent act monitoring system may be made different for that one surplus set value. For example, in setting value 1' which is one surplus setting value, even though setting value 1 and "big hit probability" or "small hit probability" among setting values 1 to 5 are the same setting value, fraud monitoring "Fraud monitoring B" may be set for the setting values 1 to 5 for which the system is set to "Fraud monitoring A". Even in such a case, the surplus set values can be effectively utilized.

In the above description, either one of “fraud monitoring A” and “fraud monitoring B” is set as the fraud monitoring system. ”, or “unauthorized monitoring C” may be set. The monitoring of fraudulent activity is strengthened in the order of "fraud monitoring C", "fraud monitoring B", and "fraud monitoring A". For example, setting values 1 and 2 corresponding to two types of "jackpot probabilities" are set, and four surplus setting values occur. For the values 1 and 2, the set values 1' and 2' set in the 'illegal monitoring B' even though the 'big hit probability' and 'small hit probability' are the same set values, and the 'big hit probability' and 'small hit probability' The setting values 1'' and 2''' set in the "unauthorized monitoring C" may be set as surplus setting values even though the "probability" is the same setting value. Even in such a case, the surplus set values can be effectively utilized.

In the above, although the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" are the same set value, the case where the fraud monitoring system is set to be different has been explained. As other information, all or part of a plurality of accessories (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 may be set to have different operation systems. As a sixth specific example, a case where some of the plurality of accessories (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are set to operate differently will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 206, in the sixth specific example, the operation system of a specific role (specific movable object) among a plurality of roles (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is set. Values 1 to 3 are set to "with specific action", and set values 1' to 3' are set to "no specific action" is the first reason that "monitoring system for cheating" is set. This is different from the specific example to the fifth specific example. That is, in the sixth specific example, the "big hit probability" and the "small hit probability" are set for each of the set value 1 and the set value 1', the set value 2 and the set value 2', and the set value 3 and the set value 3'. Although the set value is the same, the action system of the specific role product (specific movable object) is set to either "with specific role product action" or "without specific role product action". It should be noted that a plurality of accessories (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 can each be operated using a drive source such as a drive motor or a solenoid. The accessory is composed of the effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 described above, and the effect operation unit 300 can be vertically moved by the operation mechanism described above. Since the effect operation unit 300 can be directly touched and operated by the player, it is more likely to cause a failure or malfunction than other accessories. In addition, in the case of "there is a specific accessory action", the specific accessory is controlled to operate at a predetermined timing during the execution of the movable object production that accompanies the action of the specific role (the production operation unit 300 moves up and down). On the other hand, in the case of "no specific role product action", control is performed so that the specific role product does not move without executing the movable object production accompanying the action of the specific role product. For example, if there is a problem with the operation mechanism of the specific role and the specific role does not operate normally, by selecting "no specific role", the operation of the specific role will stop in the middle. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which continuation of the game becomes difficult due to the loss of the game.

In this example, when a variation pattern in which the execution of a movable object effect involving the action of a specific role is set is determined among a plurality of variation patterns, in the case of "there is a specific role While the specific role is controlled to operate at a predetermined timing during the execution of the movable object production accompanied by the action, in the case of "no specific role action", the movable object production accompanied by the action of the specific role is executed. It is controlled so that the specific role does not work. On the other hand, the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern may be changed between "with specific role action" and "without specific role action", for example, "with specific role action" , among a plurality of variation patterns, it is possible to determine the variation pattern in which the execution of the movable object production accompanied by the action of the specific role is set. It may be controlled so as not to determine the variation pattern in which the execution of the movable object presentation accompanied by the action of is set. Even in such a case, in the case of "no specific role action", the same effects as above can be achieved by controlling the specific role product so that it does not move without executing the movable object production that accompanies the action of the specific role product. can be obtained.

In addition, in this example, when the operation system of the specific role (specific movable object) is set to the setting value 1 to 3, which is "with specific role product operation", when the power is turned on (after setting change), the specific role While the initial action of the object is performed, if the setting values 1' to 3', which are "no specific role action", are set, the initial action of the specific role is performed when the power is turned on (after changing the setting) I am trying not to do it. As a result, it is possible to remind the user that the specific role object (specific movable object) out of the plurality of role objects (movable objects) is excluded from the action target. In addition, it is possible to confirm whether or not the setting values intended by the operator are possible with respect to the operation of the specific role object (specific movable object), preventing situations in which the operator makes a mistake with the setting values not intended by the operator. be able to.

Different from the above, if priority is given to confirming whether or not there is a problem with the movement of a specific accessory (specific movable object), in order to accurately notify it, "with specific accessory action" and "without specific accessory action" In either case, the initial action of the specific role may be performed when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed).

In addition, it is possible to check which of "with specific role product action" and "without specific role product action" is set by the setting value displayed on the setting display 1310g, but other than the setting display 1310g However, it may be notified. For example, at the completion of the setting change of the setting value, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker ``Set with specific role action / Set without specific role action'' is notified. Or, as a standby screen during the period when the game is not played, it is notified to that effect, and whether the specific role object (specific movable object) among the plurality of role objects (movable objects) is the target of the action can recognize what

In addition, in this example, by changing the setting value by the operator, it is possible to set either "with specific role product action" or "no specific role product action", but such an initial After setting, the initial setting may be changed to another setting by the player. For example, during the display of the standby screen during the period in which the game is not played, the player may be allowed to change to either "specific role product action" or "no specific role product action". That is, the setting values 1 to 3 are set to "with specific role product operation", and the setting values 1' to 3' are set to "no specific role product operation", and the main control MPU is directed to the peripheral control board 1510, setting By transmitting information about the value as a command, the peripheral control board 1510 side will execute either setting as the initial setting, but if the player changes to another setting after the initial setting, On the side of the peripheral control board 1510, the settings changed by the player are given priority over the initial settings.

Further, the specific accessory (specific movable object) among the plurality of accessories (movable objects) is not limited to the effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300, and is provided on the game board 5 or the door frame 3, It may operate from outside the front of the screen of the effect display device 1600 toward the front of the screen. Also, in this example, it is possible to change the operation system of a specific role (specific movable object) out of a plurality of roles (movable objects) by changing the setting of the set value, but it is not limited to the specific role, It is possible to change the action system of multiple roles (movable objects) or all the roles, and set the target role to either "with role action" or "without role action". You may do so. In addition, accessories (movable objects) may be provided not only on the game board 5 and the door frame 3, but also on the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and it is possible to change the operation system of such accessories. It may be a target to do.

[26. fraud monitoring]
In this embodiment, various types of fraudulent activity are monitored in the fraudulent activity detection process in step S112 described above. Specifically, by bringing a magnet closer to the pachinko machine 1 to change the path of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5, various winning openings and gates (gates) provided on the game board 5 are changed. ), a magnetic sensor 2010 is provided to detect fraudulent activity such as entering a ball, and the main control MPU determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, and monitors fraudulent activity by magnets. ing. In addition, shaking or striking the pachinko machine 1 vibrates the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game balls B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 to change the path of the game balls B to the game board 5.例文帳に追加By installing vibration sensors that detect fraudulent actions such as entering the ball into the various winning openings and gates provided, the main control MPU determines whether there is fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. Monitors fraudulent behavior by vibration. As for the monitoring of these fraudulent acts, the mode of monitoring differs between the normal state and the state in which setting values are being changed or confirmation display of setting values is being performed.

[26-1. Regarding fraud monitoring during normal times]
First, the monitoring of fraudulent activity during normal times will be described below. Here, the normal state is a state in which the main body frame 4 is closed, and the setting value is not changed or the confirmation display of the setting value is not performed. It refers to a state in which it is possible to play a game.

In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting fraudulent activity using a magnet, a setting operation unit capable of detecting the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 is provided. A magnetic sensor 2010a and a game area section magnetic sensor 2010b capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 are provided. Normally, the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a is used to monitor fraudulent activity in a predetermined area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In other words, normally, the magnetic sensor 2010a of the setting operation section detects magnetism that should not be generated (such It monitors whether a magnetic field has been generated (whether a magnet is approaching), and monitors fraudulent actions such as attempts to change settings or display confirmation by a person other than the person who performs the setting change or confirmation display. Examples of fraudulent acts against the back side of the pachinko machine 1 using magnets include, for example, illegal metal implements and their A magnet for indirectly manipulating the illegal metal implement is installed, and the magnet and the illegal metal implement are driven through a slight gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the inside of the island facility or an opening formed by partially destroying the pachinko machine 1. An act of illegally accessing the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is conceivable. It should be noted that, in the fraudulent act detection processing in step S112, when a detection signal is input from the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a, an act of fraudulent act using a magnet is performed on the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. has been determined to be carried out.

Similarly, during normal times, the gaming area magnetic sensor 2010b is used to monitor fraudulent activity in a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. That is, normally, the game area magnetic sensor 2010b monitors whether or not magnetism (magnetism due to unauthorized access) that should not be generated in the area in front of the game area 5a is generated (whether a magnet approaches). Also, it monitors cheating such as changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a and causing the ball to enter various winning holes or gates provided on the game board 5.例文帳に追加It should be noted that when a detection signal is input from the game area magnetic sensor 2010b in the fraudulent act detection process of step S112, it is determined that an act of fraud using a magnet is being performed in the area in front of the game area 5a. is doing.

In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting fraudulent activity using magnets, two magnetic sensors, a setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a and a game area section magnetic sensor 2010b, are provided. Sensors 2010a, 2010b may have identical performance. That is, although not shown, the two magnetic sensors 2010a and 2010b are formed by a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, and the first magnetic sensor 2010a and 2010b has directivity with strong sensitivity in the direction perpendicular to one side surface. Magnetic detection within the magnetic detection region and magnetic detection within the second magnetic detection region having directivity with high sensitivity in the direction perpendicular to the other side opposite to the magnetic detection region. It has become. It should be noted that "vertical sensitivity is high" means that sensitivity is higher in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction with respect to each side, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction. In other words, the magnetic detection area emitted from each side surface is a wide area surrounded by a spherical shape. The game area magnetic sensor 2010b is arranged so that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of the sensor body spread in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. , a wide range of the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the big winning opening 2005, etc., and other main parts of the ball flow path, etc. location) can be monitored. On the other hand, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a is configured such that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of the sensor body are spread in the front-rear direction when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, and One magnetic detection area is arranged to cover the back side of the pachinko machine 1 so that the area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switches 1311a are provided can be monitored.

Note that an embodiment in which the two magnetic sensors 2010a and 2010b do not have the same performance is also possible. For example, instead of the magnetic sensors 2010a and 2010b, the place where the magnetism is generated (around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5, or the game sensor located on the front side of the game board 5). A single magnetic sensor may be provided that can specify whether the area is in front of the area 5a. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to monitor whether the magnet approaches the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and whether the magnet approaches the area in front of the game area 5a. .

In addition, in this example, as a vibration sensor for detecting fraudulent activity by vibration, a setting operation capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 is used. A partial vibration sensor and a game area partial vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the third sorting device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5 are provided. In normal times, fraudulent actions are monitored using the setting operation unit vibration sensor. In other words, normally, the setting operation unit vibration sensor monitors whether vibrations that should not occur (vibrations due to unauthorized access) are applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switches 1311a are provided. It also monitors illegal actions such as attempts to change settings or display confirmation by a person other than the person who performs the setting change or confirmation display. It should be noted that, in the fraudulent act detection processing in step S112, when a detection signal is input from the setting operation unit vibration sensor, an act of fraudulent act is performed by vibrating the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. It is determined that

On the other hand, only during the small winning game in the normal time, the game area part vibration sensor is used to monitor the cheating, and the game area part vibration sensor is not used to monitor the cheating except for the small winning game. This is because, in the small winning game, in the third distribution device 2550, the game ball B distributed to the second V winning port side by the second distribution device 2540 is sent to either the second V winning port 2008 or the losing side. However, when vibration is applied to the third sorting device 2550, the course of the game ball B in the third sorting device 2550 is changed, and the game ball B is sent to the second V winning opening 2008. This is to prevent such a fraudulent act as it becomes possible to let the player enter the ball. In other words, during the small winning game in the normal time, the game area part vibration sensor monitors whether or not vibration (vibration due to unauthorized access) that should not occur originally is applied to the third sorting device 2550 However, it monitors cheating, such as changing the course of the game ball B in the third sorting device 2550 and causing the game ball B to enter the second V winning hole 2008 . In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when the detection signal from the game area vibration sensor is input, it is determined that the third sorting device 2550 is being fraudulent due to vibration.

In this example, two vibration sensors, a setting operation section vibration sensor and a game area section vibration sensor, are provided as vibration sensors for detecting cheating due to vibration. Is it around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the board 5, or is it around the third sorting device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5). A single vibration sensor may be provided. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to monitor whether vibration is applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and whether vibration is applied to the third sorting device 2550. can.

Also, normally, in the firing permission signal setting process of step S113, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to inform the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 that the firing of the game ball B is permitted. A game ball B can be shot when the handle 182 is operated.

Also, normally, when the game ball B wins a winning opening such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the big winning opening 2005, etc., the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to each is input by the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as valid. Specifically, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B wins the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the symbol variation is not performed, and the game ball B While the payout is not performed, when the detection of the game ball B is enabled, when the game ball B wins the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the pattern variation is performed. It is possible for the game balls B to be paid out while being played.

In addition, normally, except for the period during which the effect using the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 is executed during the pattern change, the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, the screen of the effect display device 1600, etc. It is possible to adjust the amount of light output from the light emitting member. Specifically, after an image for adjustment is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by operating the pressing operation unit 303, the sound volume and the amount of light can be adjusted by rotating the rotary operation unit 302. It should be noted that during the period during which the effect using the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 is being executed during the symbol variation, the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 is waited for the effect. Since it is in this state, even if the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, the volume and the amount of light cannot be adjusted during the prohibited period.

[26-2. Regarding unauthorized monitoring during setting change]
Next, referring to FIG. 207, a description will be given of monitoring of fraudulent activity during setting change of setting values. FIG. 207 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraudulent activity during setting change of set values.

When changing the settings of the set values, first, the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off). After performing the operation (timing t1), the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. , the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (timing t2). Then, by operating the power switch 630a to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t3), the setting value can be changed (change permission state). In such a change permission state, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button, it is possible to change the setting values (setting values 1 to 6) each time the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed. After that, the setting key cylinder is turned counterclockwise by 120 degrees to perform a second ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON, and then turning the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return it to its original position and turning it off (timing t4). In other words, the period from timing t3 to timing t4 is a state in which the setting value can be changed (change permission state), and after timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the setting value is changed. It becomes a state in which it is impossible to change the settings (unchangeable state). Then, by removing the setting key from the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), a game can be played. Become.

In this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on processing (see FIGS. 142 and 143), but at timing t4, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. (It is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off in step S222 of the setting change process) until the setting change process of step S37 is finished until the The interrupt permission setting in step S52 is prohibited, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is delayed compared to normal power-on. Then, since the main control side timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 144) is not started until the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is performed, the switch input processing of step S104 and the fraud detection of step S112 in the main control side timer interrupt processing Processing, firing permission signal setting processing in step S113, and the like are not executed, and a standby state is entered. In other words, for the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value can be changed (change permitted state), but the monitoring of fraud is not executed, and the game ball B is not monitored. A special period is set in which the shooting is not permitted and the input of the detection signal is not validated when the game ball B wins the winning hole. In addition, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, information regarding the setting change of the setting value is output to the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. , the hall clerk can grasp that the setting is being changed.

Specifically, in the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, fraudulent behavior is monitored using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, and fraudulent behavior is detected using the game area magnetic sensor 2010b. I'm trying not to run the entire monitoring. This is because, in the change-permitted state, an authorized operator who changes the settings of the set values operates the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button). This is because there is no room for anyone other than the authorized operator who changes the settings of the set values to cheat using the magnet. In addition, even if the authorized operator who changes the setting value has something that can generate magnetism, it is possible to prevent detection as a fraudulent act using a magnet. , it is possible to suppress the obstruction of regular setting change work.

Similarly, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of cheating using the setting operation section vibration sensor and overall monitoring of cheating using the game area section vibration sensor are performed. I try not to. This is because, in the change-permitted state, the authorized operator who changes the setting of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button). This is because there is no room for anyone other than the authorized operator who changes the settings to commit fraudulent acts using vibration. In addition, even if an authorized operator who changes the settings applies vibration when changing the setting values, it is possible to prevent detection of fraudulent actions due to vibrations, and to prevent unauthorized setting change work from being detected. Inhibition can be suppressed.

In addition, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the logic of the firing permission signal that tells the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to allow the firing of the game ball B is not set. , and shooting of the game ball B is prohibited. Thereby, even if the regular operator who changes the setting of the set value touches the handle 182, the game ball B can be prevented from being shot, and the obstruction of the regular setting change operation can be suppressed. Also, even if the player operates the handle 182 in the change permission state, the game ball B cannot be shot.

In addition, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, there are winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the big winning opening 2005, and various gates (gates ), the main control MPU does not input the detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. It should be noted that the game ball B itself may not be detected by the detection sensor, or the detection signal from the detection sensor may be treated as invalid even though it is input. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, lottery, symbol variation, game ball B Even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 for some reason during the regular work of changing the set value , it is possible to suppress the progress of the game.

Also, although not shown, the main control MPU inputs detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to each of the winning openings and gates (gates) in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4. At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is also prevented from being input to the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008 is invalidated, for example, the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the change permission state is measured by the base monitor 1310h. It becomes possible to exclude from objects (objects to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to slinging (ball clogging) or the like is detected in the change permission state and the base monitor 1310h. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the number of outs is measured (added to the number of outs counter).

In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, the screen of the effect display device 1600, etc. It is made impossible to adjust the amount of light output from the light emitting member.

In addition, in the change permission state which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the pattern display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the setting value is set by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. A setting change in-progress notification (setting change-related notification) is being executed to notify that the setting is being changed. As for notification during setting change, the voice repeatedly saying "The setting is being changed", the message "The setting is being changed!" and This notification during setting change is a notification (effect) performed only in a change-permitted state, and is executed with priority over the body frame open notification performed when the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2.例文帳に追加That is, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open notification (such as display and voice of "the frame is open") is normally performed, but when the change is permitted, the main body frame open notification is performed. It is decided that the notification during setting change is executed with the highest priority without performing Note that the body frame open notification and setting change notification are executed in parallel, the setting change notification is given priority over the body frame open notification, and the body frame open notification is performed after the setting change notification is completed. A form can also be illustrated.

In addition, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, as the setting change notification, in addition to the image and lamp of the effect display device 1600 and the output from the speaker, the function display unit 1400 notifies. Running. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal pending indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special pending number indicator, a second special In addition to the pattern indicator, the second special hold number indicator, and the round indicator, a setting change indicator consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being changed (change permitted state), the setting value A confirming display indicator consisting of one LED is provided for indicating that confirmation is being displayed (confirmation display state). In the change permission state, only the LED of the setting changing indicator in the function display unit 1400 is lit, and the LEDs of the other indicators are all extinguished. Thus, in the change-permitted state, the notification from the function display unit 1400 makes it possible to grasp that the game does not progress.

Also, at timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the setting change process of step S37 in the main control power-on process (see FIGS. 142 and 143) is terminated (the setting key switch 1311a is turned off in step S222 of the setting change process). It is determined that the switch 1311a has been turned off), and the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is performed. Then, it becomes possible to start the main control side timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 144), switch input processing in step S104, fraud detection processing in step S112, and firing enable signal setting in step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt processing. processing etc. will be performed. However, in this embodiment, until the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), it is detected when the game ball B is permitted to be shot or when the game ball B wins the winning hole. A state in which no signal can be input and a game cannot be started is maintained. In other words, during the period from timing t4 to timing t5, even if the game ball B is entered into the winning opening by fraudulent act, the detection signal is not input and illegal profit cannot be obtained. In addition, since there is a possibility that the body frame 4 may be subjected to an impact that closes the outer frame 2, fraudulent behavior is monitored using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, and fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor 2010b The action monitoring, the monitoring of fraudulent behavior using the setting operation section vibration sensor, and the monitoring of fraudulent behavior using the game area vibration sensor are not executed and are in a standby state.

In addition, from the timing t5 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B can be shot, and games such as pattern variations, big win games, and small win games can be played. In such a state, monitoring of various fraudulent acts is started according to the contents described in [Regarding fraud monitoring in normal times].

Also, during the period from timing t4 to timing t5, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the screen of the effect display device 1600 is in a state of waiting for the start of the game. An image is displayed to notify that (game standby notification). Then, during a predetermined period from timing t5, after closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, a game such as a pattern variation, a big win game, a small win game, etc. is started. An image (game start notification) is displayed to notify that the game has become possible.

In this example, during the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4), the game ball B is launched. Although the logic of the firing permission signal that conveys permission to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set, considering the inspection of the firing operation by the handle 182 in the change permission state, etc. During that period, the logic of the launch permission signal may be set so that the game ball B can be launched when the operator operates the handle 182 . However, during the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from timing t3 to timing t4), the permission is limited to the launch of the game ball B. It is desirable to prevent the game from proceeding unfairly by preventing the detection signal from being input even if the game ball B is entered into various prize-winning openings or gates (gates). .

Further, in this example, during the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4), the game ball B is launched. The logic of the launch permission signal that tells the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit is not set, and from the timing t5 (may be timing t4), the game ball B is launched. However, when the handle 182 is operated (contacted with the handle 182) for the first time after the change permission state is ended and the shooting of the game ball B is permitted, the set value is changed in the change permission state. Notification after setting change is executed. As the notification after the setting change, a voice saying "The setting has been changed", a message "The setting has been changed" is displayed, and a lamp is emitted. In addition, even if a setting value is changed by an unauthorized person other than the authorized operator who changes the setting value, the handle 182 is operated for the first time after the setting value is changed. 182) is executed. As a result, even though the authorized worker who changes the setting value does not change the setting value, if the notification is executed after changing the setting value, the setting value is changed due to fraudulent behavior. It is possible to increase the deterrence against fraudulent acts by making it known to the outside.

Further, in this example, during the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4), the game ball B is launched. The logic of the launch permission signal that tells the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit is not set, and from the timing t5 (may be timing t4), the game ball B is launched. However, if the handle 182 is operated (contacted with the handle 182) before the game ball B is permitted to be shot, the contact with the handle 182 is temporarily released after the game ball B is allowed to be shot. The game ball B will not be shot unless the handle 182 is touched (operated) again (by turning off the contact detection). That is, even if the contact of the handle 182 has been ON before timing t5, unless the contact detection for the handle 182 turns ON from OFF after timing t5, the contact with the handle 182 continues. contact is invalidated to restrict the game ball B from being shot. As a result, even if an authorized worker who changes the settings of the set values touches the handle 182 when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 cannot be moved from the outer frame 2. A game ball B is not shot carelessly when it is closed, and it is possible to surely prevent the loss of the player.

Also, unlike the above, in consideration of speeding up the game start based on the end of the change permission state, when the handle 182 is being operated from the time before the shooting permission of the game ball B, the handle 182 While the contact is continued, the continued contact with the handle 182 may be validated so that the game ball B can be shot from the time when the game ball B is allowed to be shot. In such a case, the handle 182 is operated before closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 to prepare for shooting the game ball B, and immediately after closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. You can start playing.

Further, in this example, the game ball B can be shot from the timing t5 when the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and games such as pattern variations, big win games, and small win games can be performed. However, at timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the game may be immediately started. In other words, from the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the game ball B can be shot, and the game such as the pattern variation, the big win game, and the small win game can be performed. Regarding fraud monitoring at times], monitoring of fraudulent behavior may be performed. In such a configuration, in the period from timing t4 to timing t5, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, but on the screen of the effect display device 1600, the pattern fluctuation, the big win game, the small game, etc. An image (game start notification) for notifying that a game such as a winning game can be started may be displayed.

As another example, after the power is turned on, before starting the setting change process in step S37, at least the switch input process in step S104, the fraud detection process in step S112, and the firing permission signal setting process in step S113. It may be configured such that corresponding processing is performed first. With such a configuration, the period from timing t3 to timing t4 is a state in which the setting value is changed (change permission state), but fraud is not monitored, and the game ball is set. In addition to not permitting the launch of B, the input of the detection signal may not be validated when the game ball B wins the winning hole.

Further, in the above example, the change-permitted state from timing t3 to timing t4 (may be a period including the change-permitted state from timing t3 to timing t5) includes the magnetic sensor 2010 and the magnetic sensor 2010. It may be configured so as not to notify the abnormal state when an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected while monitoring fraudulent activity using a vibration sensor. Also, normally, when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet or vibration is being performed, the values of the magnet counter and the vibration counter are incremented by 1, but from timing t3 to timing t4. (It may be a period including the change-permitted state from timing t3 to timing t5.), which is the period of , even if it is determined that a fraudulent act is being performed by a magnet or vibration, the magnet The value of the goto counter or vibration goto counter may be configured so as not to be added. Even with such a configuration, even if an authorized operator who changes the settings brings a magnet close to the setting or applies vibration when changing the setting value, the magnet or the vibration may cause an illegal operation. No notification or addition is performed as an act, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent monitoring from becoming an obstacle when changing setting values.

Note that various processing related to the change permission state described above may have various needs depending on the environment of the game hall, etc., and thus may be selectively set for each game hall. For example, when the power is turned on with normal operation of the RAM clear switch instead of the change permission state (Since the RWM clear button 633z is in a state of operating as a RAM clear switch, while operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z When the power is turned on), a state is generated in which the operator of the game hall can select which setting to use for various processing related to the change permission state, and when the change permission state is generated after that, the selected Various types of processing relating to the change permission state are to be executed in the setting. As a result, in the game arcade A, it is set so that contact with the handle 182 is enabled while fraud monitoring is disabled in the change-permitted state, and in the game arcade B, fraud monitoring is enabled in the change-permitted state. It can be set to be non-monitoring and to invalidate contact with the handle 182, and the needs of the game hall, such as whether to check the shooting operation with the handle 182 in the change permission state. will be able to match

[26-3. About unauthorized monitoring during setting value confirmation display]
In the above, it was explained that the monitoring of fraudulent activity during the setting value change is not monitored while the setting value is being changed. Either a state in which fraudulent activity is not monitored during confirmation display of the set value or a state in which fraudulent activity is partially monitored may be used. First, a case in which fraudulent activity is not monitored during confirmation display of setting values will be described with reference to FIG. 208 . FIG. 208 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraudulent activity when fraudulent activity is not monitored during confirmation display of setting values.

When confirming and displaying the set values currently set, first, confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and confirm that no pattern variation is being performed (no pending state). Then, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 (timing t5), and then the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the clock is operated in the same manner as when changing the setting. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a by 60 degrees toward the direction and performing the first ON operation (timing t6). At this time, the setting display 1310g displays the current set value (the set value among the set values 1 to 6 when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON for the first time). do. Then, the setting key switch 1311a is turned counterclockwise 60 degrees so as to return to the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON, and is turned OFF (timing t7). 1310g, the setting value is switched from being displayed to being hidden. In other words, the period from timing t6 to timing t7 is a state in which confirmation display of the setting value is performed (confirmation display state), and after timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, confirmation of the setting value is performed. It will be in a state where no display is performed (unconfirmable state). Then, by removing the setting key from the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t8), a game can be played. Become.

At timing t6 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the current set value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g unless game balls B such as prize balls are being paid out. ing. Also, even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation, game balls B such as prize balls are dispensed. If so, the setting key switch 1311a may not be turned ON (the setting key may remain OFF), or the setting key switch 1311a may be turned off after the payout of game balls B such as prize balls is completed. The setting key may be turned ON to display the current set value on the setting display 1310g.

As another example, when the currently set value is displayed for confirmation, the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is (blocked state), the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. By turning the key switch 1311a to the setting key ON and operating the power switch 630a to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the setting value can be confirmed and displayed (confirmation display state). may Also, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the power switch 630a, if the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch (because the RWM clear button 633z is in a state of operating as a RAM clear switch, the RWM When the power is turned on while operating the pressing operation part of the clear button 633z), the state shifts to a state in which setting values can be changed (change permitted state). It may be configured to shift to a state (confirmation display state) in which confirmation display of the set value can be performed. In such a configuration, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON and the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch, the setting value is confirmed and displayed (confirmation display state). , the state (confirmation display state) in which confirmation display of the set value is performed corresponds to the period from timing t6 to timing t7.

In this example, the period from timing t6 to timing t7 is a state in which confirmation display of the setting value is performed (confirmation display state), but monitoring of fraud is not executed, and game ball B is not permitted, and the input of the detection signal is not validated when the game ball B wins the winning hole. In addition, in the confirmation display state which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, information regarding the confirmation display of the setting value is output to the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1. , the hall clerk can grasp that the confirmation is being displayed.

Specifically, in the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t6 to timing t7, fraudulent behavior is monitored using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, and fraudulent behavior is monitored using the game area magnetic sensor 2010b. I'm trying not to run the entire monitoring. This is because, in the confirmation display state, an authorized operator who confirms and displays the set values operates the setting key switch 1311a, and a person other than the authorized operator who confirms and displays the set values is illegally using a magnet. This is because there is no room for In addition, when confirming and displaying the setting value, even if the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as a fraudulent act using a magnet. , it is possible to suppress the hindrance of the regular confirmation display work.

Similarly, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, monitoring of cheating using the setting operation section vibration sensor and overall monitoring of cheating using the game area section vibration sensor are performed. I try not to. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and there is no room for anyone other than the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display to commit fraudulent acts by vibration. because there is no In addition, even if the authorized operator who carries out the confirmation display of the setting value applies vibration to the confirmation display of the setting value, it is possible to prevent detection as an illegal act due to the vibration, thereby preventing the confirmation display work from being performed properly. Inhibition can be suppressed.

Also, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the logic of the launch permission signal that tells the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to allow the launch of the game ball B is not set. , and shooting of the game ball B is prohibited. As a result, even if the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display of the setting value touches the handle 182, the game ball B can be prevented from being shot, and hindrance to the regular confirmation display operation can be suppressed. Also, even if the player operates the handle 182 in the confirmation display state, the game ball B cannot be shot.

In addition, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the big winning opening 2005, and various gates (gates ), even if the main control MPU receives a detection signal from each corresponding detection sensor, the detection of the game ball B is invalidated. It should be noted that the game ball B may not be detected by the detection sensor itself, or the detection signal itself from the detection sensor may not be input. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, lottery, symbol variation, game ball B Even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 for some reason during the regular work of confirming and displaying the set value, it is not performed for any of the payouts. , it is possible to suppress the progress of the game.

Also, although not shown, the main control MPU inputs detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to each of the winning openings and gates (gates) in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7. At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is also prevented from being input to the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B ejected from the outlet 1008 is invalidated, for example, the game ball B ejected from the game area 5a in the confirmation display state is measured by the base monitor 1310h. It becomes possible to exclude from objects (objects to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to slinging (ball clogging) or the like is detected in the confirmation display state and the base monitor 1310h is detected. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the number of outs is measured (added to the number of outs counter).

In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, even if the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, the screen of the effect display device 1600, etc. It is made impossible to adjust the amount of light output from the light emitting member.

In addition, in the confirmation display state which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the pattern display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the setting value is confirmed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Notification during confirmation display (confirmation display-related notification) for notifying that display is in progress is executed. As notification during confirmation display, the voice repeatedly saying "Confirmation is being displayed", the message "Confirmation is being displayed!" there is This notification during confirmation display is notification (effect) performed only in the confirmation display state, and is executed with priority over body frame open notification performed when the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2.例文帳に追加That is, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open notification (such as display and voice of "the frame is open") is normally performed, but in the confirmation display state, the main body frame open notification is performed. It is decided that the notification during confirmation display is given the highest priority without performing Note that the body frame open notification and the confirmation display notification are executed in parallel, the confirmation display notification is given priority over the body frame open notification, and the body frame open notification is performed after the confirmation display completion notification. A form can also be illustrated.

In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, in addition to the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600, the notification from the function display unit 1400 is also sent as the notification during the confirmation display. Running. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal pending indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special pending number indicator, a second special In addition to the pattern indicator, the second special hold number indicator, and the round indicator, a setting change indicator consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being changed (change permitted state), the setting value A confirming display indicator consisting of one LED is provided for indicating that confirmation is being displayed (confirmation display state). In the confirmation display state, only the LED of the confirmation display indicator in the function display unit 1400 is lit, and the LEDs of the other indicators are all extinguished. Thus, in the confirmation display state, the notification from the function display unit 1400 makes it possible to grasp that the game will not progress.

In addition, in the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7 (the period may include the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8), the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, normal winning opening 2003, big winning opening 2005, and other winning openings, game ball B is detected even if the main control MPU receives a detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor. is treated as invalid, when such a detection signal is input, the game ball B is not permitted to be shot due to the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. In spite of the period during which the game ball B does not enter the winning hole, the warning performance C is executed to notify that the game ball B has illegally entered the winning hole. This warning effect C is executed with priority over the in-confirmation display notification and the body frame open notification. That is, when the warning effect C is executed, the warning effect C is executed with the highest priority without performing the confirmation display in progress notification or the main body frame open notification.

In addition, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, it is not possible to allow the shooting of the game ball B or to input the detection signal when the game ball B wins the winning opening. Although it is in a state in which it cannot be started, this state is maintained until the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed (timing t8). In other words, during the period from timing t7 to timing t8, even if the game ball B is entered into the winning opening by fraudulent act, the detection signal is not input and illegal profit cannot be obtained. In addition, since there is a possibility that the body frame 4 may be subjected to an impact that closes the outer frame 2, fraudulent behavior is monitored using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, and fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor 2010b The action monitoring, the monitoring of fraudulent behavior using the setting operation section vibration sensor, and the monitoring of fraudulent behavior using the game area vibration sensor are not executed and are in a standby state.

In addition, from the timing t8 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B can be shot, and games such as pattern variations, big win games, and small win games can be played. In such a state, monitoring of various fraudulent acts is started according to the contents described in [Regarding fraud monitoring in normal times]. The game ball B can be shot even before the timing t6 when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, and the pattern variation and the big hit are possible. A game such as a game or a small winning game can be played, and monitoring of various fraudulent acts is started according to the contents described in [Regarding fraud monitoring in normal times].

Also, during the period from timing t7 to timing t8, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the screen of the effect display device 1600 is in a state of waiting for the start of the game. An image is displayed to notify that (game standby notification). Then, during a predetermined period from timing t8, after closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, a game such as a pattern variation, a big win game, or a small win game is started. is displayed (game start notification).

Also, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, normally, the setting key switch 1311a should not be turned on. 2, warning effects A and B are executed for notifying that the setting key is turned on illegally by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the ON state (timing t1) in a state where pattern variation is performed normally, the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. Until (timing t2), the warning effect A is executed. Similarly, when the setting key switch 1311a is in a state where the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON (timing t3) in a state where the pattern variation is not performed at all times, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key OFF. During (timing t4), the warning effect B is executed. Also, the warning effects A and B are executed with priority over the effects being executed. That is, when the warning effects A and B are executed, the effects being executed are stopped and the warning effects A and B are executed with the highest priority regardless of whether or not the symbol variation is performed. Note that the warning effects A and B are executed in the same manner, but may be executed in different manners so that it can be determined whether or not the symbol variation is being performed.

In addition, if the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected during the period of monitoring fraudulent activity by magnets or vibrations, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, or the output from the speaker will cause the magnetism or vibration to occur for a predetermined period of time. An abnormal occurrence effect is executed to notify that it is in an abnormal state due to the occurrence of In addition, in the abnormality occurrence effect, the contents of the abnormality (magnetism, vibration which occurrence was detected) and the part where the abnormality was detected (whether it is the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, the area in front of the game area 5a, the third sorting device area around 2550). Also, the abnormal occurrence effect is executed with priority over the effect being executed. In other words, when the abnormality occurrence effect is executed, regardless of whether or not the pattern variation is being performed, the effect being executed is stopped and the abnormality occurrence effect is executed with the highest priority.

In this example, during the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from timing t6 to timing t7), the game ball B is not launched. Although the logic of the firing permission signal that conveys permission to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set, considering the inspection of the firing operation by the handle 182 in the confirmation display state, etc. During that period, the logic of the launch permission signal may be set so that the game ball B can be launched when the operator operates the handle 182 . However, during the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from timing t6 to timing t7), the permission is limited to the shooting of the game ball B. It is desirable to prevent the game from proceeding unfairly by preventing the detection signal from being input even if the game ball B is entered into various prize-winning openings or gates (gates). .

Further, in this example, during the period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7), the game ball B is launched. The game ball B is launched from the time point t8 (may be timing t7) without setting the logic of the launch permission signal for telling the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that it is permitted. However, if the handle 182 has been operated (contacted with the handle 182) before the launch of the game ball B is permitted, the contact with the handle 182 is once allowed after the launch of the game ball B is permitted. The game ball B is not shot unless the handle 182 is released (contact detection is turned off) and the handle 182 is not touched (operated) again. That is, even if the contact of the handle 182 has been ON before the timing t8, unless the contact detection for the handle 182 turns ON from the OFF after the timing t8, the contact with the handle 182 continues. contact is invalidated to restrict the game ball B from being shot. As a result, even if an authorized operator who confirms and displays the set values is in contact with the handle 182 when the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame 4 cannot be moved from the outer frame 2. A game ball B is not shot carelessly when it is closed, and it is possible to surely prevent the loss of the player.

Also, unlike the above, in consideration of speeding up the game start based on the end of the confirmation display state, when the handle 182 is being operated from the time before the game ball B is permitted to be shot, the handle 182 While continuing the contact, the continued contact with the handle 182 may be validated so that the game ball B can be launched from the time when the game ball B is allowed to be launched. In such a case, the handle 182 is operated before closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 to prepare for shooting the game ball B, and immediately after closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. You can start playing.

Further, in this example, the game ball B can be shot from the timing t8 when the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and games such as pattern variations, big win games, and small win games can be performed. However, at timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the game may be immediately started. In other words, from the timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the game ball B can be shot, and the game such as the pattern variation, the big win game, and the small win game can be performed. Regarding fraud monitoring at times], monitoring of fraudulent behavior may be performed. In such a configuration, in the period from timing t7 to timing t8, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, but on the screen of the effect display device 1600, the pattern fluctuation, the big win game, the small game, etc. An image (game start notification) for notifying that a game such as a winning game can be started may be displayed.

As another example, the magnetic sensor 2010 and the vibration sensor are in the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7 (the period may include the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8). may be used to monitor fraudulent activity, but when an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected, the abnormal state may not be notified. Also, normally, when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet or vibration is being performed, the values of the magnet counter and the vibration counter are incremented by 1, but from timing t6 to timing t7. In the confirmation display state (a period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8), which is the period of , the magnet The value of the goto counter or vibration goto counter may be configured so as not to be added. Even with such a configuration, even if the authorized operator who carries out the confirmation display brings the magnet close to the confirmation display or applies vibration when the setting value is displayed for confirmation, fraud due to the magnet or vibration may occur. No notification or addition is performed as an act, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent monitoring from becoming an obstacle when confirming and displaying the set value.

Note that various processing related to the confirmation display state described above may have various needs depending on the environment of the game arcade, etc., and thus may be selectively set for each game arcade. For example, when the power is turned on with normal operation of the RAM clear switch instead of the confirmation display state (Since the RWM clear button 633z is in a state of operating as a RAM clear switch, while operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z When the power is turned on), a state is generated in which the operator of the game hall can select which setting to use for various processing related to the confirmation display state, and when the confirmation display state is generated after that, the selected Various kinds of processing related to the confirmation display state are to be executed in the settings. As a result, in the game arcade A, while fraud monitoring is not monitored in the confirmation display state, contact with the handle 182 is enabled, and in the game arcade B, fraud monitoring is enabled in the confirmation display state. It can be set to be non-monitored and to invalidate contact with the handle 182, and the needs of the game hall, such as whether or not to check the shooting operation with the handle 182 in the confirmation display state. will be able to match

Next, referring to FIG. 209, a description will be given of a case in which unauthorized actions are partially monitored during confirmation display of setting values. FIG. 209 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraudulent activity when part of the fraudulent activity is monitored during confirmation display of setting values. Here, differences from the above-described case in which fraudulent activity is not monitored during confirmation display of set values will be described below.

In this example, the period from timing t6 to timing t7 is a state in which confirmation display of the set value is being performed (confirmation display state), but shooting of the game ball B is not permitted, and a game ball is inserted into the winning opening. When B wins, the input of the detection signal is not validated during a special period, and among the fraudulent acts, only fraudulent acts in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided are monitored. there is

Specifically, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a is not monitored for fraudulent activity using the game area section magnetic sensor 2010b. We are trying to monitor fraudulent use. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a. A person other than the authorized operator who confirms and displays the setting value may be illegally changed by bringing a magnet closer to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction.

On the other hand, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, even if the game ball B is entered into the winning opening by fraudulent act, no detection signal is input, and illegal profit cannot be obtained. Since it is a period in which it is not possible, there is no need to monitor cheating using the game area magnetic sensor 2010b.

Note that the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a is used not only in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, but also in the period up to timing t8, in which the operation of closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. all fraudulent activities are monitored. In other words, the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a is performed in a normal state or in a state in which the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. The area in which the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is always monitored regardless of whether it is in the confirmation display state.

Similarly, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, fraudulent behavior using the game area section vibration sensor is not monitored, whereas fraudulent behavior using the setting operation section vibration sensor is not monitored. I am trying to monitor their behavior. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a. A person other than the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display of the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a may fraudulently apply vibration to the area provided with the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a, thereby illegally changing the setting value. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction.

On the other hand, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, even if the game ball B is entered into the winning opening by fraudulent act, no detection signal is input, and illegal profit cannot be obtained. Since it is a period in which it is not possible, there is no need to monitor cheating using the game area vibration sensor.

Note that the setting operation unit vibration sensor is used not only in the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7, but also during the period up to timing t8 when the operation of closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. to monitor for fraudulent activities. In other words, the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation section vibration sensor can be performed in a normal state or in a state in which the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. The area in which the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is always monitored regardless of whether it is in the confirmation display state.

In addition, during a period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be a period from timing t6 to timing t7), the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a is used. Monitoring of fraudulent activity and monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor are performed. An abnormality occurrence presentation A for notifying an abnormal state due to the occurrence of vibration is executed. Further, in the abnormality occurrence effect A, the contents of the abnormality (whether the generation of magnetism or vibration is detected) or the abnormality is determined depending on which of the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a and the setting operation section vibration sensor detects the abnormality. The detected part (the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided) and the like are notified. Then, when the abnormality occurrence effect A is executed, at the timing t7 (or at the timing t8) when the confirmation display state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the The abnormal occurrence presentation A is forcibly terminated. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and when the confirmation display of the setting value is performed, the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display operates the setting key switch 1311a. It is not possible to eliminate the possibility that the magnet was unintentionally brought closer or the vibration was applied. For this reason, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet or vibration is being performed, there is little need to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred. I am planning to finish.

As described above, during the period from timing t6 to timing t8 that includes the confirmation display state, fraudulent activity is monitored using the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a, and fraudulent activity is monitored using the setting operation section vibration sensor. However, even during normal times other than that period, monitoring fraud using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, monitoring fraud using the game area unit magnetic sensor 2010b, setting operation unit vibration sensor We monitor fraudulent behavior using , and monitor fraudulent behavior using the game area vibration sensor. In addition, when the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected in such a normal time, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker will cause an abnormal state due to the occurrence of magnetism or vibration for a predetermined period. An abnormality occurrence presentation B is executed to notify that there is something. Here, in the abnormality occurrence effect B, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are used. The performance is executed in a less conspicuous mode than the performance B. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the person who confirms and displays the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and when the confirmation display of the setting value is performed, the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display is not intentional. This is because it is not possible to rule out the possibility that a magnet has been brought close to the device or that vibration has been applied. It should be noted that, in the abnormality occurrence effect B, the content of the abnormality (magnetism, vibration detected), and the part where the abnormality was detected (whether it is the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, the area in front of the game area 5a, the third distribution area around the device 2550).

Further, as described above, when the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 during the period from the timing t5 to the timing t8, the output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600 causes the outer frame 2 The body frame open notification for notifying that the body frame 4 is opened is executed. In addition, in the confirmation display state which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the pattern display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the setting value is confirmed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Notification during confirmation display (confirmation display-related notification) for notifying that display is in progress is executed. Then, after performing the work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to shift to the confirmation display state. In addition, when the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a or the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration in the confirmation display state, the main body frame is opened. The abnormality occurrence effect A is executed with priority over the notification and the notification during confirmation display.

[26-4. Modification of unauthorized monitoring during setting change]
In the above, it was explained that the monitoring of fraudulent activity during the setting change of the setting value is not monitored. good. A case in which fraudulent actions are partially monitored while setting values are being changed will be described with reference to FIG. 210 . FIG. 210 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraudulent activity when part of the fraudulent activity is monitored during the setting change of the setting value. Here, differences from the above-described case in which fraudulent activity is not monitored during the setting change of the set values will be described below.

In the above, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on processing (see FIGS. 142 and 143), but the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4. Until then, the setting change process in step S37 is not terminated (in step S222 of the setting change process, it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off), and during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the following steps The interrupt permission setting in S52 is prohibited, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is delayed compared to normal power-on. That is, the main control side timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 144) is not started until the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is performed. Processing, firing permission signal setting processing in step S113, etc. are not executed, and a standby state is entered. On the other hand, after the power is turned on, before starting the setting change process in step S37, at least the switch input process in step S104, the fraud detection process in step S112, and the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 are performed. The processing (same processing) may be configured to be performed first. With such a configuration, in this example, the period from timing t3 to timing t4 is in a state in which the setting value is changed (change permitted state), but shooting of the game ball B is not permitted. At the same time, when the game ball B wins in the winning hole, the input of the detection signal is set as a special period in which it is not valid. I try to monitor only fraudulent activity.

Before starting the setting change process in step S37, a process (same process) corresponding to the fraud detection process in step S112 is performed in advance. 1311a in the area provided with 1311a, in the same process as the fraud detection process in step S112, when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 or the vibration sensor is input, the magnet It is determined that a fraudulent act is being performed by vibration or vibration, and the value of the magnet counter or the vibration counter is incremented by one. However, in the main control power-on process, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, and after the setting change process in step S37 is completed (it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned OFF in step S222 of the setting change process). After the determination), in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are always cleared except for a specific area. Therefore, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet or vibration is being performed in the change-permitted state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, and the values of the magnet counter and the vibration counter are added (incremented), By clearing the RAM at the end of the change permission state, the values of the magnet goto counter and the vibration goto counter are set (initialized) to 0 (zero) as initial values. As described above, when the change permission state ends, the values of the magnet counter and the vibration counter are initialized. (The RWM clear button 633z is in a state of operating as a setting switching button.), and when changing the settings of the set values, the person who changes the settings unintentionally brings the magnet closer. It is not possible to rule out the possibility that the body was chilled or that vibration was applied. For this reason, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet or vibration has occurred, there is little need to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred. We are planning to

Specifically, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a is not monitored for fraudulent activity using the game area section magnetic sensor 2010b. We are trying to monitor fraudulent use. In the change-permitted state, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the authorized operator who changes the settings of the set values can press the setting key switch 1311a or the RWM clear button 633z (RWM clear button 633z). 633z operates as a setting change button.), but the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided cannot be operated by anyone other than the authorized operator who changes the settings of the set values. This is to eliminate the possibility of erroneous operation such as setting values being illegally changed by illicitly bringing a magnet closer to the magnet.

On the other hand, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the game ball B is entered into the winning opening by fraudulent act, the detection signal is not input, and an illegal profit cannot be obtained. Since it is a period in which it is not possible, there is no need to monitor cheating using the game area magnetic sensor 2010b.

Note that the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a is used not only in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, but also in the period up to timing t5, in which work for closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. all fraudulent activities are monitored. In other words, the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a is performed in a normal state or in a state in which the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. The area in which the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is always monitored regardless of whether the change is permitted.

Similarly, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, fraudulent behavior using the game area vibration sensor is not monitored. I am trying to monitor their behavior. In the change-permitted state, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the authorized operator who changes the settings of the set values can press the setting key switch 1311a or the RWM clear button 633z (RWM clear button 633z). 633z operates as a setting change button.), but the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided cannot be operated by anyone other than the authorized operator who changes the settings of the set values. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction such as setting values being illegally changed by performing an illegal act such as applying vibration to the device.

On the other hand, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the game ball B is entered into the winning opening by fraudulent act, the detection signal is not input, and an illegal profit cannot be obtained. Since it is a period in which it is not possible, there is no need to monitor cheating using the game area vibration sensor.

Note that the setting operation section vibration sensor is used not only in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, but also in the period up to timing t5, in which the operation of closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. to monitor for fraudulent activities. In other words, the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation section vibration sensor can be performed in a normal state or in a state in which the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. The area in which the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is always monitored regardless of whether the change is permitted or not.

In addition, in the change permission state which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the pattern display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the setting value is set by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. A setting changing effect is being executed to notify that the setting is being changed. Note that the change permission state (the period may include the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5), which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, includes the first start port 2002 and the second start port. 2004, normal winning opening 2003, big winning opening 2005, etc., even if the main control MPU receives a detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor when the game ball B wins, the game ball B is detected. is treated as invalid, when such a detection signal is input, the shooting of the game ball B is not permitted due to the output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600. In spite of the period during which the game ball B does not enter the winning hole, the warning performance C is executed to notify that the game ball B has illegally entered the winning hole. This warning effect C is executed with priority over the setting changing notification and the body frame opening notification. In other words, when the warning effect C is executed, the warning effect C is executed with the highest priority without performing the setting changing notification or the main body frame opening notification.

Further, during a period including the change-permitted state from timing t3 to timing t5 (the change-permitted state may be a period from timing t3 to timing t4), the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a is used to Monitoring of fraudulent activity and monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor are performed. An abnormality occurrence effect A for notifying an abnormal state due to the occurrence of vibration is executed. Further, in the abnormality occurrence effect A, the contents of the abnormality (whether the generation of magnetism or vibration is detected) or the abnormality is determined depending on which of the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a and the setting operation section vibration sensor detects the abnormality. The detected part (the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided) and the like are notified. Then, when the abnormality occurrence effect A is executed, at timing t4 (or at timing t5), which is the end of the change permission state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the The abnormal occurrence presentation A is forcibly terminated. This is because, in the change-permitted state, the authorized operator who changes the setting of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button). Therefore, the possibility cannot be ruled out that, when changing the settings of the set values, the authorized operator unintentionally brought the magnet close to the setting value or applied vibrations. For this reason, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet or vibration is being performed, there is little need to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred. I am planning to finish.

As described above, during the period from timing t3 to timing t5, which includes the change permission state, fraudulent activity is monitored using the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a, and fraudulent activity is monitored using the setting operation section vibration sensor. However, even during normal times other than that period, monitoring fraud using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, monitoring fraud using the game area unit magnetic sensor 2010b, setting operation unit vibration sensor We monitor fraudulent behavior using , and monitor fraudulent behavior using the game area vibration sensor. In addition, when the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected in such a normal time, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker will cause an abnormal state due to the occurrence of magnetism or vibration for a predetermined period. An abnormality occurrence effect B for notifying that there is a problem is being executed. Here, in the abnormality occurrence effect B, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are used. The performance is executed in a less conspicuous mode than the performance B. This is because, in the change-permitted state, an authorized operator who changes the settings of the set values operates the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button). This is because the possibility cannot be ruled out that the authorized operator unintentionally brought the magnet close to the setting value or applied vibration when changing the setting value. It should be noted that, in the abnormality occurrence effect B, the content of the abnormality (magnetism, vibration detected), and the part where the abnormality was detected (whether it is the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, the area in front of the game area 5a, the third distribution area around the device 2550).

Further, as described above, after the power is turned on, when the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t5, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker , the body frame open notification for notifying that the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 is executed. In addition, after the power is turned on, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the pattern display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker A setting change in-progress notification (setting change-related notification) for notifying that the setting value is being changed is being executed. Then, after performing the work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON and the power is turned on to shift to the change permission state. The notification during setting change is executed with priority over the open notification, and furthermore, when the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a or the setting operation section vibration sensor detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration in the change permission state, the main body The abnormality occurrence effect A is executed with priority over the frame opening notification and setting change notification.

[27. Variation of setting change such as winning probability]
In the above example, control is performed to the big win game state or the small win game state based on the result of the special lottery, and when the game ball is received in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 during the small winning game state 211 shows that the setting change of the winning probability etc. is performed for the one that controls the transition to the jackpot game state, but as shown in FIG. Even if a game ball is received in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 during the small winning game state, setting change such as winning probability may be performed for those not controlled to shift to the big winning game state. Hereinafter, a modified example of changing the setting of the winning probability etc. in the pachinko machine in which the first V winning hole 2007 and the second V winning hole 2008 are not provided will be described as a second embodiment. In the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment, in place of the accessory prize winning port 2006 (the first V winning port 2007 and the second V winning port 2008 are arranged inside) of the pachinko machine 1 of the above example, A second big winning opening 2006 (inside which the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 are not arranged) is provided, and other configurations are the same.

[27-1. Game contents of the second embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the game ball B is received by the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot") that is advantageous to the player. , “small hit”, “time reduction (time reduction) hit”, “probability fluctuation (probability variation) hit”) will be drawn for special lottery results. Then, the special lottery result of the lottery is suggested (derived) to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time). In this embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the second special lottery result according to the acceptance to the second start port 2004 is preferentially suggested (derived) do. In addition, the game ball B is accepted by the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 without preferentially suggesting (leading out) the special lottery result corresponding to the acceptance to the second start port 2004 (priority change). The special lottery result may be suggested (derived) in the order of (sequential change), or the first special lottery result according to the acceptance to the first start port 2002 and the acceptance to the second start port 2004 The second special lottery result may be suggested (derived) at the same time (simultaneous variation).

In addition, the special lottery results drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include "loss", "minor hit", "2R probability variable big hit", "15R probability variable big hit". ”, “15R normal jackpot”, and the like. In this embodiment, the second special lottery result includes a "small hit", while the first special lottery result does not include a "small hit". In addition, while including the "small hit" in both the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result, the second special lottery result is more likely to win the "small hit" than the first special lottery result. A high probability may be set.

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a "small hit", the second After a predetermined time (for example, 0.88 s) has passed after the two major winning openings 2006 are in an open state capable of accepting the game ball B, a "small hit" game in which the game ball B is not accepted is closed. executed. Since the second big prize-winning port 2006 is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, when a "small hit" is drawn, "right hit" is performed for the first guide. A game ball B is driven into the passage 2521. - 特許庁In addition, in the small winning game of the second embodiment, the period in which the second large winning opening 2006 is opened is shorter than in the big winning game, but if the game ball is continuously hit so as to flow down the first guide passage 2521. For example, at least one game ball B can enter the second big winning hole 2006 in one small winning game. In addition, during the small-hit game, the game state before the start of the small-hit game state (probability variable state, time-saving state, etc., which will be described later) is maintained, and after the small-hit game, the game state before the start of the small-hit game state continues. .

The first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are "15R probability variable big hit" or "15R normal big hit". In that case, after the first big winning hole 2005 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, a predetermined time (for example, 29 s) elapses, or a predetermined limit number to the first big winning hole 2005 ( For example, if any of the conditions of acceptance of game balls B of 10) are satisfied, the opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) to make the game ball B unacceptable in the closed state is repeated 15 times. A repeating "jackpot" game is executed. If the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery are "15R normal jackpot", the lottery is drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 after the end of the jackpot game. The fluctuation time of the special symbols for suggesting the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery to the player is set to a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery are combined) Until the number of times reaches 100 times), the time is shortened than usual, and the time until the next "win" is drawn is shortened to shift to a "time saving state". In addition, if the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are "15R probability variable big hit", after the "big hit" game ends, the game proceeds to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the next "big hit". Shorter than usual fluctuation time of special symbols for suggesting the first special lottery result and second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B, and the first special lottery result and the second The special lottery result shifts to a ``variable probability state (high-probability state)'' for improving the probability of a ``win''.

When the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are "2R probability variable big hit", the second big winning port 2006 , After a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 s) has passed after the game ball B is in an open state that can be accepted, an opening and closing pattern that makes the game ball B unacceptable in a closed state (one opening and closing pattern is one round) ) is repeated twice to execute a “jackpot” game. In addition, after the end of the "big hit" game, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the next "big win". In addition to shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbols for suggesting the result to the player, the probability that the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result will be "hit" is improved. )”.

Since the second big winning hole 2006 and the first big winning hole 2005 are mainly on the flow path of the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center role 2500, the game ball B is hit toward the right side of the center role 2500. It is possible to let the player perform the loading operation. When the game ball B is received in the second large winning opening 2006 or the first large winning opening 2005 when the second large winning opening 2006 and the first large winning opening 2005 are in the open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 A predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 by . Therefore, when the second big winning hole 2006 and the first big winning hole 2005 are capable of accepting the game ball B, by allowing the second big winning hole 2006 and the first big winning hole 2005 to accept the game ball B, game ball B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

In the guide passage group 2520 provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the first guide passage 2521 side is easier to drive than the second guide passage 2522 side. Since the probability that the ball is accepted in the first big winning hole 2005 is lower than that on the side, the player can select which passage the hitting operation is aimed at, and it is difficult for the player to get bored with various games. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by doing so. In addition, only the game ball driven into the first guide passage 2521 side can be received in the second big winning hole 2006. - 特許庁

In this embodiment, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2002 and the second start port 2002 and the second Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball B is accepted in the starting port 2004, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. be. The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, it is discarded without withholding the special lottery result. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

By the way, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 indicate the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 . The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time, and then suggesting the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs. It should be noted that hereinafter, the flashing of the LED for a predetermined period of time to suggest the result of the first special lottery to the player is referred to as "variation display of the first special symbol", and the result of the second special lottery to the player. The flashing of the LEDs for a predetermined period of time may be referred to as "variation display of the second special symbol", and the lighting combination pattern of the LEDs suggesting the result of the first special lottery to the player is referred to as the "stop symbol of the first special symbol". , and the LED lighting combination pattern that suggests the second special lottery result to the player may be referred to as a "stop symbol of the second special symbol".

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is a pattern row displayed in a state in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction, and each pattern row is varied. are sequentially stop-displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stop-displayed so that the patterns of the three stop-displayed pattern rows are in a combination corresponding to the result of the special lottery. When the special lottery result is other than ``losing'', after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a "small winning" game, a "big winning" game, etc.) occurs according to the special lottery result.

Note that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image does not appear). time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 300 on the door frame 3 is operated according to the special lottery result. A player-participation type effect can be performed in which the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player-participation type performance, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate the rotary operation unit 302, vibrate it, assist the rotary operation, or inhibit the rotary operation. By 367, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised to be conspicuous, and the operation of the production operation section 301 can entertain the player participation type production.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back By appropriately using the production unit 3200, etc., it is possible to perform light emission production, display production, etc., and it is possible to entertain the player with various productions, and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. can do.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to allow the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake in performing the operation to be performed or does not perform the operation in the player participation type presentation in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated. to notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when a pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is requested, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation portion 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 is caused to vibrate. The effect display device 1600 is made to display that effect.

Further, when the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003, the main control board 1310 performs a normal lottery result determination as to whether or not the second start opening door 2411 is to be opened in a predetermined pattern. Then, the ordinary lottery result of the lottery is indicated to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 s to 6000 s, also referred to as ordinary fluctuation time) on the ordinary pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 . In this embodiment, the variation time of the normal pattern for suggesting the player the normal lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the normal winning hole 2003 is set to "6000 s" in the normal state, while in the probability variable state. And in the time saving state, it is set to "0.1 s".

In addition, the normal drawing probability (the probability that the normal lottery result is a "normal hit") is set to "10/11", and when the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2003, in most cases, the "normal hit" and the second starting door 2411 is opened. In addition, when the normal lottery result is "normal hit", the period in which the second start door 2411 is opened is set to "0.1 s" in the normal state, while in the variable probability state and the time saving state, "2 .0s”. Therefore, in the normal state, the second starting door 2411 is opened only at intervals of 6000 seconds at the shortest, and the opening period is extremely short. considered difficult. As a result, it is possible to suppress cheating aimed at accepting game balls into the second starting port 2004 in the normal state. On the other hand, in the variable probability state, not only is the second starting port door 2411 frequently opened, but also the open state is long, making it easy to accept game balls into the second starting port 2004 . In addition, the probability per normal pattern may be different from the normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and the time saving state (low probability time saving state) or the probability change state (high probability time saving state), for example, in the normal state The normal pattern per probability is set to "1/11", the normal pattern per probability is set to "10/11" during the time saving state or the probability variable state, and the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port 2004 is very much during the normal state. While making it difficult, by facilitating the reception of the game ball to the second start port 2004 during the time saving state and the probability variable state, the game ball is frequently received to the second start port 2004 during the time saving state and the probability variable state. You may make it suppress the fraudulent act aiming at the game ball acceptance to the 2nd start mouth 2004 in a normal state, while making it generate|occur|produce. In addition, while preventing the normal state (low probability non-time-saving state) from winning as zero (0/11) in the normal state (low probability non-working time state), the normal state probability is set to "10/11 ' or '11/11' may be used to further suppress cheating aimed at accepting game balls into the second starting port 2004 in the normal state.

In this way, in the normal state, the reception of the game ball to the second start port 2004 hardly occurs, and the suggestion of the first special lottery result (first special symbol) mainly based on the reception of the game ball to the first start port 2002 fluctuation display) is performed. On the other hand, in the probability variable state and the time saving state, since the operation of hitting the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 is performed, the reception of the game ball to the second start port 2004 occurs frequently, mainly the second start Suggestion of the second special lottery result (fluctuation display of the second special symbol) based on the acceptance of the game ball into the mouth 2004 is performed.

In addition, when the game ball B is accepted into the ordinary winning opening 2003 during the period from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the result of the ordinary lottery due to the reception of the game ball B into the ordinary winning opening 2003, the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested. cannot be started, the start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previously drawn ordinary lottery result is completed. The number of reservations of the ordinary lottery results to be held is set to four as the upper limit for the ordinary winning prize opening 2003, and for more than that, the ordinary lottery result is reserved even if the game ball B is accepted in the ordinary winning prize opening 2003. I'm trying to discard it. In place of this example, game ball B was received in normal winning opening 2003 during the period from the start of the normal lottery to the indication of the result of the normal lottery due to the reception of game ball B in normal winning opening 2003. In some cases, the result of the ordinary lottery may be discarded without being retained. As a result, it is possible to further prevent the operation of hitting the game ball B aiming at the normal prize winning opening 2003 and the second start opening 2004 in the normal state, and the second special lottery is performed in the normal state to obtain a small hit. It is possible to prevent it from occurring, and it is possible to further suppress cheating aimed at accepting game balls into the second starting port 2004 in the normal state.

Further, the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the ordinary winning hole 2003 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 in the same manner as the special lottery result. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the ordinary lottery. The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing an LED different from the LED suggesting the special lottery result, blinking for a predetermined time, and thereafter, by combining the lit LEDs, the ordinary lottery is indicated. Suggest results.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is hit toward the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the normal state, and the first special lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first start port 2002 is performed. Suggestion of the result (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed. In addition, when the first special lottery result becomes "15R normal jackpot" in the normal state, after the jackpot game is over, control is shifted to the time-saving state, and the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 is hit. Suggestion of the second special lottery result (fluctuation display of the second special symbol) based on the reception of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is performed. When a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 times of suggestion, which is the sum of suggestions for the first special lottery and suggestions for the second special lottery) is reached without a big hit occurring in the time-saving state, the time-saving state is terminated and the normal state. , and the game ball B is hit again aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500, suggesting the first special lottery result based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first start port 2002 (first special symbol fluctuation display) is performed.

In addition, when the result of the first special lottery is ``15R probability variable jackpot'' or ``2R probability variable jackpot'' in the normal state or the time-saving state, after the jackpot game is over, the shift control is performed to the probability variable state (high probability state), and the center role is performed. A game ball B is struck aiming at the right side of 2500, and a suggestion of a second special lottery result (variation display of a second special symbol) based on acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2004 is performed. The variable probability state is continuously executed until the next big win, and when the result of the second special lottery becomes ``15R normal big win'' in the variable probability state, control is shifted to the time saving state after the big win game is finished, and a big win occurs in the time saving state. When the number of times of change reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times of suggestion, which is the total number of suggestions of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery), the time-saving state is ended and shift control is performed to the normal state.

In addition, when the result of the second special lottery becomes ``15R probability variable big win'' or ``2R probability variable big win'' in the probability variable state, after the big win game is over, the control is shifted to the probability variable state (high probability state) again. In this way, the variable probability state continues until the "15R normal big win" is reached, and when the "15R normal big win" is reached, control is shifted to the time saving state after the big win game ends.

In addition, when there is no pending second special lottery result and only the first special lottery result is held, or when there is no pending second special lottery result, the game ball enters the first start port 2002. If it is accepted, the suggestion of the first special lottery result (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed even in the time saving state and the variable probability state. Then, when the first special lottery result becomes ``15R normal jackpot'' in the time saving state or the variable probability state, the shift control is performed to the time saving state after the big hit game is finished, and the first special lottery result is ``15R'' in the time saving state or the variable probability state. When the probability variable jackpot” or the “2R probability variable jackpot” is achieved, the transition to the probability variable state is controlled after the jackpot game is finished.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the probability of a "minor win" as the result of the second special lottery (minor win probability) is set to be much higher than the big win probability (for example, the probability of a big win of 10 double). In addition, during the time saving state or the variable probability state, the reception of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 occurs frequently and the second special lottery is performed, so the small hit occurs frequently and the second big winning port. 2006 is open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.88 s).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, small hits occur frequently in the second special lottery in the time-saving state or the probability-variable state, and even if the big hits are not made, prize balls that exceed the amount of shots are obtained little by little. It is possible, and the longer the time-saving state and the variable state continue, the more prize balls you can win. Therefore, not only the number of game balls does not decrease in the time-saving state or the probability-variable state, but also the number of balls possessed by the player can be increased by the prize balls obtained by the generated small hits. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game is played in the normal state in which the consumption of game balls is large, and the consumption of game balls is small, and the number of balls held by the player increases even if a small win does not occur due to the occurrence of a small win. It is possible to control the game in a completely different state from the game executed in the time-saving state and the variable probability state.

[27-2. Setting changes such as winning probability in the second embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment, the probability of a big hit, a small hit, etc., which is changed according to the set value, will be described.

In the second embodiment, similarly to the example described above, a table corresponding to a set value is selected as a table (hit determination table, big hit design determination table, small hit design determination table, etc.) used in a special lottery or the like. A table used in a special lottery or the like is provided for each set value, and each table is set so that at least some of the values are different.

As shown in FIG. 212(A), in the present embodiment, the "big hit probability" and the "small hit probability" are set corresponding to setting values 1 to 6, respectively.

In addition, a different value is set for each set value for the jackpot probability (the ratio of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won in the hit determination table), which is common to the first special lottery and the second special lottery. The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the state and the time saving state (low probability state) is "1/319" at the setting value 1, "1/309" at the setting value 2, and the setting value 3 is "1/299", set value 4 is "1/289", set value 5 is "1/279", and set value 6 is "1/269". In addition, the probability of hitting the jackpot in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the variable state (high probability state) is "1/30" with a setting value of 1, "1/40" with a setting value of 2, and a setting value of 3. is "1/50", set value 4 is "1/60", set value 5 is "1/70", and set value 6 is "1/80".

In this way, in the normal state and time saving state (low probability state), the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of hitting the jackpot, but in the variable probability state, the setting value is higher in contrast to the normal state and time saving state. The probability of hitting the jackpot becomes lower as you go. That is, in the normal state and the time saving state, the jackpot probability of the set value 6 is the highest, while in the variable probability state the jackpot probability of the set value 1 is the lowest. In addition, the jackpot probability is not limited to being proportional or inversely proportional to the set value, and for some, the jackpot probability set to a set value lower than the set value is better than the jackpot probability set to an arbitrary set value. You may make it set so that it may become high.

As shown in FIG. 212 (A), the small hit probability in the first special lottery (percentage of the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit has been won in the hit determination table) is "0" at all set values. It is said that it is difficult to acquire prize balls by small hits in the normal state and time saving state (no winning of small hits), while the probability of small hits in the second special lottery (small hits in the hit judgment table The ratio of the small hit judgment value that indicates that you have won the lottery) is a common "1/3" for all set values, which is a very high probability compared to the probability of a big hit, so it is small in the variable state and short time state. Hits occur frequently, making it easy to win prize balls.

In the variable probability state, the probability of the big hit is lowest at the set value 6, so the occurrence of the big hit is less likely than the low set value (delay). As a matter of fact, the number of small hits that occur until a big hit increases. That is, the higher the set value, the more prize balls can be obtained by the small hit, and the next big hit is promised, and the higher the set value, the higher the advantage. In other words, in the variable probability state, the next big hit is guaranteed regardless of the set value, but the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained other than the big hit is made different for each set value, and the higher the set value, the greater the big hit. The expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained outside is increasing.

In addition, without setting the duration of the variable state to the next big hit, a predetermined number of fluctuations in the same way as the normal state and the time saving state (100 times of suggestions, which is the sum of the suggestions of the first special lottery and the suggestions of the second special lottery) The higher the set value, the higher the probability of the big win, while increasing the frequency of occurrence of the big win, thereby increasing the degree of advantage. It is also good (so-called number cut probability variable). In this case, although the next big win is not promised, the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained other than the big win is set differently for each set value, and the higher the set value, the more the number of prize balls that can be obtained other than the big win. Although the expected value is increased, it is possible to realize a game property that makes one expect that a big win will occur before the termination condition of the variable probability state is satisfied, and to improve interest. In addition, in realizing such a game, the probability of winning the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the time saving state does not have a setting difference (uniform at 1/319), Only the big hit probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the state may be provided with a setting difference as described above.

In addition, in realizing the game characteristics of the second embodiment, in the case of a set value lower than a specific set value, while making the big hit probability in the variable probability state higher than the small hit probability in the second special lottery, In the case of a set value higher than a specific set value, the big win probability in the variable probability state may be made lower than the small win probability in the second special lottery. Specifically, for example, the probability of a big hit in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the time saving state (low probability state) is set to "1/250" at the setting value 1, and "240" at the setting value 2. "1/230" at setting value 3, "1/180" at setting value 4, "1/170" at setting value 5, "1/160" at setting value 6, The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the variable state (high probability state) is "1/25" at the setting value 1, "1/24" at the setting value 2, and "1/24" at the setting value 3. 1/23”, set value 4 “1/18”, set value 5 “1/17”, set value 6 “1/16”, while the second special lottery It can be exemplified that the hit probability (the ratio of the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit has been won in the hit determination table) is set to "1/20" in common for all set values.

In the case of such a configuration, with the set values 1 to 3, the probability of the small hit probability in the second special lottery is lower than the probability of the big hit in the variable probability state, so the prize ball that can be obtained by the small hit in the variable probability state. While the number is relatively small, at the set values 4 to 6, the probability of the small hit in the second special lottery is higher than the probability of the big hit in the variable probability state, so the prize that can be obtained by the small hit in the variable state. The number of balls will be relatively large. In particular, when the set value is 4 or more, the probability of a big hit is lower than the probability of a small hit in the variable probability state, making it difficult for a big hit to occur. It is possible to create a game property that gives a sense of expectation that the ball can be acquired. In addition, the history information of the probability of the big hit occurring in the variable probability state after the power is turned on and the probability of the small hit occurring in the variable probability state is stored in a predetermined storage area (such as RAM) of the peripheral control unit 1511, and the By displaying various hit probability information based on the history information on the performance display device 1600, the player can be made aware that the probability of the small win is higher than the probability of the big win in the variable probability state, and the game can be played. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that ``the set value may be 4 or more,'' and to give new enjoyment and amusement that have not existed in the past while the game is continued in the variable probability state. In addition, the player feels that the variable probability state continues for a long time and that many prize balls can be obtained by small hits in the variable probability state. It can also be recognized, and in this respect as well, it is possible to provide new enjoyment and interest that have not existed in the past. As described above, with a specific set value (set value 4 in this embodiment) as a boundary, at a set value higher than the set value, the game is transformed into a game property in which a large number of prize balls can be won by a small hit, thereby increasing the game interest. can be further improved.

In addition, as another embodiment, the higher the set value in the variable probability state, the higher the probability of the big hit in the first special lottery and the second special lottery, and the higher the set value, the second special lottery. You may make it so that the small-hit probability in may become high. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212(B), the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the time saving state (low probability state) is set to 1. "1/319", setting value 2 "1/309", setting value 3 "1/299", setting value 4 "1/289", setting value 5 "1/279" , setting value 6 is "1/269". In addition, the small hit probability of the variable state (high probability state) is "1/31.9" at the setting value 1, "1/30.9" at the setting value 2, and "29.9 minutes" at the setting value 3. 1”, set value 4 is “1/28.9”, set value 5 is “1/27.9”, and set value 6 is “1/26.9”. In this way, in the variable probability state, the probability of big hits for all set values is increased tenfold compared to the normal state and the time saving state.

In addition, the small hit probability in the second special lottery is set value 1 "1/7", set value 2 "1/6", set value 3 "1/5", set value 4 " A set value of 5 is set to "1/3", and a set value of 6 is set to "1/2". Therefore, with a setting value of 1, one small win occurs every seven times the second special lottery is performed, whereas with a setting value of 6, one small win occurs every time the second special lottery is performed twice. It will occur once, and the frequency of small hits will increase. That is, with the set value 6, small hits occur more frequently than with the set value 1, making it easier to acquire prize balls by small hits. The expected value of the number of balls is increasing.

In addition to changing the setting of the above-described big hit probability and small win probability, or without changing the setting of the big hit probability and small win probability, etc., the degree of advantage can be increased by making the determination ratio of the big hit type different for each set value. You may make it change. As described above, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, the second special lottery is mainly executed and a small win can occur, while in the normal state, the first special lottery is mainly executed and a small win cannot occur. Therefore, the advantage degree changes according to the duration of the variable probability state and the time saving state.

Also, in the variable probability state, as in the normal state and the time saving state, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a big hit, and the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a small hit. Alternatively, a so-called falling lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to end the variable probability state when the special lottery result is "lost" during the variable probability state. In this case, the fall probability (probability of ending the variable probability state) may be common without being different for each set value, or the fall probability may be made different for each set value.

For example, as shown in FIG. 212(C), the fall probability in the high-probability state may be "1/100" common to all set values. does not differ for each set value, but as shown in FIG. 212(B), the higher the set value is, the higher the jackpot probability is, so the frequency and number of occurrences of the big hit are not changed for each set value. The degree of advantage is changed by changing the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the degree of advantage.

Also, the fall probability in the high probability state may be changed for each set value. For example, as shown in FIG. A value of 6 may be "1/100".

In this case, with the set value 1, the probability of a big hit is ``1/31.9'', whereas the probability of a fall is ``1/80'', and the probability of a big hit is about 2.5 times higher than the probability of a fall. On the other hand, with the set value 6, the probability of a big hit is ``1/26.9'', whereas the probability of falling is ``1/100'', which means that the probability of a big hit is about 3.7 of the probability of falling. is doubled. That is, the higher the set value is, the higher the degree of advantage is by increasing the probability of winning the big win before obtaining the falling lottery result that terminates the variable probability state by improving the probability of winning the big hit as the set value increases. there is

In addition, when the falling lottery result that ends the probability state during the probability state is obtained, the probability of the jackpot is returned from the probability of the probability state (high probability) to the probability of the normal state (low probability), while the second special lottery The control for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbols for suggesting the result to the player may be continued. The control may be terminated and the control may be shifted to the normal state based on the fact that the total number of suggestions for the lottery and the suggestion for the second special lottery has reached 100 times. That is, when the falling lottery result for ending the variable probability state is obtained during the variable probability state, the variable probability state may be ended and the shift control to the time saving state may be performed. In addition, when the fall lottery result that ends the variable state is obtained, the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game has already been a predetermined number of times (for example, the total number of suggestions of the first special lottery and the second special lottery is 100 times. ), it may be possible to control the transition to the normal state without controlling the transition to the time saving state after ending the variable probability state.

In addition, when the falling lottery result that ends the probability state is obtained during the probability state, the jackpot probability is returned from the probability of the probability state (high probability) to the probability of the normal state (low probability), and the second special lottery result is The variable time of the special symbols for suggesting to the player may be returned to the normal variable time. That is, when the falling lottery result for ending the variable probability state is obtained during the variable probability state, the variable probability state may be ended and the transition to the normal state may be controlled. In this case, the falling lottery may be performed even during the time saving state, and when the falling lottery result for ending the time saving state is obtained during the time saving state, the time saving state is ended and the state is shifted to the normal state. You may make it control.

In the example shown in FIG. 212 (E), after the transition control to the variable probability state after the end of the big hit game, when the special lottery result becomes "big hit", the occurrence ratio of the big hit type that the variable probability state ends when By changing it, the degree of advantage is changed. Specifically, when the first special lottery result executed mainly in the normal state (low probability non-time saving state) is "jackpot", the occurrence ratio of the jackpot type is the same at all set values, A ``15R variable probability big hit'' controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of the big win game and a ``2R variable probability big win'' in which the number of prize balls acquired is smaller than that of the ``15R variable probability big hit'' although the transition is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big win game. The occurrence ratio of "big win" is set to "40/100" respectively, and after the end of the big win game, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the number of suggestions of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery are summed up to 100 times). The occurrence ratio of the "15R normal jackpot" that is controlled to shift to the time-saving state until reaching is set to "20/100".

On the other hand, when the result of the second special lottery executed mainly in the probability variable state and the time saving state is "big hit", the occurrence ratio of the big hit type is different for each set value, and at the set value 1 The occurrence ratio of the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of the big win game is set to ``45/100'', and the number of prize balls acquired although the state is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the big win game. The occurrence ratio of ``2R probability variable big hit'' which is less than ``15R probability variable big hit'' is set to ``15/100'', and control is shifted to a time saving state until reaching a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit game. The occurrence ratio of the "15R normal jackpot" is set to "40/100".

At the set value 2, the rate of occurrence of the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' controlled to transition to the high probability state after the end of the big win game is set to ``46/100'', and the prize of which the transition to the high probability state is controlled after the end of the big win game. The occurrence ratio of the ``2R probability variable jackpot'' where the number of winning balls is less than the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' is set to ``19/100'', and after the jackpot game is over, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence ratio of the "15R normal jackpot" which is controlled to shift to the time saving state until reaching the total number of suggestions of the second special lottery (100 times) is set to "35/100".

At the set value 3, the rate of occurrence of the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' controlled to transition to a high probability state after the end of the big win game is set to ``47/100'', and the prize for which the transition to the high probability state is controlled after the end of the big win game. The occurrence ratio of the ``2R probability variable jackpot'' where the number of winning balls is less than the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' is set to ``23/100'', and after the jackpot game is over, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence ratio of the "15R normal jackpot" that is controlled to shift to the time saving state until the number of suggestions of the second special lottery is totaled (100 times) is set to "30/100".

At the set value 4, the rate of occurrence of the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' controlled to transition to the high probability state after the end of the big win game is set to ``48/100'', and the prize for which the transition to the high probability state is controlled after the end of the big win game. The occurrence ratio of the ``2R probability variable jackpot'' where the number of acquired balls is less than the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' is set to ``27/100'', and after the jackpot game is over, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence ratio of "15R normal jackpot" which is controlled to shift to the time saving state until reaching 100 times of suggestion (total of suggestions of the second special lottery) is set to "25/100".

At the set value 5, the occurrence ratio of the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the big win game is ``49/100'', and the prize for which the shift to the high probability state is controlled after the end of the big win game. The occurrence ratio of the ``2R probability variable jackpot'' where the number of acquired balls is less than the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' is set to ``31/100'', and after the jackpot game is over, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence ratio of the "15R normal jackpot" which is controlled to shift to the time saving state until reaching the total number of suggestions of the second special lottery (100 times) is set to "20/100".

At the set value 6, the rate of occurrence of the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' controlled to transition to the high probability state after the end of the big win game is set to ``50/100'', and the prize for which the transition to the high probability state is controlled after the end of the big win game. The occurrence ratio of the ``2R probability variable jackpot'' where the number of winning balls is less than the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' is set to ``35/100'', and after the jackpot game is over, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence ratio of the "15R normal jackpot" which is controlled to shift to the time saving state until reaching the total number of suggestions of the second special lottery (100 times) is set to "15/100".

In this way, when the result of the second special lottery executed mainly in the variable probability state and the time saving state is a "jackpot", a predetermined number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and the second The generation ratio of the ``15R normal big hit'' controlled to shift to the time-saving state until reaching 100 times of suggestions totaling the suggestions of the special lottery is changed for each set value, and the higher the set value, the more the ``15R normal big win'' occurs. By reducing the ratio, it becomes difficult to end the probability change state. As a result, the higher the set value is, the more difficult it is to end the variable probability state once it is controlled to shift to the variable probability state. acquisition becomes possible. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value of the number of winning balls that can be obtained in the variable probability state.

In addition, the higher the set value, the lower the occurrence ratio of "15R normal jackpot", while the higher the occurrence ratio of "2R probability variable jackpot" than "15R probability variable jackpot" to suppress the number of winning balls. It is possible to suppress the situation from becoming excessively advantageous to

[27-3. Setting Suggestion Effect of Second Embodiment]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is configured such that the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained in the variable probability state and the expected value of the number of small wins that can be won are different for each set value. Specifically, in FIG. 212 (A), the big hit probability of the variable probability state of the set value 1 is set to "1/30", and the small hit probability is set to "1/3", so after the end of the big hit game The expected value of the number of small wins that can be won from the control to the variable probability state to the next big win is "9 times". In addition, since about one game ball B can enter the second big winning hole 2006 in one small winning game, the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained in one small winning game. becomes "15 balls". That is, in the case of the set value 1, the expected value of prize balls obtainable by a small hit in the variable probability state is "135 balls", which is "9 times x 15 balls". Similarly, when the set value is 2, the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in the variable probability state is "195 balls" of "13 times x 15 balls", and when the set value is 3, the expected value is obtained by a small hit in the variable state. The expected value of possible prize balls is "240 balls" of "16 times x 15 balls", and the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in the variable probability state in the case of the setting value 4 is "19 times x 15 balls". "285 balls", the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in a variable probability state in the case of a set value of 5 is "345 balls" of "23 times x 15 balls", and a small hit in a variable state in the case of a set value of 6 The expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by the above is "390 balls" of "26 times x 15 balls".

In addition, in FIG. 212 (B), the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in the probability variable state in the case of the setting value 1 is "60 balls" of "4 times × 15 balls", and in the case of the setting value 2, the probability variable state The expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit is "75 balls" of "5 times x 15 balls", and the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in the variable probability state is "5 times ``75 balls'' of ``× 15 balls'', the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in the variable probability state is ``105 balls'' of ``7 times x 15 balls'', and the setting value of 5 is The expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in the variable state is "135 balls" of "9 times x 15 balls", and the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in the variable state is " "195 balls" of 13 times x 15 balls".

In this way, the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in a variable probability state and the expected value of the number of small wins that can be won differ according to the set value (in FIG. 212 (B), they are partly the same. Therefore, when controlling to a high probability state after the end of the big win game, it is possible to guess the set value according to the number of prize balls won in the small win game, the number of times the small win is won, etc. until the next big win. can. It should be noted that an effect (set value suggesting effect) of suggesting a set value may be executed according to the number of winning balls obtained in the small win game, the number of times the small win is won, or the like.

For example, as shown in FIG. 213, the peripheral control unit 1510 displays a gauge unit having six scales 1600a from 1 to 6 so as to correspond to six levels of setting values on the effect display device 1600 as a setting value suggesting effect, The scale of the gauge part is colored according to the number of prize balls acquired (number of payouts) by winning a prize in the second big prize opening 2006, and the gauge part changes from the initial display mode to the stage as the number of prize balls acquired in small wins increases. It may be arranged such that the color is gradually colored (increase the color display between the scales), and the color between all the scales of the gauge section may indicate a high set value. Specifically, when controlling to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. It is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . In this initial display mode, on the premise that the number of won prize balls is "0", only the leftmost one of the six scales is colored and displayed as a setting value corresponding to it. "Value 1 or more" is displayed, and "What is the set value?"

Then, when it is determined by the peripheral control unit 1510 that the number of prize balls put out in the small winning game after the big winning game exceeds the expected value of the set value 1 and falls within the range of the expected value of the set value 2. , the second scale from the left of the six scales on the gauge section is further colored and displayed (the first and second from the left are colored) to indicate that the set value is 2 or more. In addition to suggesting, "2 or more?"

Further, when the peripheral control unit 1510 determines that the number of prize balls put out in the small winning game after the big winning game exceeds the expected value of the set value 2 and is within the range of the expected value of the set value 3. , Of the 6 scales on the gauge part, the 3rd scale from the left side is further colored and displayed (the 1st to 3rd scales from the left side are colored) to indicate that the "set value is 3 or more". In addition to suggesting the setting value, "Is it 3 or more?"

Also, when it is determined by the peripheral control unit 1510 that the number of prize balls put out in the small winning game after the big winning game exceeds the expected value of the set value 3 and is within the range of the expected value of the set value 4. , Of the 6 scales on the gauge part, the 4th scale from the left side is further colored and displayed (the 1st to 4th scales from the left side are colored) to indicate that the "set value is 4 or more". In addition to suggesting, "4 or more!?"

Further, when it is determined by the peripheral control unit 1510 that the number of prize balls put out in the small winning game after the big winning game exceeds the expected value at the set value 4 and is within the range of the expected value at the set value 5. , of the 6 scales on the gauge part, the 5th scale from the left side is further colored and displayed (the 1st to 5th scales from the left side are colored) to indicate that the "set value is 5 or more". In addition to suggesting the setting value, "Over 5?"

Further, when it is determined by the peripheral control unit 1510 that the number of prize balls put out in the small winning game after the big winning game exceeds the expected value at the set value 5 and is within the range of the expected value at the set value 6. , the sixth scale from the left side of the six scales in the gauge portion is further colored (the state in which all the scales are colored) to suggest that the "set value is 6", and the character 1600b. As a speech balloon 1600c, "You did it! It might be 6!!!"

After the state where the sixth scale from the left side of the six scales on the gauge part is colored and displayed (the state where all the scales are colored and displayed), the final stage of display has already been reached, so it is a big hit. Without changing the display of the gauge part according to the number of prize balls put out in the small winning game after the game, the next big winning game is started, or if there is an ending condition of the probability variable state, the ending condition is established. Until then, the state in which all scales are colored and displayed is continued.

In addition, in a state in which all the six scales in the gauge section are colored and displayed, a further setting suggestion may be made separately. When paying out prize balls in the later small winning game, based on the detection of the entering ball in the second big prize winning port 2006, the maximum setting determination to definitely inform the player that the maximum setting (set value 6) is set. A special effect lottery for executing the effect may be performed. Specifically, in a state in which all six scales in the gauge section are colored and displayed, every time a ball is detected to enter the second prize-winning opening 2006, a special effect lottery for winning 1/1000 is performed. By winning, special mode voice output (setting 6 congratulations message voice), various lamp light emission of door frame 3 in special mode (lamp light emission in rainbow color using 7 colors), effect display device 1600 It can be exemplified that a maximum setting finalization effect consisting of a special display (message display of congratulations on setting 6!) is performed at the same time. In this way, by executing the highest setting finalization effect in a state where all the scales are displayed in colors, the player is given a sense of satisfaction by the effect related to the previously performed setting suggestion, and furthermore, the game is continued without boring the player. It is possible to provide the player with a greater sense of satisfaction, and to further improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, if a big win is achieved before all the scales are colored and displayed, the display mode of the gauge portion is cleared after the big win, so that a big win occurs and a big win game is played. In order to suggest the set value of the pachinko machine 1 by executing the set value suggestion performance every time the variable probability state is controlled later, the actual set value is estimated by statistically suggesting the set value suggested by the set value suggestion performance. be able to That is, if the variable probability state is executed only once, the number of prize balls acquired by the small hit during the variable probability state and the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained according to the set value may differ from the set value. However, if the number of prize balls obtained by small hits is counted for each variable state between big hits, the ratio near the specific number of prize balls will increase, so the specific number of prize balls will be considered as the expected value. The comparison makes it possible to infer the set value. In this example, it can be inferred that the set value with the highest suggested ratio in the set value suggestion effect executed a plurality of times is the actual set value.

It should be noted that the display mode of the gauge part may be taken over until the variable probability state ends without clearing the display mode of the gauge part when the jackpot is won. In addition, in this case, the six scales on the gauge part are set to 1 as the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained in one probability state and the number of small hits that can occur in one probability state according to the set value. You may make it so that all the scales may not be colored in the probability variation state of times. As a result, the set value can be suggested based on the number of winning balls won in the variable probability state over a long period of time, the number of small hits, and the like, so that the reliability of the suggested set value can be improved.

In addition, the above-described various set value suggesting effects are executed by the peripheral control unit 1511, and the prize balls obtained by the small winning game executed in the variable probability state during the period from the end of the big winning game to the start of the next big winning. Suggested settings may differ from actual settings, as they are based on numbers and not actual settings. It should be noted that the main control board 1310 may transmit information on the set value (set value information) to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, as the set value suggesting effect, the prize won in the small win game after the big win game. In addition to the number of balls, the setting value may be suggested based on the setting value information. Specifically, when the number of prize balls obtained in the small winning game after the big winning game exceeds the expected value of the set value indicated by the set value information, the suggestion mode of the set value suggestion performance is not changed. Alternatively, when the number of winning balls obtained in the small winning game after the big winning game is less than the expected value of the set value indicated by the set value information, the set value or the set value information indicated by the set value information by lottery etc. may be changed to a setting value suggesting effect in accordance with a set value equal to or less than the set value indicated by . By configuring in this way, the reliability of the set value suggestion effect can be increased, and the set value suggested by the set value suggestion effect can be noticed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1510 grasps the number of prize balls paid out in the small winning game after the big winning game, and the peripheral control unit 1510 determines that the total number of prize balls exceeds the expected value at each set value. When it is determined, the display of the gauge part is changed to suggest setting in the variable probability state, but the setting suggestion in the variable probability state is not limited to this form, and may be as follows.

For example, when there is a six-stage gauge section as described above, one scale 1600 is colored each time the peripheral control section 1510 determines that the number of prize balls paid out by a small hit has reached a certain value. Achieving the final stage coloring of the scale 1600 may suggest to the player that the setting is high. In this case, it is preferable to use the expected value of the number of prize balls to be paid out in the small winning game after the winning game with the set value 6 as a guide, and to achieve the coloring of the scale 1600 in the final stage. When the expected value of the number of prize balls to be paid out in the small winning game after the winning game is 6, the payout of ``195 balls + α balls (α < 195)'' is colored in the scale 1600 in the final stage. It can be exemplified to use the achievement timing.

Also, not based on the prize balls paid out as a small hit, but based on the fact that the peripheral control unit 1510 determines that the number of times the result of the second special lottery results in a small hit has reached a certain value. By coloring the two scales 1600 and achieving the coloring of the scale 1600 in the final stage (for example, the number of times that the result of the second special lottery resulted in a small hit reaching 80 times, etc.) It may also suggest something to the player. In this case, the achievement difficulty will change depending on the relationship between the big hit probability and the small hit probability in the variable probability state at the set value that is actually set. And depending on the display status of the gauge (for example, the situation where the final stage is reached by coloring one more scale, etc.), the result of the second special lottery may be a small win rather than a big win, in anticipation of setting value suggestions. It is also possible to provide a new game property that pays attention to.

In this way, when the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is controlled to the variable probability state, a new game is provided in which set values are estimated according to the number of winning balls won in the small winning game after the big winning game and the number of winning times of the small winning game. can provide sexuality.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, the game control board having the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 of FIG. A control board 1310 is provided. This main control board 1310 has a test connector 1310k shown in FIG. 141 that can be electrically connected to a test harness as a wiring for extracting an output signal from the main control MPU 1310a and transmitting it to a test device for testing the pachinko machine 1. It is ready.

When the pachinko machine 1 is tested by a test device, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, whereas the test connector 1310k is mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, which is the rear surface side.

In this way, since the test connector 1310k is mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested by a specific testing institute, or when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a game hall Even if it is produced as a mass-produced machine to be shipped to , the area where the test connector 1310k is mounted on the surface side of the main control board 1310 will not be formed as an empty area. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface of main control board 1310 can be increased.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310' of FIG. 139(a) as a game control board capable of controlling the progress of the game. . These electronic components are a ZIP type main control MPU included in the lead type shown in FIG. An SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 shown in FIG. 139(a) is used as an electronic component, and is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'.

The main control board 1310' has a parts list area 1310xb' in FIG. 139(a) as an information area. This parts list area 1310xb' can describe identifiers of surface mount type electronic parts and corresponding information. Examples of information written in the parts list area 1310xb' include names of manufacturers of surface-mounted electronic parts (including abbreviations and symbols), part numbers of surface-mounted electronic parts, and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 139(a), in the parts list area 1310xb', there is a parts list of electronic parts configured in a manner in which part numbers and part numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) are aligned. is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. The part number and the size of the part number are larger (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) than the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the part placement area 1310xa'. is printed in white (or black) as A delimiter ":" is provided between the part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) so that the part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. . With this delimiter, it is possible to distinguish and identify the part number from the part number (the number listed in the catalog). The product number (the number listed in the catalog) and the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be silk-screened in white (or black).

In this way, even if the display mode of the identifier attached to the surface mount type electronic component mounted on the main control board 1310′ is difficult to visually recognize, information corresponding to this identifier (manufacturer name, product number, etc.) ) are displayed in a parts list area 1310xb' provided on the main control board 1310'. Therefore, the identifier of the surface-mount type electronic component can be reliably visually recognized.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310 of FIG. A control board 1310 is accommodated in a main control board box 1320 of FIG. 141 as a sealed board box having sealing means.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1301z formed in the transparent cover body 1301 of FIG. It is

As described above, main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1301z, which are holes having a shape smaller than the shape of surface mount type electronic components. is removed from the main control board 1310 and replaced with an illegal electronic component, the surface mount type electronic component cannot be taken out from the vent hole 1301z, which is a plurality of holes provided in the main control board box 1320. ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a surface mount type electronic component from being replaced with an illegal electronic component.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be played. And after operating the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 of FIG. 77 and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 as the second operation unit, A main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 in FIG. 111 is provided as a setting change means capable of changing the setting value in which the probability of being advantageous to the player is set. The RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is provided separately from the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 . In this pachinko machine 1, as a guide means for guiding information regarding the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, there is further provided a notation serving as location information capable of conveying the location of the RWM clear button 633z.

In this way, since information about the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is guided, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 are separated. Even if it is provided on the body, a person who operates the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 does not have to be confused about the operation procedure. By separately providing the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, the security can be enhanced. Therefore, crime prevention can be enhanced.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above-described embodiment, the group of guide passages 2520 is composed of two guide passages, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured by one or more guide passages.

In the above-described embodiment, the guide passage group 2520 is twisted 90 degrees and then twisted 90 degrees in the opposite direction, so that the alignment of the entrance and the alignment of the exit are the same, but this is not a limitation. Instead, it may be twisted so that the inlets and outlets are arranged differently. Alternatively, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 may be twisted multiple times so as to form a spiral.

Also, in the embodiments, the invention is of course not limited to the embodiments described above. For example, in the embodiments, a pachinko machine was exemplified as a gaming machine, but it can also be applied to other gaming machines such as a mammoth ball machine and an arrangement ball machine. It can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates reels. Here, the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 214 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

The slot machine 6000 comprises a front door 6002 and a main body 6004, as shown in FIG. Front door 6002 and body portion 6004 are connected to each other via hinges (not shown). The front door 6002 can be opened from the body portion 6004 by inserting a key into the keyhole 6005 provided at the right end of the front door 6002 and turning it clockwise with this hinge as the center of rotation.

A game panel 6006 is provided on the upper half of the front door 6002 , and a projecting portion projecting forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on the lower half of the front door 6002 . A medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 on this projecting portion. A storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are arranged on the lower half of the front door 6002 , and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024 . These bet buttons 6010, 6012, starting lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, accumulation settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. It is The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004 .

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at approximately the center of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotating bodies (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 and production devices (not shown) are displayed through this display window. It is designed to be transparent. The three variable rotators (not shown) are attached and fixed to a body-side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the body portion 6004 . On the other hand, the production device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side mounting member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door 6002 .

On these variable rotators, translucent pattern belts printed with a plurality of patterns (for example, bells, watermelons, cherries, 7s, Vs, etc.) as pattern information are attached to the respective cylindrical frameworks. ing. Such cylindrical variable rotators are called reels or drums in game machines such as slot machines, and the output shafts of stepping motors (not shown) are connected to the respective variable rotators. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and by rotating the output shafts of the stepping motors, a plurality of types of patterns are continuously changed from the above display window from top to bottom. It looks like

The production device includes a plurality of movable production bodies (not shown), the above-described production display device 1600, various decorative substrates on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the above-described peripheral control unit 1500. Based on various commands from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1500 controls operation of a plurality of movable effect bodies, drawing control of the effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decoration boards, and the like. By performing various controls, the progress of production is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

A predetermined number of medals as game media are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008, and the main control board 1310 starts the variable display of pattern information based on the operation of the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right The variable display of the pattern information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the lapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) under the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals to a receiving tray 6026 as a game medium.

In addition, in the fusion game machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes the ball slot 6008', and the main control board 1310 has a predetermined number of game balls as game media inserted into the ball slot 6008', and the start lever 6014 is operated. Then, the variable display of the pattern information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) under the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls to a receiving tray 6026 as game media.

1 pachinko machine 3 door frame 4 main body frame 5 game board 5a game area 1000 front constituent member 1100 game panel 2000 front unit 2003 normal winning opening (privilege giving section)
2004 Second starting point (privilege granting department)
2005 Grand Prize Opening 2400 Attacker Unit 2500 Center Accessory 2505 Upstream Space 2510 Upper Right Peripheral Wall 2510
2520 guide passage group 2520a weighted portion 2521 first guide passage (guide passage)
2522 second guidance passage (guidance passage)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of setting game performance to a predetermined set value among a plurality of set values,
Lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not the game is a hit;
a game state control means for controlling the winning state in the case of the winning;
A production display device for displaying a production,
In the winning state, a predetermined prize winning opening is opened, and when a prize is won in the predetermined winning opening, a prize ball is played,
There is a setting correspondence display corresponding to each of the plurality of setting values, and the setting correspondence display corresponding to the set setting value can be displayed on the effect display device,
The display corresponding to the setting can be displayed under the condition that the predetermined winning hole is entered and the prize ball is being played,
From the situation in which the setting correspondence display corresponding to the specific setting value among the plurality of setting values is displayed on the effect display device as the setting correspondence display, the setting value is one step higher than the specific setting value. The situation changes to a situation in which the corresponding setting correspondence display is displayed on the effect display device, and from the situation in which the setting correspondence display corresponding to the setting value one step higher is displayed on the effect display device, the one step higher. It is possible to change to a situation in which a setting correspondence display corresponding to a setting value one step higher than the setting value of is displayed on the effect display device,
the number of the setting correspondence displays corresponding to each of the plurality of setting values is one corresponding to each of the plurality of setting values;
In a state where the setting correspondence display corresponding to the highest set value among the plurality of set values is displayed on the effect display device, the effect display device displays the highest set value among the plurality of set values. After the corresponding setting correspondence display is displayed, the setting correspondence display corresponding to the highest setting value among the plurality of setting values is continued even if a prize ball is played by entering the predetermined winning hole. to display the
As the setting correspondence display, part of the setting correspondence display corresponding to the specific setting value among the plurality of setting values and the setting correspondence display corresponding to the setting value one step higher than the specific setting value are partly the same. A game machine characterized by:

Images